ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS
REGULATIONS 2021

B. TECH. PETROCHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM (CBCS)

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES:

After 3 years of graduation, our graduates will be

1. Successful in their careers in the diversified sectors of the Petrochemical Technology.

2. A successful entrepreneur, manager or occupy higher positions.
3. Pursuing higher studies and research programmes in India and abroad.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

1. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to apply knowledge of

science and engineering to analyze petrochemical technology problems.
2. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to Understand and interpret
the problems in petrochemical processes.
3. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to Design and develop
appropriate solutions for the petrochemical systems.
4. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to Identify, formulate and
solve complex petrochemical technology problems.
5. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to Use the modern
engineering skills and software tools to analyze petrochemical technology problems.
6. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to understand the global and
societal impact of Petrochemical engineering practice.
7. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to understand the impact of
petrochemical technology solutions in environmental context and adopt suitable
methods for sustainable development.
8. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to meet the professional and
ethical duties.
1
 9. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will function effectively as an individual
and in multidisciplinary teams.
10. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to communicate effectively
both in verbal and written forms.
11. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will be able to apply principles of
management and economics for the effective functioning of Petrochemical and allied
Industries.
12. The graduates of the petrochemical technology will engage in lifelong learning.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES:
Graduates of Petrochemical Technology will:

PSO1: Strong foundation in Chemical, Petroleum & Petrochemical processes and

effectively describe various units of modern petroleum refining and petrochemical
industries.

PSO2: Effectively describe, analyze, develop appropriate solutions for Chemical,

Petroleum & Petrochemical industrial problems using innovative research &
development skills with continuous learning efforts.

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
PEO
s PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
I 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 1 1 3 2
II 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 3
III 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3

2
 MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES AND PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
COURSE PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO8 PO9 PO1 PO PO PS PSO
NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 11 12 O1 2
Professional 1. 2.2 1. 2.2 1. 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - -
English - I 6 8 5
Matrices and - -
3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3
Calculus
Engineering 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - -
Physics
Engineering 2. 1.3 1. 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - -
Chemistry 8 6
Problem
Solving and
2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
SEMESTER 1

Python
Programming

/Heritage of
Tamils
Problem Solving
and Python
2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3
Programming
Laboratory
3 2.4 2.6 1 1
Physics and
YEAR 1

Chemistry
2. 1.3 1. 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - -
Laboratory
6 6
English 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - -
Laboratory
Professional 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - -
English – II
Statistics and - -
Numerical 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3
Methods
Basic Electrical,
Electronics and
2 1 1 1 - -
SEMSTER 2

Instrumentation
Engineering
Engineering 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Graphics

/ Tamils
and Technology
Engineering 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
Practices
Laboratory
Basic Electrical,
Electronics and
Instrumentation 1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6
Engineering
Laboratory
Communication 2.4 2.8 3 3 1. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - -
Laboratory / 8
Foreign
Language
3
 Transforms and
Partial
3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - -
Differential
Equations
Process
3 3 2 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 3 1
Calculations
Fluid
SEMESTER 3

Mechanics for
2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 2
Petrochemical
Technologists
Petroleum
Primary
3 3 2 2 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
Processing
Technology
Heat Transfer 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
Mechanical
1 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 3 2 2
Operations
Heat Transfer
Laboratory 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 2 2 3 2
Chemical
Engineering
YEAR 2

3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 1
Thermodynamic
s
Petroleum
Secondary
2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
Processing
Technology
Mass Transfer I 3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3
Industrial
SEMESTER 4

Chemical
Technology 2 3 1 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 3 2
Chemical
Reaction 3 3 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2
Engineering
Environmental 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - -
Sciences and
Sustainability
Petrochemical
and Polymer
3 3 1 2 2 0 0 3 3 3 0 2 2 2
Analysis
Laboratory
Petroleum
Product Testing 2 2 1 2 2 0 0 3 3 3 0 2 2 2
Laboratory
Mass Transfer II 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - 1 3 2
SEMESTER

Catalytic 3 3 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2
Reaction
5

Engineering
Mass Transfer
YEAR 3

Laboratory 3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 3
Process
SEMESTER 6

Instrumentation
3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 1
Dynamics and
Control
Chemical
Reaction and 3 3 3 1 _ _ 2 _ 3 _ _ _ 3 3
Process control

4
 Laboratory
Computational 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 2 3 2 2
Petrochemical
Laboratory
Process Safety 3 2
SEMESTER 7

in
2 2 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1
YEAR 4

Petrochemical
Industries
Process
Equipment 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 2 2 2 2 2
Design

1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation

5
 ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI
NON-AUTONOMOUS COLLEGES AFFILIATED COLLEGES
REGULATIONS 2021
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
B.TECH. PETROCHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI FOR I TO VIII SEMESTERS
SEMESTER I
PERIODS PER TOTAL CREDITS
S. COURSE CATE- WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT
No. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. IP3151 Induction Programme - - - - - 0
THEORY
2. HS3152 Professional English – I HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. MA3151 Matrices and Calculus BSC 3 1 0 4 4
4. PH3151 Engineering Physics BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CY3151 Engineering Chemistry BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Problem Solving and Python
6. GE3151 ESC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
7. GE3152 /Heritage of Tamils HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
PRACTICALS
Problem Solving and Python
8. GE3171 ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Programming Laboratory
9. BS3171 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory BSC 0 0 4 4 2
10. GE3172 English Laboratory $ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 16 1 10 27 22
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER II
PERIODS PER TOTAL CREDITS
S. COURSE CATE-
COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT
No. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. HS3252 Professional English – II HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
2. MA3251 Statistics and Numerical Methods BSC 3 1 0 4 4
3. PH3253 Materials Science for Technologists BSC 3 0 0 3 3
Basic Electrical, Electronics and
4. BE3252 Instrumentation Engineering BSC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CY3251 Chemistry for Technologists BSC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GE3251 Engineering Graphics ESC 2 0 4 6 4
GE3252 / Tamils
7. HSMC 1 0 0 1 1
and Technology
8. NCC Credit Course Level 1* - 2 0 0 2 2
PRACTICALS
7 GE3271 Engineering Practices Laboratory ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Basic Electrical, Electronics and
8 BE3272 Instrumentation Engineering ESC 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
Communication Laboratory / Foreign
9 GE3272 EEC 0 0 4 4 2
Language $
TOTAL 17 1 16 34 26
#*NCC Credit Course level 1 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be recorded in the Mark Sheet,
however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
$ Skill Based Course
6
 SEMESTER III
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. MA3351 Transforms and Partial
BSC 3 1 0 4 4
Differential Equations
2. PE3351 Process Calculations PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. PC3351 Fluid Mechanics for
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Petrochemical Technologists
4. PC3353 Petroleum Primary
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Processing Technology
5. CH3491 Heat Transfer PCC 3 0 0 3 3
6. PC3352 Mechanical Operations PCC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
7. PE3481 Heat Transfer Laboratory PCC 0 0 4 4 2
8. PE3361 Fluid Mechanics and Solid
PCC 0 0 4 4 2
Operations laboratory
9. GE3361 Professional Development$ EEC 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 18 1 10 29 24
$ Skill Based Course
SEMESTER IV
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. PE3451 Chemical Engineering
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Thermodynamics
2. PC3451 Petroleum Secondary
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Processing Technology
3. CH3451 Mass Transfer I PCC 3 0 0 3 3
4. PC3401 Industrial Chemical PCC
3 0 0 3 3
Technology
5. CPE331 Chemical Reaction PCC
3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
6. GE3451 Environmental Sciences and
BSC 2 0 0 2 2
Sustainability
7. NCC Credit Course Level 2# 3 0 0 3 3#
PRACTICALS
8. PC3461 Petrochemical and Polymer PCC
0 0 4 4 2
Analysis Laboratory
9. PC3462 Petroleum Product Testing PCC
0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
10. PC3511 Industrial Training/ EEC - - - - -
Internship I*
TOTAL 17 0 8 25 21
# NCC Credit Course level 2 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be recorded in the Mark
Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.
*Four weeks industrial training/internship carries two credits. Industrial training/internship during IV Semester Summer
Vacation will be evaluated in V semester

7
 SEMESTER V

PERIODS PER TOTAL

S. COURSE CATE WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. CH3551 Mass Transfer II PCC 3 0 0 3 3
2. PC3551 Catalytic Reaction
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
3. Professional Elective I PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective II PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective III PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Mandatory Course-I& Non-Credit
MC 3 0 0 3
Course
PRACTICALS
7. PC3511 Industrial Training / Internship EEC - - - - 2
I*
8. CH3561 Mass Transfer Laboratory PCC 0 0 3 3 1.5
TOTAL 18 0 3 21 18.5
&
Mandatory Course-I is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC-I)
*Four weeks industrial training/internship carries two credits. Industrial training/internship during IV Semester Summer
Vacation will be evaluated in V semester
SEMESTER VI
PERIODS PER TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. PC3652 Process Instrumentation
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Dynamics and Control
2. Open Elective – I* OEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. Professional Elective IV PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. Professional Elective V PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Professional Elective VI PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Professional Elective VII PEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. NCC Credit Course Level 3# 3 0 0 3 3#
8. Non-Credit
Mandatory Course-II& MC 3 0 0 3
Course
PRACTICALS
9. PC3611 Chemical Reaction and PCC
0 0 4 4 2
Process control Laboratory
10. PC3651 Computational Petrochemical PCC
0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
11. PC3711 Industrial Training/Internship EEC
- - - - -
II##
TOTAL 24 0 8 29 22
*Open Elective – I shall be chosen from the emerging technologies.
**Four weeks industrial training/internship carries two credits. Industrial training/Internship during VI Semester Summer
Vacation will be evaluated in VII semester
&
Mandatory Course-II is a Non-credit Course (Student shall select one course from the list given under MC- II)
#
NCC Credit Course level 3 is offered for NCC students only. The grades earned by the students will be recorded
in the Mark Sheet, however the same shall not be considered for the computation of CGPA.

8
 SEMESTER VII/VIII*
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
THEORY
1. PC3752 Process Safety in
PCC 3 0 0 3 3
Petrochemical Industries
2. PC3751 Process Equipment Design PCC 3 0 0 3 3
3. GE3791 Human values and Ethics HSMC 2 0 0 2 2
4. Elective- Management # HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
5. Open Elective – II** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. Open Elective – III*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
7. Open Elective – IV*** OEC 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICALS
8. PC3711 Industrial EEC
- - - - 2
Training/Internship II##
TOTAL 20 0 0 20 22
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered
during semester VIII.
**Open Elective – II shall be chosen from the emerging technologies.
***Open Elective III and IV (Shall be chosen from the list of open electives offered by other Programmes
#
Elective- Management shall be chosen from the Elective Management courses
##
Four weeks industrial training/internship carries two credits. Industrial training/Internship during VI Semester Summer
Vacation will be evaluated in VII semester

SEMESTER VIII/VII*
PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE PER WEEK
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
PRACTICALS
1. PC3811 Project Work / Internship# EEC 0 0 20 20 10
TOTAL 0 0 20 20 10
*If students undergo internship in Semester VII, then the courses offered during semester VII will be offered during
semester VIII.
#
15 weeks of continuous Internship in an organization carries 10 credits.
TOTAL CREDITS: 165.5

ELECTIVE – MANAGEMENT COURSES

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PERWEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. GE3751 Principles of Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
2. GE3752 Total Quality Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
3. GE3753 Engineering Economics and HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Financial Accounting
4. GE3754 Human Resource HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
5. GE3755 Knowledge Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
6. GE3792 Industrial Management HSMC 3 0 0 3 3
9
 MANDATORY COURSES I*
PERIODS TOTAL
S. CATE
COURSE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT
NO. GORY
CODE L T P PERIODS
1. MX3081 Introduction to Women and MC 3 0 0 3
Gender Studies
2. MX3082 Elements of Literature MC 3 0 0 3
3. MX3083 Film Appreciation MC 3 0 0 3
4. MX3084 Disaster Risk Reduction and MC 3 0 0 3
Management

* Mandatory Courses are offered as Non –Credit Courses

MANDATORY COURSES II*

PERIODS TOTAL
S. COURSE CATE
COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT
NO. CODE GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. MX3085 Well Being with Traditional MC 3 0 0 3
Practices -Yoga, Ayurveda
and Siddha
2. MX3086 History of Science and MC 3 0 0 3
Technology in India
3. MX3087 Political and Economic MC 3 0 0 3
Thought for a Humane
Society
4. MX3088 State, Nation Building and MC 3 0 0 3
Politics in India
5. MX3089 Industrial Safety MC 3 0 0 3

* Mandatory Courses are offered as Non –Credit Courses

10
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES : VERTICALS

Vertical I Vertical II Vertical III Vertical IV

Petrochemical Process Hydrocarbon Health, Safety and Process

Technology Transportation and Environment Intensification
Storage
Petrochemical Unit Storage Fire and Explosion Multi Component
processes Transportation of Control Distillation
Crude Oil and Natural
Gas
Petroleum Exploration and Petroleum Corrosion Industrial Hygiene Process Modelling
Exploitation Techniques Technology and simulation

Process Equipment Piping Engineering Transportation Safety Optimization of

Auxiliaries and Utilities Chemical Processes

Polymer Technology Unconventional Process Hazard Modern Separation

Hydrocarbon sources Analysis Studies Techniques

Fertilizer Technology Design of Pressure Health Safety and Fluidization

Vessels and storage Environmental Engineering
Vessels Management
Petrochemical Derivatives Natural Gas and LNG Plant Safety and Risk Process
Processing Management Instrumentation

Registration of Professional Elective Courses from Verticals:

Refer to the regulations 2021, Clause 6.3. (Amended on 27.07.2023)

11
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES : VERTICALS

VERTICAL I: PETROCHEMICAL PROCESS TECHNOLOGY

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. PC3001 Petrochemical Unit PEC 3 0 0 3 3
processes
2. PC3002 Petroleum Exploration PEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Exploitation
Techniques
3. PC3003 Process equipment PEC 3 0 0 3 3
auxiliaries and Utilities
4. CPC332 Polymer Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3

5. PC3004 Fertilizer Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3

6. PC3005 Petrochemical PEC 3 0 0 3 3

Derivatives

VERTICAL II: HYDROCARBON TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CPE345 Storage Transportation PEC 3 0 0 3 3
of Crude Oil and
Natural Gas
2. CPE341 Petroleum Corrosion PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
3. CPE343 Piping Engineering PEC 3 0 0 3 3

4. CPE347 Unconventional PEC 3 0 0 3 3

Hydrocarbon sources
5. CPE332 Design of Pressure PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Vessels and storage
Vessels
6. CPE339 Natural Gas and LNG PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Processing

12
 VERTICAL III: HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CPC331 Fire and Explosion PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Control
2. CPE338 Industrial Hygiene PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CPE346 Transportation Safety PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CPC333 Process Hazard PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analysis Studies
5. CPE336 Health Safety and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Environmental
Management
6. CPE344 Plant Safety and Risk PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management

VERTICAL IV: PROCESS INTENSIFICATION

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. PC3006 Multi component PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Distillation
2. CCH331 Process modeling and PEC 3 0 0 3 3
simulation
3. PC3007 Optimization of PEC 3 0 0 3 3
chemical Processes
4. PC3008 Modern Separation PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Techniques
5. CPE335 Fluidization PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
6. CPC334 Process PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Instrumentation

13
 OPEN ELECTIVES
Students shall choose the open elective courses, such that the course contents are not similar to any
other course contents/title under other course categories.

OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

(EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES)
To be offered other than Faculty of Information and Communication Engineering
COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE PER WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OCS351 Artificial Intelligence and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Machine Learning
Fundamentals
2. OCS352 IoT Concepts and OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Applications
3. OCS353 Data Science Fundamentals OEC 2 0 2 4 3
4. CCS333 Augmented Reality / Virtual OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Reality

OPEN ELECTIVES – III

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS351 English for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Competitive
Examinations
2. OCE353 Lean Concepts, Tools OEC 3 0 0 3 3
And Practices
3. OMG352 NGOs and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainable
Development
4. OMG353 Democracy and Good OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Governance
5. CME365 Renewable Energy OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technologies
6. OME354 Applied Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Thinking
7. MF3003 Reverse Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
8. OPR351 Sustainable OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacturing
9. AU3791 Electric and Hybrid OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Vehicle
10. OAS352 Space Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
11. OIM351 Industrial Management OEC 3 0 0 3 3
12. OIE354 Quality Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
13. OSF351 Fire Safety OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
14. OML351 Introduction to non- OEC 3 0 0 3 3
destructive testing

14
15. OMR351 Mechatronics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. ORA351 Foundation of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Robotics
17. OAE352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Aeronautical
engineering
18. OGI351 Remote Sensing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Concepts
19. OAI351 Urban Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. OEE352 Electric Vehicle OEC 3 0 0 3 3
technology
21. OEI353 Introduction to PLC OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Programming
22. OFD352 Traditional Indian OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Foods
23. OFD353 Introduction to food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
processing
24. OPY352 IPR for Pharma OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Industry
25. OTT351 Basics of Textile OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Finishing
26. OTT352 Industrial Engineering OEC 3 0 0 3 3
for Garment Industry
27. OTT353 Basics of Textile OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacture
28. OCH351 Nano Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
29. OCH352 Functional Materials OEC 3 0 0 3 3
30. OPT351 Basics of Plastics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Processing
31. OEC351 Signals and Systems OEC 3 0 0 3 3
32. OEC352 Fundamentals of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Electronic Devices and
Circuits
33. CBM348 Foundation Skills in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Integrated Product
Development
34. CBM333 Assistive Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
35. OMA352 Operations Research OEC 3 0 0 3 3
36. OMA353 Algebra and Number OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Theory
37. OMA354 Linear Algebra OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OBT352 Basics of Microbial OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Technology
39. OBT353 Basics of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Biomolecules
40. OBT354 Fundamentals of Cell OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Molecular Biology

15
 OPEN ELECTIVES – IV

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL

SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. OHS352 Project Report Writing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. OCE354 Basics of Integrated OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Water Resources
Management
3. OMA355 Advanced Numerical OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Methods
4. OMA356 Random Processes OEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. OMA357 Queuing and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Reliability Modelling
6. OMG354 Production and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Operations
Management for
Entrepreneurs
7. OMG355 Multivariate Data OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analysis
8. OME352 Additive Manufacturing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
9. CME343 New Product OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
10. OME355 Industrial Design & OEC 2 0 2 4 3
Rapid Prototyping
Techniques
11. MF3010 Micro and Precision OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
12. OMF354 Cost Management of OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering Projects
13. AU3002 Batteries and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management system
14. AU3008 Sensors and Actuators OEC 3 0 0 3 3
15. OAS353 Space Vehicles OEC 3 0 0 3 3
16. OIM352 Management Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
17. OIM353 Production Planning OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Control
18. OIE353 Operations OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
19. OSF352 Industrial Hygiene OEC 3 0 0 3 3
20. OML352 Electrical, Electronic OEC 3 0 0 3 3
and Magnetic
materials
21. OML353 Nanomaterials and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
applications
22. OMR353 Sensors OEC 3 0 0 3 3
23. ORA352 Concepts in Mobile OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Robots
24. MV3501 Marine Propulsion OEC 3 0 0 3 3
25. OMV351 Marine Merchant OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Vessels
16
26. OMV352 Elements of Marine OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
27. CRA332 Drone Technologies OEC 3 0 0 3 3
28. OGI352 Geographical OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Information System
29. OAI352 Agriculture OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
Development
30. OEN352 Biodiversity OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Conservation
31. OEE353 Introduction to control OEC 3 0 0 3 3
systems
32. OEI354 Introduction to OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Industrial Automation
Systems
33. OFD354 Fundamentals of Food OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
34. OFD355 Food safety and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Quality Regulations
35. OPY353 Nutraceuticals OEC 3 0 0 3 3
36. OTT354 Basics of Dyeing and OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Printing
37. FT3201 Fibre Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
38. OTT355 Garment OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacturing
Technology
39. OCH353 Energy Technology OEC 3 0 0 3 3
40. OCH354 Surface Science OEC 3 0 0 3 3
41. OPT352 Plastic Materials for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Engineers
42. OPT353 Properties and Testing OEC 3 0 0 3 3
of Plastics
43. OEC353 VLSI Design OEC 3 0 0 3 3
44. CBM370 Wearable devices OEC 3 0 0 3 3
45. CBM356 Medical Informatics OEC 3 0 0 3 3
46. OBT355 Biotechnology for OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Waste Management
47. OBT356 Lifestyle Diseases OEC 3 0 0 3 3
48. OBT357 Biotechnology in OEC 3 0 0 3 3
Health Care

17
 SUMMARY

Name of the Programme

Subject
Credits per Semester Total
S.No Area
Credits
I II III IV V VI VII/VIII VIII/VII
1 HSMC 4 3 5 12
2 BSC 12 13 4 2 31
3 ESC 5 8 13
4 PCC 19 19 8 7 6 59
5 PEC 9 12 21
6 OEC 3 9 12
7 EEC 1 2 1 2 2 10 18

Non-Credit
8 √ √
/(Mandatory)

Total 22 26 24 21 19 22 22 10 166

18
 Enrollment for B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours) / Minor degree (Optional)
A student can also optionally register for additional courses (18 credits) and become eligible for the
award of B.E./B.Tech. (Honours) Minor degree.
For B.E. / B. Tech. (Honours), a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from
semester V onwards. These courses shall be from the same vertical or a combination of different
verticals of the same programme of study only.
For minor degree, a student shall register for the additional courses (18 credits) from semester V
onwards. All these courses have to be in a particular vertical from any one of the other programmes,
Moreover, for minor degree the student can register for courses from any one of the following verticals
also.
Complete details are available in clause 4.10 (Amendments) of Regulations 2021.
VERTICALS FOR MINOR DEGREE (IN ADDITIONS TO ALL THE VERTICALS OF OTHER
PROGRAMMES)
Vertical IV
Vertical I Vertical III Business Vertical V
Vertical II
Fintech and Public Data Environment and
Entrepreneurship
Block Chain Administration Analytics Sustainability

Financial Foundations of Principles of Statistics For Sustainable

Management Entrepreneurship Public Management infrastructure
Administration Development
Fundamentals Team Building & Constitution of Datamining Sustainable
of Investment Leadership India For Business Agriculture and
Management for Intelligence Environmental
Business Management
Banking, Creativity & Innovation Public Personnel Human Sustainable Bio
Financial in Entrepreneurship Administration Resource Materials
Services and Analytics
Insurance
Introduction to Principles of Marketing Administrative Marketing Materials for Energy
Blockchain and Management For Theories And Social Sustainability
its Applications Business Media Web
Analytics

Fintech Human Resource Indian Operation Green Technology

Personal Management for Administrative And Supply
Finance and Entrepreneurs System Chain
Payments Analytics

Introduction to Financing New Public Policy Financial Environmental Quality

Fintech Business Ventures Administration Analytics Monitoring and
Analysis
- - - - Integrated Energy
Planning for
Sustainable
Development
- - - - Energy Efficiency for
Sustainable
Development

19
(Choice of courses for Minor degree is to be made from any one vertical of other
programmes or from anyone of the following verticals)

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

SL PERIODS
COURSE PER TOTAL
. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
N GORY
PERIODS
O. L T P
1. CMG331 Financial Management PEC 3 0 0 3 3
2. CMG332 Fundamentals of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Investment
3. CMG333 Banking, Financial
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Services and Insurance
4. CMG334 Introduction to
Blockchain and its PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Applications
5. CMG335 Fintech Personal
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Finance and Payments
6. CMG336 Introduction to Fintech PEC 3 0 0 3 3

VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP

PERIODS
COURSE PER TOTAL
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
PERIODS
L T P
1. CMG337 Foundations of
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneruship
2. CMG338 Team Building &
Leadership
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management for
Business
3. CMG339 Creativity & Innovation
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
in Entrepreneurship
4. CMG340 Principles of Marketing
Management For PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business
5. CMG341 Human Resource
Management for PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurs
6. CMG342 Financing New
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Business Ventures

20
 VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
PERIODS
COURSE PER TOTAL
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
PERIODS
L T P
1. CMG343 Principles of Public
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
2. CMG344 Constitution of India PEC 3 0 0 3 3
3. CMG345 Public Personnel
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration
4. CMG346 Administrative Theories PEC 3 0 0 3 3
5. CMG347 Indian Administrative
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
System
6. CMG348 Public Policy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Administration

VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

PERIODS
COURSE PER TOTAL
SL. CATE
CODE COURSE TITLE WEEK CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
PERIODS
L T P
1. CMG349 Statistics For
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
2. CMG350 Datamining For Business PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Intelligence
3. CMG351 Human Resource
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Analytics
4. CMG352 Marketing And Social
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Media Web Analytics
5. CMG353 Operation And Supply
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Chain Analytics
6. CMG354 Financial Analytics PEC 3 0 0 3 3

VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

COURSE PERIODS TOTAL
SL. CATE PER WEEK
CODE COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO. GORY
L T P PERIODS
1. CES331 Sustainable infrastructure
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
2. CES332 Sustainable Agriculture
and Environmental PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Management
3. CES333 Sustainable Bio Materials PEC 3 0 0 3 3
4. CES334 Materials for Energy
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainability
5. CES335 Green Technology PEC 3 0 0 3 3
6. CES336 Environmental Quality
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Monitoring and Analysis
7. CES337 Integrated Energy
Planning for Sustainable PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Development
8. CES338 Energy Efficiency for
PEC 3 0 0 3 3
Sustainable Development

21
IP3151 INDUCTION PROGRAMME
This is a mandatory 2 week programme to be conducted as soon as the students enter the
institution. Normal classes start only after the induction program is over.

The induction programme has been introduced by AICTE with the following objective:

“Engineering colleges were established to train graduates well in the branch/department of

admission, have a holistic outlook, and have a desire to work for national needs and beyond. The
graduating student must have knowledge and skills in the area of his/her study. However, he/she
must also have broad understanding of society and relationships. Character needs to be nurtured
as an essential quality by which he/she would understand and fulfill his/her responsibility as an
engineer, a citizen and a human being. Besides the above, several meta-skills and underlying
values are needed.”

“One will have to work closely with the newly joined students in making them feel comfortable,
allow them to explore their academic interests and activities, reduce competition and make them
work for excellence, promote bonding within them, build relations between teachers and students,
give a broader view of life, and build character. “

Hence, the purpose of this programme is to make the students feel comfortable in their new
environment, open them up, set a healthy daily routine, create bonding in the batch as well as
between faculty and students, develop awareness, sensitivity and understanding of the self,
people around them, society at large, and nature.

The following are the activities under the induction program in which the student would be fully
engaged throughout the day for the entire duration of the program.

(i) Physical Activity

This would involve a daily routine of physical activity with games and sports, yoga, gardening, etc.

(ii) Creative Arts

Every student would choose one skill related to the arts whether visual arts or performing arts.
Examples are painting, sculpture, pottery, music, dance etc. The student would pursue it everyday
for the duration of the program. These would allow for creative expression. It would develop a
sense of aesthetics and also enhance creativity which would, hopefully, grow into engineering
design later.

(iii) Universal Human Values

This is the anchoring activity of the Induction Programme. It gets the student to explore oneself
and allows one to experience the joy of learning, stand up to peer pressure, take decisions with
courage, be aware of relationships with colleagues and supporting stay in the hostel and
department, be sensitive to others, etc. A module in Universal Human Values provides the base.
Methodology of teaching this content is extremely important. It must not be through do's and
dont's, but get students to explore and think by engaging them in a dialogue. It is best taught
through group discussions and real life activities rather than lecturing.
Discussions would be conducted in small groups of about 20 students with a faculty
mentor each. It would be effective that the faculty mentor assigned is also the faculty advisor for
the student for the full duration of the UG programme.
(iv) Literary Activity
Literary activity would encompass reading, writing and possibly, debating, enacting a play etc.
(v) Proficiency Modules
This would address some lacunas that students might have, for example, English, computer
familiarity etc.

22
 (vi) Lectures by Eminent People
Motivational lectures by eminent people from all walks of life should be arranged to give the
students exposure to people who are socially active or in public life.
(vii) Visits to Local Area
A couple of visits to the landmarks of the city, or a hospital or orphanage could be organized. This
would familiarize them with the area as well as expose them to the under privileged.
(viii) Familiarization to Dept./Branch & Innovations
They should be told about what getting into a branch or department means what role it plays in
society, through its technology. They should also be shown the laboratories, workshops & other
facilities.
(ix) Department Specific Activities
About a week can be spent in introducing activities (games, quizzes, social interactions, small
experiments, design thinking etc.) that are relevant to the particular branch of
Engineering/Technology/Architecture that can serve as a motivation and kindle interest in building
things (become a maker) in that particular field. This can be conducted in the form of a workshop.
For example, CSE and IT students may be introduced to activities that kindle computational
thinking, and get them to build simple games. ECE students may be introduced to building simple
circuits as an extension of their knowledge in Science, and so on. Students may be asked to build
stuff using their knowledge of science.

Induction Programme is totally an activity based programme and therefore there shall be
no tests / assessments during this programme.

REFERENCES:
Guide to Induction program from AICTE

HS3152 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH I LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES :
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To learn to use basic grammatic structures in suitable contexts
 To acquire lexical competence and use them appropriately in a sentence and understand
their meaning in a text
 To help learners use language effectively in professional contexts
 To develop learners’ ability to read and write complex texts, summaries, articles, blogs,
definitions, essays and user manuals.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 1

What is effective communication? (Explain using activities) Why is communication critical for
excellence during study, research and work? What are the seven C’s of effective communication?
What are key language skills? What is effective listening? What does it involve? What is effective
speaking? What does it mean to be an excellent reader? What should you be able to do? What is
effective writing? How does one develop language and communication skills? What does the
course focus on? How are communication and language skills going to be enhanced during this
course? What do you as a learner need to do to enhance your English language and
communication skills to get the best out of this course?

23
INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION 8
Reading - Reading brochures (technical context), telephone messages / social media messages
relevant to technical contexts and emails. Writing - Writing emails / letters introducing oneself.
Grammar - Present Tense ( simple and progressive); Question types: Wh/ Yes or No/ and Tags.
Vocabulary - Synonyms; One word substitution; Abbreviations & Acronyms (as used in technical
contexts).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 9

Reading - Reading biographies, travelogues, newspaper reports, Excerpts from literature, and
travel & technical blogs. Writing - Guided writing-- Paragraph writing Short Report on an event
(field trip etc.) Grammar –Past tense (simple); Subject-Verb Agreement; and Prepositions.
Vocabulary - Word forms (prefixes& suffixes); Synonyms and Antonyms. Phrasal verbs.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 9

Reading – Reading advertisements, gadget reviews; user manuals. Writing - Writing definitions;
instructions; and Product /Process description. Grammar - Imperatives; Adjectives; Degrees of
comparison; Present & Past Perfect Tenses. Vocabulary - Compound Nouns, Homonyms; and
Homophones, discourse markers (connectives & sequence words).

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 9

Reading – Newspaper articles; Journal reports –and Non Verbal Communcation ( tables, pie
charts etc,. ). Writing – Note-making / Note-taking (*Study skills to be taught, not tested); Writing
recommendations; Transferring information from non verbal ( chart , graph etc, to verbal mode)
Grammar – Articles; Pronouns - Possessive & Relative pronouns. Vocabulary - Collocations; Fixed
/ Semi fixed expressions.

UNIT V EXPRESSION 9
Reading – Reading editorials; and Opinion Blogs; Writing – Essay Writing (Descriptive or
narrative). Grammar – Future Tenses, Punctuation; Negation (Statements & Questions); and
Simple, Compound & Complex Sentences. Vocabulary - Cause & Effect Expressions – Content vs
Function words.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To use appropriate words in a professional context
 To gain understanding of basic grammatical structures and use them in right context.
 To read and interpret information presented in tables, charts and other graphic forms
 To write definitions, descriptions, narrations and essays on various topics
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists Orient Blackswan Private Ltd. Department of
English, Anna University, (2020 edition)
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press, 2021.
Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr.
KN. Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Technical Communication – Principles And Practices By Meenakshi Raman & Sangeeta
Sharma, Oxford Univ. Press, 2016, New Delhi.
2. A Course Book On Technical English By Lakshminarayanan, Scitech Publications (India)
Pvt. Ltd.
3. English For Technical Communication (With CD) By Aysha Viswamohan, Mcgraw Hill
Education, ISBN : 0070264244.
4. Effective Communication Skill, Kulbhusan Kumar, RS Salaria, Khanna Publishing House.
5. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal, Allied Publishing House, New Delhi,2003.
24
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 - 3 - - -
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 2 3 - 3 - - -
AVg. 1.6 2.2 1.8 2.2 1.5 3 3 3 1.6 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

MA3151 MATRICES AND CALCULUS L T P C

3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by engineers for practical
applications.
 To familiarize the students with differential calculus.
 To familiarize the student with functions of several variables. This is needed in many
branches of engineering.
 To make the students understand various techniques of integration.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and
their applications.

UNIT I MATRICES 9+3

Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley - Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices by
orthogonal transformation – Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal
transformation – Nature of quadratic forms – Applications : Stretching of an elastic membrane.
UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 9+3
Representation of functions - Limit of a function - Continuity - Derivatives - Differentiation rules
(sum, product, quotient, chain rules) - Implicit differentiation - Logarithmic differentiation -
Applications : Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.

UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9+3

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Change
of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions
of two variables – Applications : Maxima and minima of functions of two variables and
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.
UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 9+3
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration : Integration by parts,
Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational functions by partial
fraction, Integration of irrational functions - Improper integrals - Applications : Hydrostatic force
and pressure, moments and centres of mass.

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9+3

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates – Area
25
enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in double
and triple integrals – Applications : Moments and centres of mass, moment of inertia.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 : Use the matrix algebra methods for solving practical problems.
CO2 : Apply differential calculus tools in solving various application problems.
CO3 : Able to use differential calculus ideas on several variable functions.
CO4 : Apply different methods of integration in solving practical problems.
CO5 : Apply multiple integral ideas in solving areas, volumes and other practical problems.

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Kreyszig.E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, New
Delhi, 2016.
2. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 44th Edition
, 2018.
3. James Stewart, " Calculus : Early Transcendentals ", Cengage Learning, 8th Edition,
New Delhi, 2015. [For Units II & IV - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7 (Tangents problems
only), 2.8, 3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 (Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net
change theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8 ].

REFERENCES:
1. Anton. H, Bivens. I and Davis. S, " Calculus ", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016
2. Bali. N., Goyal. M. and Watkins. C., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Firewall Media
(An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
3. Jain . R.K. and Iyengar. S.R.K., “ Advanced Engineering Mathematics ”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S. and Manicavachagom Pillai. T. K., “ Calculus " Volume I and II, S.
Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2009.
5. Ramana. B.V., " Higher Engineering Mathematics ", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2016.
6. Srimantha Pal and Bhunia. S.C, " Engineering Mathematics " Oxford University Press,
2015.
7. Thomas. G. B., Hass. J, and Weir. M.D, " Thomas Calculus ", 14th Edition, Pearson India,
2018.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

PH3151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To make the students effectively to achieve an understanding of mechanics.
 To enable the students to gain knowledge of electromagnetic waves and its applications.
 To introduce the basics of oscillations, optics and lasers.
 Equipping the students to be successfully understand the importance of quantum physics.
 To motivate the students towards the applications of quantum mechanics.

26
UNIT I MECHANICS 9
Multi-particle dynamics: Center of mass (CM) – CM of continuous bodies – motion of the CM –
kinetic energy of system of particles. Rotation of rigid bodies: Rotational kinematics – rotational
kinetic energy and moment of inertia - theorems of M .I –moment of inertia of continuous bodies –
M.I of a diatomic molecule - torque – rotational dynamics of rigid bodies – conservation of angular
momentum – rotational energy state of a rigid diatomic molecule - gyroscope - torsional pendulum
– double pendulum –Introduction to nonlinear oscillations.

UNIT II ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9

The Maxwell’s equations - wave equation; Plane electromagnetic waves in vacuum, Conditions on
the wave field - properties of electromagnetic waves: speed, amplitude, phase, orientation and
waves in matter - polarization - Producing electromagnetic waves - Energy and momentum in EM
waves: Intensity, waves from localized sources, momentum and radiation pressure - Cell-phone
reception. Reflection and transmission of electromagnetic waves from a non-conducting medium-
vacuum interface for normal incidence.

UNIT III OSCILLATIONS, OPTICS AND LASERS 9

Simple harmonic motion - resonance –analogy between electrical and mechanical oscillating
systems - waves on a string - standing waves - traveling waves - Energy transfer of a wave -
sound waves - Doppler effect. Reflection and refraction of light waves - total internal reflection -
interference –Michelson interferometer –Theory of air wedge and experiment. Theory of laser -
characteristics - Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficients - population
inversion - Nd-YAG laser, CO2 laser, semiconductor laser –Basic applications of lasers in industry.

UNIT IV BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

Photons and light waves - Electrons and matter waves –Compton effect - The Schrodinger
equation (Time dependent and time independent forms) - meaning of wave function -
Normalization –Free particle - particle in a infinite potential well: 1D,2D and 3D Boxes-
Normalization, probabilities and the correspondence principle.

UNIT V APPLIED QUANTUM MECHANICS 9

The harmonic oscillator(qualitative)- Barrier penetration and quantum tunneling(qualitative)-
Tunneling microscope - Resonant diode - Finite potential wells (qualitative)- Bloch’s theorem for
particles in a periodic potential –Basics of Kronig-Penney model and origin of energy bands.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO1 : Understand the importance of mechanics.
CO2 : Express their knowledge in electromagnetic waves.
CO3 : Demonstrate a strong foundational knowledge in oscillations, optics and lasers.
CO4 : Understand the importance of quantum physics.
CO5 : Comprehend and apply quantum mechanical principles towards the formation of energy
bands.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.Kleppner and R.Kolenkow. An Introduction to Mechanics. McGraw Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2017.
2. E.M.Purcell and D.J.Morin, Electricity and Magnetism, Cambridge Univ.Press, 2013.
3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan, S. Rai Choudhury, Concepts of Modern Physics, McGraw-
Hill (Indian Edition), 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. R.Wolfson. Essential University Physics. Volume 1 & 2. Pearson Education (Indian
Edition), 2009.
2. Paul A. Tipler, Physic – Volume 1 & 2, CBS, (Indian Edition), 2004.
27
 3. K.Thyagarajan and A.Ghatak. Lasers: Fundamentals and Applications, Laxmi Publications,
(Indian Edition), 2019.
4. D.Halliday, R.Resnick and J.Walker. Principles of Physics, Wiley (Indian Edition), 2015.
5. N.Garcia, A.Damask and S.Schwarz. Physics for Computer Science Students. Springer-
Verlag, 2012.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
4 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - -
5 3 3 1 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 3 1.6 1.2 1.8 1 - - - - - 1 - - -
1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

CY3151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate sound understanding of water quality parameters and water treatment
techniques.
 To impart knowledge on the basic principles and preparatory methods of nanomaterials.
 To introduce the basic concepts and applications of phase rule and composites.
 To facilitate the understanding of different types of fuels, their preparation, properties and
combustion characteristics.
 To familiarize the students with the operating principles, working processes and
applications of energy conversion and storage devices.

UNIT I WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

Water: Sources and impurities, Water quality parameters: Definition and significance of-color,
odour, turbidity, pH, hardness, alkalinity, TDS, COD and BOD, flouride and arsenic. Municipal
water treatment: primary treatment and disinfection (UV, Ozonation, break-point chlorination).
Desalination of brackish water: Reverse Osmosis. Boiler troubles: Scale and sludge, Boiler
corrosion, Caustic embrittlement, Priming &foaming. Treatment of boiler feed water: Internal
treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon conditioning) and External treatment
– Ion exchange demineralization and zeolite process.

UNIT II NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics: Distinction between molecules, nanomaterials and bulk materials; Size-dependent
properties (optical, electrical, mechanical and magnetic); Types of nanomaterials: Definition,
properties and uses of – nanoparticle, nanocluster, nanorod, nanowire and nanotube. Preparation
of nanomaterials: sol-gel, solvothermal, laser ablation, chemical vapour deposition,
electrochemical deposition and electro spinning. Applications of nanomaterials in medicine,
agriculture, energy, electronics and catalysis.

UNIT III PHASE RULE AND COMPOSITES 9

Phase rule: Introduction, definition of terms with examples. One component system - water
system; Reduced phase rule; Construction of a simple eutectic phase diagram - Thermal analysis;
Two component system: lead-silver system - Pattinson process.
Composites: Introduction: Definition & Need for composites; Constitution: Matrix materials

28
(Polymer matrix, metal matrix and ceramic matrix) and Reinforcement (fiber, particulates, flakes
and whiskers). Properties and applications of: Metal matrix composites (MMC), Ceramic matrix
composites and Polymer matrix composites. Hybrid composites - definition and examples.

UNIT IV FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuels: Introduction: Classification of fuels; Coal and coke: Analysis of coal (proximate and
ultimate), Carbonization, Manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto Hoffmann method). Petroleum
and Diesel: Manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process), Knocking - octane number, diesel
oil - cetane number; Power alcohol and biodiesel.
Combustion of fuels: Introduction: Calorific value - higher and lower calorific values, Theoretical
calculation of calorific value; Ignition temperature: spontaneous ignition temperature, Explosive
range; Flue gas analysis - ORSAT Method. CO2 emission and carbon foot print.

UNIT V ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9

Stability of nucleus: mass defect (problems), binding energy; Nuclear energy: light water nuclear
power plant, breeder reactor. Solar energy conversion: Principle, working and applications of solar
cells; Recent developments in solar cell materials. Wind energy; Geothermal energy; Batteries:
Types of batteries, Primary battery - dry cell, Secondary battery - lead acid battery and lithium-ion-
battery; Electric vehicles; working principles; Fuel cells: H2-O2 fuel cell, microbial fuel cell;
Supercapacitors: Storage principle, types and examples.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the students will be able:
CO1 :To infer the quality of water from quality parameter data and propose suitable treatment
methodologies to treat water.
CO2 :To identify and apply basic concepts of nanoscience and nanotechnology in designing the
synthesis of nanomaterials for engineering and technology applications.
CO3 :To apply the knowledge of phase rule and composites for material selection
requirements.
CO4 :To recommend suitable fuels for engineering processes and applications.
CO5 :To recognize different forms of energy resources and apply them for suitable applications
in energy sectors.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, 17th Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2008.
3. S.S. Dara, “A Text book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand Publishing, 12 th Edition,
2018.

REFERENCES:
1. B. S. Murty, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B. B. Rath and James Murday, “Text book of
nanoscience and nanotechnology”, Universities Press-IIM Series in Metallurgy and
Materials Science, 2018.
2. O.G. Palanna, “Engineering Chemistry” McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited, 2nd
Edition, 2017.
3. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New Delhi,
2014.
4. ShikhaAgarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, Second Edition, 2019.
5. O.V. Roussak and H.D. Gesser, Applied Chemistry-A Text Book for Engineers and
Technologists, Springer Science Business Media, New York, 2nd Edition, 2013.

29
 CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - -
2 2 - - 1 - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 1 1 - - 1 2 - - - - - - - -
5 3 1 2 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.3 1.6 1 - 1.5 1.8 - - - 1.5 - - -
1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3151 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LTPC

3 00 3
OBJECTIVES:
● To understand the basics of algorithmic problem solving.
● To learn to solve problems using Python conditionals and loops.
● To define Python functions and use function calls to solve problems.
● To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries to represent complex data.
● To do input/output with files in Python.

UNIT I COMPUTATIONAL THINKING AND PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Fundamentals of Computing – Identification of Computational Problems -Algorithms, building
blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo code, flow
chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving, simple strategies for developing
algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find minimum in a list, insert a card in a list
of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range, Towers of Hanoi.

UNIT II DATA TYPES, EXPRESSIONS, STATEMENTS 9

Python interpreter and interactive mode, debugging; values and types: int, float, boolean,
string, and list; variables, expressions, statements, tuple assignment, precedence of operators,
comments; Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables, circulate the values of n
variables, distance between two points.

UNI\T III CONTROL FLOW, FUNCTIONS, STRINGS 9

Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; Fruitful functions: return
values, parameters, local and global scope, function composition, recursion; Strings: string
slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module; Lists as arrays. Illustrative
programs: square root, gcd, exponentiation, sum an array of numbers, linear search, binary
search.

UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES 9

Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list
parameters; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return value; Dictionaries: operations and
methods; advanced list processing - list comprehension; Illustrative programs: simple sorting,
histogram, Students marks statement, Retail bill preparation.

UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9

Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; command line arguments,
errors and exceptions, handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count,
copy file, Voter’s age validation, Marks range validation (0-100).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

30
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Write simple Python programs using conditionals and looping for solving problems.
CO4: Decompose a Python program into functions.
CO5: Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries etc.
CO6: Read and write data from/to files in Python programs.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition,
O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT
Press , 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 2 - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1.

1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

GE3152 LTPC
1 001
I : 3
– – –
- –
–
– -
– –
–

31
 II – –
: 3
– –
–
– – –
– –
–

III : 3

IV : 3
–
–
– –
–
–
V
: 3
–
– –
– -

TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. – –

2. –
3. –

4. –
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in
print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
32
GE3152 HERITAGE OF TAMILS LTPC
1 001
UNIT I LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 3
Language Families in India - Dravidian Languages – Tamil as a Classical Language - Classical
Literature in Tamil – Secular Nature of Sangam Literature – Distributive Justice in Sangam
Literature - Management Principles in Thirukural - Tamil Epics and Impact of Buddhism & Jainism
in Tamil Land - Bakthi Literature Azhwars and Nayanmars - Forms of minor Poetry - Development
of Modern literature in Tamil - Contribution of Bharathiyar and Bharathidhasan.

UNIT II HERITAGE - ROCK ART PAINTINGS TO MODERN ART – SCULPTURE 3

Hero stone to modern sculpture - Bronze icons - Tribes and their handicrafts - Art of temple car
making - - Massive Terracotta sculptures, Village deities, Thiruvalluvar Statue at Kanyakumari,
Making of musical instruments - Mridhangam, Parai, Veenai, Yazh and Nadhaswaram - Role of
Temples in Social and Economic Life of Tamils.

UNIT III FOLK AND MARTIAL ARTS 3

Therukoothu, Karagattam, Villu Pattu, Kaniyan Koothu, Oyillattam, Leather puppetry, Silambattam,
Valari, Tiger dance - Sports and Games of Tamils.

UNIT IV THINAI CONCEPT OF TAMILS 3

Flora and Fauna of Tamils & Aham and Puram Concept from Tholkappiyam and Sangam
Literature - Aram Concept of Tamils - Education and Literacy during Sangam Age - Ancient Cities
and Ports of Sangam Age - Export and Import during Sangam Age - Overseas Conquest of
Cholas.

UNIT V CONTRIBUTION OF TAMILS TO INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND INDIAN

CULTURE 3
Contribution of Tamils to Indian Freedom Struggle - The Cultural Influence of Tamils over the
other parts of India – Self-Respect Movement - Role of Siddha Medicine in Indigenous Systems
of Medicine – Inscriptions & Manuscripts – Print History of Tamil Books.
TOTAL : 15 PERIODS
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. – – . . ( :
).
2. – . .( ).
3. – (
)
4. – .( )
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in
print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.
33
GE3171 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L TPC
0 04 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the problem solving approaches.
 To learn the basic programming constructs in Python.
 To practice various computing strategies for Python-based solutions to real world
problems.
 To use Python data structures - lists, tuples, dictionaries.
 To do input/output with files in Python.

EXPERIMENTS:
Note: The examples suggested in each experiment are only indicative. The lab instructor is
expected to design other problems on similar lines. The Examination shall not be restricted to the
sample experiments listed here.
1. Identification and solving of simple real life or scientific or technical problems, and
developing flow charts for the same. (Electricity Billing, Retail shop billing, Sin series, weight
of a motorbike, Weight of a steel bar, compute Electrical Current in Three Phase AC Circuit,
etc.)
2. Python programming using simple statements and expressions (exchange the values of two
variables, circulate the values of n variables, distance between two points).
3. Scientific problems using Conditionals and Iterative loops. (Number series, Number Patterns,
pyramid pattern)
4. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Lists, Tuples. (Items present in a
library/Components of a car/ Materials required for construction of a building –operations of
list & tuples)
5. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Sets, Dictionaries. (Language,
components of an automobile, Elements of a civil structure, etc.- operations of Sets &
Dictionaries)
6. Implementing programs using Functions. (Factorial, largest number in a list, area of shape)
7. Implementing programs using Strings. (reverse, palindrome, character count, replacing
characters)
8. Implementing programs using written modules and Python Standard Libraries (pandas,
numpy. Matplotlib, scipy)
9. Implementing real-time/technical applications using File handling. (copy from one file to
another, word count, longest word)
10. Implementing real-time/technical applications using Exception handling. (divide by zero error,
voter’s age validity, student mark range validation)
11. Exploring Pygame tool.
12. Developing a game activity using Pygame like bouncing ball, car race etc.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems
CO2: Develop and execute simple Python programs.
CO3: Implement programs in Python using conditionals and loops for solving problems..
CO4: Deploy functions to decompose a Python program.
CO5: Process compound data using Python data structures.
CO6: Utilize Python packages in developing software applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python : How to Think like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd Edition,
O’Reilly Publishers, 2016.
2. Karl Beecher, “Computational Thinking: A Beginner's Guide to Problem Solving and
Programming”, 1st Edition, BCS Learning & Development Limited, 2017.

34
REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “Python for Programmers”, Pearson Education, 1st Edition,
2021.
2. G Venkatesh and Madhavan Mukund, “Computational Thinking: A Primer for Programmers
and Data Scientists”, 1st Edition, Notion Press, 2021.
3. John V Guttag, "Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python: With
Applications to Computational Modeling and Understanding Data‘‘, Third Edition, MIT
Press , 2021
4. Eric Matthes, “Python Crash Course, A Hands - on Project Based Introduction to
Programming”, 2nd Edition, No Starch Press, 2019.
5. https://www.python.org/
6. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, 2018.

COs- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 3 -
2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 3 - -
3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 3 - -
4 3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 1 - 3 - -
5 1 2 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
6 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
AVg. 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 -
1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high, ‘-' - no correlation

BS3171 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2
PHYSICS LABORATORY: (Any Seven Experiments)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the proper use of various kinds of physics laboratory equipment.
 To learn how data can be collected, presented and interpreted in a clear and concise manner.
 To learn problem solving skills related to physics principles and interpretation of experimental
data.
 To determine error in experimental measurements and techniques used to minimize such
error.
 To make the student as an active participant in each part of all lab exercises.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Torsional pendulum - Determination of rigidity modulus of wire and moment of inertia of
regular and irregular objects.
2. Simple harmonic oscillations of cantilever.
3. Non-uniform bending - Determination of Young’s modulus
4. Uniform bending – Determination of Young’s modulus
5. Laser- Determination of the wave length of the laser using grating
6. Air wedge - Determination of thickness of a thin sheet/wire
7. a) Optical fibre -Determination of Numerical Aperture and acceptance angle
b) Compact disc- Determination of width of the groove using laser.
8. Acoustic grating- Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves in liquids.
9. Ultrasonic interferometer – determination of the velocity of sound and compressibility of
liquids
10. Post office box -Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor.
11. Photoelectric effect
12. Michelson Interferometer.
35
 13. Melde’s string experiment
14. Experiment with lattice dynamics kit.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
CO1 : Understand the functioning of various physics laboratory equipment.
CO2 : Use graphical models to analyze laboratory data.
CO3 : Use mathematical models as a medium for quantitative reasoning and describing
physical reality.
CO4 : Access, process and analyze scientific information.
CO5 : Solve problems individually and collaboratively.

CO’s-PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
5 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - -
AVG 3 2.4 2.6 1 1
 1-Low,2-Medium,3-High,”-“-no correlation
 Note: the average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments )

OBJECTIVES:
 To inculcate experimental skills to test basic understanding of water quality parameters,
such as, acidity, alkalinity, hardness, DO, chloride and copper.
 To induce the students to familiarize with electro analytical techniques such as, pH metry,
potentiometry and conductometry in the determination of impurities in aqueous solutions.
 To demonstrate the analysis of metals and alloys.
 To demonstrate the synthesis of nanoparticles

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any seven experiments to be conducted)

1. Preparation of Na2CO3 as a primary standard and estimation of acidity of a water sample
using the primary standard
2. Determination of types and amount of alkalinity in water sample.
- Split the first experiment into two
3. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
4. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method.
5. Determination of chloride content of water sample by Argentometric method.
6. Estimation of copper content of the given solution by Iodometry.
7. Estimation of TDS of a water sample by gravimetry.
8. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
9. Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
10. Conductometric titration of barium chloride against sodium sulphate (precipitation
titration)
11. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
12. Estimation of sodium /potassium present in water using flame photometer.
13. Preparation of nanoparticles (TiO2/ZnO/CuO) by Sol-Gel method.
14. Estimation of Nickel in steel
15. Proximate analysis of Coal
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

36
OUTCOMES :
 To analyse the quality of water samples with respect to their acidity, alkalinity, hardness
and DO.
 To determine the amount of metal ions through volumetric and spectroscopic techniques
 To analyse and determine the composition of alloys.
 To learn simple method of synthesis of nanoparticles
 To quantitatively analyse the impurities in solution by electroanalytical techniques

TEXT BOOK:
1. J. Mendham, R. C. Denney, J.D. Barnes, M. Thomas and B. Sivasankar, Vogel’s Textbook
of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (2009).
CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 1 - - -
3 3 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - -
4 2 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - -
5 2 1 2 - 1 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg 2.6 1.3 1.6 1 1 1.4 1.8 - - - - 1.3 - - -
.
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

GE3172 ENGLISH LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES :
 To improve the communicative competence of learners
 To help learners use language effectively in academic /work contexts
 To develop various listening strategies to comprehend various types of audio materials like
lectures, discussions, videos etc.
 To build on students’ English language skills by engaging them in listening, speaking and
grammar learning activities that are relevant to authentic contexts.
 To use language efficiently in expressing their opinions via various media.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUNDAMENTALS OF

COMMUNICATION 6
Listening for general information-specific details- conversation: Introduction to classmates - Audio /
video (formal & informal); Telephone conversation; Listening to voicemail & messages; Listening
and filling a form. Speaking - making telephone calls-Self Introduction; Introducing a friend; -
politeness strategies- making polite requests, making polite offers, replying to polite requests and
offers- understanding basic instructions( filling out a bank application for example).

UNIT II NARRATION AND SUMMATION 6

Listening - Listening to podcasts, anecdotes / stories / event narration; documentaries and
interviews with celebrities. Speaking - Narrating personal experiences / events-Talking about
current and temporary situations & permanent and regular situations* - describing experiences and
feelings- engaging in small talk- describing requirements and abilities.

UNIT III DESCRIPTION OF A PROCESS / PRODUCT 6

Listening - Listen to product and process descriptions; a classroom lecture; and advertisements
about products. Speaking – Picture description- describing locations in workplaces- Giving
instruction to use the product- explaining uses and purposes- Presenting a product- describing
shapes and sizes and weights- talking about quantities(large & small)-talking about precautions.
37
UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 6
Listening – Listening to TED Talks; Listening to lectures - and educational videos. Speaking –
Small Talk; discussing and making plans-talking about tasks-talking about progress- talking about
positions and directions of movement-talking about travel preparations- talking about
transportation-

UNIT V EXPRESSION 6
Listening – Listening to debates/ discussions; different viewpoints on an issue; and panel
discussions. Speaking –making predictions- talking about a given topic-giving opinions-
understanding a website-describing processes
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To listen to and comprehend general as well as complex academic texts information
 To listen to and understand different points of view in a discussion
 To speak fluently and accurately in formal and informal communicative contexts
 To describe products and processes and explain their uses and purposes clearly and
accurately
 To express their opinions effectively in both formal and informal discussions

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
 One online / app based assessment to test listening /speaking
 End Semester ONLY listening and speaking will be conducted online.
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of listening and speaking internal
test and end semester exam.
CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

HS3252 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH -II L T P C

2 00 2
OBJECTIVES :
 To engage learners in meaningful language activities to improve their reading and writing
skills
 To learn various reading strategies and apply in comprehending documents in professional
context.
 To help learners understand the purpose, audience, contexts of different types of writing
 To develop analytical thinking skills for problem solving in communicative contexts
 To demonstrate an understanding of job applications and interviews for internship and
placements

38
UNIT I MAKING COMPARISONS 6


Reading - Reading advertisements, user manuals, brochures; Writing – Professional emails, Email
etiquette - Compare and Contrast Essay; Grammar – Mixed Tenses, Prepositional phrases

UNIT II EXPRESSING CAUSAL RELATIONS IN SPEAKING AND WRITING 6

Reading - Reading longer technical texts– Cause and Effect Essays, and Letters / emails of
complaint, Writing - Writing responses to complaints. Grammar - Active Passive Voice
transformations, Infinitive and Gerunds
UNIT III PROBLEM SOLVING 6
Reading - Case Studies, excerpts from literary texts, news reports etc. Writing – Letter to the
Editor, Checklists, Problem solution essay / Argumentative Essay. Grammar – Error correction; If
conditional sentences

UNIT IV REPORTING OF EVENTS AND RESEARCH 6

Reading –Newspaper articles; Writing – Recommendations, Transcoding, Accident Report, Survey
Report Grammar – Reported Speech, Modals Vocabulary – Conjunctions- use of prepositions

UNIT V THE ABILITY TO PUT IDEAS OR INFORMATION COGENTLY 6

Reading – Company profiles, Statement of Purpose, (SOP), an excerpt of interview with
professionals; Writing – Job / Internship application – Cover letter & Resume; Grammar –
Numerical adjectives, Relative Clauses.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 To compare and contrast products and ideas in technical texts.
 To identify and report cause and effects in events, industrial processes through technical
texts
 To analyse problems in order to arrive at feasible solutions and communicate them in the
written format.
 To present their ideas and opinions in a planned and logical manner
 To draft effective resumes in the context of job search.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. English for Engineers & Technologists (2020 edition) Orient Blackswan Private Ltd.
Department of English, Anna University.
2. English for Science & Technology Cambridge University Press 2021.
3. Authored by Dr. Veena Selvam, Dr. Sujatha Priyadarshini, Dr. Deepa Mary Francis, Dr. KN.
Shoba, and Dr. Lourdes Joevani, Department of English, Anna University.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Raman. Meenakshi, Sharma. Sangeeta (2019). Professional English. Oxford university press.
New Delhi.
2. Improve Your Writing ed. V.N. Arora and Laxmi Chandra, Oxford Univ. Press, 2001,
NewDelhi.
3. Learning to Communicate – Dr. V. Chellammal. Allied Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
4. Business Correspondence and Report Writing by Prof. R.C. Sharma & Krishna Mohan, Tata
McGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 2001, New Delhi.
5. Developing Communication Skills by Krishna Mohan, Meera Bannerji- Macmillan India Ltd.
1990, Delhi.

ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Two internal assessments and an end semester examination to test students’ reading and writing
skills along with their grammatical and lexical competence.

39
 CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 - - -
5 - - - - - - - - 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 3 3 3 3 2.75 3 3 3 2.2 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

MA3251 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C

3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few statistical and
numerical methods and give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems
occurring in engineering and technology.
 To acquaint the knowledge of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples which
plays an important role in real life problems.
 To introduce the basic concepts of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
 To introduce the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and numerical
techniques of differentiation and integration which plays an important role in engineering
and technology disciplines.
 To acquaint the knowledge of various techniques and methods of solving ordinary
differential equations.

UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9+3

Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, proportion and difference of means (Large and
small samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – Chi square test for
goodness of fit – Independence of attributes.

UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9+3

One way and two way classifications - Completely randomized design – Randomized block design
– Latin square design - 22 factorial design.

UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9+3

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method – Newton
Raphson method- Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting -
Gauss Jordan method – Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel - Eigenvalues of a
matrix by Power method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices.
UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL
INTEGRATION 9+3
Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolations – Newton’s forward and backward
difference interpolation – Approximation of derivates using interpolation polynomials – Numerical
single and double integrations using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.

UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Single step methods: Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth
order Runge-Kutta method for solving first order differential equations - Multi step methods:
Milne’s and Adams - Bash forth predictor corrector methods for solving first order differential
equations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
40
OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
 Apply the concept of testing of hypothesis for small and large samples in real life problems.
 Apply the basic concepts of classifications of design of experiments in the field of agriculture.
 Appreciate the numerical techniques of interpolation in various intervals and apply the
numerical techniques of differentiation and integration for engineering problems.
 Understand the knowledge of various techniques and methods for solving first and second
order ordinary differential equations.
 Solve the partial and ordinary differential equations with initial and boundary conditions by
using certain techniques with engineering applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal, B.S., and Grewal, J.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science", Khanna
Publishers, 10th Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Johnson, R.A., Miller, I and Freund J., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for
Engineers", Pearson Education, Asia, 8th Edition, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Burden, R.L and Faires, J.D, "Numerical Analysis”, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2016.
2. Devore. J.L., "Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi, 8th Edition, 2014.
3. Gerald. C.F. and Wheatley. P.O. "Applied Numerical Analysis” Pearson Education, Asia, New
Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
4. Gupta S.C. and Kapoor V. K., “ Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, 12th Edition, 2020.
5. Spiegel. M.R., Schiller. J. and Srinivasan. R.A., "Schaum’s Outlines on Probability and
Statistics ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 4th Edition, 2012.
6. Walpole. R.E., Myers. R.H., Myers. S.L. and Ye. K., “Probability and Statistics for Engineers
and Scientists", 9th Edition, Pearson Education, Asia, 2010.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 3 - - -

PH3253 MATERIALS SCIENCE FOR TECHNOLOGISTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students effectively to understand the basics of crystallography and crystal
imperfections.
 To enable the students to get knowledge on various strengthening methods of materials, and
also various mechanical properties and their measurement.
 To impart knowledge on the basics of phase diagrams and their applications.
 To learn about iron-carbon system, and about various ferrous and non-ferrous alloys.
 To introduce the preparation, properties and applications of ceramics, composites and
nanomaterials.
41
UNIT I CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 9
Crystallographic directions and planes – metallic crystal structures: BCC, FCC and HCP – linear
and planar densities – crystal imperfections- edge and screw dislocations, Burgers vector and
elastic strain energy- surface imperfections – grain and twin boundaries – Polymorphism – phase
changes – nucleation and growth – homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation.

UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Tensile test - plastic deformation by slip – slip systems – mechanisms of strengthening in metals:
strain hardening, grain size reduction, solid solution strengthening, precipitation hardening –
Creep: creep curves,stress and temperature effects, mechanisms of creep, creep-resistant
materials – Fracture: ductile and brittle fractures - the Griffith criterion –fracture toughness -
Fatigue failure:the S-N curve – factors that affect fatigue life – Hardness: Rockwell and Brinell
hardness tests, Knoop and Vickers microhardness tests.

UNIT III PHASE DIAGRAMS 9

Basic concepts - Gibbs phase rule –Unary phase diagram (iron) - Binary phase diagrams:
isomorphous systems (Cu-Ni) –determination of phase composition and phase amounts – tieline
and lever rule - binary eutectic diagram with no solid solution and limited solid solution (Pb-Sn) –
eutectoid and peritectic reactions - other invariant reactions – microstructural development during
the slow cooling: eutectic, hypereutectic and hypoeutectic compositions.

UNIT IV FERROUS AND NONFERROUS ALLOYS 9

The Fe-Fe3C phase diagram: phases, invariant reactions,development of microstructure in
eutectoid, hypoeutectoid and hypereutectoid alloys–influence of other alloying elements in the Fe-
C system - phase transformations –isothermal transformation diagram for eutectoid iron-carbon
alloy – microstructures: pearlite, bainite, spheroidite and martensite – steels, stainless steels and
cast irons – copper alloys – aluminum alloys – titanium alloys.

UNIT V CERAMICS, COMPOSITES AND NANO MATERIALS 9

Ceramics – types and applications-refractories, abrasives and cements – Composites:
classification, role of matrix and reinforcement -Fiber reinforced composites – carbon-carbon
composites –Nanomaterials:types, physical, chemical and mechanical properties - carbon
nanotubes: properties and applications - synthesis of nanomaterials: sonochemical, molecular
epitaxy, physical vapor deposition (PVD) and chemical vapor deposition (CVD). Characterization:
Transmission electron microscopy - scanning electron microscopy - Atomic force microscopy - X-
ray powder diffraction - Nanoparticle size calculation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to
CO2 : Understand the basics of crystallography and its importance in materials properties
CO3 : Understand the significance of dislocations, strengthening mechanisms, and tensile, creep,
hardness and fracture behavior of materials
CO4 : Gain knowledge on binary phase diagrams, and also will be able to determine the phase
composition and phase amount.
CO5 : Understand about the Fe-C system and various microstructures in it, and also about various
ferrous and non-ferrous alloys.
CO6 : Get adequate understanding on the preparation, properties and applications of ceramics,
composites and nanomaterials.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Balasubramaniam, Callister’s Materials Science and Engineering.Wiley (Indian Edition),
2014.
2. V.Raghavan. Materials Science and Engineering: A First Course, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited, 2015.

42
 3. William F. Smith, Javad Hashemi andRavi Prakash, Materials Science and Engineering,
McGraw Hill Education (Indian Edition), 2017.

REFERENCES :
1. J.F.Shackelford. Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers. Pearson, 2015.
2. Wendelin Wright and Donald Askeland, Essentials of Materials Science and Engineering,
CL Engineering, 2013.
3. J.C. Anderson, K.D. Leaver, P. Leevers and R.D. Rawlings, Materials Science for
Engineers, CRC Press, 2003.
4. Jean P.Mercier, G.Zambelli and W.Kurz, Introduction to Materials Science,Elsevier, 2002.
5. Yaser Dahman, Nanotechnology and Functional Materials for Engineers, Elsevier, 2017.

BE3252 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION LTPC

ENGINEERING 3 003

OBJECTIVES :
 To introduce the basics of electric circuits and analysis
 To impart knowledge in domestic wiring
 To impart knowledge in the basics of working principles and application of electrical
machines
 To introduce analog devices and their characteristics
 To introduce the functional elements and working of sensors and transducers.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS 9

DC Circuits: Circuit Components: Conductor, Resistor, Inductor, Capacitor – Ohm’s Law -
Kirchhoff’s Laws – Simple problems- Nodal Analysis, Mesh analysis with Independent sources
only (Steady state)
Introduction to AC Circuits and Parameters: Waveforms, Average value, RMS Value,
Instantaneous power, real power, reactive power and apparent power, power factor – Steady
state analysis of RLC circuits (Simple problems only), Three phase supply – star and delta
connection – power in three-phase systems

UNIT II MAGNETIC CIRCUITS AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 9

Magnetic circuits-definitions-MMF, flux, reluctance, magnetic field intensity, flux density, fringing,
self and mutual inductances-simple problems.
Domestic wiring , types of wires and cables, earthing ,protective devices- switch fuse unit-
Miniature circuit breaker-moulded case circuit breaker- earth leakage circuit breaker, safety
precautions and First Aid

UNIT III ELECTRICAL MACHINES 9

Construction and Working principle- DC Separately and Self excited Generators, EMF equation,
Types and Applications. Working Principle of DC motors, Torque Equation, Types and
Applications. Construction, Working principle and Applications of Transformer, Three phase
Alternator, Synchronous motor and Three Phase Induction Motor.

UNIT IV ANALOG ELECTRONICS 9

Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor in Electronic Circuits- Semiconductor Materials: Silicon
&Germanium – PN Junction Diodes, Zener Diode –Characteristics Applications – Bipolar Junction
Transistor-Biasing, JFET, SCR, MOSFET,IGBT – Types, I-V Characteristics and Applications,
Rectifier and Inverters, harmonics

UNIT V SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9

Sensors, solenoids, pneumatic controls with electrical actuator, mechatronics, types of valves and
43
its applications, electro-pneumatic systems, proximity sensors, limit switches, piezoelectric, hall
effect, photo sensors,Strain gauge, LVDT, differential pressure transducer,optical and digital
transducers, Smart sensors, Thermal Imagers..
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Compute the electric circuit parameters for simple problems
CO2: Explain the concepts of domestics wiring and protective devices
CO3: Explain the working principle and applications of electrical machines
CO4: Analyze the characteristics of analog electronic devices
CO5: Explain the types and operating principles of sensors and transducers

TEXT BOOKS:
1. D P Kothari and I.J Nagarath, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, Second Edition, 2020
2. A.K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney ‘A Course in Electrical & Electronic
Measurements & Instrumentation’, Dhanpat Rai and Co, 2015.
3. S.K. Bhattacharya, Basic Electrical Engineering, Pearson Education, 2019
4. James A Svoboda, Richard C. Dorf, Dorf’s Introduction to Electric Circuits, Wiley,2018

REFERENCES:
1. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit theory and technology”, Routledge; 2017.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, ‘Electronic Devices’, 10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2018.
3. Albert Malvino, David Bates, ‘Electronic Principles, McGraw Hill Education; 7th edition,
2017
4. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Spice for Circuits and electronics”, 4th Edition.,Cengage
India,2019.
5. H.S. Kalsi, ‘Electronic Instrumentation’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2010

CO’s, PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 - - -
2 2 1 1 1 - - -
3 2 1 1 1 - - -
4 2 1 1 1 - - -
5 2 1 1 1 - - -
Avg. 2 1 1 1 - - -

CY3251 CHEMISTRY FOR TECHNOLOGISTS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES :
The course aims to
 Provide conceptual understanding on spectroscopic and surface analytical techniques.
 Impart knowledge to students on the chemistry of surface and interfaces.
 make students well versed on the chemical analysis of oils, fats, soaps & lubricants.
 Provide deep knowledge to students about various classification and properties of
hydrocarbon.
 familiarize students with the identification and characteristics of dyes and their
applications.

44
UNIT I SPECTROSCOPIC TECHNIQUES 9
Spectroscopy: Electromagnetic spectrum - absorption of radiation - electronic, vibrational and
rotational transitions. Width and intensities of spectral lines. Flame photometer, Atomic absorption
spectroscopy, UV- Vis, IR spectroscopy, Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) and Transmission
Electron Microscope (TEM) - principles, instrumentation (Block diagram) and applications.

UNIT II CHEMISTRY OF INTERFACES 9

Interface region-curved interfaces-thermodynamics of surfaces - Surface film on liquids-
Adsorption of gases on Solids-adsorption isotherms – types. Applications of adsorption studies-
detergency, wetting, foaming ,defoaming, spreading, water repellency.

UNIT III OILS, FATS, SOAPS & LUBRICANTS 9

Chemical constitution, Chemical analysis of oils and fats – acid, saponification and iodine values,
Definitions, determinations and significance. Definition, mechanism of lubrication, preparation of
petrolubes, desirable characteristics – viscosity, viscosity index, carbon residue, oxidation stability,
flash and fire points, cloud and pour points, aniline point. Semisolid lubricant – greases,
preparation of sodium, lithium, calcium and axle greases and uses, consistency test and drop point
test.Solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum disulphide.

UNIT IV HYDROCARBON 9
Classification of Hydrocarbons. Aliphatic Hydrocarbons: Alkanes –l isomerism, conformations,
physical, chemical reactions including free radical mechanism of halogenation, combustion and
pyrolysis. Alkenes– structure of double bond, geometrical isomerism, chemical reactions: ddition of
hydrogen, halogen, water, hydrogen halides, ozonolysis, oxidation. Alkynes – structure of triple
bond acidic character of alkynes, addition reaction of - hydrogen, halogens, hydrogenhalides and
water. Aromatic hydrocarbons - resonance, aromaticity ; mechanism of electrophilic substitution –
nitration sulphonation, halogenations.

UNIT V COLORANTS 9
Theory of colour and constitution : chromophore and auxochrome, bathochromic and
hypsochromic shift, classification of dyes based on application and composition. Chemistry of azo
dye – synthesis of Methyl red, Methyl orange, Congo red, phenolphthalein, fluorescein and eosin.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, the students will be able to :
 Understand and apply spectroscopic techniques for the analysis of engineering materials
for their applications.
 Make use of the applications of adsorption in detergency, wetting, spreading, foaming, de-
foaming, and water repellenceand separation processes.
 Analyse and estimate oils, fats, lubricants and soap for their intended applications.
 Distinguish and demonstrate the role of different types of hydrocarbon.
 Realize the chemical structures, properties and relationships of different types of dyes and
their applications.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dara S. S., “A Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi,
th
12 Edition, 2016.
2. Jain. P.C. and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, DhanpetRai& Sons, New Delhi, 17th
Edition, 2018.
A. Ravikrishnan, ''Chemistry for Technologists'', Sri Krishna, Hi Tech Publishing Company
Pvt. Ltd. Chennai, 2015.
3. Arun Pahl and B.S.Paul , “ Advanced Organic Chemistry”, S.Chand Publishers, Third
Edition , New Delhi, 2012.

45
REFERENCES:
1. B.K. Sharma, “Industrial chemistry”, Krishna Prakashan Media (P) Ltd, Meerut, 2014.
2. Shore J., “Colourants and Auxiliaries'', Volume 1 & 2, Wood head Publishing Ltd., 2nd
Edition, 2002.
3. Shenai V. A., “Chemistry of Dyes and Principles of Dyeing”, Sevak Publications, Mumbai,
1995.
4. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, B.Y Publishing Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 1994.
5. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”, Cambridge
University Press, Delhi, 2019.

GE3251 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C

2 0 4 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Drawing engineering curves.
 Drawing freehand sketch of simple objects.
 Drawing orthographic projection of solids and section of solids.
 Drawing development of solids
 Drawing isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination)
Importance of graphics in engineering applications — Use of drafting instruments — BIS
conventions and specifications — Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets — Lettering and
dimensioning.

UNIT I PLANE CURVES 6+12

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics — Construction
of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method — Construction of cycloid —
construction of involutes of square and circle — Drawing of tangents and normal to the above
curves.

UNIT II PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+12

Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes-First angle projection-projection of points.
Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and traces. Projection
of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the principal planes by rotating object
method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 6+12

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone and truncated solids when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes and parallel to the other by rotating object method.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of
Three Dimensional objects — Layout of views- Freehand sketching of multiple views from
pictorial views of objects.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for examination)

UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF

SURFACES 6+12
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the one
of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other — obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids — Prisms, pyramids cylinders and
cones.
46
 Practicing three dimensional modeling of simple objects by CAD Software(Not for examination)

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+12

Principles of isometric projection — isometric scale —lsometric projections of simple solids and
truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones- combination of two solid objects in simple
vertical positions - Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinders by
visual ray method.
Practicing three dimensional modeling of isometric projection of simple objects by CAD
Software(Not for examination)
TOTAL: (L=30+P=60) 90 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
• Use BIS conventions and specifications for engineering drawing.
• Construct the conic curves, involutes and cycloid.
• Solve practical problems involving projection of lines.
• Draw the orthographic, isometric and perspective projections of simple solids.
• Draw the development of simple solids.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,
rd
53 Edition, 2019.
2. Natrajan K.V., “A Text Book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2018.
3. Parthasarathy, N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Drawing”, Oxford University Press, 2015

REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, McGraw Hill, 2 n d Edition, 2019.
2. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas Publications, Bangalore,
27th Edition, 2017.
3. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
4. Parthasarathy N. S. and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford University, Press, New Delhi,
2015.
5. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson Education India, 2nd Edition, 2009.
6. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P) Limited,
2008.

Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

1. IS 10711 — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Size and lay out of drawing sheets.
2. IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) — 2001: Technical products Documentation — Lettering.
3. IS 10714 (Part 20) — 2001 & SP 46 — 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS 11669 — 1986 & SP 46 —2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) — 2001: Technical drawings — Projection Methods.

Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:

1. There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
2. All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
3. The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be
permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
4. The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day

47
 PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
2 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
3 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Avg 3 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

GE3252 LTPC
1 0 01
I : 3
– -
–

II : 3

-
– -
–
–
-
– –
-

III : 3
– – –
– –
– –
– – – –
–

IV : 3
– –
– –
– –
– –
–

V : 3
– -
– –
– – –

TOTAL : 15 PERIODS

48
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. – –

2. –
3. –

4. –
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

GE3252 TAMILS AND TECHNOLOGY LTPC

1001
UNIT I WEAVING AND CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY 3
Weaving Industry during Sangam Age – Ceramic technology – Black and Red Ware Potteries
(BRW) – Graffiti on Potteries.

UNIT II DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY 3

Designing and Structural construction House & Designs in household materials during Sangam
Age - Building materials and Hero stones of Sangam age – Details of Stage Constructions in
Silappathikaram - Sculptures and Temples of Mamallapuram - Great Temples of Cholas and other
worship places - Temples of Nayaka Period - Type study (Madurai Meenakshi Temple)-
Thirumalai Nayakar Mahal - Chetti Nadu Houses, Indo - Saracenic architecture at Madras during
British Period.

UNIT III MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY 3

Art of Ship Building - Metallurgical studies - Iron industry - Iron smelting, steel -Copper and gold-
Coins as source of history - Minting of Coins – Beads making-industries Stone beads -Glass
beads - Terracotta beads -Shell beads/ bone beats - Archeological evidences - Gem stone types
described in Silappathikaram.

UNIT IV AGRICULTURE AND IRRIGATION TECHNOLOGY 3

Dam, Tank, ponds, Sluice, Significance of Kumizhi Thoompu of Chola Period, Animal Husbandry -
Wells designed for cattle use - Agriculture and Agro Processing - Knowledge of Sea - Fisheries –
Pearl - Conche diving - Ancient Knowledge of Ocean - Knowledge Specific Society.
UNIT V SCIENTIFIC TAMIL & TAMIL COMPUTING 3
Development of Scientific Tamil - Tamil computing – Digitalization of Tamil Books – Development
of Tamil Software – Tamil Virtual Academy – Tamil Digital Library – Online Tamil Dictionaries –
Sorkuvai Project.
TOTAL: 15 PERIODS
49
TEXT-CUM-REFERENCE BOOKS
1. – – . . ( :

).
2. – . .( ).
3. – (
)
4. – .( )
5. Social Life of Tamils (Dr.K.K.Pillay) A joint publication of TNTB & ESC and RMRL – (in print)
6. Social Life of the Tamils - The Classical Period (Dr.S.Singaravelu) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
7. Historical Heritage of the Tamils (Dr.S.V.Subatamanian, Dr.K.D. Thirunavukkarasu)
(Published by: International Institute of Tamil Studies).
8. The Contributions of the Tamils to Indian Culture (Dr.M.Valarmathi) (Published by:
International Institute of Tamil Studies.)
9. Keeladi - ‘Sangam City C ivilization on the banks of river Vaigai’ (Jointly Published by:
Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text Book and Educational Services Corporation,
Tamil Nadu)
10. Studies in the History of India with Special Reference to Tamil Nadu (Dr.K.K.Pillay)
(Published by: The Author)
11. Porunai Civilization (Jointly Published by: Department of Archaeology & Tamil Nadu Text
Book and Educational Services Corporation, Tamil Nadu)
12. Journey of Civilization Indus to Vaigai (R.Balakrishnan) (Published by: RMRL) – Reference
Book.

NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3251 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T PC
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct
2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4
NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security
1
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and
Problem Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L 1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour ‘Code 3
L 2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1

50
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3252 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C
2 0 0 2
NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4
NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security
1

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 1*

NX3253 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - I L T P C

2 0 0 2

NCC GENERAL 6
NCC 1 Aims, Objectives & Organization of NCC 1
NCC 2 Incentives 2
NCC 3 Duties of NCC Cadet 1
NCC 4 NCC Camps: Types & Conduct 2
NATIONAL INTEGRATION AND AWARENESS 4
NI 1 National Integration: Importance & Necessity 1
51
 NI 2 Factors Affecting National Integration 1
NI 3 Unity in Diversity & Role of NCC in Nation Building 1
NI 4 Threats to National Security 1
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 7
PD 1 Self-Awareness, Empathy, Critical & Creative Thinking, Decision Making and Problem
Solving 2
PD 2 Communication Skills 3
PD 3 Group Discussion: Stress & Emotions 2
LEADERSHIP 5
L1 Leadership Capsule: Traits, Indicators, Motivation, Moral Values, Honour Code 3
L2 Case Studies: Shivaji, Jhasi Ki Rani 2
SOCIAL SERVICE AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 8
SS 1 Basics, Rural Development Programmes, NGOs, Contribution of Youth 3
SS 4 Protection of Children and Women Safety 1
SS 5 Road / Rail Travel Safety 1
SS 6 New Initiatives 2
SS 7 Cyber and Mobile Security Awareness 1
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

GE3271 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY LT P C

0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Drawing pipe line plan; laying and connecting various pipe fittings used in common
household plumbing work; Sawing; planing; making joints in wood materials used in
commonhousehold wood work.
 Wiring various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.
 Welding various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machining various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assembling simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Making a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
 Soldering and testing simple electronic circuits; Assembling and testing simple electronic
components on PCB.
GROUP – A (CIVIL & ELECTRICAL)
PART I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

PLUMBING WORK:
a) Connecting various basic pipe fittings like valves, taps, coupling, unions,
reducers,elbows and other components which are commonly used in household.
b) Preparing plumbing line sketches.
c) Laying pipe connection to the suction side of a pump
d) Laying pipe connection to the delivery side of a pump.
e) Connecting pipes of different materials: Metal, plastic and flexible pipes used
inhousehold appliances.

WOOD WORK:
a) Sawing,
b) Planing and
c) Making joints like T-Joint, Mortise joint and Tenon joint and Dovetail joint.

Wood Work Study:

a) Studying joints in door panels and wooden furniture
52
 b) Studying common industrial trusses using models.

PART II ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

a) Introduction to switches, fuses, indicators and lamps - Basic switch board wiring with
lamp, fan and three pin socket
b) Staircase wiring
c) Fluorescent Lamp wiring with introduction to CFL and LED types.
d) Energy meter wiring and related calculations/ calibration
e) Study of Iron Box wiring and assembly
f) Study of Fan Regulator (Resistor type and Electronic type using Diac/Triac/quadrac)
g) Study of emergency lamp wiring/Water heater

GROUP – B (MECHANICAL AND ELECTRONICS)

PART III MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

WELDING WORK:
a) Welding of Butt Joints, Lap Joints, and Tee Joints using arc welding.
b) Practicing gas welding.

BASIC MACHINING WORK:

a) (simple)Turning.
b) (simple)Drilling.
c) (simple)Tapping.

ASSEMBLY WORK:
a) Assembling a centrifugal pump.
b) Assembling a household mixer.
c) Assembling an air conditioner.

SHEET METAL WORK:

a) Making of a square tray

FOUNDRY WORK:
a) Demonstrating basic foundry operations.

PART IV ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING PRACTICES 15

SOLDERING WORK:
a) Soldering simple electronic circuits and checking continuity.

ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY AND TESTING WORK:

a) Assembling and testing electronic components on a small PCB.

ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STUDY:

a) Study an elements of smart phone..
b) Assembly and dismantle of LED TV.
c) Assembly and dismantle of computer/ laptop
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 : Draw pipe line plan; lay and connect various pipe fittings used in common household
plumbing work; Saw; plan; make joints in wood materials used in common household ood
work.
CO2 : Wire various electrical joints in common household electrical wire work.

53
CO3: Weld various joints in steel plates using arc welding work; Machine various simple
processes like turning, drilling, tapping in parts; Assemble simple mechanical assembly of
common household equipments; Make a tray out of metal sheet using sheet metal work.
CO4 : Solder and test simple electronic circuits; Assemble and test simple
electronic components on PCB.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Avg 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

BE3272 BASIC ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P C

ENGINEERING LABORATORY 0 04 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To train the students in conducting load tests electrical machines
 To gain practical experience in experimentally obtaining the characteristics of electronic
devices and rectifiers
 To train the students to measure three phase power and displacement

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Verification of ohms and Kirchhoff’s Laws.
2. Three Phase Power Measurement
3. Load test on DC Shunt Motor.
4. Load test on Self Excited DC Generator
5. Load test on Single phase Transformer
6. Load Test on Induction Motor
7. Characteristics of PN and Zener Diodes
8. Characteristics of BJT, SCR and MOSFET
9. Design and analysis of Half wave and Full Wave rectifiers
10. Measurement of displacement of LVDT
. TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Use experimental methods to verify the Ohm’s law and Kirchhoff’s Law and to measure
three phase power
CO2: Analyze experimentally the load characteristics of electrical machines
CO3: Analyze the characteristics of basic electronic devices
CO4: Use LVDT to measure displacement

CO’s, PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
2 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
3 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
4 2 3 1 2 1.5 2 - - -
Avg. 1.6 1.4 0.8 1.6 1.2 1.6

54
GE3272 COMMUNICATION LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES
 To identify varied group discussion skills and apply them to take part in effective
discussions in a professional context.
 To analyse concepts and problems and make effective presentations explaining them
clearly and precisely.
 To be able to communicate effectively through formal and informal writing.
 To be able to use appropriate language structures to write emails, reports and essays
 To give instructions and recommendations that are clear and relevant to the context

UNIT I 12
Speaking-Role Play Exercises Based on Workplace Contexts, - talking about competition-
discussing progress toward goals-talking about experiences- talking about events in life-
discussing past events-Writing: writing emails ( formal & semi-formal).

UNIT II 12
Speaking: discussing news stories-talking about frequency-talking about travel problems-
discussing travel procedures- talking about travel problems- making arrangements-describing
arrangements-discussing plans and decisions- discussing purposes and reasons- understanding
common technology terms-Writing: - writing different types of emails.

UNIT III 12
Speaking: discussing predictions-describing the climate-discussing forecasts and scenarios-
talking about purchasing-discussing advantages and disadvantages- making comparisons-
discussing likes and dislikes- discussing feelings about experiences-discussing imaginary
scenarios Writing: short essays and reports-formal/semi-formal letters.

UNIT IV 12
Speaking: discussing the natural environment-describing systems-describing position and
movement- explaining rules-( example- discussing rental arrangements)- understanding technical
instructions-Writing: writing instructions-writing a short article.

UNIT V 12
Speaking: describing things relatively-describing clothing-discussing safety issues( making
recommendations) talking about electrical devices-describing controlling actions- Writing:
job application( Cover letter + Curriculum vitae)-writing recommendations.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
LEARNING OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 Speak effectively in group discussions held in a formal/semi formal contexts.
 Discuss, analyse and present concepts and problems from various perspectives to arrive at
suitable solutions
 Write emails, letters and effective job applications.
 Write critical reports to convey data and information with clarity and precision
 Give appropriate instructions and recommendations for safe execution of tasks

Assessment Pattern
 One online / app based assessment to test speaking and writing skills
 Proficiency certification is given on successful completion of speaking and writing.

55
 CO-PO & PSO MAPPING
PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.8 3 3 1.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
 Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

MA3351 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C

3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of PDE for solving standard partial differential equations.
 To introduce Fourier series analysis which is central to many applications in engineering apart
from its use in solving boundary value problems.
 To acquaint the student with Fourier series techniques in solving heat flow problems used in
various situations.
 To acquaint the student with Fourier transform techniques used in wide variety of situations.
 To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations
that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for discrete
time systems.

UNIT - I : PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Formation of partial differential equations –Solutions of standard types of first order partial
differential equations - First order partial differential equations reducible to standard types-
Lagrange’s linear equation - Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with
constant coefficients of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous types.

UNIT - II : FOURIER SERIES 9+3

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series
and cosine series – Root mean square value – Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.

UNIT - III : APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Fourier series solutions of one
dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state
solution of two dimensional equation of heat conduction (Cartesian coordinates only).

UNIT - IV : FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9+3

Statement of Fourier integral theorem– Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and
cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem –
Parseval’s identity.

UNIT - V : Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9+3

Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Convergence of Z-transforms - – Initial and final value
theorems - Inverse Z-transform using partial fraction and convolution theorem - Formation of
difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z - transforms.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
56
  Understand how to solve the given standard partial differential equations.
 Solve differential equations using Fourier series analysis which plays a vital role in
engineering applications.
 Appreciate the physical significance of Fourier series techniques in solving one and two
dimensional heat flow problems and one dimensional wave equations.
 Understand the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations
would provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of
engineering.
 Use the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential equations by
using Z transform techniques for discrete time systems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics", 44thEdition, Khanna Publishers,
New Delhi, 2018.
2. Kreyszig E, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", 10th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi, India,
2016.

REFERENCES :
1. Andrews. L.C and Shivamoggi. B, "Integral Transforms for Engineers" SPIE Press, 1999.
2. Bali. N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt. Ltd, 2015.
3. James. G., "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 4thEdition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2016.
4. Narayanan. S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah.G "Advanced Mathematics for
Engineering Students", Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd, Chennai, 1998.
5. Ramana. B.V., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, 2018.
6. Wylie. R.C. and Barrett . L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 ‘04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 3 - - -

PE3351 PROCESS CALCULATIONS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 To teach concept of degree of freedom and its application to solution of mass and energy
balance equations for single and network of units and introduce to process simulators.
UNIT I 9
Base and derived Units - Composition of Mixture and solutions - calculations of pressure, volume
and temperature using ideal gas law. Use of partial pressure and pure component volume in gas
calculations, applications of real gas relationship in gas calculation.

UNIT II 9
Stoichiometric principles, Application of material balance to unit operations like distillation,
evaporation, crystallisation, drying etc., - Material balance with chemical reaction - Limiting and

57
excess reactants - recycle - bypass and purging - Unsteady state material balances.

UNIT III 9
Calculation of absolute humidity, molal humidity, relative humidity and percentage humidity - Use
of humidity in condensation and drying - Humidity chart, dew point.

UNITIV 9
Heat capacity of solids, liquids, gases and solutions, use of mean heat capacity in heat
calculations, problems involving sensible heat and latent heats, evaluation of enthalpy.Standard
heat of reaction, heats of formation, combustion, solution, mixing etc., calculation of standard heat
of reaction - Effect of pressure and temperature on heat of reaction -Energy balance for systems
with and without chemical reaction.

UNIT V 9
Determination of Composition by Orsat analysis of products of combustion of solid, liquid and gas
fuels - Calculation of excess air from orsat technique, problems on sulphur and sulphur burning
compounds - Application of Process simulators in energy and material balance problems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: (COs)
1. Understand the fundamentals of system of units, apply ideal gas law to solve problems in
pure components and mixtures.
2. Apply stoichiometric principles to solve problems and write material balance for different
process equipments.
3. Understand and apply basics of humidity to solve problems in humidification and other
processes.
4. Understand and apply the basics of energy balance concepts to solve to different chemical
processes.
5. Understand the basics of fuels and combustion, to solve problems on combustion of
various fuels and also to find excess air.
6. Apply the above knowledge in process flow sheeting calculations.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Himmelblau, D.M., “Basic Principles and Calculations in Chemical Engineering”, EEE Sixth
Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., 2003
2. Felder, R. M. and Rousseau, R. W., “Elementary Principles of Chemical Processes”,3rd
Edn., John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2000.
3. Bhatt, B.L., Vora, S.M., “Stoichiometry “, 4th Edition,Tata McGraw-Hill (2004)

REFERENCES:
1. Hougen O A, Watson K M and Ragatz R A, “Chemical process principles” Part I, CBS
publishers (1973).
2. Venkatramani. V, Anatharaman. N and Meera Shariffa Begam “ Process Calculations”
Printice Hall of India, New Delhi,
3. K.V.Narayanan, B.Lakshmipathy,”Stoichiometry and Process Calculation”, PHI Learning
Ltd.(2013).

58
Course Articulation Matrix

Course PROCESS CALCULATIONS

Statement
Outcomes
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand the fundamentals of
system of units, apply ideal gas
CO1
law to solve problems in pure 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
components and mixtures.
Apply stoichiometric principles to
solve problems and write material
CO2
balance for different process 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
equipments.
Understand and apply basics of
humidity to solve problems in
CO3
humidification and other 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
processes.
Understand and apply the basics
of energy balance concepts to
CO4
solve to different chemical 3 3 1 1 2 - - - - - - 1 3 1
processes
Understand the basics of fuels and
combustion, to solve problems on
CO5
combustion of various fuels and 3 3 1 1 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 1
also to find excess air.
Apply the above knowledge in
CO6
process flow sheeting calculations. 2 2 1 - 2 - 1 - - - - 1 3 3
Overall CO 3 3 2 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 3 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

59
PC3351 FLUID MECHANICS FOR PETROCHEMICAL TECHNOLOGISTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
To impart to the student knowledge on
 Fluid properties, fluid statics, dynamic characteristics for through pipes and porous
medium.
 Flow measurement and fluid machineries.

UNIT I PROPERTIES OF FLUIDS AND CONCEPT OF PRESSURE 9

Introduction – Physical properties of fluids – Types of fluids – Fluid statics and its applications -
Hydrostatic equilibrium – Pressure measurement - Rheological properties of fluids.

UNIT II MOMEMTUM BALANCE AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9

Basic equation of fluid flow –Mass balance in a flowing fluid; continuity- Differential momentum
balance; Equations of motion - macroscopic momentum balances -Bernoulli's equation –
Correction for fluid friction – Correction for pump work - Velocity potential - Reynolds experiment
and significance.

UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 9

The principle of dimensional homogeneity – dimensional analysis, Rayleigh method and the Pi
theorem - non-dimensional action of the basic equations - similitude – relationship between
dimensional analysis and similitude.

UNIT IV FLOW OF INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUIDS THROUGH DUCTS 9

Flow of incompressible fluids in pipes – Shear stress and skin friction in pipes -laminar flow in
pipes and channels –Velocity profile and friction factor for smooth and rough pipes – Loss due to
friction in pipes and Fittings – Fluidization – Mechanism – Types – General properties –
Applications. Flow past immersed bodies, Drag and Drag coefficient, Flow through beds of solids –
Ergun's Equation.

UNIT V TRANSPORTATION AND METERING 9

Measurement of fluid flow – Orifice meter – Venturimeter – Rotameter – Weirs and notches –
Transportation of fluids – Positive displacement pumps – Rotary and Reciprocating pumps –
Centrifugal pumps – Performance and characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the fundamental properties of fluids, stress-strain relationship in fluids, and its
characteristics under static conditions and establish force balance in static systems.
CO2: Apply Bernouli principle, Navier - Stokes equation and compute pressure variation in static
fluid.
CO3: Use of dimensional analysis to derive relationships among process or system variables.
Further they would develop dimensionless roups that help in scale-up studies.
CO4: Understand the different types of flow conditions in fixed bed and fluidized beds.
CO5: Describe function of flow metering devices, apply Bernoulli equation to determine the
performance of flow-metering devices and also analyze the performance aspects of fluid
machinery such as pumps.
CO6: Understand the impact of technology change and also develop responsibilities to the
professional engineering practices.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Noel de Nevers, “Fluid Mechanics for Chemical Engineers “, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill,
(1991).
2. Munson, B. R., Young, D.F., Okiishi, T.H. “Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics”, 5th Edition“,
John Wiley, 2006.
3. McCabe W.L, Smith, J C and Harriot. P “Unit operations in Chemical Engineering”, McGraw
Hill, VII Edition, 2005
60
REFERENCES:
1. White, F.M., “Fluid Mechanics “, IV Edition, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1999.
2. James O Wilkes and Stacy G Bike, “Fluid Mechanics for Chemical Engineers’ Prentice Hall
PTR (International series in Chemical Engineering) (1999)

61
Course Articulation Matrix

Course Program Outcome

Outcome Statement
s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand the fundamental
properties of fluids, stress-strain
relationship in fluids, and its
CO1 characteristics under static conditions
2 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 3 2
and establish force balance in static
systems.
Apply Bernouli principle, Navier -
CO2 Stokes equation and compute 2 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - - 3 2
pressure variation in static fluid.
Use of dimensional analysis to derive
relationships among process or
CO3 system variables. Further they would 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2 3 2
develop dimensionless groups that
help in scale-up studies
Understand the different types of flow
CO4 conditions in fixed bed and fluidized 2 - 3 3 2 - - - - - - 3 3 2
beds.
Describe function of flow metering
devices, apply Bernoulli equation to
determine the performance of flow-
CO5 metering devices and also analyze
2 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 2 3 2
the performance aspects of fluid
machinery such as pumps.
Understand the impact of technology
change and also develop
CO6 responsibilities to the professional
2 2 2 - 2 1 - 1 2 - - 2 3 2
engineering practices.
Overall CO 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 2
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

62
PC3353 PETROLEUM PRIMARY PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students to learn the primary refining operation of crude oil and testing of
petroleum products and its treatment techniques.

UNIT I CRUDE OIL COMPOSITION AND CLASSIFICATION 9

Theories behind the Origin of petroleum – Exploration and production of petroleum – Basics of
hydrocarbon chemistry - Composition of crude oil – Impurities present in crude oil - Crude oil
classification and its characteristics – Crude oil properties, Crude oil assay – Indigenous and imported
crudes – Crude availability Vs demands – Refining capacity of India.

UNIT II TESTING OF PETROLEUM PRODUCTS 9

IS 1448: Standard – Important commercial petroleum products: LPG, Gasoline, Kerosene, ATF,
Diesel, and Lube oil - Specifications, Important testing methods and their Significance.

UNIT III CRUDE PROCESSING 9

Pretreatment of crude oil – Dehydration and desalting – Types of fractionating column - Types of trays
- Flow pattern in the trays – Products separation using Atmospheric distillation - Vacuum distillation of
residue products – Reflux types and its significance.

UNIT IV LUBE DISTILLATE TREATMENT TECHNIQUES 9

Lubricating oil classification and its uses - Production of lubricating oils from vacuum distillates with
different treatment techniques: Solvent extraction, Deasphalting, Dewaxing, Catalytic dewaxing and
Hydrofining process – Industrial Grease - Manufacture of Calcium Grease.

UNIT V WAX AND BITUMEN PROCESSING TECHNIQUES 9

Paraffinic wax: Classification and its uses, Petroleum jelly manufacture - Bitumen: Types and their
properties – Bitumen Testing: Ductility, Penetration Index and Softening point - Asphalt manufacture:
Air blowing technology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1. Have knowledge on crude composition, types and their characteristics primary
refining operations.
CO2. Be able to analyse the suitability of test methods to check the quality of crude oil
and its products.
CO3. Have knowledge on the concept of separating crude products using fractionating
column
CO4. Have knowledge on the significance of units present in the lube complex.
CO5. Have knowledge on the classification, production and uses of wax and bitumen.
CO6. Be able to identify the role of additives added in the commercial products of
petroleum.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ram Prasad, “Petroleum Refining Technology”, Khanna Publishers.2008
2. Bhaskara Rao, B.K., “Modern Petroleum Refining Processes”, 6th edition, Oxford and IBH
Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd. 2018.

REFERENCES:
1. James H. Gary and Glenn E. Handwerk., “Petroleum Refining Technology and Economics”, 4th
Edition, Marcel Dekker Inc., 2001.
2. Nelson, W.L., “Petroleum Refinery Engineering”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 1985.
3. Hobson, G.D., “Modern Petroleum Refining Technology “, 5th Edition, John Wiley Publishers, 1984

63
 Course Articulation Matrix: PETROLEUM PRIMARY PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Acquire knowledge on crude composition, types,
CO1 characteristics and current trends 3 1 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3

Analyse the suitability of test methods to check

CO2 the quality of petroleum products 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2 2
3
Understand the concept of separating crude
CO3 3 2 2 1 - 2 1 - - - - 2 2 3
products using fractionating column
Understand the significance of units present in
CO4 3 3 2 3 1 2 1 - - - - 2 2 -
the lube complex and its operation
Understand the classification, production, testing
CO5 methods and uses of wax and bitumen 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 - - - - 2 2 3

Identify the role of additives used in the

CO6 commercial products of petroleum 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 - - - - 3 2 2

Overall CO 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 2 2
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

64
CH3491 HEAT TRANSFER L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
Teach the fundamental concepts of heat transfer viz., conduction, convection,
radiation, boiling and condensation and its application to the students

UNIT I 9
Importance of heat transfer in Chemical Engineering operations - Modes of heat transfer ; One
dimensional steady state heat conduction through plane and composite walls, hollow cylinder
and spheres - Thermal conductivity measurement-effect of temperature on thermal conductivity;
Heat transfer in extended surfaces; Transient heat conduction

UNIT II 11
Concepts of heat transfer by convection - Natural and forced convection, Hydrodynamic and
thermal Boundary layers; analogies between transfer of momentum and heat - Reynold’s
analogy, Prandtl and Colburn analogy. Dimensional analysis in heat transfer, heat transfer
coefficient for flow through a pipe, flow past flat plate.

UNIT III 9
Heat Exchangers – classification and design, overall and individual film coefficients, mean
temperature difference, LMTD correction factor for multiple pass exchanger, NTU and efficiency
of Heat exchangers

UNIT IV 8
Heat transfer to fluids with phase change - heat transfer from condensing vapours, drop wise
and film wise condensation, Nusselt equation for vertical and horizontal tubes, condensation of
superheated vapours, Heat transfer to boiling liquids - mechanism of boiling, nucleate boiling and
film boiling

UNIT V 8
Evaporation- single and multiple effect operation, material and Energy balance in evaporators,
boiling point elevation, Duhring’s rule. Radiation heat transfer - Black body radiation, Emissivity,
Stefan - Boltzman law, Plank’s law, radiation between surfaces.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Familiarize the students with the fundamental concepts of Heat Transfer. provide the
student with knowledge about heat transfer by conduction in solids for steady state.
CO2: Understand convective heat transfer and use of heat transfer coefficients for laminar
and turbulent flows
CO3: Students will be able to calculate and use overall heat transfer coefficients in designing
heat exchangers
CO4 : The course provides the student with knowledge about heat transfer with phase change
(boiling and condensation) and evaporation
CO5: Students will understand radiative heat transfer including blackbody radiation and
Kirchoff’slaw, and will be able to solve radiative problems apply knowledge of
heat transfer to solve thermal engineering problems

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Holman, J. P., ‘Heat Transfer ’, 10th Edn., McGraw Hill,2010.
2. Ozisik, M. N., Heat Transfer: A Basic Approach, McGraw-Hill, 1984
3. Kern, D.Q., “Process Heat Transfer “, McGraw-Hill, 1999.
4. B.K. Dutta, Heat transfer principles and applications, PHI Learning PVT Ltd, 2016

65
REFERENCES:
1. McCabe, W.L., Smith, J.C., and Harriot, P., “Unit Operations in Chemical
Engineering”,6th Edn., McGraw-Hill, 2001.
2. Coulson, J.M. and Richardson, J.F., “Chemical Engineering “ Vol. I, 4th Edn., Asian
Books Pvt. Ltd., India, 1998

66
 Course Articulation Matrix: HEAT TRANSFER

Course Program Outcome

Outcom Statements PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO PO1 PO11 PO1 PSO P
es 9 0 2 1 S
O
2
CO1 familiarize the students with the fundamental 3 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 2

concepts of Heat Transfer. provide the student

with knowledge about heat transfer by
conduction in solids for steady state.
CO2 understand convective heat transfer and use 2 2 3 3 2 1 - 1 1 1 1 - 1 2

of heat transfer coefficients for laminar and

turbulent flows
CO3 Students will be able to calculate and use 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1

overall heat transfer coefficients in designing

heat exchangers
CO4 The course provides the student with 2 2 3 2 3 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1

knowledge about heat transfer with phase

change (boiling and condensation) and
evaporation
CO5 Students will understand radiative heat 2 3 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - 1 1 2 2

transfer including blackbody radiation and

Kirchoff’slaw, and will be able to solve
radiative problems apply knowledge of
heat transfer to solve thermal engineering
problems
OVERALL CO 3 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

67
PC3352 MECHANICAL OPERATIONS L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge in the field of particle size reduction and also deals with the detail
construction and working of equipment’s used for mechanical operations.

UNIT I PARTICLE CHARACTERIZATION AND MEASUREMENT 9

General characteristics of solids, different techniques of size analysis- Static - Image analysis and
Dynamic analysis - Light scattering techniques, shape factor, surface area determination,
estimation of particle size. Advanced particle size analysis techniques. Screening methods and
equipment, screen efficiency, ideal and actual screens.

UNIT II PARTICLE SIZE REDUCTION AND SIZE ENLARGEMENT 9

Laws of size reduction, energy relationships in size reduction, methods of size reduction,
classification of equipments, crushers, grinders, disintegrators for coarse, intermediate and fine
grinding, power requirement, work index; Advanced size reduction techniques - Nano particle
fabrication - Top down approach - Bottom-up approach. Size enlargement - Importance of size
enlargement, principle of granulation, briquetting, palletization, and flocculation. Fundamentals of
particle generation.

UNIT III PARTICLE SEPARATION (GAS-SOLID AND LIQUID-SOLID SYSTEM) 9

Gravity settling, sedimentation, thickening, elutriation, double cone classifier, rake classifier, bowl
classifier. Centrifugal separation - continuous centrifuges, super centrifuges, design of basket
centrifuges; industrial dust removing equipment, cyclones and hydro cyclones, electrostatic and
magnetic separators, heavy media separations, floatation, jigging

UNIT IV FILTRATION AND FILTRATION EQUIPMENTS 9

Theory of filtration, Batch and continuous filters, Flow through filter cake and filter media,
compressible and incompressible filter cakes, filtration equipments - selection, operation and
design of filters and optimum cycle of operation, filter aids.

UNIT V MIXING AND PARTICLE HANDLING 9

Mixing and agitation - Mixing of liquids (with or without solids), mixing of powders, selection of
suitable mixers, power requirement for mixing. Storage and Conveying of solids - Bunkers, silos,
bins and hoppers, transportation of solids in bulk, Powder hazards, conveyer selection, different
types of conveyers and their performance characteristics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to
1. Determine and Estimate various properties of particulates, particle size using advanced
analysis techniques
2. Understand the overview of equipment design used for size reduction, and understand the
importance of size enlargement.
3. Examine and identify various separation and purification equipment for solid-solid, solid-
liquid and solid-gas system.
4. Categorize various filters and problems associated during the implementation and
applications of filtration equipments
5. Analyze and understand the working of various types of impellers, mixers, Handling,
Storage and Transportation of Solids.
6. Know the future challenges and obtain knowledge on various unit operations and their
applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. McCabe, W.L., Smith, J.C., and Harriot, P., “Unit Operations in Chemical Engineering”, 7th
Edn., McGraw-Hill, 2005.

68
 2. Badger W.L. and Banchero J.T., “Introduction to Chemical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill,
1997.
3. Foust, A. S., Wenzel, L.A., Clump, C.W., Naus, L., and Anderson, L.B., “Principles of Unit
Operations”, 2nd Edn., John Wiley & Sons, 1994.
4. Hiroaki Masuda , KoHigashitani and Hideto Yoshida, Powder Technology Handbook, 3rd
Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Coulson, J.M. and Richardson, J.F., “Chemical Engineering” Vol. II, 4th Edn., Asian Books
Pvt. Ltd., India, 1998.
2. Christie J. Geankoplis, Transport processes and unit operations.
3. Sunggyu Lee, Kimberly H. Henthorn, Particle Technology and Applications.
4. Martin Rhodes, Introduction to Particle Technology, Second Edition.

69
Course Articulation Matrix

Course Program Outcome

Outcome Statement
s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Determine and Estimate various
CO1 properties of particulates, particle size 1 - - 1 - - - - - 3 1 3 3 2
using advanced analysis techniques
Understand the overview of equipment
design used for size reduction, and
CO2 1 2 3 1 2 - - - 2 3 2 3 2 2
understand the importance of size
enlargement.
Examine and identify various separation
CO3 and purification equipment for solid- 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 3 2 3
solid, solid-liquid and solid-gas system.
Categorize various filters and problems
CO4 associated during the implementation 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 3 2 2
and applications of filtration equipments
Analyze and understand the working of
various types of impellers, mixers,
CO5 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 3 2 3
Handling, Storage and Transportation of
Solids.
Know the future challenges and Obtain
CO6 knowledge on various unit operations 1 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 3 - 3 3 2
and their applications
Overall CO 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 3 2 3 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

70
PE3481 HEAT TRANSFER LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to develop a sound working knowledge on different types of heat
transfer equipments.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Heat Transfer in a Double Pipe Heat Exchanger
2. Heat transfer in Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger
3. Heat Transfer in a Bare and Finned Tube Heat Exchanger
4. Heat transfer in composite wall
5. Heat transfer by Forced / Natural Convection
6. Heat Transfer by Radiation - Determination of Stefan Boltzmann constant
7. Heat Transfer by Radiation - Emissivity measurement
8. Heat transfer in Open Pan Evaporator
9. Heat transfer by Single effect evaporation / Multiple effect evaporation
10. Boiling Heat Transfer
11. Heat Transfer through Packed Bed
12. Heat Transfer in a Horizontal Condenser / Vertical Condenser
13. Heat Transfer in Helical Coils
14. Heat Transfer in Agitated Vessels
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
Minimum 10 experiments to be offered

OUTCOME:
CO1 : Understand the concepts of heat transfer equipments.
CO2 : Estimate the heat transfer rate and heat transfer co-efficient for heat exchangers.
CO3 : Perform and compare heat transfer operations.
CO4 : Evaluate the parameters in heat transfer equipments.
CO5 : Analyze the heat transfer data from experiments.
CO6 : Solve engineering problems effectively as an individual as well as team work.

71
Course Articulation Matrix: HEAT TRANSFER LABORATORY

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO11 PO12 PSO PSO
PO1 PO2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
Understand the
CO1 concepts of heat 3 3 - 1 - - - - 2 1 2 1 3 2 3
transfer equipments
Estimate the heat
CO2 transfer rate and heat
3 3 - 1 - - - - 2 1 2 2 3 2 3
transfer co-efficient for
heat exchangers
Perform and compare
CO3 heat transfer 3 3 - 1 - - - - 2 1 2 2 3 2 3
operations.
Evaluate the
CO4 parameters in heat 3 3 - 1 - - - - 2 1 2 2 3 2 3
transfer equipments
Analyze the heat
CO5 transfer data from 3 3 - 2 - - - - 2 1 2 2 3 2 3
experiments.
Solve engineering
CO6 problems effectively
3 3 - 2 - - - - 2 1 2 3 3 2 3
as an individual as
well as team work
Overall CO 3 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 2 2 3 2 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

72
PE3361 FLUID MECHANICS AND SOLID OPERATIONS LABORATORY LT PC
0 0 42
OBJECTIVES:
• To learn experimentally to calibrate flow meters, find pressure loss for fluid flows and
determine pump characteristics.
• Students develop a sound working knowledge on different types of crushing equipments
and separation characteristics of different mechanical operation separators.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS - Phase – I (minimum 5 Experiments to be conducted)

1. Calibration of constant and variable head meters
2. Open drum orifice and draining time
3. Flow through straight pipe
4. Flow through annular pipe
5. Flow through helical coil and spiral coil
6. Characteristic curves of pumps
7. Pressure drop studies in packed column

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS - Phase- II (minimum 5 Experiments to be conducted)

1. Sieve analysis
2. Batch filtration studies using a Leaf filter
3. Batch filtration studies using a Plate and Frame Filter press
4. Characteristics of batch Sedimentation
5. Reduction ratio in Jaw Crusher
6. Reduction ratio in Ball mill
7. Separation characteristics of Cyclone separator
8. Reduction ratio of Roll Crusher
9. Drop weight crusher
10. Drag on Sphere
11. Effectiveness of screen
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Correlate the difference between fixed and fluidized bed columns and its application.
CO2: Select pumps for the transportation of fluids based on process
conditions/requirements and fluid properties
CO3: Compare the results of theoretical analytical models to the actual behavior of real
fluid flows and draw sustainable conclusions
CO4: Determine the size analysis in solid- solid separation systems
CO5: Evaluate the size reduction and various crushing parameters
CO6: Work effectively as a team with commitment to the professional ethics among the
peer group involved.

73
Course Articulation Matrix

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcome PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
s
Correlate the difference between
CO1 fixed and fluidized bed columns 3 3 3 1 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3
and its application
Select pumps for the
transportation of fluids based on
CO2 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3
process conditions/requirements
and fluid properties
Compare the results of theoretical
analytical models to the actual
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2 3 3
behavior of real fluid flows and
draw sustainable conclusions
Determine the size analysis in
CO4 2 3 1 3 2 - - - - - - 3 3 3
solid- solid separation systems
Evaluate the size reduction and
CO5 2 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - - 3 3
various crushing parameters
Work effectively as a team with
commitment to the professional
CO6 - 2 1 1 2 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3
ethics among the peer group
involved.
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

74
GE3361 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT LTPC
0 021
OBJECTIVES:
To be proficient in important Microsoft Office tools: MS WORD, EXCEL, POWERPOINT.
 To be proficient in using MS WORD to create quality technical documents, by using
standard templates, widely acceptable styles and formats, variety of features to enhance
the presentability and overall utility value of content.
 To be proficient in using MS EXCEL for all data manipulation tasks including the common
statistical, logical, mathematical etc., operations, conversion, analytics, search and explore,
visualize,interlink, and utilizing many more critical features offered
 To be able to create and share quality presentations by using the features of MS
PowerPoint, including: organization of content, presentability, aesthetics, using media
elements and enhance the overall quality of presentations.

MS WORD: 10 Hours
Create and format a document
Working with tables
Working with Bullets and Lists
Working with styles, shapes, smart art, charts
Inserting objects, charts and importing objects from other office tools
Creating and Using document templates
Inserting equations, symbols and special characters
Working with Table of contents and References, citations
Insert and review comments
Create bookmarks, hyperlinks, endnotes footnote
Viewing document in different modes
Working with document protection and security
Inspect document for accessibility

MS EXCEL: 10 Hours
Create worksheets, insert and format data
Work with different types of data: text, currency, date, numeric etc.
Split, validate, consolidate, Convert data
Sort and filter data
Perform calculations and use functions: (Statistical, Logical, Mathematical, date, Time etc.,)
Work with Lookup and reference formulae
Create and Work with different types of charts
Use pivot tables to summarize and analyse data
Perform data analysis using own formulae and functions
Combine data from multiple worksheets using own formulae and built-in functions to generate
results
Export data and sheets to other file formats
Working with macros
Protecting data and Securing the workbook

MS POWERPOINT: 10 Hours
Select slide templates, layout and themes
Formatting slide content and using bullets and numbering
Insert and format images, smart art, tables, charts
Using Slide master, notes and handout master
Working with animation and transitions
Organize and Group slides
Import or create and use media objects: audio, video, animation
Perform slideshow recording and Record narration and create presentable videos
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

75
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion the students will be able to
 Use MS Word to create quality documents, by structuring and organizing content
for their day to day technical and academic requirements
 Use MS EXCEL to perform data operations and analytics, record, retrieve data as
per requirements and visualize data for ease of understanding
 Use MS PowerPoint to create high quality academic presentations by including
common tables, charts, graphs, interlinking other elements, and using media
objects.

PE3451 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS LT PC

30 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn PVT behaviour of fluids, laws of thermodynamics,
thermodynamic property relations and their application to fluid flow, power generation and
refrigeration processes.

UNIT I PVT RELATIONS AND FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9

Scope of thermodynamics, basic concepts and definitions, Equilibrium state and phase rule,
Energy, Work, Temperature and Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics, reversible and irreversible
process, Ideal gas- Equation of State involving ideal and real gas, Law of corresponding states,
Compressibility chart, First Law of Thermodynamics and its consequences.

UNIT II SECOND LAW AND THERMODYNAMIC CORRELATIONS 9

Application of first Law of Thermodynamics for Flow and non-flow processes. Limitations of the
first Law, statements of second Law of Thermodynamics, Thermodynamic Temperature scale,
Entropy, Third law of thermodynamics. Thermodynamic Potentials, thermodynamic correlation,
Maxwell relations. Clapeyron equation.

UNIT III SOLUTION THERMODYNAMICS 9

Partial molar properties, ideal and non-ideal solutions, standard states definition and choice,
Gibbs-Duhem equation, activity and property change of mixing, excess properties of mixtures.
Activity coefficient-composition models.

UNIT IV PHASE EQUILIBRIA 9

Phase equilibrium in ideal solution, excess Gibbs free energy models, Henry’s law, fugacity,
Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium at low, moderate and high pressures; bubble and dew point calculation,
thermodynamic consistency test of VLE data, Phase diagrams for homogeneous systems and for
systems with a miscibility gap, effect of temperature and pressure on azeotrope composition,
liquid-liquid equilibrium.

UNIT V REACTION EQUILIBRIA 9

Chemical Reaction Equilibrium of single and multiple reactions, Standard Gibbs free change,
equilibrium constant-effect of temperature; homogeneous gas and liquid phase reactions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students would be able to
 Understand PVT relations and first law of thermodynamics
 Apply second law and analyse the feasibility of system/devices
 Understand the systematic development of new class of properties to describe real
mixtures
 Develop the idea of chemical potential to derive the idea of phase equilibria
 Understand the principle of chemical reaction thermodynamics for the prediction of
equilibrium conversion.
76
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sonntag, Borgnakke, Van Wylen, Fundamentals of Thermodynamics, 7th Edition, Wiley
India, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Narayanan, K.V. A Textbook of Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics Prentice Hall
India, 2004
3. Smith, van Ness and Abbott, “Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics”, 7th Edition,
McGraw Hill, New York, 2005

REFERENCES:
1. S. I. Sandler, Chemical, Biochemical and Engineering Thermodynamics, Wiley New York,
2006
2. Y V C Rao, “Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics”, Universities Press, Hyderabad
2005.
3. Pradeep Ahuja,” Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics”, PHI Learning Ltd (2009).
4. Gopinath Halder,” Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics”, PHI Learning
Ltd (2009).

77
 Course Articulation Matrix

Course Statement CHEMICAL ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS

Outcome PO PO PO PO PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
s 1 2 3 4
CO1 Understand PVT relations and first law
of thermodynamics 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1

CO2 Apply second law and analyse the

3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
feasibility of system/devices
CO3 Understand the systematic development
of new class of properties to describe 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
real mixtures
CO4 Develop the idea of chemical potential to
derive the idea of phase equilibria 3 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
CO5 Understand the principle of chemical
reaction thermodynamics for the 3 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 1
prediction of equilibrium conversion.
Overall CO 3 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

78
PC3451 PETROLEUM SECONDARY PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 Students will learn the process involving to convert one form of hydrocarbon into another
form of hydrocarbon to meet the customer requirement using cracking, reforming,
alklylation, isomerization and polymerization unit processes.

UNIT I VISBREAKING, THERMAL CRACKING AND COKING 9

Need and significance of Secondary Processing - Types and functions of Secondary Processing –
Visbreaking: Principle - Process flow schemes - Coil type, Soaker drum Processes, operating
parameters and advantages – Factors influencing visbreaking process.
Thermal Cracking: Process flow schemes, Reaction chemistry and free radical mechanisms,
Factors influencing thermal cracking process.
Coking : Principle – Types – Advantages - Process flow schemes - Delayed Coking, Fluid Coking
and Flexi-Coking processes - Factors influencing coking process

UNIT II CATALYTIC CRAKING AND HYDRO CRACKING 9

Catalytic Cracking: Principle - Advantages - Process flow schemes - Batch process and
Continuous process - Fixed bed, Moving bed and Fludized bed catalytic cracking process,
Reaction chemistry and carbonium ion mechanisms, Factors influencing catalytic cracking
process. Commercial Catalyst.
Hydro Cracking: Principle - Advantages - Process flow schemes - Reaction chemistry - Factors
influencing hydro cracking process - Commercial Catalyst

UNIT III CATALYTIC REFORMING AND POLYMERIZATION 9

Reforming: Principle - Advantages - Process flow schemes - Batch process and Continuous
process - Reaction chemistry – Favourable and unfavourable reactions - Factors influencing
reforming process - Commercial Catalyst Other commercial reforming process like Platforming,
Houdri Forming, Rhein Forming, Power Forming, Selecto Forming. Ultra Forming and Rex
Forming Polymerization: Principle - Advantages - Process flow schemes - Reaction chemistry and
mechanisms, Factors influencing polymerization process - Commercial Catalyst.

UNIT IV ALKYLATION AND ISOMERIZATION 9

Alkylation Process: Principle - Advantages - Process flow schemes - Sulphuric Acid Alkylation,
Hydrofluoric Acid Alkylation - Reaction chemistry, Factors influencing alkylation process - catalyst
selection.
Isomerization Process: Principle - Advantages - Process flow schemes - Platinum Catalyst and
Aluminium Chloride Process - Reaction chemistry, Factors influencing alkylation process - catalyst
selection.

UNIT V FINAL TREATMENT TECHNIQUES 9

Acid gas and Sulphur Removal Techniques: Hydro Desulphurization Processes, Merox process,
Metal Oxide process-Iron sponge process, Zinc Oxide process – Chem sweet process, Sulfa
Check process, Amine process / Girbotol process and Molecular sieve process. Sulphur recovery
using claus process.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
On completion of the course, the students would be able to
CO1. Understand the need of different secondary process and demonstrate appropriate
technologies available to meet the specified needs of the petroleum products.
CO2. Select appropriate technologies to meet the specified needs of lighter petroleum
products from heavier feed
CO3. Select appropriate technologies and different flow sheet to get aromatic and olefin
compounds from paraffinic feed and getting heavier products from lighter feed

79
CO4. Understand different flow sheets, and appropriate technologies to maximize gasoline
yield and quality.
CO5. Select appropriate technologies to get cleaner products and demonstrate knowledge
on various application of specialty products obtained from crude oil
CO6. Optimization of product blending for quality and quantity improvement.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jones, D.S.J. and Pujadó, P.R., Handbook of petroleum processing, Springer, The
Netherlands, 2006
2. Nelson, W. L “Petroleum Refinery Engineering”, McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited,1985.
3. Watkins, R. N “Petroleum Refinery Distillations”, 2nd Edition, Gulf Publishing Company, Texas,
1981.

REFERENCES:
1. Parkash, S., Refining processes handbook, Gulf Professional Publishing, 2003
2. Hobson, G. D “Modern Petroleum Refining Technology”, 4th Edition, Institute of Petroleum, U.
K. 1973.

80
 Course Articulation Matrix: PETROLEUM SECONDARY PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Understand the need of different secondary process
and demonstrate appropriate technologies available
CO1 2 3 1 2 1 - 2 - - - - - 2 3
to meet the specified needs of the petroleum
products
Select appropriate technologies and different flow
CO2 sheet to get the specified needs of lighter petroleum 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2
3
products using thermal catalytic and hydro cracking
Select appropriate technologies and different flow
CO3 sheet to get aromatic and olefin compound using 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - 2 2 3
reforming process
Understand different flow sheets, and appropriate
CO4 technologies to maximize gasoline yield and quality 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - 3 2 2
by Alkylation and Isomerization.
Select appropriate technologies to get cleaner
CO5 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - 2 2 3
products of petroleum and natural gas
Acquiring knowledge on commercial catalyst used
CO6 cracking, reforming, alkylation, isomerization & 2 2 2 - 2 1 2 - - - - 3 2 2
polymerization and its recent advancements
Overall CO 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 0 0 0 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

81
CH3451 MASS TRANSFER I L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
 Learn and determine mass transfer rates under laminar and turbulent conditions and apply
these concepts in the design of humidification columns, dryers and crystallisers.

UNIT I MOLECULAR DIFFUSION 9

Introduction to mass transfer operations. Molecular diffusion in gases, liquids and solids. Diffusivity
measurement and prediction; multi-component diffusion.

UNIT II CONVECTIVE TRANSFER AND INTERPHASE MASS TRANSFER 9

Eddy diffusion, concept of mass transfer coefficients, theories of mass transfer, different transport
analogies, application of correlations for mass transfer coefficients, inter phase mass transfer,
relationship between individual and overall mass transfer coefficients. NTU and NTP
concepts, Stage-wise and differential contractors.

UNIT III HUMIDIFICATION OPERATIONS 9

Humidification – Equilibrium, humidity chart, adiabatic and wet bulb temperatures; humidification
operations; theory and design of cooling towers, dehumidifiers and humidifiers using enthalpy
transfer unit concept.

UNIT IV DRYING 9
Drying – Equilibrium. Classification of dryers, batch drying – Mechanism and time of cross through
circulation drying, theoretical estimation of drying rate and time. Continuous dryers – material and
energy balance. Advance drying techniques such as freeze drying, microwave drying

UNIT V CRYSTALLIZATION 9
Crystal geometry. Equilibrium, yield and purity of products, theory of super saturation, nucleation
and crystal growth, classification of crystallizers, design of batch crystallizers and continuous
crystallizers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand the fundamentals, types and mechanism of mass transfer operations
CO2: Understand the theories of mass transfer and the concept of inter-phase mass transfer
CO3: Understand the basics of humidification process and its application
CO4: Understand the concept and mechanism of drying operations
CO5: Understand the concept of crystallization process and identification of suitable crystallizer
and Formulate and solve material balances for unit operations such as humidification,
drying and crystallization operations.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Treybal, R. E., “Mass Transfer Operations”, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill,2017.
2. Geankoplis, C.J., “Transport Processes and Unit Operations”, 4th Edition, Prentice
Hall Inc., NewJersey, 2003.
3. Narayanan K.V. and Lakshmikutty, B “Mass Transfer – Theory and Applications”, 1st
Edition, CBS Publishers & Distributors Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2014.

REFERENCES:
1. McCabe, W.L., Smith, J.C., and Harriot, P., “Unit Operations in Chemical Engineering”, 7th
Edition., McGraw-Hill, 2005.
2. Coulson, J.M. and Richardson, J.F., “Chemical Engineering” Vol. I and II, 5th Edition, Asian
Books Pvt. Ltd., India, 2002.
3. Seader J.D. and Henley E.J., “Separation Process Principles”, 4th Ed., John Wiley, 2016

82
 Course Articulation Matrix: MASS TRANSFER I

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Understand the fundamentals, types and mechanism
CO1 3 2 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 3
of mass transfer operations
Understand the theories of mass transfer and the
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 3
concept of inter-phase mass transfer
Understand the basics of humidification process and
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 3
its application
Understand the concept and mechanism of drying
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 3
operations
Understand the concept of crystallization process and
identification of suitable crystallizer and Formulate
CO5 and solve material balances for unit operations such 3 2 3 3 1 - - - - - 1 1 3 3
as humidification, drying and crystallization
operations.
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

83
PC3401 INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 The course is aimed to Impart knowledge on
 unit process and unit operations in chemical industry.
 Manufacturing process flow drawing for the manufacturing chemical processes, its
applications and major engineering problems encountered in the process

UNIT I CHLORO- ALKALI INDUSTRIES 9

Introduction to chemical processing; symbolic representation of different unit operations and unit
processes to build a flow sheet ; Chlor - alkali Industries: Manufacture of Soda ash, Manufacture of
caustic soda and chlorine - common salt.

UNIT II ACIDS 9
Sulphur and Sulphuric acid: Mining of sulphur and manufacture of sulphuric acid, Manufacture of
hydrochloric acid. Phosphate rock, phosphoric acid.

UNIT III PULP, PAPER, SUGAR AND STARCH INDUSTRIES 9

Pulp – Methods of production – Comparison of pulping processes. Paper – types of paper
products, Raw materials, Methods of production. Sugar – Methods of production – by products of
the Sugar industry – Starch – Methods of production, Starch derivations.

UNIT IV CEMENT AND INDUSTRIAL GASES 9

Cement – properties of Cement – Methods of production – Fuel Gases – Producer gas, Water gas,
Coke oven gas, Natural gas, Liquefied natural gas – Industrial gases – Carbon dioxide, hydrogen,
nitrogen and oxygen.

UNIT V FERTILIZER INDUSTRY 9

Fertilizers: Nitrogen Fertilizers; Synthetic ammonia, nitric acid, Urea, Phosphorous Fertilizers:
super phosphate and Triple Super phosphate
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand various unit operations and processes with their symbols.
CO2: Understand various chemical reactions involved in the process
CO3: Understand manufacturing process involved
CO4: Know to draw the process flow sheet and understand the major engineering problems
encountered in the processes
CO5: Learn manufacturing processes of organic and inorganic chemicals and its applications.
CO6: Understand the role of chemical engineering in the production

TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Gopal Rao, Marshall Sittig Dryden's Outlines of Chemical technology, III Ed., Affiliate East
West press, 2018.
2. Austin G.T., “Shreve's Chemical Process Industries”, 5th Edition, McGraw-Hill International
Book Company, Singapore, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Moulin, J.A., M. Makkee, and Diepen, A.V., Chemical Process Technology, Wiley, 2001.
2. Srikumar Koyikkal,”Chemical Process Technology and Simulation”,PHI Learning Ltd
(2013).
3. Mark W.V. and Bhatia S.C., “Chemical Process Industries”, Volume-I and II, 2nd Edition,
CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2007.

84
 Course Articulation Matrix: INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY

Course Statement Program Outcome

Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand various unit operations
CO1 1 3 2 - 2 - 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
and processes with their symbols
Understand various chemical
CO2 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
reactions involved in the process
Understand manufacturing
CO3 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
process involved
Know to draw the process flow
sheet and understand the major
CO4 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
engineering problems
encountered in the processes
Learn manufacturing processes of
CO5 organic and inorganic chemicals 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
and its applications
Understand the role of chemical
CO6 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 - 1 - 1 - 3 2
engineering in the production
Overall CO 2 3 1 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 3 2
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

85
CPE331 CHEMICAL REACTION ENGINEERING LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to gain knowledge on different types of chemical reactors, the
design of chemical reactors under isothermal and non-isothermal conditions

UNIT I KINETICS OF HOMOGENEOUS REACTIONS 9

Rate equation, elementary, non-elementary reactions, theories of reaction rate - Arrhenius theory,
interpretation of kinetic data, integral and differential analysis.

UNIT II IDEAL REACTORS 9

Design equation for constant and variable volume batch reactors, Design of continuous reactors -
stirred tank and tubular flow reactor, recycle reactors, combination of reactors-Equal sized CSTRs
in series and parallel - Equal sized PFRs in series and parallel, size comparison of reactors.

UNIT III MULTIPLE REACTIONS 9

Design of reactors for multiple reactions – Series, parallel Reactions - factors affecting choice,
optimum yield and conversion, selectivity, reactivity.

UNIT IV NON-ISOTHERMAL REACTORS 9

Heats of reaction and equilibrium conversion from thermodynamics, Non-isothermal homogeneous
reactor systems, adiabatic reactors, Material and energy balances in batch reactors, Material and
energy balances in plug flow and mixed flow reactors.

UNIT V NON-IDEAL REACTORS 9

Residence time distribution as a factor of performance; residence time functions and relationship
between them in reactors; basic models for non-ideal flow-single parameter model, conversion in
non-ideal reactors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students would be able to
1. Apply the principles of reaction kinetics, formulate rate equations and analyze the batch
reactor data.
2. Analyze the experimental kinetic data to select a suitable reactor for a particular application
and to workout conversion and space time for different types of reactors.
3. Evaluate selectivity, reactivity and yield for parallel and mixed reactions.
4. Design isothermal and non-isothermal reactors for homogeneous reactions.
5. Examine how far real reactors deviate from the ideal reactors.
6. Solve the complex reaction engineering problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Levenspiel O, “Chemical Reaction Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., III Edition, 2000.
2. Smith, J.M, “Chemical Engineering Kinetics”, McGraw Hill, III Edition, 1981.
3. Fogler.H.S., “Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., III
Edition, 2000.

REFERENCE:
1. Froment. G.F. & K.B.Bischoff, “Chemical Reactor Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and Sons,
III Edition, 2010.
2. Mark E. Davis and Robert J.Davis, Fundamentals of Chemical Reaction Engineering,
Mc. GrawHill, 2003.
3. Charles G. Hill, Jr., An Introduction to Chemical Engineering Kinetics & Reactor
Design, John Wiley& Sons, 1977.

86
 Course Articulation Matrix: CHEMICAL REACTION ENGINEERING

Course Program Outcomes

Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Apply the principles of
reaction kinetics, formulate
CO1 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 3 2
rate equations and analyze
the batch reactor data.
Analyze the experimental
CO2 kinetic data to select a 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 3
suitable reactor.
Evaluate selectivity,
CO3 reactivity and yield for 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2
multiple reactions.
Design isothermal and non-
CO4 isothermal reactors for 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2
homogeneous reactions.
Examine how far real
CO5 reactors deviate from the 2 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 2
ideal reactors.
Solve the complex reaction
CO6 2 2 1 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3
engineering problems.
Overall CO 3 3 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

87
GE3451 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND SUSTAINABILITY L T P C
2 0 0 2
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity and
emphasize on the biodiversity of India and its conservation.
 To impart knowledge on the causes, effects and control or prevention measures of
environmental pollution and natural disasters.
 To facilitate the understanding of global and Indian scenario of renewable and
nonrenewable resources, causes of their degradation and measures to preserve them.
 To familiarize the concept of sustainable development goals and appreciate the
interdependence of economic and social aspects of sustainability, recognize and analyze
climate changes, concept of carbon credit and the challenges of environmental
management.
 To inculcate and embrace sustainability practices and develop a broader understanding on
green materials, energy cycles and analyze the role of sustainable urbanization.

UNIT - I ENVIRONMENT AND BIODIVERSITY 6

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness. Eco-system and
Energy flow– ecological succession. Types of biodiversity: genetic, species and ecosystem
diversity– values of biodiversity, India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity –
threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and
endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ.

UNIT – II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 6

Causes, Effects and Preventive measures of Water, Soil, Air and Noise Pollutions.
Solid, Hazardous and E-Waste management. Case studies on Occupational Health and Safety
Management system (OHASMS). Environmental protection, Environmental protection acts .

UNIT – III RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY . 6

Energy management and conservation, New Energy Sources: Need of new sources. Different
types new energy sources. Applications of- Hydrogen energy, Ocean energy resources, Tidal
energy conversion. Concept, origin and power plants of geothermal energy.

UNIT - IV SUSTAINABILITY AND MANAGEMENT 6

Development , GDP ,Sustainability- concept, needs and challenges-economic, social and aspects
of sustainability-from unsustainability to sustainability-millennium development goals, and
protocols-Sustainable Development Goals-targets, indicators and intervention areas Climate
change- Global, Regional and local environmental issues and possible solutions-case studies.
Concept of Carbon Credit, Carbon Footprint. Environmental management in industry-A case study.

UNIT - V SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 6

Zero waste and R concept, Circular economy, ISO 14000 Series, Material Life cycle assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment. Sustainable habitat: Green buildings, Green materials, Energy
efficiency, Sustainable transports. Sustainable energy: Non-conventional Sources, Energy
Cycles-carbon cycle, emission and sequestration, Green Engineering: Sustainable urbanization-
Socio-economical and technological change.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 To recognize and understand the functions of environment, ecosystems and biodiversity
and their conservation.
 To identify the causes, effects of environmental pollution and natural disasters and
contribute to the preventive measures in the society.
 To identify and apply the understanding of renewable and non-renewable resources and
contribute to the sustainable measures to preserve them for future generations.

88
  To recognize the different goals of sustainable development and apply them for suitable
technological advancement and societal development.
 To demonstrate the knowledge of sustainability practices and identify green materials,
energy cycles and the role of sustainable urbanization.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anubha Kaushik and C. P. Kaushik’s “Perspectives in Environmental Studies”, 6th Edition,
New Age International Publishers ,2018.
2. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2016.
3. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,
Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case
Studies, Prentice Hall.
5. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and
development, Cengage learning.
6. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006.
7. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication,
London, 1998.

REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. R.K. Trivedi, ‘Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules, Guidelines, Compliances and
Standards’, Vol. I and II, Enviro Media. 38 .
2. Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, ‘Environmental Encyclopedia’, Jaico Publ.,
House, Mumbai, 2001.
3. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India PVT. LTD, New Delhi,
2007.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press,
2005.
5. Erach Bharucha “Textbook of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses” Orient
Blackswan Pvt. Ltd. 2013.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 - - - 2 3 - - - - 2 - - -
2 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 2 - - -
3 3 - 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
4 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - -
5 3 2 1 - - 2 2 - - - - 1 - - -
Avg. 2.8 1.8 1 1 - 2.2 2.4 - - - - 1.8 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

89
 NCC Credit Course Level 2*
NX3451 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LT P C
3 0 0 3

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Change your mindset, Time Management, Social Skills 6
PD 5 Public Speaking 3

LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty,
Ratan Tata, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7

DISASTER MANAGEMENT 13
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services,
Assistance, Civil Defence Organisation 3
DM 2 Initiative Training, Organising Skills, Do's & Don’t's,
Natural Disasters, Man Made Disasters 9
DM 3 Fire Service & Fire Fighting 1

ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS & CONSERVATION 3

EA 1 Environmental Awareness and Conservation 3

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GA 1 General Knowledge 4

ARMED FORCES 6
AF 1 Armed Forces, Army, CAPF, Police 6

ADVENTURE 1
AD 1 Introduction to Adventure Activities 1
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 2
BCA 1 History, Geography & Topography of Border/Coastal areas 2

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 2*

NX3452 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LTPC
3 003
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Change your mindset, Time Management, Social Skills 6
PD 5 Public Speaking 3

LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty,
Ratan Tata, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7

DISASTER MANAGEMENT 13
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services,
Assistance, Civil Defence Organisation 3
DM 2 Initiative Training, Organising Skills, Do's & Don’t's,
Natural Disasters, Man Made Disasters 9
90
DM 3 Fire Service & Fire Fighting 1

ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS & CONSERVATION 3

EA 1 Environmental Awareness and Conservation 3

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GA 1 General Knowledge 4

NAVAL ORIENTATION 6
AF 1 Armed Forces and Navy Capsule 3
EEZ 1 EEZ Maritime Security and ICG 3

ADVENTURE 1
AD 1 Introduction to Adventure Activities 1

BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 2

BCA 1 History, Geography & Topography of Border/Coastal areas 2

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 2*

NX3453 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - II LT P C
3 00 3

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Change your mindset, Time Management, Social Skills 6
PD 5 Public Speaking 3

LEADERSHIP 7
L2 Case Studies: APJ Abdul Kalam, Deepa Malik, Maharana Pratap, N Narayan Murty,
Ratan Tata, Rabindra Nath Tagore, Role of NCC cadets in 1965 7

DISASTER MANAGEMENT 13
DM 1 Disaster Management Capsule: Organisation, Types of Disasters, Essential Services,
Assistance, Civil Defence Organisation 3
DM 2 Initiative Training, Organising Skills, Do's & Don’t's,
Natural Disasters, Man Made Disasters 9
DM 3 Fire Service & Fire Fighting 1

ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS & CONSERVATION 3

EA 1 Environmental Awareness and Conservation 3

GENERAL AWARENESS 4
GA 1 General Knowledge 4

GENERAL SERVICE KNOWLEDGE 6

GSK 1 Armed Forces & IAF Capsule 2
GSK 2 Modes of Entry in IAF, Civil Aviation 2
GSK 3 Aircrafts - Types, Capabilities & Role 2

91
ADVENTURE 1
AD 1 Introduction to Adventure Activities 1

BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 2

BCA 1 History, Geography & Topography of Border/Coastal areas 2

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

PC3461 PETROCHEMICAL AND POLYMER ANALYSIS LABORATORY LTPC

0 042
OBJECTIVE:
 To learn basic principles involved in analysis of petrochemical products.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 12 Experiments)

1) Refractive index of petrochemicals
2) Flash and Fire point determination using Cleveland Open cup method
3) Flash and Fire point determination using Pensky Martien Closed cup method
4) Kinematic viscosity determination using Redwood
5) Kinematic viscosity determination using Saybolt
6) Determination of moisture content – KF titrator
7) Total acidity determination
8) Solvent Recovery from petrochemical feed stock
9) Elemental analysis of petrochemicals using GC / NMR
10) Functional group analysis of petrochemicals using UV / FTIR
11) Flue gas Analysis – Orsat Apparatus/Digital flue gas analyzer.
12) Determination of Density, Apparent Density of Polymer
13) Identification of Polymers : Plastics and Rubber – PE/PP/PS/PVC/PET/ NR/SBR/IR
14) Determination of hardness of Polymers
15) Determination of Glass Transition Temperature (Tg) / Melting Point, (Tm) of Polymers
16) Determination of molecular weight by end group analysis (COOH group) / viscosity
method.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1. Perform the testing of various physical properties of the petroleum products in a
safe manner.
CO2. Perform the testing of various chemical properties of the petroleum products in a
safe manner.
CO3. Differentiate various petroleum products by performing the specific tests.
CO4. Perform the advanced qualitative and quantitative laboratory tasks, including the
operation of advanced analytical instrumentation.
CO5. Ability to communicate and perform in the team
CO6. Ability to understand the significance and theoretical principles behind of each test

92
 Course Articulation Matrix: PETROCHEMICAL AND POLYMER ANALYSIS LABORATORY

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Perform the testing of various physical properties
CO1 of the petrochemical / polymer products in a safe 3 3 1 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - 1 2 2
manner
Perform the testing of various chemical properties
CO2 of the petrochemical / polymer l products in a safe 3 3 1 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - 1 2 2
manner
Differentiate various petrochemical / polymer
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - 3 3 3 - 3 2 3
products by performing the specific tests
Perform the advanced qualitative and quantitative
CO4 laboratory tasks, including the operation of 3 3 - 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - 1 2 2
advanced analytical instrumentation

CO5 Ability to communicate and perform in the team - - - - 3 - - 3 3 3 - 3 2 2

Ability to understand the significance and

CO6 theoretical principles behind of each test. 2 2 - - - - - 3 3 3 - - 2 2

Overall CO 3 3 1 2 2 0 0 3 3 3 0 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

93
PC3462 PETROLEUM PRODUCT TESTING LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVE:
 On completion of the course, the students should be conversant with the theoretical
principles and experimental procedures for quantitative estimation of petroleum products.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 12 Experiments)

1. Specific gravity determination using API gravity / Specific gravity bottle method
2. Carbon residue determination Canrodson / Rams bottom method
3. Dynamic viscosity measerment / Kinematic viscosity by U-Tube viscometer
4. Moisture content determination using Dean & Stark / Centrifuge method
5. ASTM Distillation to identify petroleum fractions and find out boiling range
6. Aniline point determination
7. Copper strip corrosion testing of petroleum products
8. Cloud and Pour point determination
9. Smoke point determination
10. Reid-Vapor pressure determination of gasoline
11. BS&W separation using Centrifuge method
12. Drop point determination for industrial grease
13. Softening point determination
14. Ductility of bitumen - Determination
15. Penetration index determination
16. Calorific value of petrochemical product
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1. Perform the testing of various physical properties of the petroleum products in a
safe manner.
CO2. Perform the testing of various chemical properties of the petroleum products in a
safe manner.
CO3. Differentiate various petroleum products by performing the specific tests.
CO4. Perform the advanced qualitative and quantitative laboratory tasks, including the
operation of advanced analytical instrumentation.
CO5. Ability to communicate and perform in the team
CO6. Ability to understand the theoretical knowledge

94
 Course Articulation Matrix: PETROLEUM PRODUCT TESTING LABORATORY

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Perform the testing of various physical properties
CO1 3 3 1 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - 1 2 2
of the petroleum products in a safe manner.
Perform the testing of various chemical properties of
CO2 3 3 1 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - 1 2 2
the petroleum products in a safe manner.
Differentiate various petroleum products by
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 - - 3 3 3 - 3 2 3
performing the specific tests.
Perform the advanced qualitative and quantitative
CO4 laboratory tasks, including the operation of 3 3 - 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - 1 2 2
advanced analytical instrumentation.
CO5 Ability to communicate and perform in the team - - - - 3 - - 3 3 3 - 3 2 2
CO6 Ability to understand the theoretical knowledge - - - - - - - 3 3 3 - - 2 2
Overall CO 2 2 1 2 2 0 0 3 3 3 0 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

95
PC3511 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING / INTERNSHIP I* LTPC
000 2
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to
 Get connected with industry/ laboratory/research institute
 Get practical knowledge on production process in the industry and develop skills to solve
related problems
 Develop skills to carry out research in the research institutes/laboratories

The students individually undergo training in reputed firms/ research institutes / laboratories for the
specified duration. After the completion of training, a detailed report should be submitted within ten
days from the commencement of next semester. The students will be evaluated as per the
Regulations.
No.of. Weeks: 04
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student will know about
CO1: Plant layout, machinery, organizational structure and production processes in the firm or
research facilities in the laboratory/research institute
CO2: Analysis of industrial / research problems and their solutions
CO3: Documenting of material specifications, machine and process parameters, testing
parameters and results
CO4: Preparing of Technical report and presentation

CH3551 MASS TRANSFER II L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
Impart knowledge on how certain substances undergo the change in composition,
change in phases and exhibit their properties according to the changed environment.
Also, to design absorber and stripper, distillation column, extraction and leaching
equipment and adsorber.

UNIT I ABSORPTION 9
Equilibrium and operating line concept in absorption calculations; types of contactors,
design of packed and plate type absorbers; Operating characteristics of stage wise and
differential contactors, concepts of NTU, HTU and overall volumetric mass transfer coefficients;
multicomponent absorption; mechanism and model of absorption with chemical reaction; thermal
effects in absorption process.

UNIT II DISTILLATION 9
Vapour liquid equilibria - Raoult’s law, vapor-liquid equilibrium diagrams for ideal and non-ideal
systems, enthalpy concentration diagrams. Principle of distillation - flash distillation, differential
distillation, steam distillation, multistage continuous rectification, Number of ideal stages by
Mc.Cabe
- Thiele method and Ponchan - Savarit method, Total reflux, minimum reflux ratio, optimum
reflux ratio. Introduction to multi-component distillation, azeotropic and extractive distillation

UNIT III LIQUID-LIQUID EXTRACTION 9

Liquid - liquid extraction - solvent characteristics-equilibrium stage wise contact calculations for
batch and continuous extractors- differential contact equipment-spray, packed and mechanically
agitated contactors and their design calculations-packed bed extraction with reflux. Pulsed
extractors, centrifugal extractors-Supercritical extraction

96
UNIT IV LEACHING 9
Solid-liquid equilibria- leaching equipment for batch and continuous operations, calculation of
number of stages - Leaching - Leaching by percolation through stationary solid beds, moving
bed leaching, counter current multiple contact (shank’s system), equipments for leaching
operation, multi stage continuous cross current and countercurrent leaching, stage calculations,
stage efficiency.

UNIT V ADSORPTION, ION EXCHANGE AND MEMBRANE SEPARATION PROCESSES 9

Adsorption - Types of adsorption, nature of adsorbents, adsorption equilibria, effect of pressure
and temperature on adsorption isotherms, Adsorption operations - stage wise operations, steady
state moving bed and unsteady state fixed bed adsorbers, break through curves. Principle of
Ion exchange, techniques and applications. Solid and liquid membranes; concept of osmosis;
reverse osmosis; electro dialysis; ultrafiltration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand concept and determine the theoretical stages, number of transfer units
and height requirements for a gas absorption process
CO2: Identify the suitable distillation techniques, determine the number of trays for stage
wise contact and determine the height of the packed tower.
CO3: Apply the ternary equilibrium diagram concepts to determine the number of stages
required for separation of liquid-liquid extraction process.
CO4: Describe core principles of leaching, setting up mass balances, use graphical
methods to estimate the number of ideal stages in leaching operation.
CO5: Understand the concept of adsorption techniques, various isotherms and ion
exchange process and Formulate and solve mass and energy balances for unit
operations such as absorption, distillation, extraction, leaching, adsorption and other separation
processes.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Treybal, R.E., “Mass Transfer Operations “, 3rd Edn., McGraw-Hill,2017.
2. Geankoplis, C.J., “Transport Processes and Unit Operations”, 4th Edition, Prentice
Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
3. Wankat, P., “Equilibrium Stage Separations”, Prentice Hall, 1998.
4. B. K. Dutta.,”Mass Transfer and separation processes,Prentice Hall,2006

REFERENCES:
th
1. McCabe, W.L., Smith, J.C., and Harriot, P., “Unit Operations in Chemical Engineering”, 7
Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2017.
2. Seader J.D. and Henley E.J., “Separation Process Principles”, 2nd Ed., John Wiley, 2006.
3. King,C.J.,“SeparationProcesses“,2ndEdn.,TataMcGraw-Hill1980

97
 Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Program Outcome
Outcome Statement
s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand concept and determine the
theoretical stages, number of transfer
CO1 units and height requirements for a gas
3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 2
absorption process.
Identify the suitable distillation techniques,
determine the number of trays for stage
CO2 wise contact and determine the height of
3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
the packed tower
Apply the ternary equilibrium diagram
concepts to determine the number of
CO3 stages required for separation of liquid-
3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
liquid extraction process
Describe core principles of leaching,
setting up mass balances, use graphical
CO4 methods to estimate the number of ideal
3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
stages in leaching operation
Understand the concept of adsorption
techniques, various isotherms and ion
exchange Process and Formulate to
CO5 solve mass and energy balances for 3 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1 3 2
unit operations such as absorption,
distillation, extraction, leaching, adsorption
and other separation processes
Overall CO
3 3 3 3 1 - - - - 1 3 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

98
PC3551 CATALYTIC REACTION ENGINEERING LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to gain knowledge on the selection of catalyst and multiphase
reactors for the heterogeneous catalytic reactions.

UNIT I CATALYST AND ITS CHARACTERIZATION 9

General definition of catalysts, Solid catalysts, Components of catalyst, Industrial catalysts,
Preparation of solid catalysts, Precipitation and co-precipitation methods, Sol gel method,
Supported catalysts, Impregnation and ion exchange method, Catalyst Characterization
techniques-Structural analysis-surface area and pore analysis, Catalysts tests.
UNIT II KINETICS OF HETEROGENEOUS CATALYTIC REACTIONS 9
Reaction mechanism and rate equations, Power law model, Langmuir-Hinshelwood–Hougen-
Watson (LHHW) model, Eley Rideal model, Rate controlling Step, Reactor types- Fixed bed
reactor, Fluidized bed reactor, Berty Reactor, Multiphase Reactors- Slurry Reactor, Trickle bed
reactor.
UNIT III DIFFUSION EFFECTS IN CATALYSIS 9
Effect of external transport on catalytic reaction rate, Effect of internal mass transport on catalytic
reaction rate, Bulk diffusion, Knudsen diffusion, Surface diffusion, Effectiveness factor for spherical
catalysts at isothermal conditions, Significance of intrapellet diffusion.
UNIT IV CATALYST DEACTIVATION 9
Types of Catalyst Deactivation. Kinetics of Catalyst Poisoning. Kinetics of Catalyst Deactivation by
Coke Formation.

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL CATALYTIC PROCESSES 9

Steam reforming, Catalytic cracking, Hydro cracking, Three Lumped kinetic model for catalytic
cracking of gas oil.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Understand selection of catalysts, preparation and characterization techniques for
multiphase reactors.
2. Apply heterogeneous kinetic model for the development of rate equations and rate
controlling steps and select a suitable reactor for a particular application.
3. Understand the mechanism of internal and external transport processes in reactions with
catalysts.
4. Analyze the types of catalyst deactivation and develop a kinetic model for various
deactivation mechanisms.
5. Demonstrate the application of models for industrial catalytic reactions.
6. Solve complex kinetic equations by software packages.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Levenspiel O, “Chemical Reaction Engineering”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., III Edition, 2000.
2. Smith, J.M, “Chemical Engineering Kinetics”, McGraw Hill, III Edition, 1981.
3. Fogler.H.S., “Elements of Chemical Reaction Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., III
Edition, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Froment. G.F. & K.B. Bischoff, “Chemical Reactor Analysis and Design”, John Wiley and
Sons, III Edition, 2010.
2. Mark E. Davis and Robert J.Davis, Fundamentals of Chemical Reaction Engineering, Mc
GrawHill, 2003.
3. Charles G. Hill, Jr., An Introduction to Chemical Engineering Kinetics & Reactor Design,
John Wiley& Sons, 1977.

99
 Course Articulation Matrix: CATALYTIC REACTION ENGINEERING
Course Statement Program Outcomes
Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Understand selection of 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - 3 2
catalysts, preparation and
characterization techniques for
multiphase reactors.
CO2 Apply heterogeneous kinetic 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 3
model for the development of rate
equations and select a suitable
reactor for a particular
application.
CO3 Understand the mechanism 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2
of internal and external
transport processes in
catalytic reactions.
CO4 Analyze the types of catalyst 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2
deactivation and develop a kinetic
model for various deactivation
mechanisms.
CO5 Demonstrate the application of 2 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 2
models for industrial catalytic
reactions.
CO6 Solve complex kinetic equations 2 2 1 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3
by software packages.
Overall CO 3 3 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

100
CH3561 MASS TRANSFER LABORATORY L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to
 Develop s o u n d practical knowledge for students on different types of mass
transfer equipments
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS*
1. Separation of binary mixture using Simple distillation
2. Separation of binary mixture using Steam distillation
3. Separation of binary mixture using Packed column distillation
4. Measurement of diffusivity
5. Liquid-liquid extraction
6. Drying characteristics of forced draft dryer
7. Adsorption studies
8. Cross current leaching studies
9. Surface evaporation
10. Wetted wall column
11. Solid Liquid mass transfer studies
12. Water purification using ion exchange columns
13. Mass transfer characteristics of Rotating disc contactor
14. Estimation of mass/heat transfer coefficient for cooling tower
15. Demonstration of Gas – Liquid absorption
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Determine the diffusivity practically and compare the results with the empirical
correlations.
CO2: Estimate the mass transfer rate and mass transfer co-efficient
CO3: Evaluate the performance/calculate the parameters in different distillation processes
CO4: Evaluate the performance/calculate the parameters in leaching and extraction
operations
CO5: Estimate the drying characteristics

101
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Program Outcome

Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Determine the diffusivity practically and
CO1 compare the results with the empirical
correlations. 3 3 2 3 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 3
Estimate the mass transfer rate and
CO2 mass transfer co-efficient 3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 3
Evaluate the performance/calculate the
CO3 parameters in different distillation
processes 3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 3
Evaluate the performance/calculate the
CO4 parameters in leaching and extraction
operations 3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 3
CO5 Estimate the drying characteristics 3 3 2 3 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 3
Overall CO 3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

102
PC3652 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION DYNAMICS AND CONTROL LTPC
3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To introduce open and closed loop systems and its responses, control loop components
and stability of control systems along with instrumentation.
UNIT I INSTRUMENTATION 9
Principles of measurements and classification of process instruments, measurement of
temperature, pressure, fluid flow, liquid weight and weight flow rate, viscosity, pH, concentration,
electrical and thermal conductivity, humidity of gases.

UNIT II OPEN LOOP SYSTEMS 9

Laplace transformation and its application in process control. First order systems and their
transient response for standard input functions, first order systems in series, linearization and its
application in process control, second order systems and their dynamics; transportation lag.

UNIT III CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS 10

Closed loop control systems, development of block diagram for feed-back control systems, servo
and regulatory problems, transfer function for controllers and final control element, principles of
pneumatic and electronic controllers, transient response of closed-loop control systems and their
stability.
UNIT IV FREQUENCY RESPONSE 9
Introduction to frequency response of closed-loop systems, control system design by frequency
response techniques, Bode diagram, stability criterion, tuning of controllers Z-N tuning rules, C-C
tuning rules.

UNIT V ADVANCED CONTROL SCHEMES 8

Feedback control of systems with dead time and inverse response. Control systems with multiple
loops. Advanced Control Schemes a) Feed forward b) ratio control. control of distillation towers
and heat exchangers,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1:Understand working principles, types and applications of various process instruments used
in chemical and petrochemical industries.
CO2:Develop transient models for processes using material and/or energy balance equations and
seek their solution using Laplace Transforms.
CO3:Explain the principles of controllers and control elements and analyze the closed loop control
systems to determine the transient response, offset and their stability.
CO4:Understand Frequency response of control systems and tune the PID controllers.
CO5:Analyzing the performance of various of advanced control strategies.
CO6:Identify practical challenges in posing control problems and work in teams on dynamics and
controller problems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Coughnowr, D., “Process Systems Analysis and Control “, 3rd Edn., McGraw Hill, New
York, 2008.
2. Stephanopoulos, G., “Chemical Process Control“, Prentice Hall of India, 2003
REFERENCES:
1. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp , Process dynamics and control I
-2nd ed. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Marlin, T. E., “ Process Control “, 2nd Edn, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000.
3. Smith, C. A. and Corripio, A. B., “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”, 2 nd
Edn., John Wiley, New York, 1997.
4. Jason L. Speyer, Walter H. Chung, ”Stochastic Processes, Estimation, and Control”, PHI
Ltd (2013).

103
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course C313 CH8653 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION DYNAMICS AND CONTROL
Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand working principles,
types and applications of
CO1 various process instruments 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 1
used in chemical and
petrochemical industries.
Develop transient models for
processes using material
and/or energy balance
CO2 3 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - 3 1
equations and seek their
solution using Laplace
Transforms.
Explain the principles of
controllers and control
elements and analyze the
CO3 closed loop control systems 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 1
to determine the transient
response, offset and their
stability.
Understand Frequency
CO4 response of control systems 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 1
and tune the PID controllers.
Analyzing the performance of
CO5 various of advanced control 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 3 1
strategies.
Identify practical challenges in
posing control problems and
CO6 - - - 3 - - - - 3 - - - 3 3
work in teams on dynamics
and controller problems.
Average value of PO and PSO 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 1
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

104
 NCC Credit Course Level 3*
NX3651 (ARMY WING) NCC Credit Course - III LT P C
3 00 3

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3
PD 5 Public Speaking 4
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 4
BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2

ARMED FORCES 3
AF 2 Modes of Entry to Army, CAPF, Police 3
COMMUNICATION 3
C1 Introduction to Communication & Latest Trends 3
INFANTRY 3
INF 1 Organisation of Infantry Battalion & its weapons 3
MILITARY HISTORY 23
MH 1 Biographies of Renowned Generals 4
MH 2 War Heroes - PVC Awardees 4
MH 3 Study of Battles - Indo Pak War 1965, 1971 & Kargil 9
MH 4 War Movies 6

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 3*

NX3652 (NAVAL WING) NCC Credit Course - III L T P C
3 0 0 3
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3
PD 5 Public Speaking 4
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 4
BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2
NAVAL ORIENTATION 6
NO 3 Modes of Entry - IN, ICG, Merchant Navy 3
AF 2 Naval Expeditions & Campaigns 3
NAVAL COMMUNICATION 2
NC 1 Introduction to Naval Communications 1
NC 2 Semaphore 1
NAVIGATION 2
N1 Navigation of Ship - Basic Requirements 1
N2 Chart Work 1
SEAMANSHIP 15
MH 1 Introduction to Anchor Work 2
MH 2 Rigging Capsule 6
MH 3 Boatwork - Parts of Boat 2
MH 4 Boat Pulling Instructions
2
105
MH 5 Whaler Sailing Instructions 3
FIRE FIGHTING FLOODING & DAMAGE CONTROL 4
FFDC 1 Fire Fighting 2
FFDC 2 Damage Control 2
SHIP MODELLING 3
SM Ship Modelling Capsule 3
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

NCC Credit Course Level 3*

NX3653 (AIR FORCE WING) NCC Credit Course Level - III LTPC
300 3
PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT 9
PD 3 Group Discussion: Team Work 2
PD 4 Career Counselling, SSB Procedure & Interview Skills 3
PD 5 Public Speaking 4
BORDER & COASTAL AREAS 4
BCA 2 Security Setup and Border/Coastal management in the area 2
BCA 3 Security Challenges & Role of cadets in Border management 2
AIRMANSHIP 1
A1 Airmanship 1
BASIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 3
FI 1 Basic Flight Instruments 3
AERO MODELLING 3
AM 1 Aero Modelling Capsule 3
GENERAL SERVICE KNOWLEDGE 2
GSK 4 Latest Trends & Acquisitions 2
AIR CAMPAIGNS 6
AC 1 Air Campaigns 6
PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT 6
PF 1 Principles of Flight 3
PF 2 Forces acting on Aircraft 3
NAVIGATION 5
NM 1 Navigation 2
NM 2 Introduction to Met and Atmosphere 3
AERO ENGINES 6
E1 Introduction and types of Aero Engine 3
E2 Aircraft Controls 3

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

106
PC3611 CHEMICAL REACTION AND PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY LTPC
0 042
CHEMICAL REACTION LABORATORY

OBJECTIVES
 Students will develop sound working knowledge on different types of reactors.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Kinetic studies in a Batch reactor
2. Kinetic studies in a coiled Plug flow reactor
3. Kinetic studies in a CSTR
4. Kinetic studies in a Packed bed reactor
5. Kinetic studies in a PFR followed by a CSTR
6. RTD studies in a straight tube PFR
7. RTD studies in a Packed bed reactor
8. RTD studies in a CSTR
9. Study of temperature dependence of rate constant using CSTR.
10. Kinetic studies in Sono chemical reactor

PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY

OBJECTIVE:
Students will gain the hands on training about the control systems

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Open loop study on a level system
2. Open loop study on a flow system
3. Open loop study on a thermal system
4. Closed loop study on a level system
5. Closed loop study on a flow system
6. Closed loop study on a thermal system
7. Response of first order system
8. Response of second order system
9. Response of Non-Interacting level System
10. Response of Interacting level System
11. Tuning of a level system
12. Tuning of a flow system
13. Tuning of a thermal system
14. Flow co-efficient of control valves
15. Characteristics of different types of control valves
*Minimum 10 experiments shall be offered.

OUTCOMES:
 Understand rate equation for different types of reactors.
 Design experiments in kinetics to determine conversion and effect of temperature on
rate constant.
 Assess the non-ideal behavior of plug flow, mixed flow and packed bed by studying
the residence time distribution.
 Understand the prerequisites of control strategies and design different process control
systems
 Evaluate the suitable controllers for different chemical & Petrochemical process.
 Analyze and tune the control systems unto stability
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

107
 Course Articulation Matrix: CHEMICAL REACTION AND PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY

Course Statement Program Outcomes

Outcomes PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO
PO1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2
CO1 Understand rate equation for
3 2 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
different types of reactors.
CO2 Design experiments in kinetics to
determine conversion and effect 3 3 3 1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
of temperature on rate constant.
CO3 Assess the non-ideal behavior of
plug flow, mixed flow and packed
3 3 3 1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
bed by studying the residence
time distribution.
CO4 Understand the prerequisites of
control strategies and design
3 2 3 1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
different process
control systems.
CO5 Evaluate the suitable controllers
and tune the control systems for
3 3 2 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 2
different chemical &
Petrochemical process.
CO6 Analyze and tune the control
systems unto stability _ 3 _ _ _ _ 2 3 _ _ _ 1 2

Overall CO 3 3 3 1 _ _ 2 _ 3 _ _ _ 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

108
PC3651 COMPUTATIONAL PETROCHEMICAL LABORATORY LTPC
0042
OBJECTIVE:
 To enhance the students to develop enrich practical knowledge on computational process
simulator with different refinery operation.
 To provide industrial working environment and practical working knowledge on different
chemical and petrochemical process plant operation.
 To give the students an understanding the fundamentals concepts in mathematics,
problems solving and computer programming.

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

Minimum 10 experiments to be offered
Stand alone desktops/server with respective simulation software’s 30 users.
Softwares:
1. MATLAB Single user license
2. Chemical engineering simulation software
3. Process simulator software package – Petrochemical Engineering Suite
4. Open source MS office
Specific examples in MATLAB/EXCEL/ PROCESS SIMUALTION
1. Solving equation of state, regression of parameters using EXCEL/MATLAB
2. Calculation of Reynolds number, friction factor and pressure drop using EXCEL/MATLAB
3. Calculation of heat transfer coefficient in a Heat Exchanger using EXCEL/MATLAB
4. Calculation of minimum Reflux ratio for binary/tertiary system in a fractionators using
EXCEL/ MATLAB
5. Calculation of HTU and NTU in a Absorber using EXCEL/MATLAB
6. Calculation of Antoine‘s coefficient using EXCEL/MATLAB
7. EstimationofsettlingvelocityofsolidsinliquidsusingStoke‘slawusingEXCEL/MATLAB
8. CalculationofminimumnumberofstagesinadistillationcolumnusingEXCEL/MATLAB
9. Solving mass and energy balance problems using EXCEL/MATLAB
10. Dynamic simulation of an Absorption column using PROCESS SIMULATION SOFTWARE
TOOL
11. Developing Heat and Mass balance diagram using PROCESS SIMULATION SOFTWARE
TOOL

LIST OF SUGGESTED EXERCISES

Practice the following using process simulator. The simulator can be used from Virtual Lab
simulators:
1. Change the P & I values and process parameters and observe the change in trend, bar graph
and mimics
2. Attend the malfunction occurring in the plant then restoring to its design conditions.
3. Perform the experiments using the simulator by varying the process variables and tabulate the
results.
4. Practice correct start up and shut down procedure of plant.
Practice the above exercise on the following modules given below using process simulator.
 Fractionation column for the distillation of binary mixture.
 shell and tube Heat exchanger
 Level and flow control in different sizes of vessel
 Batch Reactor / reaction kinetic studies in batch reactor
 CSTR in series
 Centrifugal pump
 Centrifugal compressor
 Fluidized bed column
 Packed bed column
 Cyclone separator
 Evaporator

109
  Crude Distillation unit
 Manufacture of urea in urea plant
5. Equations of state using Newton‘s method
6. Regression for parameter estimation using a set of data points
7. Equilibrium flash distillation (Multicomponent Ideal)
8. Batch Reactor
9. CSTR in Series Stage wise contacting equipment
10. Solving a simple flow sheet by simultaneous approach
11. Simulation of batch Distillation (binary ideal).
12. Gravity Flow Tank
13. Heat Exchanger
14. Plug Flow Reactor
15. Absorber

OUTCOME:
CO1 : Remembering industrial exposure environment in computational pro-simulation.
CO2 : Understanding In-depth Processes of chemical and refinery operation.
CO3: Applying project knowledge and Carry out In-house projects
CO4: Analyze Sound Fundamental Concepts of Process Control and safety with DCS Operations.
CO5: Evaluate the Intricacy & Complexity of process dynamics.
CO6: Create Employability opportunities in simulation models.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Bequette.B.W, ―Process Dynamics‖: Modeling, Analysis and Simulation,‖PrenticeHall(1998)
2. Himmelblau.D.M.and Bischoff.K.B, ―Process Analysis and Simulation ‖, Wiley, 1988.
3. Strang.G.,‖Introduction to Linear Algebra‖, Cambridge Press, 4th edition, 2009.
4. William. Luyben, ―Process Modeling, simulation and control for Chemical Engineers, 2nd Edn.,
Mc Graw Hill International Editions, New York, 1990
5. Chapra.S.C. and Canale.R.P. ―Numerical Methods for Engineers ‖, McGraw Hill, 2001

110
Course Articulation Matrix: COMPUTATIONAL PETROCHEMICAL LABORATORY

Course Statement PROGRAM OUTCOME

Outcomes P P P P P P P
PO1 O O O O O O O PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CO1 Remembering industrial exposure environment in 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 3 3 3 2
computational pro-simulation.
CO2 Understanding In-depth Processes of chemical 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 2 3 2 2
and refinery operation.
CO3 Applying project knowledge and Carry out In- 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 2
house projects
CO4 Analyze Sound Fundamental Concepts of 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 3 2 3
Process Control and safety with DCS
Operations.
CO5 Evaluate the Intricacy & Complexity of process 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 3 2 3 2 3
dynamics.
CO6 Create Employability opportunities in simulation 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 1 3 3 2 3
models.
OVERALL CO 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 2 3 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

111
PC3711 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING / INTERNSHIP II## LTPC
000 2
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to
 Get connected with industry/ laboratory/research institute
 Get practical knowledge on production process in the industry and develop skills to solve
related problems
 Develop skills to carry out research in the research institutes/laboratories

The students individually undergo training in reputed firms/ research institutes / laboratories for the
specified duration. After the completion of training, a detailed report should be submitted within ten
days from the commencement of next semester. The students will be evaluated as per the
Regulations.
No.of. Weeks: 04
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student will know about
CO1: Plant layout, machinery, organizational structure and production processes in the firm or
research facilities in the laboratory/research institute
CO2: Analysis of industrial / research problems and their solutions
CO3: Documenting of material specifications, machine and process parameters, testing
parameters and results
CO4: Preparing of Technical report and presentation

PC3752 PROCESS SAFETY IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES LTPC

300 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To ensure knowledge on the safe handling of petrochemical products

UNIT I PETROLEUM PRODUCTS CLASSIFICATION & HAZARDS 9

Petroleum and Petroleum products – Fuels- Petroleum solvents – Lubricating oils – Petroleum
wax, greases – Miscellaneous product

UNIT II UPSTREAM & DOWNSTREAM OPERATION 9

On and off shore oil operation – Construction of Installation – Pipe line Construction –
Maintenance and repair activities – Safety and associated hazards - transportation - Petroleum
product storage

UNIT III SAFETY HANDLING OF HYDROCARBON 9

Boil over phenomena - Hydro Carbon Detector (HCD) – Remote Operated Shut Off valves
(ROSOV) – Firefighting techniques – Foam types – AFFF, ARAFFF, and Rim Seal Fire Protection
System - Foam Pourer – Foam monitor – Medium Expansion Foam Generator (MEFG), High
Volume Long Range (HVLR) Monitor

UNIT IV DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN 9

Basics of major DMP - Objective of DMP - Categories of Emergencies – Quantitative Risk
Assessment - Element of Disaster Management Plan - Mutual aid - On-site drill - Off-site drill -
Disaster Management Act, 2005

UNIT V RULES AND REGULATION 9

Oil Industry Safety Directorate – OISD-STD-105 - OISD-STD-118 - OISD-STD-144 - Jaipur Fire
Incident - OISD-STD-244 - The Petroleum Rules, 2002
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

112
OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand about the various classes of petrochemical products
CO2: Know about different aspects of pipeline constructional safety aspects of oil transportation
CO3: Obtain knowledge about various safety techniques of safe handling of hydro carbon
CO4: Analyze different aspects of disaster management plans and safety management drill
CO5: Obtain insight into various oil and natural gas legislation in India
CO6: Understand about the various rules and regulations of petroleum industries

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Basic Offshore Safety: Safety induction and emergency training for new entrants to the
offshore oil and gas industry Hardcover – 4 Jul 2017.
2. Offshore Safety Management, 2nd Edition, Ian Sutton - 6th December 2013.
3. Safety of offshore oil and gas operations: Lessons from past accident analysis Michalis
Christou and Myrto Konstantinidou 2012.
4. Guide to the Offshore Installations (Safety Case) Regulations 2005 (Legal) Paperback –
December 1, by HSE (Author).

113
 Course Articulation Matrix: PROCESS SAFETY IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES

Course PROCESS SAFETY IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES

Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand about the various 3 2
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 1
classes of petrochemical products
Know about different aspects of 3 2
CO2 pipeline constructional safety 3 2 - - - 3 - - - - - 1
aspects of oil transportation
Obtain knowledge about various 3 2
CO3 safety techniques of safe handling 2 2 1 - 3 - - - - - - 1
of hydro carbon
Analyze different aspects of 3 2
CO4 disaster management plans and 2 2 2 - - - - - 3 - - 1
safety management drill
Obtain insight into various oil and 3 2
CO5 1 1 1 - - - - - - 3 - 1
natural gas legislation in India
Understand about the various 3 2
CO6 rules and regulations of petroleum - - - - - - - - - - - 3
industries
Overall CO 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 3 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

114
PC3751 PROCESS EQUIPMENT DESIGN LT PC
3 0 03
(Chemical Engineers’ Handbook/Data Books/Graph Sheets are permitted during the Examination.)
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart practical knowledge on the shape and drawing of the process equipments
 To gain knowledge about design of heat exchanging equipment, auxiliary equipments.
 To become a design engineers on process equipments design and drawing consideration
of the following:

UNIT I HEAT EXCHANGER DESIGN 9

Design of double pipe heat exchangers, Heat exchanger types and its selection – shell and tube
heat exchangers and Condensers – Effectiveness – NTU method of heat exchanger analysis.
Design of cooling towers.

UNIT II DESIGN OF AUXILIARY EQUIPEMENTS 9

Design of Reboilers and Condenser, Cooling towers.

UNIT III EVAPORATOR DESIGN 9

Steam – Uses of steam – Outstanding qualities of steam – BPE – Duhring’s rule – Principle of
multiple effect evaporation – Temperature driving force – Evaporators types and its selection –
Design of single and multiple effect evaporators. Design of batch and continuous Dryers.

UNIT IV COLUMN DESIGN 9

Design of distillation columns, Absorption columns, Extraction column, and Adsorption columns.

UNIT V PUMPS, FANS AND COMPRESSORS 9

Pumps, fans and compressors – Types and its applications – Selection criteria - Characteristics –
NPSHR and NPSHA – Power rating calculations based on process duty - Performance analysis of
pumps, fans and compressors - Pump Cavitation. Surge problem in compressors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1: Remembering knowledge on thermal equipments design and specifications.
CO2: Understanding the skill in thermal design of heat transfer equipment like shell and tube,
Double pipe heat Exchangers and evaporators, and assessing thermal efficiency of the above
equipment in practice.
CO3: Demonstrate the skills in basic design and drawing of different dryers, cooling towers and
adsorption columns.
CO4: Apply the concepts involved in phase separation and design of distillation, Extraction and
absorption columns.
CO5: Evaluating auxiliary equipments pumps, fan, compressor and optimizing sizes, materials,
and capital and operating costs of equipment commonly used in the chemical processing
industries.
CO6: Design the essential elements of a chemical engineering process (equipment sizes, material
& energy balances, economics, environmental, safety)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ernest E. Ludwig., “Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants”, Vol.I, II
and III, Gulf Professional Publishing, 2002.
2. Dawande, S. D., “Process Design of Equiments”, 4th Edition, Central Techno Publications,
Nagpure, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Coulson, M. and Richardson, J.F., “Chemical Engineering”, Vol.6, 3rd Edition, Pergamon
Press, 1987.
115
2. Robert H. Perry and Don W. Green, “Perry’s Chemical Engineer’s Hand Book”, 7th Edition,
McGraw Hill – International, 1997. 3. Van Winkle, “Distillation Operations”, McGraw Hill
Publications, 1987.
3. D. Q. Kern, “Process Heat Transfer", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1990.
4. Baranan, C.R., “Rules of Thumb for Chemical Engineers”, Gulf Publishing Co,Texas, 1996.

116
 Course Articulation Matrix: PROCESS EQUIPMENT DESIGN

Course Statement PROGRAM OUTCOME

Outcomes PO1 PO 2 PO3 PO4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

Remembering knowledge on thermal equipments

CO1 design and specifications. 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 2 3 2 2 2

Understanding the skill in thermal design of heat

transfer equipment like shell and tube,
CO2 Double pipe heat Exchangers and evaporators, 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 - 1 2 2 2 2 2
and assessing thermal efficiency of the
above equipment in practice.
Demonstrate the skills in basic design and
CO3 drawing of different dryers, cooling towers and 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 2 2 2
adsorption columns.
Apply the concepts involved in phase separation
CO4 and design of distillation, Extraction and 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 - 1 2 1 2 2 2
absorption columns.
Evaluating auxiliary equipments pumps, fan,
compressor and optimizing sizes, materials and
CO5 capital and operating costs of equipment 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 3 2 2 2 2
commonly used in the chemical processing
industries.
Design the essential elements of a chemical
engineering process (equipment sizes, material &
CO6 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 - 1 1 3 2 2 2
energy balances, economics, environmental,
safety)
OVERALL CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 2 2 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

117
GE3791 HUMAN VALUES AND ETHICS LT P C
2 0 0 2
COURSE DESCRIPTION
This course aims to provide a broad understanding about the modern values and ethical principles
that have evolved and are enshrined in the Constitution of India with regard to the democratic,
secular and scientific aspects. The course is designed for undergraduate students so that they
could study, understand and apply these values in their day to day life.

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To create awareness about values and ethics enshrined in the Constitution of India
 To sensitize students about the democratic values to be upheld in the modern society.
 To inculcate respect for all people irrespective of their religion or other affiliations.
 To instill the scientific temper in the students’ minds and develop their critical thinking.
 To promote sense of responsibility and understanding of the duties of citizen.

UNIT I DEMOCRATIC VALUES 6

Understanding Democratic values: Equality, Liberty, Fraternity, Freedom, Justice, Pluralism,
Tolerance, Respect for All, Freedom of Expression, Citizen Participation in Governance – World
Democracies: French Revolution, American Independence, Indian Freedom Movement.
Reading Text: Excerpts from John Stuart Mills’ On Liberty

UNIT II SECULAR VALUES 6

Understanding Secular values – Interpretation of secularism in Indian context - Disassociation of
state from religion – Acceptance of all faiths – Encouraging non-discriminatory practices.

Reading Text: Excerpt from Secularism in India: Concept and Practice by Ram Puniyani

UNIT III SCIENTIFIC VALUES 6

Scientific thinking and method: Inductive and Deductive thinking, Proposing and testing
Hypothesis, Validating facts using evidence based approach – Skepticism and Empiricism –
Rationalism and Scientific Temper.

Reading Text: Excerpt from The Scientific Temper by Antony Michaelis R

UNIT IV SOCIAL ETHICS 6

Application of ethical reasoning to social problems – Gender bias and issues – Gender violence –
Social discrimination – Constitutional protection and policies – Inclusive practices.

Reading Text: Excerpt from 21 Lessons for the 21st Century by Yuval Noah Harari

UNIT V SCIENTIFIC ETHICS 6

Transparency and Fairness in scientific pursuits – Scientific inventions for the betterment of
society - Unfair application of scientific inventions – Role and Responsibility of Scientist in the
modern society.

Reading Text: Excerpt from American Prometheus: The Triumph and Tragedy of J.Robert
Oppenheimer by Kai Bird and Martin J. Sherwin.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. The Nonreligious: Understanding Secular People and Societies, Luke W. Galen Oxford
University Press, 2016.
2. Secularism: A Dictionary of Atheism, Bullivant, Stephen; Lee, Lois, Oxford University Press,
2016.
3. The Oxford Handbook of Secularism, John R. Shook, Oxford University Press, 2017.

118
4. The Civic Culture: Political Attitudes and Democracy in Five Nations by Gabriel A. Almond and
Sidney Verba, Princeton University Press,
5. Research Methodology for Natural Sciences by Soumitro Banerjee, IISc Press, January 2022

COURSE OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
CO1 : Identify the importance of democratic, secular and scientific values in harmonious
functioning of social life
CO2 : Practice democratic and scientific values in both their personal and professional life.
CO3 : Find rational solutions to social problems.
CO4 : Behave in an ethical manner in society
CO5 : Practice critical thinking and the pursuit of truth.

PC3811 PROJECT WORK / INTERNSHIP # L T P C

0 0 20 10
OBJECTIVES:
To train the students in
 Identifying problem and developing the structured methodology to solve the identified
problem in the industry or research problem at research Institution or college.
 Conducting experiments, analyze and discuss the test results, and make conclusions.
 Preparing project reports and presentation

The students shall individually / or as group work on a specific topic approved by the
Department. The student can select any topic which is relevant to his/her specialization of the
programme. The student should continue the work on the selected topic as per the formulated
methodology. At the end of the semester, after completing the work to the satisfaction of the
supervisor and review committee, a detailed report which contains clear definition of the
identified problem, detailed literature review related to the area of work and methodology for
carrying out the work, results and discussion, conclusion and references should be prepared as
per the format prescribed by the University and submitted to the Head of the department. The
students will be evaluated based on the report and viva-voce examination by a panel of
examiners as per the Regulations.
TOTAL: 300 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the project, the student will be able to
CO1: Formulate and analyze problem / create a new product/ process.
CO2: Design and conduct experiments to find solution
CO3: Analyze the results and provide solution for the identified problem, prepare project
report and make presentation

119
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE I
PC3001 PETROCHEMICAL UNIT PROCESSES LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To design and conduct experiments and analyze and interpret data related to petrochemical
Unit processes
 To learn feed stock and source of petrochemicals, synthesis gas production.
 To impart knowledge on primary unit processes.

UNIT I FEED STOCK AND SOURCE OF PETROCHEMICALS 9

Overview of Petrochemical Industry – The key growth area of India, Economics – Feed stock
selections for Petrochemicals – Steam cracking of Gas and Naphtha to produce Olefins, Diolefins
and Production of Acetylene.

UNIT II SYNTHESIS GAS PRODUCTION 9

Steam reforming of Natural gas – Naphtha and Heavy distillate to produce Hydrogen and
Synthesis gas – Production of Methanol – Oxo process.

UNIT III PRIMARY UNIT PROCESSES 9

Fundamental and Technological principled involved in Alkylation – Oxidation – Nitration and
Hydrolysis.

UNIT IV SECONDARY UNIT PROCESSES 9

Fundamental and Technological principled involved in Sulphonation, Sulfation and Isomerisation.

UNIT V TERTIARY UNIT PROCESSES 9

Fundamental and Technological principles involved in Halogenation and Esterification
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
CO1; Students would be able to understand the principles of various unit processes in
the petrochemical industry.
CO2: Enhanced the knowledge on Production of Methanol and Oxo process.
CO3: Study on Fundamental and Technological principled involved in petrochemical unit
processes.
CO4: Understanding the principles involved in Sulphonation, Sulfation and Isomerization.
CO5: Understanding the principles involved in Sulphonation, Sulfation and Isomerization.
CO6: Skills on Fundamental and Technological principles involved tertiary unit processes

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhaskara Rao, B.K., “A Text on Petrochemicals”, Khanna Publishers, 2000.
2. Sukumar Maiti, “Introduction to Petrochemicals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford and IBH Publishers,
2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Margaret Wells, “Handbook of Petrochemicals and Processes”, 2nd Edition, Ash Gate
Publishing Limited, 2002.
2. Sami Matar, and Lewis F. Hatch., “Chemistry of Petrochemical Processes”, 2 nd Edition, Gulf
Publishing Company, 2000.
3. Dryden, C.E., “Outlines of Chemical Technology”, 2nd Edition, Affiliated East-West Press, 1993.

120
 Course Articulation Matrix: PETROCHEMICAL UNIT PROCESSES

Course Statement PROGRAM OUTCOME

Outcomes P P P P P P P
PO1 O O O O O O O PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CO1 Students would be able to understand the 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 3 3 3 3
principles of various unit processes in the
petrochemical industry.
CO2 Enhanced the knowledge on Production of 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 - 1 2 2 3 3 3
Methanol and Oxo process.
CO3 Study on Fundamental and Technological 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 3 3 3
principled involved in petrochemical unit
processes.
CO4 Understanding the principles involved in 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 - 1 2 1 3 3 3
Sulphonation, Sulfation and Isomerization.
CO5 Understanding the principles involved in 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 3 2 3 2 3
Sulphonation, Sulfation and Isomerization.
CO6 Skills on Fundamental and Technological 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 - 1 1 3 3 2 3
principles involved tertiary unit processes
OVERALL CO 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 2 2 3 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

121
PC3002 PETROLEUM EXPLORATION AND EXPLOITATION TECHNIQUES L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students understand the stages of oil and gas formation, exploration and
production

UNIT I ORIGIN AND OCCURRENCE OF PETROLEUM AND SEDIMENTRARY

ENVIRONMENT 9
Origin of petroleum – Types of rocks and rock cycle – Formation of petroleum - Important factors
that control petroleum occurrence – Source rocks, Reservoir rocks and Cap rocks - Factors
influences the physical characteristics of a reservoir - Migration and Accumulation – Porosity,
Types of porosity, Factors influencing porosity, Permeability and its classifications - Various Traps
and Faults and its classifications.

UNIT II EXPLORATION METHODS, WELL PROGNOSIS AND ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 9

Geological exploration methods – Geophysical exploration methods, Gravity, Magnetic and
Seismic methods – Geochemical methods – Reserve estimation methods - Prognostication –
Classification of drilling locations – Economic analysis – Well programme – Geo-Technical order.

UNIT III GEOLOGGING AND WIRE LINE WELL LOGGING 9

Rock cutting and core collection techniques – Symbols used to represent rocks and wells in
logging, Sample logging, Drilling time logging, Mud/Gas/Oil logging – Formation evaluation
techniques using wire line well logging including – Spontaneous potential logging, Natural gamma
ray logging, Caliber logging, Formation density logging, Neutron porosity logging, Sonic velocity
logging, Electrical resistance logging.

UNIT IV DRILLING TECHNOLOGY AND WORK COMPLETION 9

Drilling Technology, Rotary drilling – Types of off-shore drilling rigs – Drilling Fluids: Function,
Composition, and Classification – Casing packs – Cementing – Bottom hole completion methods:
open hole completion, gravel pack completion, Liner completion and Perforated cased hole
completion – Surface well completion method.

UNIT V CRUDE OIL RECOVERY 9

Primary oil recovery: Self recovery, artificial recovery using sucker rod pump, Gas lifting and
electrical submerged pump, Various stimulation methods. Secondary oil recovery and Tertiary oil
recovery – Enhanced oil recovery techniques: Chemical, miscible gas and thermal method – Major
well complication and Remedies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1. Identify the origin and favourable geological conditions for the formation and accumulation
of petroleum and natural gas.
CO2. Understand the modern oil finding techniques and its feasibility and limitations.
CO3. Understand the principle behind the wire line well logging techniques for oil finding
CO4. Understand the technology involved in well drilling and gain knowledge on various well
completion methods
CO5. Analyse the various oil recovery and stimulation methods to optimize oil production.
CO6. Acquire knowledge on Recent trends in drilling technology and software used.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhagwan Sahay “Petroleum Exploration and Exploitation Practices” Allied Publishers Ltd.,
Chennai, 1999.
2. Richard Dawe, “Modern Petroleum Technology”, Vol.I, Upstream, 6th Edition, John and Wiley
Sons Ltd, 2002.

122
REFERENCES:
1. Howard B. Bradley, “Petroleum Engineering Handbook”, Society of Petroleum Engineers,
1987.
2. Norman J. Hyne., “Nontechnical Guide to Petroleum Geology, Exploration, Drilling and
Production”, 2nd Edition, Pennwell Books, 2001.
3. Shay B., “Wellsite Geological Techniques for Petroleum Exploration” Allied Publishers Ltd.,
1991.

123
 Course Articulation Matrix: PETROLEUM EXPLORATION AND EXPLOITATION TECHNIQUES

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Identify the origin and favorable geological
CO1 Conditions for the formation and accumulation 3 3 1 2 - 1 - - - - - 1 2 2
of petroleum and natural gas
Understand the modern oil finding techniques & its
CO2 feasibility and limitations 3 3 1 1 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
Understand the principle behind the wire line well
CO3 3 3 1 2 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
logging techniques for oil finding
Understand the technology involved in well drilling
CO4 and gain knowledge on various well completion 3 2 2 1 - 2 3 - - - - 2 2 2
methods
Analyse the various oil recovery and stimulation
CO5 methods to optimize oil production 3 3 - - 2 2 3 - - - - 2 2 2

Acquire knowledge on recent trends in drilling

CO6 technology and software used 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - - - - 3 2 2

Overall CO 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

124
PC3003 PROCESS EQUIPMENT AUXILIARIES AND UTILITIES LTPC
300 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To give an overview of various equipment auxiliaries involved in the chemical processes.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND STARTERS 9

Electrical motors – Induction –Synchronous – Electrical Starters.

UNIT II ROTARY EQUIPMENTS 9

Pumps –Turbines – Blowers – Compressors – Fans – Concept – Working and application.

UNIT III INDUSTRIAL VALVES 9

Needle valve – Globe, gate and ball valves – Butterfly valve – Check valve – Piping system.

UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL DRYERS 9

Rotary fluid bed – Spray and freeze dryers – Electro osmotic dryers – Rotary dryer – Case
Studies.

UNIT V PROCESS UTILITY EQUIPMENTS 9

Vacuum devices – Filters – Cooling towers – Refrigeration systems – Flare system –Equipments
for waste water treatment systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Understand the working principle, types, operation, selection and applications of Electrical
motors and starters
 Explain the working principle, types, operation, selection and applications of rotary
equipments namely pumps, blowers, turbines, compressors and fans
 Elaborate the working principle, types, operation, selection and applications of Industrial
Valves
 Illustrate the working principle, types, operation, selection and applications of Industrial
Dryers.
 Explain the working principle, types, operation, selection and applications of vacuum
devices, filters, cooling towers, refrigeration systems, flares and waste water systems.
 Solve trouble shoots in auxiliary equipments used in petrochemical and chemical
industries.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Walas, S.M., “Chemical Process Equipment”, Butterworth – Heinemann Oxford Publishing
Ltd., 1999.
2. Thomas, C.E., “Process Technology – Equipment and systems”, Uhai Publishing, Inc.,
2002.

REFERENCES:
1. Ludwig, E.E., “Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants”, Vol.I and
III, Gulf Professional Publishing, 2002.
2. Perry, R.H. and Green, D.W., “Perry’s Chemical Engineer’s Hand Book”, 7th Edition,
McGraw Hill – International, 1997.
3. Sahu, G.K., “Hand Book of Piping Design”, New Age International Publishers, 2005

125
Course Articulation Matrix:
Course Statement PROGRAM OUTCOMES
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 Understand the working principle,
types, operation, selection and
applications of Electrical motors and 3 3 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
starters
CO2 Explain the working principle, types,
operation, selection and applications
of rotary equipments namely pumps, 3 3 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
blowers, turbines, compressors and
fans
CO3 Elaborate the working principle,
types, operation, selection and 3 3 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
applications of Industrial Valves
CO4 Illustrate the working principle, types,
operation, selection and applications 3 3 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
of Industrial Dryers.
CO5 Explain the working principle, types,
operation, selection and applications
of vacuum devices, filters, cooling 3 3 2 _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
towers, refrigeration systems, flares
and waste water systems.
CO6 Solve trouble shoots in auxiliary
equipments used in petrochemical 3 3 2 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 3
and chemical industries.
Average value of PO and PSO 3 3 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 3
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

126
CPC332 POLYMER TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to compute molecular weight averages from the molecular
weight distribution, Condensation polymerization and transition in polymers.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basic concepts of macromolecules – Monomers – Polymers – Natural and Synthetic polymers -
structure of natural products like cellulose, rubber and proteins - Chemistry of Olefins and Dienes
– double bonds - Functionality - degree of polymerization-Classification and nomenclature of
polymers – Thermoplastic and thermosetting polymerization.

UNIT II ADDITION AND CONDENSATION POLYMERIZATION 9

Addition Polymerization: free radical polymerization – cationic polymerization – anionic
polymerization – coordination polymerization – industrial polymerization – bulk, emulsion,
suspension and solution polymerization techniques – Copolymerization concepts – Condensation
polymerization

UNIT III MOLECULAR WEIGHTS OF POLYMERS 9

Molecular weight of polymer: Number average and Weight average molecular weights – Degree
of polymerization – molecular weight distribution – Polydispersity – Molecular weight
determination.– Gel Permeation Chromatography, Osmometry and Light Scattering

UNIT IV GLASS TRANSITIONS TEMPARATURE 9

Glass transition Temperature: significance and experimental study – Melting Point of polymer -
significance and experimental study – Relationship between Tg and Tm – Crystallinity in polymers
– effect of crystallization– factors affecting crystallization - Polymer Density / Apparent Density,
Viscosity measurements.

UNIT V PLASTICS PROCESS – MOULDIG TECHNIQUES 9

Injection molding: Principle, Types and advantages - Blow molding: Principle, Types and
advantages - Thermoforming: Principle, Types and advantages - Compression molding: Principle,
Types and advantages - Extrusion : Principle, Types and advantages – Calendaring : Principle,
Types and advantages.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: Understand the fundamentals of Monomer, Polymer and its types.
CO2: Understand the addition and condensation polymerization mechanism.
CO3: Acquire knowledge on molecular weight and its significance
CO4: Acquire knowledge on glass transition temperature and melting point
CO5: Understand the concept of different molding techniques for different applications
CO6: Understand the manufacture of water soluble polymers and bio degradable polymers

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Billmeyer.F.W.,Jr, Text Book of Polymer Science, Ed. Wiley-Interscience, 1984.
2. Seymour. R.B., and Carraher.C.E., Jr., Polymer Chemistry, 2nd Ed., Marcel Dekker, 1988.
3. Gowariker.V.T., Viswanathan.N.V., and Sreedar.J., Polymer Science, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1988.

REFERENCES:
1. Joel,R.F; Polymer Science and Technology, Eastern Economy Edition, 1999.
2. Rodriguez, F., Cohen.C., Oberic.K and Arches, L.A., Principles of Polymer Systems, 6th edition,
CRC Press, 2014.

127
 Course Articulation Matrix: POLYMER TECHNOLOGY

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Understand the fundamentals of Monomer,
CO1 3 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2
Polymer and its types
Understand the addition and condensation
CO2 polymerization mechanism 3 2 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - 3 2 2
Acquire knowledge on molecular weight and its
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 3 1 - - - - 1 2 2
significance
Acquire knowledge on glass transition
CO4 3 2 2 1 3 2 1 - - - - 1 2 2
temperature and melting point
Understand the concept of different moulding
CO5 techniques for different applications 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 - - - - 3 2 2

Understand the manufacture of water soluble

CO6 polymers and bio degradable polymers 3 2 2 2 1 - 2 - - 2 - 2 2 2

Overall CO 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 2 2 2
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

128
PC3004 FERTILIZER TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn the fertilizer manufacturing including new or modified
fertilizer products and new techniques

UNIT I NITROGENOUS FERTILISERS 9

Methods of production of nitrogenous fertilizer-ammonium sulphate, nitrate, urea and calcium
ammonium nitrate; ammonium chloride and their methods of production, characteristics and
specifications, storage and handling.

UNIT II PHOSPHATIC FERTILISERS 9

Raw materials; phosphate rock, sulphur; pyrites etc., processes for the production of sulphuric and
phosphoric acids; phosphates fertilizers - ground rock phosphate; bone meal-single
superphosphate, triple superphosphate, triple superphosphate, thermal phosphates and their
methods of production, characteristics and specifications.

UNIT III POTASSIC FERTILISERS 9

Methods of production of potassium chloride, potassium schoenite, their characteristics and
specifications.

UNIT IV COMPLEX AND NPK FERTILISERS 9

Methods of production of ammonium phosphate, sulphate diammonium phosphate,
nitrophosphates, urea, ammonium phosphate, mono-ammonium phosphate and various grades of
NPK fertilizers produced in the country.

UNIT V MISCELLANEOUS FERTILISERS 9

Mixed fertilizers and granulated mixtures; biofertilisers, nutrients, secondary nutrients and micro
nutrients; fluid fertilizers, controlled release fertilizers, controlled release fertilizers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Understand various manufacturing process involved in production of Nitrogenous fertilizers
 Concepts of phosphatic fertilizers types and their manufacturing methods
 Understand the role of potassium in plants and the method of production
 Study the complex and NPK fertilizers
 Acquire knowledge of bio fertilizers, fluid fertilizers and slow release fertilizers and their
applications
 Understand the major engineering problems encountered during the manufacturing
processes.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. “Handbook of fertilizer technology”, Association of India, New Delhi, 1977.
2. Menno, M.G.; “Fertilizer Industry - An Introductory Survey”, Higginbothams Pvt. Ltd., 1973.

REFERENCES:
1. Sauchelli, V.; “The Chemistry and Technology of Fertilizers”, ACS MONOGRAPH No.
148, Reinhold Publishing Cor. New York, 1980.
2. Fertiliser Manual, “United Nations Industrial Development Organisation”, United Nations, New
York, 1967.
3. Slack, A.V.; Chemistry and Technology of Fertilisers, Interscience, New York, 1966.

129
 Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Program Outcome

Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand various manufacturing
CO1 process involved in production of 1 3 2 - 2 - 1 - - - 1 - 3 3
Nitrogenous fertilizers
Concepts of phosphatic fertilizers types
CO2 and their manufacturing methods 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 3
Understand the role of potassium in
CO3 plants and the method of production 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 3

CO4 Study the complex and NPK fertilizers 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 3

Acquire knowledge of bio fertilizers, fluid
CO5 fertilizers and slow release fertilizers 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 3
and their applications
Understand the major engineering
CO6 problems encountered during the 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 - 1 - 1 - 3 3
manufacturing processes.
Overall CO 2 3 1 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

130
PC3005 PETROCHEMICAL DERIVATIVES LTPC
300 3
UNIT I PRECURSORS 9
Indian Petrochemical Industry - Sources of Petrochemicals - Classification of Petrochemicals -
Classification of Hydrocarbons - Alternate routes with flow diagram for production of methane,
ethylene, propylene, acetylene. Chemicals from methane, ethylene, propylene, acetylene.

UNIT II FIRST GENERATION PETROCHEMICALS 9

Alternate routes with flow diagram for production of butadiene, related dienes, aromatics –
Benzene, toluene, xylene – Chemicals from butadiene, related dienes, aromatics – Benzene,
toluene, xylene.

UNIT III SECOND GENERATION PETROCHEMICALS 9

Alternate routes with flow diagram for production of ethylene glycol, ethylene oxide, Ethyl
benzene, VCM, acrylonitrile, phenol, adipic acid, hexmethylenediamine, DMT, TPA, maleic
anhydride, styrene.

UNIT IV THIRD GENERATION PETROCHEMICALS 9

Polymerization – Modes and techniques – Production of polyethylene – LDPE, HDPE,
polypropylene, SBR, SAN, ABS, PU.

UNIT V THIRD GENERATION PETROCHEMICALS 9

Polyacrylonitrile, polyvinyl chloride, polycarbonates, nylon 6, nylon 66, polyesters, resins,
explosives, organic dyes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
CO 1 :Understand the techniques and their alternate production of precursors of petrochemicals
CO 2 : Understand the various chemicals from first generation petrochemicals and their alternate
routes for production.
CO 3 : Understand the manufacturing process of third generation of petrochemicals and their
alternate routes for production
CO 4 :Characterize polymers and elaborate its production processes
CO 5 :Describe the production processes of fibres, resins and explosives
CO 6 :Understand the role of chemical Engineering in the petrochemicals production

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhaskara Rao, B.K., “A Text on Petrochemicals”, Khanna Publishers, 2000.
2. SukumarMaiti, “Introduction to Petrochemicals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford and IBH Publishers,
2002.

REFERENCES:
1. Margaret Wells, “Handbook of Petrochemicals and Processes”, 2nd Edition, Ash Gate
Publishing Limited, 2002.
2. Sami Matar, and Lewis F. Hatch., “Chemistry of Petrochemical Processes”, 2nd Edition,
Gulf Publishing company, 2000.
3. Dryden, C.E., “Outlines of Chemical Technology”, 2nd Edition, Affiliated East-West Press,
1993

131
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Program Outcome

Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand the techniques
and their alternate production
CO1 1 3 2 - 2 - 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
of precursors of
petrochemicals
Understand the various
chemicals from first
CO2 generation petrochemicals 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
and their alternate routes for
production.
Understand the
manufacturing process of
third generation of
CO3 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
petrochemicals and their
alternate routes for
production
Characterize polymers and
CO4 elaborate its production 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
processes
Describe the production
CO5 processes of fibres, resins 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 - - - 1 - 3 2
and explosives
Understand the role of
CO6 chemical Engineering in the 2 3 1 1 1 2 1 - 1 - 1 - 3 2
petrochemicals production

Overall CO 2 3 1 0 1 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 3 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

132
CPE345 STORAGE TRANSPORTATION OF CRUDE OIL AND NATURAL GAS L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To understand the natural gas regasification technology, crude oil transportation and to
learn the concepts of storage.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Crude oil Trade, Selection of Port Location, Ship Building/Shipyards.

UNIT II NATURAL GAS REGASIFICATION TECHNOLOGY 9

Commercial Sourcing of Natural Gas, Different Kinds of Regasification Techniques, Regasification
Process & Cold Utilization, Synchronization of Degasified gas and Pipelines, Current Status in
India

UNIT III CRUDE OIL TRANSPORTATION 9

Transportation techniques of crude oil, Pipeline specification, Corrosion Prevention techniques,
Pressure drop, Pumps and Booster station, Wax deposition and prevention, Chemical treatment

UNIT IV DESIGN 9
Basic Engineering Aspects of Terminal Design, Design of Liquefaction Train, Ship
Building/Shipyards, Storage Facilities

UNIT V CHARTERTICS OF STORAGE 9

Supply & Demand, Variation Gas Field & Aquifers, Technical Qualities and Storage, Properties of
Storage Reservoir, Rocks & Fluids. Flow through Storage Reservoir; Inventory Concept,
Pressure- Content Hysteresis, Inventory Verification, Gas Flow Performance, Gas Deliverability.
Design & Development of Underground Storage Fields: Operation of Storage Fields. Threshold
Pressure. Water Influx/Efflux Quantities. Aquifer Equilibrium Pressure. Error and Uncertainty. Gas
Storage in Salt Cavity & Caverns: Thermodynamics, Temperature and Pressure Effect. Recent
Developments Advanced Storage Techniques, Case Histories.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
CO1: Students would be able to design various terminal design.
CO2: They will be familiarize with the storage systems.
CO3: Compute the Different Kinds of Regasification Techniques.
CO4: Evaluate the Pipeline specification, Corrosion Prevention techniques
CO5: To know about the Properties of Storage Reservoir, Rocks & Fluids
CO6: Regulate the Pressure- Content Hysteresis

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oilfield Processing: Crude Oil (Oilfield Processing of Petroleum R. Solvay, Pennwell Books
1995.
2. Advances in Environmental Control Technology: Storage Tank Paul Cheremisinoff Gulf
Professional Publishing; 1ST edition (May 9, 1996)

133
 Course Articulation Matrix: STORAGE TRANSPORTATION OF CRUDE OIL AND NATURAL GAS

Course Program Outcome

Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Students would be able to
CO1 design various terminal 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
design.
They will be familiarize with
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
the storage systems.
Compute the Different
CO3 Kinds of Regasification 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
Techniques.
Evaluate the Pipeline
CO4 specification, Corrosion 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
Prevention techniques
To know about the
CO5 Properties of Storage 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
Reservoir, Rocks & Fluids
Regulate the Pressure-
CO6 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
Content Hysteresis
Overall CO 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

134
CPE341 PETROLEUM CORROSION TECHNOLOGY LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVE:
 To understand the types of corrosion found in the petroleum industries. This course will
provide the student with knowledge of the analytical methods needed to diagnose, treat,
and monitor corrosion to reduce costs, protect the environment, and increase safety.

UNIT I 9
Introduction to corrosion control. Definitions - Materials involved - Basic corrosion principles -
corrosion rate. Electrochemical reactions. Electrode potentials – passivity – temperature –
pressure – velocity – conductivity - pH - dissolved gases. Corrosion in oil and gas production.

UNIT II 9
Forms of corrosion – uniform corrosion – Pitting - Galvanic corrosion - Intergranular and weld
corrosion - Selective Leaching - Stress corrosion. Impingement - Hydrogen embrittlement –
Corrosion fatigue.

UNIT III 9
Role of oxygen in oil filed corrosion- down hole and surface equipment - water flood. Removal of
oxygen, analysis and criteria for control. Role of carbon dioxide (CO2) in corrosion-Effect of
temperature and pressure - Corrosion of well tubing and other equipments. Role of hydrogen
sulphide (H2S)-Corrosion in downhole, surface, storage and pipelines.

UNIT IV 9
Corrosion prevention methods - Principles of operation and applications systems. Cathodic
protection – Galvanic systems - Corrosion prevention coatings- Corrosion prevention inhibitors-
types of corrosion inhibitors- Inhibitor selection and injection.

UNIT V 9
Inspection and corrosion monitoring. Oil treatment corrosion - crude oil properties - desalting-
sweetening processes. Corrosion in oil storage tank corrosion- oilfield and oil treating facilities-oil/
gas pipelines -offshore platforms- subsea systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
CO1 : Understand the basic concepts of corrosion and its impacts.
CO2 : Understand the various types of corrosion in in petroleum processes.
CO.3 : Gain knowledge on removal techniques of various gases in pipelines applications.
CO4 : Understand the corrosion preventing methods.
CO5 : Design the offshore drilling structures based on project requirement.
CO6 : Evaluate the corrosion rate and propose the protection method based on environmental
considerations.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. “Corrosion control in Petroleum production”-TPC 5-2-nd edition H.G.Byars NACE
International, 1999.
2. Chemical engineering series, coulson and Richardson, Mc Graw Hill Publications.

REFERENCE:
1. Standard Handbook of Petroleum and Natural Gas Engineering. 2nd Edition. William C
Lyons, Gary C Plisga. Gulf Professional Publishing.

135
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Program Outcome

Outcome Statement
s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand the basic
CO1 concepts of corrosion 3 2 1 - - - - - - 1 - 2 2 2
and its impacts.
Understand the various
CO2 types of corrosion in in 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - 2 3 2
petroleum processes.
Gain knowledge on
removal techniques of
CO3 various gases in
2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - 2 3 2
pipelines applications.
Understand the
CO4 corrosion preventing 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - 2 2 2
methods
Design the offshore
CO5 drilling structures based 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - 2 3 2
on project requirement
Evaluate the corrosion
rate and propose the
CO6 protection method based 1 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - 2 2 2
on environmental
considerations.
Overall CO 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

136
CPE343 PIPING ENGINEERING LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
This course offers an insight into the design, operation and maintenance of pipes and piping
networks.

UNIT I PIPING FUNDAMENTALS: 9

Introduction to Piping – Pipe and tube, Classification of Pipes, Piping Materials and Selection
criteria, Piping components – Valves, Joints and Fittings. Fluid Flow Problems – Estimation of
Major and Minor Losses, Pumping requirements

UNIT II PIPING IN PRACTICE: 9

Piping Network – Series and Parallel pipes, Pipe Network analysis using spreadsheets. piping for
pumps and compressor

UNIT III GENERIC PIPING DESIGNS: 9

Usage of Standard and codes. Piping Design – material compatibility, estimation of optimum
diameter, selection of valves and fittings, complexity factor, stress analysis, selection of pipe
supports.

UNIT IV PIPING SYSTEMS: 9

Design considerations for piping systems – water and waste water, steam, compressed air,
industrial gases, oil, refrigeration, solid and slurry systems

UNIT V OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE: 9

Inspection of Pipelines – Testing techniques and leak detection. Maintenance – Cleaning, coating,
freeze prevention, drag reduction, insulation, Common failures and repair techniques, Piping Plan
development
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Apply the fundamental principles of fluid mechanics to solve fluid flow problems
CO2: Interpret the piping symbols and codes and sketch a piping layout for a given
Problem.
CO3: Describe the concepts of generic piping design for optimal design of piping systems
CO4: Explain the process of design of various pipelines systems
CO5: Discuss the techniques involved in inspection and maintenance of pipelines
CO6 :Explain various applications of pipes & pipeline systems in process industries

TEXT BOOKS
1. Henry Liu, "Pipeline Engineering", 2nd Edition, Lewis Publishers, United State of America,
2003. Unit I & II
2. Mohinder L. Nayyar, "Piping Handbook", 7th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, United States of America, 2000. Unit III, IV & V

REFERENCES:
1. John J Mcketta, "Piping Handbook", 3rd Edition, Marcel Dekker Inc, United State of
America, 1992.

137
Course Statement PIPING ENGINEERING
Outcome PO PO PO PO
PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
s 1 2 3 4
CO1 Apply the fundamental principles of fluid
mechanics to solve fluid flow problems 3 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1 -

CO2 Interpret the piping symbols and codes

and sketch a piping layout for a given 2 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1 -
Problem.
CO3 Describe the concepts of generic piping
design for optimal design of piping 2 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1 -
systems
CO4 Explain the process of design of various
pipeline systems 2 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1 -
CO5 Discuss the techniques involved in
inspection and maintenance of 2 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1 -
pipelines
CO6 Explain various applications of pipes &
1 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1 -
pipeline systems in process industries
Overall CO 2 2 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

138
CPE347 UNCONVENTIONAL HYDROCARBON SOURCES L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the geographic distribution of unconventional hydrocarbon resources
 To understand characterization of source and reservoir rocks
 To understand methodology to produce these reserves
 To understand environmental consequences of producing these reserves
 Demonstrate awareness related to environmental issues involved in the development
 of non-conventional hydrocarbon resources.

UNIT I NON-CONVENTIONAL OIL 9

Continuous Accumulation System
Introduction, geology of Heavy oil, extra heavy oil, Tar Sand and bituminous, oil shales, their origin
and occurrence worldwide, resources, reservoir characteristics, new production technologies.

UNIT II SHALE GAS/ OIL RESERVOIR 9

Introduction to shale gas & basin centered gas, tight reservoirs. Shale gas geology, important
occurrences in India, petrophysical properties, Development of shale gas, design of hydro
fracturing job, horizontal wells, production profiles.

UNIT III COAL BED METHANE 9

Formation and properties of coal bed methane. Thermodynamics of coal bed methane. Exploration
and Evaluation of CBM. Hydro-fracturing of coal seam. Production installation and surface
facilities. Well operations and production equipment.

UNIT IV GAS HYDRATES 9

Introduction & present status of gas hydrates. Formation and properties of gas hydrates,
Thermodynamics of gas hydrates. Recovery methods. Prevention& control of gas hydrates, Gas
hydrates accumulation in porous medium. Gasextraction from gas hydrates.

UNIT V COAL AND GAS CONVERSION TO OIL 9

Introduction, classification and principles, pyrolysis, theoretical aspect of processes involved
inconversion. Technological development of direct conversion and indirect processes and
sustainability of conversions.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
 Recognise and apply the concept of continuous accumulation system.
 Apply the concepts related to exploration and development of Shale Gas Reservoirs.
 Apply the concepts related to exploration and development of Coal Bed Methane.
 Understand and apply the concepts related to formation of gas hydrates.
 Understand and apply different conversion processes for the production of Hydrocarbons.

REFERENCES:
1. Carrol John, 2003, Natural Gas Hydrates: A guide for engineers, Gulf Publications.
2. Farooqi Ali, S M, Jones S A and Meldau R F, Practical Heavy Oil Recovery, SPE, 1997.
3. James T. Bartis, Frank Camm, David S. Ortiz, Producing Liquid Fuels from Coal, Prospects
and Policy Issues. NETL, DOE, USA, 2008.
4. Warner, H.R., 2009, Emerging and Peripheral Technologies, Society of Petroleum
Engineers, Handbook, Volume VI.
5. Pramod Thakur, Steve Schatzel and KashyAminian, (Editors), 2014, Coal Bed Methane:
From Prospects to Pipeline, Elsevier,
6. Rafiqul Islam, M, 2014, Unconventional Gas Reservoirs: Evaluation, Appraisal, and
Development, Gulf Professional Publishing.

139
 Course Articulation Matrix: UNCONVENTIONAL HYDROCARBON SOURCES

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2
Recognize and apply the concept of continuous
CO1 3 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
accumulation system
Apply the concepts related to exploration and
CO2 development of Shale Gas Reservoirs 3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
Apply the concepts related to exploration and
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
development of Coal Bed Methane
Understand and apply the concepts related to
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2
formation of gas hydrates
Understand and apply different conversion
CO5 processes for the production of Hydrocarbons 3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2

Overall CO 3 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

140
CPE332 DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS AND STORAGE VESSLES LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 The main objective is to present the industrial related problems, procedures and design.
 Principles for pressure vessels and enhance the understanding of design procedure of
pressure vessel and supports.

UNIT I DESIGN OF PIPE FITTINGS AND JOINTS 9

Stress-strain relationships of elastic materials subjected to tensile, compressive and shear forces;
Membrane stresses in shells of revolutions; Theories of failures. Design and schematic of simple
bolts and screws. Design and drawing of shafts and couplings.

UNIT II DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS 9

Unfired pressure vessel: Pressure vessel codes; Design of cylindrical and spherical shells under
internal and external pressures; Selection and design of flat plate, tori spherical, ellipsoidal, and
conical closures; Shell design of tall vertical vessels; Compensations of openings.

UNIT III DESIGN OF STORAGE VESSELS 9

Liquid storage tanks: Storage tank codes; Classification; Design of shell, bottom plates, self-
supported, and column supported roofs; Wind girder; Nozzles and other accessories.

UNIT IV FABRICATION AND MATERIALS 9

Fabrication of equipment: Major fabrication steps; Vessel lining; Materials used in fabrication of
Chemical Equipments. Vessel Coatings – selection and application. Selection of process
equipment’s material. Material selection for process fluids.

UNIT V DESIGN OF SUPPORTS FOR VESSELS 9

Introduction – Types of Support – Design of Skirts, Brackets, Saddle and Leg supports. Special
types of supports for vessels.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
CO1: Students would be able to understand the principles Stress-strain relationships of elastic
materials Design and drawing of shafts and couplings
CO2: Enhanced the knowledge on Design of cylindrical and spherical shells under internal and
external pressures.
CO3: Study on Fundamental and Technological principled involved in design of storage
vessels.
CO4: Understanding the principles involved in Material selection for process fluids.
CO5: Understanding the principles involved in piping layout and piping stress Analysis.
CO6: Skills on Fundamental and Technological principles involved design of pressure
vessels and storage vessles

TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.S. Khurmi, “Textbook of Machine design”. S. Chand & Company , XXV Edition, 2005.
2. M.V. Joshi and V.V. Mahajan, “Design of Process Equipment Design”, McMillan India III
Edition 1994.
3. Bhattacharyya, B.C., “Introduction to chemical Equipment Design: Mechanical aspects”,
CBS Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi.

REFERENCES:
1. S.D. Dawande, “Process Design of Equipments”, Central Techno Publications, Nagpur,
2000.
2. Indian Standard Specifications IS-803, 1962; IS-4072, 1967; IS-2825, 1969. Indian
Standards Institution, New Delhi.
3. R.H. Perry, “Chemical Engineers’ Handbook”, McGraw-Hill.

141
4. Ludwig, E.E., Applied Process Design for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants”, Volume I,
II, and III, Gulf Publishing Co.
5. J.M. Coulson and J.Richardson, “Chemical Engineering”, Vol. 6, Asian Books Printers Ltd.

142
Course Articulation Matrix: DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS AND STORAGE VESSLES

Course Statement PROGRAM OUTCOME

Outcomes P P P P P P P
PO1 O O O O O O O PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CO1 Students would be able to understand the 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 3 3 3 3
principles Stress-strain relationships of elastic
materials Design and drawing of shafts and
couplings
CO2 Enhanced the knowledge on Design of cylindrical 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 2 3 3 3
and spherical shells under internal and external
pressures.
CO3 Study on Fundamental and Technological 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 2 1 3 3 3
principled involved in design of storage vessels.
CO4 Understanding the principles involved in Material 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 - 1 2 1 3 3 3
selection for process fluids.
CO5 Understanding the principles involved in piping 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 - 1 3 2 3 2 3
layout and piping stress Analysis.
CO6 Skills on Fundamental and Technological 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 - 1 1 3 3 2 3
principles involved design of pressure vessels
and storage vessles
OVERALL CO 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - 1 2 2 3 3 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

143
CPE339 NATURAL GAS AND LNG PROCESSING L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the basic concept and properties, composition of natural Gas.
 To impart estimation and production of natural gas.
 To gain knowledge about production of natural gas from condensate oil fields.
 To learn the acid gas treating of natural gas.
 To gain knowledge about dehydration of natural gas and LNG processes.

UNIT I PROPERTIES AND COMPOSITION OF NATURAL GAS 9

Natural gas origin – Composition of natural gas – Sources of Natural gas– Thermodynamics
properties – Compressibility factor and chart for natural gas – Heating value and flammability limit
of natural gas.

UNIT II ESTIMATION AND PRODUCTION OF NATURAL GAS 9

Estimation of gas reserves by volumetric method – Production of natural gas –Pressure decline
method – Problems in the production of natural gas – Field separation.

UNIT III GAS FROM CONDENSATE OIL FIELDS 9

Processing of condensate well fluids – Cycling of gas condensate reservoirs – Sweep patterns –
Katy cycling plant.

UNIT IV ACID GAS TREATING OF NATURAL GAS 9

Acid gas removal: Metal oxide process – Slurry process – Amine process –Carbonate washing
process – Methanol based process and other process – Sulphur recoveryprocess.

UNIT V DEHYDRATION OF NATURAL GAS AND LNG PROCESSES 9

Dehydration: Glycol dehydration – Solid desiccant dehydration. NGL Recovery: Refrigeration
process – Lean oil absorption process – Solid bed adsorption and membrane separation process
– NGL fractionation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the students would be able to
CO1: Understand Natural gas processing.
CO2: Understand Gas Compression, Gas Gathering and Transport Installation.
CO3: Apply knowledge operation and trouble shootingof natural gas pipelines.
CO4: Understand dehydration of natural gas
CO5: Evaluate LNG processes and operations
CO6: Create new process technology for NGE and LNG processes.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Katz and Lee “Hand Book of Natural Gas Engineering” McGraw Hill, 1968.
2. Lyons, W.C., “Standard Handbook of Petroleum and Natural Gas Engineering”,
Vol.2,Gulf Professional Publishing, Elsevier Inc., 2006.

REFERENCES:
1. Katz, D. L. and Lee, R.L., “Natural Gas Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 1990.
2. Dring, M.M., “The Natural Gas Industry – A Review of World Resources and
IndustrialApplications”, Butterworth, 1974.
3. Saied Mokhatab, William A. Poe, and James G. Speight, “Handbook of Natural Gas
4. Transmission and Processing”, Gulf Professional Publishing, Elsevier Inc., 2006.

144
 Course Articulation Matrix: NATURAL GAS AND LNG PROCESSES

Course Statement PROGRAM OUTCOME

Outcomes PO1 PO 2 PO3 PO4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

Remembering knowledge about Natural gas

CO1 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
processing.
Understanding about Natural gas processing, Gas
CO2 Compression, Gas Gathering and 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
Transport Installation.
Appling knowledge about Operation and trouble
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
shooting of natural gas pipelines.
Analyzing knowledge about dehydration of natural
CO4 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
gas
CO5 Evaluating LNG processes and operations 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
Creating new process technology for NGE and
CO6 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
LNG processes.
OVERALL CO 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

145
CPC331 FIRE AND EXPLOSION CONTROL LT PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE
 To gain knowledge on BLEVE vapour cloud explosion.
 To learn about principles of fire extinguishers.
 To gain knowledge on industrial fire protection systems.
 To learn about the fire protection and fire safety equipment.
 To Gain knowledge on explosive control.

UNIT I PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF FIRE 9

Fire properties of solid, liquid and gases - fire spread - toxicity of products of combustion - theory
of combustion and explosion – vapour clouds – flash fire – jet fires – pool fires – unconfined
vapour cloud explosion, shock waves - auto-ignition – boiling liquid expanding vapour explosion –
case studies – Flixborough, Mexico disaster, Pasedena Texas, Piper Alpha, Bombay Victoria dock
ship explosions, Mahul refinery explosion, Nagothanevapour cloud explosion and Vizag refinery
disaster.

UNIT II FIRE PREVENTION AND PROTECTION 9

Sources of ignition – fire triangle Fire Tetrahedron – principles of fire extinguishing – active and
passive fire protection systems – various classes of fires – A, B, C, D, E-Fire extinguishing agents-
Water ,Foam, Dry chemical powder, Carbon-dioxide- Halon alternatives Halocarbon compounds-
Inert gases , dry powders – types of fire extinguishers – fire stoppers – hydrant pipes – hoses –
monitors – fire watchers – lay out of stand pipes – fire station-fire alarms and sirens – maintenance
of fire trucks – foam generators – escape from fire rescue operations – fire drills – notice-first aid
for burns.

UNIT III INDUSTRIAL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 9

Sprinkler-hydrants-stand pipes – special fire suppression systems like deluge and emulsifier,
selection criteria of the above installations, reliability, maintenance, evaluation and standards –
alarm and detection systems. Other suppression systems – CO2 system, foam system, dry
chemical powder (DCP) system, halon system – need for halon replacement – smoke venting.
Portable extinguishers – flammable liquids – tank farms – indices of inflammability-firefighting
systems.

UNIT IV BUILDING FIRE SAFETY 9

Objectives of fire safe building design, Fire load, fire resistant material and fire testing – structural
fire protection – structural integrity – concept of egress design - exit – width calculations - fire
certificates – fire safety requirements for high rise buildings.

UNIT V EXPLOSION PROTECTING SYSTEMS 9

Principles of explosion-detonation and blast waves-explosion parameters – Explosion Protection,
Containment, Flame Arrestors, isolation, suppression, venting, explosion relief of large enclosure-
explosion venting-inert gases, plant for generation of inert gas rupture disc in process vessels and
lines explosion, suppression system based on carbon dioxide (CO2) and halons-hazards in LPG,
ammonia (NH3).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
On successful completion of this course, the student will able to
CO1 To obtain knowledge on properties of fire and case studies related to fire
CO2 To make familiar about basic concepts of fire and explosion science.
CO3 To know the different source of ignition and their prevention techniques.
CO4 To understand the operation of various types of firefighting equipments.
CO5 To understand the causes and prevention of explosion.
CO6 To equip the students to effectively employ explosion protection techniques and their
Significances to suit the industrial requirement.

146
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. “Fire safety management”, 3rd edition – DanialE.DellaGiustina – 2014.
2. “Manual of fire safety “, N.Seghaprakash – 2011.
3. “A hand book of fire technology”, R. S. Gupta – 2010.
4. “Dust explosion and fire prevention handbook”, Nicholas P. Cheremisinoff – 2014.
5. “Industrial Fire Protection Handbook”, R.CraigSchrool – 2002.

147
 Course Articulation Matrix: FIRE AND EXPLOSION CONTROL

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcome’s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

To obtain knowledge on properties

CO1 of fire and case studies related to 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 3 2
fire
To make familiar about basic
CO2 concepts of fire and explosion 3 2 - - - 3 - - - - - 1 3 2
science.
To know the different source of
CO3 ignition and their prevention 2 2 1 - 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2
techniques.
To understand the operation of
CO4 various types of firefighting 2 2 2 - - - - - 3 - - 1 3 2
equipments.
To understand the causes and
CO5 1 1 1 - - - - - - 3 - 1 3 2
prevention of explosion.
To equip the students to effectively
employ explosion protection
CO6 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 3 2
techniques and their Significances
to suit the industrial requirement.
Overall CO 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 3 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

148
CPE338 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic knowledge on anatomy of human organs and its basic functions.
 To enable the students to learn about various functions and activities of occupational
health services.
 To enable students to compare the hazards with the permissible levels.
 To have knowledge about types of hazards arising out of physical, chemical and biological
agents.

UNIT I PHYSICAL HAZARDS 9

Noise, compensation aspects, noise exposure regulation, properties of sound, occupational
damage, risk factors, sound measuring instruments, octave band analyzer, noise networks, noise
surveys, noise control program, industrial audiometry, hearing conservation programs- vibration,
types, effects, instruments, surveying procedure, permissible exposure limit. Ionizing radiation,
types, effects, monitoring instruments, control programs, OSHA standard- nonionizing radiations,
effects, types, radar hazards, microwaves and radio-waves, lasers, TLV- cold environments,
hypothermia, wind chill index, control measures- hot environments, thermal comfort, heat stress
indices, acclimatization, estimation and control

UNIT II CHEMICAL HAZARDS 9

Recognition of chemical hazards-dust, fumes, mist, vapour, fog, gases, types, concentration,
Exposure vs. dose, TLV - Methods of Evaluation, process or operation description, Field Survey,
Sampling methodology, Industrial Hygiene calculations, Comparison with OSHAS Standard. Air
Sampling instruments, Types, Measurement Procedures, Instruments Procedures, Gas and
Vapour monitors, dust sample collection devices, personal sampling Methods of Control -
Engineering Control, Design maintenance considerations, design specifications - General Control
Methods - training and education

UNIT III BIOLOGICAL AND ERGONOMICAL HAZARDS 9

Classification of Biohazardous agents – examples, bacterial agents, rickettsial and chlamydial
agents, viral agents, fungal, parasitic agents, infectious diseases - Biohazard control program,
employee health program-laboratory safety program-animal care and handling-biological safety
cabinets - building design. Work Related Musculoskeletal Disorders –carpal tunnel syndrome
CTS- Tendon pain-disorders of the neck- back injuries.

UNIT IV OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND TOXICOLOGY 9

Concept and spectrum of health - functional units and activities of occupational health services,
preemployment and post-employment medical examinations - occupational related diseases,
levels of prevention of diseases, notifiable occupational diseases such as silicosis, asbestosis,
pneumoconiosis, siderosis, anthracosis, aluminosis and anthrax, lead-nickel, chromium and
manganese toxicity, gas poisoning (such as CO, ammonia, coal and dust etc) their effects and
prevention – cardio pulmonary resuscitation, audiometric tests, eye tests, vital function tests.
Industrial toxicology, local, systemic and chronic effects, temporary and cumulative effects,
carcinogens entry into human systems

UNIT V OCCUPATIONAL PHYSIOLOGY 9

Man as a system component – allocation of functions – efficiency – occupational work capacity –
aerobic and anaerobic work – evaluation of physiological requirements of jobs – parameters of
measurements – categorization of job heaviness – work organization – stress – strain – fatigue –
rest pauses – shift work – personal hygiene.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able

149
CO1: To understand the various physiological functions of our body and the test methods for
periodical monitoring of health.
CO2: Determine the physical hazard at workplace and suggest control measures.
CO3: Compute the chemical hazards at workplace with adequate mitigating actions.
CO4 : Evaluate the biological and ergonomical hazards at workplace and associated risk factors.
CO5: Practice the occupational health strategies at workplace.
CO6: Regulate the man machine interface in the organization.

REFERENCES:
1. Benjamin O.Alli, Fundamental Principles of Occupational Health and Safety ILO 2008.
2. Danuta Koradecka, Handbook of Occupational Health and Safety, CRC, 2010.
3. E.J. McCornick, and M. S Sanders, Human Factors in Engineering and Design, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 1992.
4. Encyclopedia of “Occupational Health and Safety”, Vol.I and II, published by International
Labour Office, Geneva, 1985
5. Hand book of “Occupational Safety and Health”, National Safety Council, Chicago, 1982.
2. Hand book of “Occupational Safety and Health”, National Safety Council, Chicago, 1982 7.
Lawrence Slote , Handbook of occupational safety and health, Wiley, 2001.
3. Louis J. Di Berardinis, Handbook of occupational safety and health Wiley, 1999.

150
 Course Articulation Matrix: INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE

Course Program Outcome

Statement
Outcome’s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
To understand the various
physiological functions of our
CO1 3 1 2 1 - − − − − − − _ 3 2
body and the test methods for
periodical monitoring of health.
Determine the physical hazard at
CO2 workplace and suggest control 2 1 3 1 3 − − − − − − - 3 2
measures.
Compute the chemical hazards at
CO3 workplace with adequate 2 1 2 2 3 - - - - - - - 3 2
mitigating actions.
Evaluate the biological and
CO4 ergonomical hazards at workplace 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 3 2
and associated risk factors.
Practice the occupational health
CO5 2 2 1 3 - − − − − − − 2 3 2
strategies at workplace.
Regulate the man machine
CO6 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 3 2
interface in the organization.
Overall CO 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

151
CPE346 TRANSPORTATION SAFETY LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the students about the various activities/steps to be followed in safe handling
the hazardous goods transportation from one location to another location.
 To educate the reasons for the road accident and the roles and responsibilities of a safe
Driver and the training needs of the driver.
 To inculcate the culture of safe driving and fuel conservation along with knowing of basic
traffic symbols followed throughout the highways.
 To understand the accident reporting and investigation procedures
 To understand the various breaking characteristics of vehicle
 To provide an in depth knowledge about the safe driving safe driving movement of cranes-
conveyors

UNIT I TRANSPORTATION OF HAZARDOUS GOODS 9

Transport emergency card (TREM) – driver training-parking of tankers on the highways-speed of
the vehicle – warning symbols – design of the tanker lorries -static electricity-responsibilities of
driver – inspection and maintenance of vehicles-check list- loading and decanting procedures –
communication.

UNIT II ROAD TRANSPORT 8

Introduction – factors for improving safety on roads – causes of accidents due to drivers and
pedestrians-design, selection, operation and maintenance of motor trucks-preventive maintenance
check lists-motor vehicles act – motor vehicle insurance and surveys.

UNIT III DRIVER AND SAFETY 9

Driver safety programme – selection of drivers – driver training-tacho-graph-driving test-driver’s
responsibility-accident reporting and investigation procedures-fleet accident frequency-safe driving
incentives-slogans in driver cabin-motor vehicle transport workers act- driver relaxation and rest
pauses – speed and fuel conservation – emergency planning and Haz mat codes

UNIT IV ROAD SAFETY 10

Road alignment and gradient-reconnaissance-ruling gradient-maximum rise per k.m.- factors
influencing alignment like tractive resistance, tractive force, direct alignment, vertical curves-
breaking characteristics of vehicle-skidding-restriction of speeds-significance of speeds- Pavement
conditions – Sight distance – Safety at intersections – Traffic control lines and guide posts-guard
rails and barriers – street lighting and illumination overloading-concentration of driver. Plant
railway: Clearance-track-warning methods-loading and unloading-moving cars-safety practices.

UNIT V SHOP FLOOR AND REPAIR SHOP SAFETY 9

Transport precautions-safety on manual, mechanical handling equipment operations-safe
drivingmovement of cranes-conveyors etc., servicing and maintenance equipment-grease rack
operationwash rack operation-battery charging-gasoline handling-other safe practices-off the road
motorized equipment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students will be able to
CO1: Recognize various safety activities undertaken in transporting of hazardous goods
CO2: Understand the various symbols which are specific to the road safety and able to reduce the
accidents occurred in the roads.
CO3: Apply for the safe transportation of hazardous goods, creating TREM card and safe loading
and unloading procedure.
CO4:To understand the various types of – emergency planning and Haz mat codes
CO5: To understand the loading and unloading of moving cars

152
CO6:To equip the students to effectively manual, mechanical handling equipment operations
Significances to suit the industrial requirement

REFERENCES
1. “Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations”, NSC, Chicago, 1982.
2. Babkov, V.F., “Road Conditions and Traffic Safety” MIR Publications, Moscow, 1986.
3. K.W.Ogden, “Safer Roads – A guide to Road Safety Engineering”
4. Kadiyali, “Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning” Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1983.
5. Motor Vehicles Act, 1988, Government of India.
6. Pasricha, “Road Safety guide for drivers of heavy vehicle” Nasha Publications, Mumbai, 1999.
7. Popkes, C.A. “Traffic Control and Road Accident Prevention” Chapman and Hall Limited, 1986.

153
 Course Articulation Matrix: TRANSPORTATION SAFETY
Course Program Outcome
Statement
Outcome’s PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Recognize various safety
activities undertaken in
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 3 2
transporting of hazardous
goods
Understand the various
symbols which are specific
CO2 to the road safety and able 3 2 - - - 3 - - - - - 1 3 2
to reduce the accidents
occurred in the roads.
Apply for the safe
transportation of
hazardous goods, creating
CO3 2 2 1 - 3 - - - - - - 1 3 2
TREM card and safe
loading and unloading
procedure.
To understand the various
types of – emergency
CO4 2 2 2 - - - - - 3 - - 1 3 2
planning and Haz mat
codes
To understand the loading
CO5 and unloading of moving 1 1 1 - - - - - - 3 - 1 3 2
cars
To equip the students to
effectively manual,
mechanical handling
CO6 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 3 2
equipment operations
Significances to suit the
industrial requirement
Overall CO 2 2 1 - 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 3 2
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

154
CPC333 PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS STUDIES LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES
 To gain knowledge on PHA, HAZOP studies.
 To learn about BAM testing and thermal analysis.
 To learn about HAZAN, FMEA, FET index.
 To gain knowledge on CPQRA, CAMEO.
 To learn about intermediate, risk on CPQRA.

UNIT I HAZARD, RISK ISSUES AND HAZARD ASSESSMENT 9

Introduction, hazard, hazard monitoring-risk issue - Hazard assessment, procedure, methodology;
safety audit, checklist analysis, what-if analysis, safety review, preliminary hazard analysis (PHA),
hazard operability studies (HAZOP).

UNIT II THERMAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARD ASSESSMENT 9

Applications of Advanced Equipment’s and Instruments, Thermo Calorimetry, Differential Scanning
Calorimeter (DSC), Thermo Gravimetric Analyzer (TGA), Accelerated Rate Calorimeter (ARC),
Principles of operations, Controlling parameters, Applications, advantages. Explosive Testing,
Deflagration Test, Detonation Test, Ignition Test, Minimum ignition energy Test, Sensitiveness
Test, Impact Sensitiveness Test (BAM) and Friction Sensitiveness Test (BAM), Shock
Sensitiveness Test, Card Gap Test.

UNIT III RISK QUANTIFICATION AND SOFTWARES 9

Fault Tree Analysis and Event Tree Analysis, Logic symbols, methodology, minimal cut set ranking
- fire explosion and Index (FEI)-fire explosion and toxicity index (FETI), various indices - Hazard
analysis (HAZAN)- Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)

UNIT IV CHEMICAL PROCESS QUANTITATIVE RISK ANALYSIS 9

CPQRA Definitions-components Techniques of CPQRA-Scope of CPQRA- Applications of
CPQRA- Utilization of CPQRA results. Hazard identification based on the properties of chemicals-
Chemical inventory analysis- identification of hazardous processes - Estimation of source term,
Gas or vapour release, liquid release, two phase release- Heat radiation effects, BLEVE, Pool fires
and Jet fire- Gas/vapour dispersion- Explosion, UVCE and Flash fire, Explosion effects and
confined explosion- Toxic effects- Plotting the damage distances on plot plant/layout - Software
CAMEO, ALOHA & MARPLOT.

UNIT V APPLICATION OF CPQRA 9

Simple /consequence CPQRA Examples Characterization, application to a new process unit,
application to an existing process unit. Intermediate/ Frequency CPQRA characterization-
application to existing/new process units. Complex/risk CPQRA Characterization. Application to
new or existing process Unit.
Case Studies of Flixborough, Bhopal, Texas, ONGC offshore, HPCL Vizag and Jaipur IOC oil-
storage depot incident; Oil, natural gas, chlorine and ammonia storage and transportation hazards.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1:Understand the basics of hazard and hazard assessment.
CO2:Know about the various advanced equipment and testing.
CO3:Acquire software knowledge on risk analysis.
CO4:Obtain knowledge on application of CPQRA.
CO5:Analyze the risk associated with chemicals process.
CO6:Obtain knowledge on chemical process quantitative risk analysis

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Methods in Chemical Process Safety, Volume 1 (1st Edition) - 7th April 2017.

155
2. Hazop and Hazan, Fourth Edition – IchemE 4th Edition- 2001.
3. Guidelines for Process Hazards Analysis (PHA, HAZOP), Hazards Identification, and Risk
Analysis (English, Paperback, Hyatt Nigel).
4. Quantitative Risk Assessment for Environmental and Occupational Health Hardcover –
Import, 9 Jun 1993.
5. Lees' Loss Prevention in the Process Industries (3rd Edition) - 27th December 2004.

156
 Course Articulation Matrix: PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS STUDIES

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand the basics 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO1 of hazard and hazard
assessment
CO2 Know about the various 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
advanced equipment
and testing.
CO3 Acquire software 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
knowledge on risk
analysis.
CO4 Obtain knowledge on 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
application of CPQRA.
CO5 Analyze the risk 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
associated with
chemicals process.
CO6 Obtain knowledge on 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
chemical process
quantitative risk
analysis
Overall CO 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

157
CPE336 HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT L T PC
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To educate about the health hazards and the safety measures to be followed in the
industrial environment.
 Describe industrial legislations (Factories Acts, Workmen's Compensation and other laws)
enacted for the protection of employees health at work settings
 Describe methods of prevention and control of Occupational Health diseases, accidents /
emergencies and other hazards

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Need for developing Environment, Health and Safety systems in work places - Accident Case
Studies - Status and relationship of Acts - Regulations and Codes of Practice - Role of trade union
safety representatives. International initiatives - Ergonomics and work place.

UNIT II OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND HYGIENE 9

Definition of the term occupational health and hygiene - Categories of health hazards - Exposure
pathways and human responses to hazardous and toxic substances - Advantages and limitations
of environmental monitoring and occupational exposure limits - Hierarchy of control measures for
occupational health risks - Role of personal protective equipment and the selection criteria -
Effects on humans - control methods and reduction strategies for noise, radiation and excessive
stress.

UNIT III WORKPLACE SAFETY AND SAFETY SYSTEMS 9

Features of Satisfactory and Safe design of work premises – good housekeeping - lighting and
colour, Ventilation and Heat Control – Electrical Safety – Fire Safety – Safe Systems of work for
manual handling operations – Machine guarding – Working at different levels – Process and
System Safety.

UNIT IV HAZARDS AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Safety appraisal - analysis and control techniques – plant safety inspection – Accident
investigation - Analysis and Reporting – Hazard and Risk Management Techniques – major
accident hazard control – Onsite and Offsite emergency Plans.

UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9

Concept of Environmental Health and Safety Management – Elements of Environmental Health
and Safety Management Policy and methods of its effective implementation and review –
Elements of Management Principles – Education and Training – Employee Participation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to:
CO1: Describe, with example, the common work-related diseases and accidents in occupational
setting
CO2: Name essential members of the Occupational Health team
CO3: What roles can a community health practitioners play in an Occupational setting to ensure
the protection, promotion and maintenance of the health of the employee
CO4:Analyze the occupational safety and health is organization.
CO5:Obtain knowledge on accident investigation environmental health and safety management
CO6: Know about the concept of environmental health and safety management

REFERENCES:
1. Fundamentals of Industrial Safety and Health by Dr.K.U.Mistry, Siddharth Prakashan, 2012
2. Environmental and Health and Safety Management by Nicholas P.Cheremisinoff and
Madelyn L. Graffia, William Andrew Inc. NY, 1995

158
3. The Facility Manager's Guide to Environmental Health and Safety by Brian Gallant,
Government Inst Publ., 2007.
4. Effective Environmental, Health, and Safety Management Using the Team Approach by Bill
Taylor, Culinary and Hospitality Industry Publications Services, 2005.
5. William F.Martin, and Steven P.Levine, “Protecting Personnel at Hazardous waste Sites”,
Second Edition, Buttorworth. Heinemann, 1994.

159
 Course Articulation Matrix: HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 Describe, with example, the 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
common work-related diseases and
accidents in occupational setting
CO2 Name essential members of the 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
Occupational Health team
CO3 What roles can a community 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
health practitioners play in an
Occupational setting to ensure the
protection, promotion and
maintenance of the health of the
employee
CO4 Analyze the occupational safety 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
and health is organization.
CO5 Obtain knowledge on accident 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
investigation environmental health
and safety management
CO6 Know about the concept of 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2
environmental health and safety
management
Overall CO 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

160
CPE344 PLANT SAFETY AND RISK MANAGEMENT L T PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVES
The course is aimed to
 To understand the need of safety in industries.
 To understand the safety regulations.
 To identify the hazards in the process plants.
 To Know about safety audit
 To understand the risk analysis techniques.

UNIT I NEED FOR SAFETY IN INDUSTRIES 9

Importance & objectives of safety- Safety Programmes – components and realization;
Potentialhazards – extreme operating conditions, toxic chemicals; safe handling

UNIT II PLANT SAFETY AND SAFETY REGULATION 9

Implementation of safety procedures – periodic inspection and replacement; Accidents -
identification and prevention; Criteria for setting & layout of chemical plant, Factories Act and
Safety Regulations.

UNIT III PLANT HAZARDS & RISK ANALYSIS 9

Fire hazards- Chemical hazards, Toxic hazards, Explosion hazards, Electrical hazards,
Mechanical hazards, Radiation hazards, Noise hazards-Overall risk analysis--emergency
planning-on site & off site emergency planning, risk management ISO 14000, EMS models case
studies. Quantitative risk assessment - rapid and comprehensive risk analysis; Risk due to
Radiation, explosion due to over pressure, jet fire-fire ball.

UNIT IV SAFETY AUDIT 9

Objective of safety audit- Hazard identification safety audits, checklist, what if analysis,
vulnerability models event tree analysis fault tree analysis, Hazan past accident analysis
Fixborough-Mexico-Madras-Vizag Bopal analysis

UNIT V RISK ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES 9

Hazard & Operability (HAZOP) studies- Hazard Analysis (HAZAN)-Fault Tree Analysis
Consequence Analysis.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Understand the importance of safety and its objectives.
CO2: Understand the implementation of safety and identification and prevention of Accidents.
CO3: Know about the types of hazards, emergency plan and ISO standards for safety studies.
CO4: Do the safety audit in plants.
CO5: Do the risk analysis in industries using the various techniques.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Chemical Process Safety: Fundamentals with Applications, Daniel A. Crowl, J.F. Louvar,
Prantice Hall, NJ, 1990.
2. Fawatt, H.H. and Wood, W.S., “Safety and Accident Prevention in Chemical Operation“, Wiley
Interscience, 1965.
3. Marcel, V.C., Major Chemical Hazard- Ellis Harwood Ltd., Chi Chester, UK, 1987. 4. Hyatt, N.,
Guidelines for process hazards analysis, hazards identification & risk analysis, Dyadem Press,
2004

161
REFERENCES
1. Handley, W., “Industrial Safety Hand Book “, 2nd Edn., McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1969.
2. Heinrich, H.W. Dan Peterson, P.E. and Rood, N., “ Industrial Accident Prevention“, McGraw-
Hill Book Co., 1980.
3. Taylor, J.R., Risk analysis for process plant, pipelines and transport, Chapman and Hall,
London, 1994

162
 Course Articulation Matrix: PLANT SAFETY AND RISK MANAGEMENT

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 Understand the importance 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
of safety and its objectives
CO2 Understand the 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
implementation of safety
and identification and
prevention of Accidents
CO3 Know about the types of 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
hazards, emergency plan
and ISO standards for
safety studies
CO4 Do the safety audit in plants. 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 Do the risk analysis in 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
industries using the various
techniques
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

163
PC3006 MULTICOMPONENT DISTILLATION LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVE:
 To understand the concepts of Multicomponent distillation systems.

UNIT I THERMODYNAMIC PRINCIPLES 9

Fundamental Thermodynamic principles involved in the calculation of vapor – liquid equilibria and
enthalpies of multi component mixtures – Use of multiple equation of state for the calculation of K
values – Estimation of the fugacity coefficients for the vapor phase of polar gas mixtures –
calculation of liquid – phase activity coefficients.

UNIT II THERMODYNAMIC PROPERTY EVALUATION 9

Fundamental principles involved in the separation of multi component mixtures – Determination of
bubble-point and Dew Point Temperatures for multi component mixtures – equilibrium flash
distillation calculations for multi component mixtures – separation of multi component mixtures at
total reflux.

UNIT III MINIMUM REFLUX RATIO FOR MCD SYSTEM 9

General considerations in the design of columns – Column sequencing – Heuristics for column
sequencing – Key components – Distributed components – Non-Distributed components –
Adjacent keys. Definition of minimum reflux ratio – calculation of Rm for multi component distillation
– Underwood method – Colburn method.

UNIT IV VARIOUS METHODS OF MCD COLUMN DESIGN 9

Theta method of convergence – Kb method and the constant composition method – Application of
the Theta method to complex columns and to system of columns – Lewis Matheson method –
Stage and reflux requirements – Short cut methods and Simplified graphical procedures.

UNIT V VARIOUS TYPES OF MCD COLUMNS 9

Design of sieve, bubble cap, valve trays and structured packing columns for multi component
distillation – computation of plate efficiencies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
CO 1 :To understand the fundamental thermodynamic principles involved in VLE
CO 2 :To understand the fundamental binary and multicomponent distillation.
CO 3 :To understand and analyse the key components in distributed and non distributed system.
CO 4 :Analyze and solve problems related to various methods of multi component distillation.
CO 5 :To understand the various types of column in multi component distillation.
CO 6 :Use the concepts of column sequencing for efficient separation.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Holland, C.D., “Fundamentals of Multi Component Distillation”, McGraw Hill Book
Company, 1981
2. Van Winkle, “Distillation Operations”, McGraw Hill Publications, 1987.

REFERENCES:
1. King, C.J., “Separation Process Principles”, Mc Graw Publications, 1986.
2. Treybal, R.E., “Mass Ttransfer Operations”, 5th Edition, Mc Graw Hill publications. 1996.
3. Mc Cabe and Smith, J.C., Harriot, “Unit Operation of Chemical Engineering”, 6th Edition,
McGraw Hill, 2001.

164
Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Program Outcome

Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
To understand the fundamental
CO1 thermodynamic principles 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - -
involved in VLE
To understand the fundamental
CO2 binary and multicomponent 3 3 3 3 1 1
- - - - - -
distillation.
To understand and analyse the
CO3 key components in distributed and 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1
non distributed system.
Analyze and solve problems
CO4 related to various methods of 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1
multi component distillation.
To understand the various types
CO5 of column in multi component 3 2 3 3 1 - - - - - - 1
distillation.
Use the concepts of column
CO6 sequencing for efficient 3 3 3 3 1 1
- - - - - -
separation.
Overall CO 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 1

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

165
CCH331 PROCESS MODELING AND SIMULATION LTPC
3003

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND FIRST PRINCIPLES 9

Definition, Uses of Mathematical Models - Principles of formulation, Classification of Process
Models, Fundamental laws: Total Continuity equation- Macroscopic and Microscopic Examples,
Component Continuity Equation – Macroscopic and Microscopic Examples, Energy equation,
Equations of motion, Transport equations, Equations of State, Equilibrium and Chemical Kinetics.
Simple Examples.

UNIT II LUMPED SYSTEMS 9

Simple Hydraulic Tank, Variable flow hydraulic tank, Enclosed tank, Adiabatic compression in gas
space, Mixing vessel, Mixing with reaction, Reversible reaction, Steam jacketed vessel,
Continuous flow boiling system.

UNIT III STAGED OPERATIONS AND DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS 9

Staged Operations: Counter current extraction, Distillation columns - Binary distillation.
Distributed systems: Counter current Heat exchanger, Membrane separation process, tubular
reactor and evaporators.

UNIT IV FITTING MODEL TO DATA 9

Fitting Linear Model, Multi-Linear Models, Matrix representation of Multi Linear Model, Fitting
Quadratic Model, Cubic Model and Polynomial model using Regression, Power Law models.
Performance Criteria to check quality of model, Co-efficient of Determination (R2)
UNIT V SIMULATION OF BASIC MODELS 9
MATLAB/Simulink - Introduction, Basic components, Operational Blocks, Examples - Gravity flow
tank, Three CSTR's in series, Numerical solution of model using RK4, Euler’s explicit and implicit
techniques, Introduction to ODE 45 solver, Dynamic simulation of simple tank, variable flow tank,
enclosed tank with isothermal compression, mixing vessel, mixing vessel with reaction using ODE
45 solver.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Understand the fundamentals of modeling and their applications to transport/energy
equations, chemical and phase equilibria kinetics
CO2: Associate the model with constitutive relations such as phenomenological laws, rate
equations, equations of state, property estimation methods
CO3: Create the mathematical models for different unit operations equipments
CO4: Analyze the principles of steady state/unsteady state lumped systems and steady state/
unsteady state distributed systems
CO5: Apply relevant solution methods for the mathematical models with relevant initial and/or
boundary conditions
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bequette, B. W., Process Dynamics: Modeling, Analysis, and Simulation. Prentice-Hall,
2002.
2. Babu, B V., Process Plant Simulation, Oxford University Press, 2004
3. Jana, A. K., Chemical Process Modeling and Computer Simulation, Second Edition,
Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Luyben, W.L.: Process Modeling, Simulatio5n and Control for Chemical Engineers,
McGraw Hill, International Student Edition, Second Edition, 1996.
2. Ramirez, W. D., Computational Methods for Process Simulation, Second Edition, Elsevier
Science, 1997.

166
 Course PROCESS MODELING AND SIMULATION
Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand the fundamentals of
modeling and their applications to
CO1 1 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
transport/energy equations, chemical
and phase equilibria kinetics
Associate the model with constitutive
relations such as phenomenological
CO2 1 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
laws, rate equations, equations of
state, property estimation methods
Create the mathematical models for
different unit operations equipments
CO3 such as stirred tank heaters, Heat 1 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
exchangers, Evaporators, Reactors,
distillation columns
Analyze the principles of steady
state/unsteady state lumped systems
CO4 1 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
and steady state/ Unsteady state
distributed systems
Apply relevant solution methods for
CO5 the mathematical models with relevant 1 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
initial and/or Boundary conditions

Overall CO 1 3 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 - 1

167
PC3007 OPTIMIZATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESSES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
The course is aimed to develop objective functions and use linear programming, geometric,
dynamic and integer programming and genetic algorithms for solution to chemical engineering
problems.

UNIT I 9
Introduction to optimization; applications of optimization in chemical engineering; classification of
Optimization problems; Developing models for optimization

UNIT II 9
Continuity of Functions; NLP Problem Statement Convexity and Its Applications Interpretation of
the Objective Function in Terms of its Quadratic Approximation Necessary and Sufficient
Conditions for an Extremum of an Unconstrained Function; region elimination methods;
interpolation methods; direct root methods.

UNIT III 9
Methods Using Function Values Only -Random Search -Grid Search – Univariate Search –
Simplex Search Method - Conjugate Search Directions; Methods That Use First Derivatives –
Steepest Descent - Conjugate gradient Methods; Newton’s Method and Quasi Newton’s Method

UNIT IV 9
Introduction to geometric, dynamic and integer programming and genetic algorithms. Linear
Programming – Solution of Problems using Excel SOLVER

UNIT V 9
Formulation of objective functions; fitting models to data; applications in fluid mechanics, heat
Transfer, mass transfer, reaction engineering, equipment design, reaction engineering, resource
allocation and inventory control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Frame mathematical models and formulate optimization models for chemical processes /
equipment.
CO2: Understand the concept of optimum and extremum and the necessary and sufficient
Conditions for extremum and solve single and multivariable optimization problems through
various techniques.
CO3: Apply various search methods to solve unconstrained single variable optimization and
Unconstrained multi variable optimization
CO4: Apply higher order techniques like geometric programming, dynamic and integer
programming and genetic algorithms
CO5: Able to use the principles of engineering and in particular chemical engineering to develop
equality and inequality constraints for an optimization problem
CO6: Apply optimization techniques for real world problems and be knowledgeable to use
Software packages for their solution

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rao, S. S., Engineering Optimization - Theory and Practice, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 1996.
2. Edgar, T.F., Himmelblau, D.M., “Optimisation of Chemical Processes “, McGraw-Hill Book
Co., New York, 2003.
3. Reklaitis, G.V., Ravindran, A., Ragsdell, K.M. “Engineering Optimisation “, John Wiley, New
York, 1980.

168
REFERENCES:
1. Venkataraman, P. (2009). Applied optimization with MATLAB programming. John Wiley &
Sons.
2. Ferris, M. C., Mangasarian, O. L., & Wright, S. J. (2007). Linear programming with MATLAB
(Vol. 7). SIAM.
3. J Nocedal and S J Wright (2006). Numerical Optimization. Springer Verlag.
4. Joshi, M. C., & Moudgalya, K. M. (2004). Optimization: theory and practice. Alpha Science Int'l
Ltd..

169
 Course Statement OPTIMIZATION OF CHEMICAL PROCESSES
Outcomes
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 Frame mathematical models and
formulate optimization models for 1 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
chemical processes / equipment.
CO2 Understand the concept of optimum
and extremum and the necessary
and sufficient Conditions for
1 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
extremum and solve single and
multivariable optimization problems
through various techniques.
CO3 Apply various search methods to
solve unconstrained single variable
1 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
optimization and Unconstrained multi
variable optimization
CO4 Apply higher order techniques like
geometric programming, dynamic
1 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
and integer programming and
genetic algorithms
CO5 Able to use the principles of
engineering and in particular
chemical engineering to develop 1 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
equality and inequality constraints for
an optimization problem
CO6 Apply optimization techniques for
real world problems and be
1 2 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
knowledgeable to use Software
packages for their solution
Overall CO 1 2 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 - 1

170
PC3008 MODERN SEPARATION TECHNIQUES LT PC
3 0 03
OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the principle and technical concept of modern separation processes.

UNIT I BASICS OF SEPARATION PROCESS 9

Basic Concepts - Characteristics and Mechanism of Separation – Feasibility of separation process
- Process concept, Theory and Equipment for filtration Process.

UNIT II MEMBRANE SEPARATIONS 9

Theory of Membranes Process, Types and choice of Membranes - Membrane Reactors and their
relative merits

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF MEMBRANE PROCESS 9

Principle and applications of Dialysis and Eletrodialysis, Reverse Osmosis, Nanofiltration, Ultra
filtration, Micro filtration and Pervaporation.

UNIT IV INORGANIC SEPARATIONS 9

Principle and applications of Ion Exchange Chromatography, Electrophoresis, Dielectrophoresis,
EDR.

UNITV CURRENT TRENDS 9

Principle and applications of Supercritical fluid Extraction, lyophilization, zone melting, Adductive
Crystallization, Oil spill Management, Cryoseparations.
.TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
At the end of this course, learners will be able to
CO1: Understand the key concepts of modern separation processes.
CO2: Understand and apply various membrane separation processes in industries
CO3: Understand the basics on adsorption process and to design an absorber for specific
separation.
CO4: Analyse the separation system for multi-component mixtures.
CO5: Apply and understand the innovative techniques for Chemical and petrochemical process
industries.
CO6: Understand and select appropriate separation technique for intended problem

TEXT BOOKS:
1. King, C. J., “Separation Processes”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1982.
2. Seader, J.D., Ernest J., Henley, Keith Roper D., "Separation Process Principles", 3rd
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, United States of America, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. Scott K., Hughes R, "Industrial Membrane Separation Technology", 1st Edition, Blackie
Academic and Professional Publications, United State of America, 1996. Schoen, H.M.,
“New Chemical Engineering Separation Techniques”, Interscience Publishers,1972.
2. Coulson, J.M., Richardson, J.F, "Chemical Engineering", 4th Edition, Butterworth-
Heinemann, United State of America, 1996.
3. Ronald W Rousseau, “ Handbook of Separation Process Technology”, 1st Edition, Wiley
India Pvt Ltd, 2008.

171
 Course Articulation Matrix: Modern Separation Techniques

Program Outcome
Course
Statement
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Understand the key concepts of
CO1 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 1 1 3 2
modern separation processes.
Understand and apply various
CO2 membrane separation processes in 3 2 3 2 - - 1 - - - 1 2 2 2
industries
Understand the basics on adsorption
CO3 process and to design an absorber for 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 2 2 3 2
specific separation
Analyse the separation system for
CO4 3 2 3 2 - - 1 - - - 1 2 3 2
multi-component mixtures
Apply and understand the innovative
CO5 techniques for Chemical and 3 2 3 2 - - 1 - - - 1 2 2 2
petrochemical process industries
Understand and select appropriate
CO6 separation technique for intended 3 2 3 2 - - 1 - - - 1 1 2 2
problem.

Overall CO 3 2 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively.

172
 CPE335 FLUIDIZATION ENGINEERING LTPC
3 00 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn the design aspects of fluidized beds.

UNIT BASICS OF FLUIDIZATION 9

Packed bed – Velocity – Pressure drop relations – Correlations of Ergun, Kozney karman – On set
of fluidization – Properties of fluidized beds – Development of fluidization from fixed bed.

UNIT II FLUIDIZED BED TYPES 9

Minimum fluidization conditions – Expanded bed – Elutriation – Moving solids and dilute phase –
spouted bed.

UNIT III DESIGN ASPECTS 9

Channeling – Bed expansion in liquid – Solid and gas – Solid fluidizations. Design aspects of
fluidized bed systems.

UNIT IV HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER IN FLUIDIZED BEDS 9

Heat and mass transfer in fluidized bed systems – Industrial applications and case studies of
fluidized bed systems.

UNIT V OTHER TYPES OF FLUIDIZATION 9

Single stage and multistage fluidization – Collection of fines – Use of cyclones.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
CO1 :Understand the basics and governing equations of fluidization
CO2 :Understand the fluidization conditions/behaviours as well as types of fluidization
CO3 :Analyse and apply design concepts for designing the fluidization systems.
CO4 :Understand heat and mass transfer concepts & case studies in fluidization.
CO5 :Understand the various accessories used & stages of fluidization.
CO6 :knowledge on industrial applications of fluidization systems

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Levenspiel, “Fluidization Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Butterworth – Heinmann, 1991.
2. Robert H. Perry and Don W. Green, “Perry’s Chemical Engineer’s Hand Book”, 7th Edition,
Mc Graw Hill – International, 1997.

REFERENCES:
1. Rowe and Davidson, “Fluidization”, Academic Press ,1971.
2. Leva, M., “Fluidization”, McGraw Hill Book Co, 1959.
3. Wen-Ching Yang., “Handbook of Fluidization and Fluid-Particle Systems”, Marcel Dekker
Inc, 2003.

173
Course Statement FLUIDIZATION ENGINEERING
Outcome PO PO PO PO
PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
s 1 2 3 4
CO1 Understand the basics and
governing equations of 3 1 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
fluidization
CO2 Understand the fluidization
conditions/behaviours as well 2 1 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
as types of fluidization
CO3 Analyse and apply design
concepts for designing the 2 1 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
fluidization systems.
CO4 Understand heat and mass
transfer concepts & case 2 1 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
studies in fluidization.
CO5 Understand the various
accessories used & stages of 2 1 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
fluidization.
CO6 knowledge on industrial
applications of fluidization 1 1 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - 1
systems.
Overall CO 2 1 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 - 1

174
CPC334 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
 This course will able to help the students to be aware of various measurement system
used in chemical & petrochemical industries to measure process variables.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT: 9

Measuring Instrument: Introduction and its types- Elements and its function. Transducer:
Importance and its classification - Measuring errors: Sources - reduction - quantification of
systematic and Random errors. Performance characteristics: Static and Dynamic characteristics

UNIT II TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT: 9

Principles of temperature measurement: Thermoelectric effect sensors - Varying resistance
devices - Radiation thermometers - Thermography - Thermal expansion methods - Fibre-optic
temperature sensors - Selection of temperature transducers.

UNIT III PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: 9

Principles of Pressure Measurement: Manometers - Bourdon tube - Bellows - Diaphragms -
Capacitive pressure sensor - Fibre-optic pressure sensors - Resonant-wire devices - Dead-weight
gauge - Special measurement devices for low pressures measurement -Selection of pressure
sensors.

UNIT IV FLOW AND VISCOSITY MEASUREMENT: 9

Principles of Flow Measurement : Mass flow rate measurement and Volume flow rate
measurement - Choice between flow meters for particular applications. Viscosity measurement:
Capillary and tube viscometers - Falling body viscometer - Rotational viscometers.

UNIT V LEVEL MEASUREMENT: 9

Principles of Level Measurement: Float systems - Pressure measuring devices - Capacitive
devices - Ultrasonic level gauge - Radar (microwave) methods - Radiation methods - Vibrating
level sensor and Laser methods - Choice between different level sensors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On the completion of the course students are expected to
CO1: Discuss the type, performance characteristics and error generation of measurement
CO2: Explain temperature measurement device applied in chemical industries
CO3: Describe various range of pressure measuring system used in process industries
CO4: Illustrate flow and viscosity measurement techniques related to production industries
CO5: Elaborate level measurement tool adopted in industries
CO6: Select suitable measurement instruments required in chemical & petrochemical industries
based on learning

TEXT BOOKS
1. Alan S Morris, Reza Langari, "Measurement and Instrumentation: Theory and Application",
3rd Edition, Academic Press, United States of America, 2001.

REFERENCES:
1. William C Dunn , "Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control", 1st
Edition, McGraw Hill International Edition, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Singh S.K, "Industrial Instrumentation and Control", 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill International
Edition, New Delhi, 2006.

175
 Course Statement PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION
Outcomes PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 Discuss the type, performance
characteristics and error generation 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - - - 1 2 -
of measurement elements
CO2 Understand & Explain temperature
measurement device applied in 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - - - 1 2 -
chemical industries
CO3 Describe various range of pressure
measuring system used in process 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - - - 1 2 -
industries.
CO4 Illustrate flow and viscosity
measurement techniques related to 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - - - 1 2 -
production industries
CO5 Elaborate level measurement tool
adopted in industries 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - - - 1 2 -

CO6 Select suitable measurement

instruments required in chemical &
1 1 - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 2 -
petrochemical industries based on
learning.
Overall CO 3 2 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0

176
GE3751 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Sketch the Evolution of Management.
 Extract the functions and principles of management.
 Learn the application of the principles in an organization.
 Study the various HR related activities.
 Analyze the position of self and company goals towards business.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur- types of managers-
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management –Scientific, human relations, system and
contingency approaches– Types of Business organization- Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises- Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management.

UNIT II PLANNING 9
Nature and purpose of planning – Planning process – Types of planning – Objectives – Setting
objectives – Policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and
Techniques – Decision making steps and process.

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – Organization chart – Organization
structure – Types – Line and staff authority – Departmentalization – delegation of authority –
Centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR
Planning, Recruitment, selection, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career
planning and management.

UNIT IV DIRECTING 9
Foundations of individual and group behaviour– Motivation – Motivation theories – Motivational
techniques – Job satisfaction – Job enrichment – Leadership – types and theories of leadership
– Communication – Process of communication – Barrier in communication – Effective
communication – Communication and IT.

UNIT V CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – Budgetary and non - Budgetary control techniques – Use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – Control
and performance – Direct and preventive control – Reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to have clear understanding of
managerial functions like planning, organizing, staffing, leading & controlling.
CO2: Have same basic knowledge on international aspect of management.
CO3: Ability to understand management concept of organizing.
CO4: Ability to understand management concept of directing.
CO5: Ability to understand management concept of controlling.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata McGraw Hill,1998.
2. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “ Management”, Prentice Hall (India)Pvt. Ltd.,
10th Edition, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Robert Kreitner and MamataMohapatra, “ Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
2. Stephen A. Robbins and David A. Decenzo and Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of

177
 Management” Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
3. Tripathy PC and Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 1999.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 1 1
2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
3 1 - 2 - - 1 - 2 - 1 1 - - 2
4 - 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2 - - - 1 1 1
5 1 - - 1 1 - - - 3 - 1 1 - 1
AVg. 1.66 1 1 1.5 1.5 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1.5 1 1.25

GE3752 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Teach the need for quality, its evolution, basic concepts, contribution of quality
gurus, TQMframework, Barriers and Benefits of TQM.
 Explain the TQM Principles for application.
 Define the basics of Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools,
Benchmarking andFMEA.
 Describe Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures and apply
Techniqueslike QFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
 Illustrate and apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of product
and service quality –Definition of TQM-- Basic concepts of TQM - Gurus of TQM (Brief
introduction) -- TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM –Benefits of TQM.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership - Deming Philosophy, Quality Council, Quality statements and Strategic planning-
Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality, Feedback, Customer complaints, Service
Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention – Employee involvement – Motivation,
Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition & Reward and Performance Appraisal--
Continuous process improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle, 5S and Kaizen - Supplier
partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating and Relationship development.

UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality - New management tools - Six-sigma Process Capability-
Bench marking - Reasons to benchmark, Benchmarking process, What to Bench Mark,
Understanding Current Performance, Planning, Studying Others, Learning from the data, Using
the findings, Pitfalls and Criticisms of Benchmarking - FMEA - Intent , Documentation, Stages:
Design FMEA and Process FMEA.

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function – TPM –
Concepts, improvement needs – Performance measures- Cost of Quality - BPR.

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9

Introduction-Benefits of ISO Registration-ISO 9000 Series of Standards-Sector-Specific
Standards - AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements-Implementation-
Documentation- Internal Audits-Registration-ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:

178
Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO 14001—Requirements of ISO
14001-Benefits of EMS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Ability to apply TQM concepts in a selected enterprise.
CO2: Ability to apply TQM principles in a selected enterprise.
CO3: Ability to understand Six Sigma and apply Traditional tools, New tools,
Benchmarking andFMEA.
CO4: Ability to understand Taguchi's Quality Loss Function, Performance Measures
and
applyQFD, TPM, COQ and BPR.
CO5: Ability to apply QMS and EMS in any organization.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna,Glen H. Bester field,MaryB.Sacre,
HemantUrdhwareshe and RashmiUrdhwareshe, “Total Quality Management”,
Pearson Education Asia, Revised Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth
Impression,2013.
REFERENCES:
1 Joel.E. Ross, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,Routledge.,2017.
2. Kiran.D.R, “Total Quality Management: Key concepts and case studies, Butterworth –
Heinemann Ltd, 2016.
3. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third
Edition,2003.
4. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India)
Pvt. Ltd.,2006 .

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3
2 3 3 2
3 3 3 2 3
4 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2
5 3 3 3 2
AVg. 2.5 3 3 2.6 3 2 3 3 2.5 2 3

GE3753 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING LTPC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Understanding the concept of Engineering Economics.
 Implement various micro economics concept in real life.
 Gaining knowledge in the field of macro economics to enable the students to have better
 understanding of various components of macro economics.
 Understanding the different procedures of pricing.
 Learn the various cost related concepts in micro economics.

UNIT I DEMAND & SUPPLY ANALYSIS 9

Managerial Economics - Relationship with other disciplines - Firms: Types, objectives
and goals - Managerial decisions - Decision analysis.Demand - Types of demand - Determinants
of demand - Demand function – Demand elasticity - Demand forecasting - Supply - Determinants
of supply - Supply function -Supply elasticity.

179
UNIT II PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS 9
Production function - Returns to scale - Production optimization - Least cost input -
Isoquants - Managerial uses of production function. Cost Concepts - Cost function - Determinants
of cost - Short run and Long run cost curves - Cost Output Decision - Estimation of Cost.

UNIT III PRICING 9

Determinants of Price - Pricing under different objectives and different market structures
- Price discrimination - Pricing methods in practice.

UNIT IV FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Balance sheet and related concepts - Profit & Loss Statement and related concepts - -
Financial Ratio Analysis - Cash flow analysis - Funds flow analysis - Comparative
financial statements - Analysis & Interpretation of financial statements.

UNIT V CAPITAL BUDGETING (ELEMENTARY TREATMENT) 9

Investments - Risks and return evaluation of investment decision - Average rate of return
- Payback Period - Net Present Value - Internal rate of return.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES: Students able to
CO1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will acquire the skills to apply the basics
of economics and cost analysis to engineering and take economically sound decisions
CO2: Evaluate the economic theories, cost concepts and pricing policies
CO3: Understand the market structures and integration concepts
CO4: Understand the measures of national income, the functions of banks and concepts of
globalization
CO5: Apply the concepts of financial management for project appraisal

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi,2001.
2. Managerial Economics: Analysis, Problems and Cases - P. L. Mehta, Edition, 13. Publisher,
Sultan Chand, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.
2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg.
Press, Texas, 2010.
3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan, New
York, 2011.
4. Zahid A khan: Engineering Economy, "Engineering Economy", Dorling Kindersley, 2012
5. Dr. S. N. Maheswari and Dr. S.K. Maheshwari: Financial Accounting, Vikas, 2009

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 3
2 3 2 2
3 2
4 2 3 3 2 2 3
5 3 3 3 2 2 2
AVg. 2.5 2.4 3 2 2 1.8 2.6 2

180
GE3754 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to staffing,
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to training,
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to performance
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to compensation
 To provide knowledge about management issues related to human factors
consideration and compliance with human resource requirements.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 9

The importance of human resources – Objective of Human Resource Management - Human
resource policies - Role of human resource manager.

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

Importance of Human Resource Planning – Internal and External sources of Human Resources -
Recruitment - Selection – Socialization.

UNIT III TRAINING AND EXECUTIVE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of training and Executive development methods – purpose – benefits.

UNIT IV EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION 9

Compensation plan – Reward – Motivation – Career Development - Mentor – Protege
relationships.

UNIT V PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND CONTROL 9

Performance evaluation – Feedback - The control process – Importance – Methods – grievances –
Causes – Redressal methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Students would have gained knowledge on the various aspects of HRM
CO2: Students will gain knowledge needed for success as a human resources professional.
CO3: Students will develop the skills needed for a successful HR manager.
CO4: Students would be prepared to implement the concepts learned
in the workplace.
CO5: Students would be aware of the emerging concepts in the field of HRM

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Decenzo and Robbins, "Human Resource Management", 8th Edition, Wiley, 2007.
2. John Bernardin. H., "Human Resource Management – An Experimental Approach", 5th Edition,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2013, New Delhi.

REFERENCES:
1. Luis R,. Gomez-Mejia, DavidB. Balkin and Robert L. Cardy, “Managing Human Resources",
7th Edition, PHI, 2012.
2. Dessler, "Human Resource Management", Pearson Education Limited, 2007.
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 1
4 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 2.8 2.8 1.8 2.6 2.6 2.2 1.8 1.8 2.4 1 1.4 1 1 1.4 1
181
GE3755 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
Learn the Evolution of Knowledge management.
 Be familiar with tools.
 Be exposed to Applications.
 Be familiar with some case studies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: An Introduction to Knowledge Management - The foundations of
knowledge management- including cultural issues- technology applications organizational concepts
and processes- management aspects- and decision support systems. The Evolution of Knowledge
management: From Information Management to Knowledge Management - Key Challenges Facing
the Evolution of Knowledge Management - Ethics for Knowledge Management.

UNIT II CREATING THE CULTURE OF LEARNING AND KNOWLEDGE SHARING 9

Organization and Knowledge Management - Building the Learning Organization. Knowledge
Markets: Cooperation among Distributed Technical Specialists – Tacit Knowledge and Quality
Assurance.

UNIT III KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT-THE TOOLS 9

Telecommunications and Networks in Knowledge Management - Internet Search Engines and
Knowledge Management - Information Technology in Support of Knowledge Management -
Knowledge Management and Vocabulary Control - Information Mapping in Information Retrieval -
Information Coding in the Internet Environment - Repackaging Information.

UNIT IV KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION 9

Components of a Knowledge Strategy - Case Studies (From Library to Knowledge Center,
Knowledge Management in the Health Sciences, Knowledge Management in Developing
Countries).

UNIT V FUTURE TRENDS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Advanced topics and case studies in knowledge management - Development of a knowledge
management map/plan that is integrated with an organization's strategic and business plan - A case
study on Corporate Memories for supporting various aspects in the process life -cycles of an
organization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
CO1: Understand the process of acquiry knowledge from experts
CO2: Understand the learning organization.
CO3: Use the knowledge management tools.
CO4: Develop knowledge management Applications.
CO5: Design and develop enterprise applications.
CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1
2 2 1
3 2 2
4 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1
AVg. 1 1.4 1 1 1.33

182
TEXT BOOK:
1. Srikantaiah, T.K., Koenig, M., “Knowledge Management for the Information Professional”
Information Today, Inc., 2000.

REFERENCE:
1. Nonaka, I., Takeuchi, H., “The Knowledge-Creating Company: How Japanese
Companies Create the Dynamics of Innovation”, Oxford University Press, 1995.

GE3792 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To study the basic concepts of management; approaches to management;
contributors to management studies; various forms of business organization and trade
unions function in professional organizations.
 To study the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
 To study the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in
professional organization.
 To learn the organizational theory in professional organization.
 To learn the principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in
professional organization.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 9

Management: Introduction; Definition and Functions – Approaches to the study of Management –
Mintzberg’s Ten Managerial Roles – Principles of Taylor; Fayol; Weber; Parker – Forms of
Organization: Sole Proprietorship; Partnership; Company (Private and Public); Cooperative –
Public Sector Vs Private Sector Organization – Business Environment: Economic; Social;
Political; Legal – Trade Union: Definition; Functions; Merits & Demerits.

UNIT – II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT - I 9

Planning: Characteristics; Nature; Importance; Steps; Limitation; Planning Premises; Strategic
Planning; Vision & Mission statement in Planning– Organizing: Organizing Theory; Principles;
Types; Departmentalization; Centralization and Decentralization; Authority & Responsibility –
Staffing: Systems Approach; Recruiting and Selection Process; Human Resource Development
(HRD) Concept and Design.

UNIT – III FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT - II 9

Directing (Leading): Leadership Traits; Style; Morale; Managerial Grids (Blake-Mounton, Reddin)
– Communication: Purpose; Model; Barriers – Controlling: Process; Types; Levels; Guidelines;
Audit (External, Internal, Merits); Preventive Control – Decision Making: Elements; Characteristics;
Nature; Process; Classifications.

UNIT – IV ORGANIZATION THEORY 9

Organizational Conflict: Positive Aspects; Individual; Role; Interpersonal; Intra Group; Inter
Group; Conflict Management – Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory; Herzberg’s motivation-
hygiene theory; McClelland’s three needs motivation theory; Vroom’s valence-expectancy
theory – Change Management: Concept of Change; Lewin’s Process of Change Model;
Sources of Resistance; Overcoming Resistance; Guidelines to managing Conflict.

UNIT – V PRODUCTIVITY AND MODERN TOPICS 9

Productivity: Concept; Measurements; Affecting Factors; Methods to Improve – Modern Topics
(concept, feature/characteristics, procedure, merits and demerits): Business Process
183
Reengineering (BPR); Benchmarking; SWOT/SWOC Analysis; Total Productive Maintenance;
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP); Management of Information Systems (MIS).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
CO1 Explain basic concepts of management; approaches to management;
contributors to management studies; various forms of business organization and
trade unions function in professional organizations.
CO2 Discuss the planning; organizing and staffing functions of management in professional
organization.
CO3 Apply the leading; controlling and decision making functions of management in
professional organization.
CO4 Discuss the organizational theory in professional organization.
CO5 Apply principles of productivity and modern concepts in management in professional
organization.

TEXTBOOKS:
1 M. Govindarajan and S. Natarajan, “Principles of Management”, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2009.
2 Koontz. H. and Weihrich. H., “Essentials of Management: An International Perspective”, 8th
Edition, Tata McGrawhill, New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1 Joseph J, Massie, “Essentials of Management”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 1987.
2 Saxena, P. K., “Principles of Management: A Modern Approach”, Global India
Publications, 2009.
3 S.Chandran, “Organizational Behaviours”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 1994.
4 Richard L. Daft, “Organization Theory and Design”, South Western College Publishing, 11th
Edition, 2012.
5 S. TrevisCerto, “Modern Management Concepts and Skills”, Pearson Education, 2018.

MAPPING OF COS AND POS:

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3

1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 1 1

184
 MANDATORY COURSES I

MX3081 INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN AND GENDER STUDIES LTPC

3 000
COURSE OUTLINE

UNIT I CONCEPTS
Sex vs. Gender, masculinity, femininity, socialization, patriarchy, public/ private, essentialism,
binaryism, power, hegemony, hierarchy, stereotype, gender roles, gender relation, deconstruction,
resistance, sexual division of labour.

UNIT II FEMINIST THEORY

Liberal, Marxist, Socialist, Radical, Psychoanalytic, postmodernist, ecofeminist.

UNIT III WOMEN’S MOVEMENTS: GLOBAL, NATIONAL AND LOCAL

Rise of Feminism in Europe and America.
Women’s Movement in India.

UNIT IV GENDER AND LANGUAGE

Linguistic Forms and Gender.
Gender and narratives.

UNIT V GENDER AND REPRESENTATION

Advertising and popular visual media.

Gender and Representation in Alternative Media.

Gender and social media.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

MX3082 ELEMENTS OF LITERATURE LTPC

3 000

OBJECTIVE:
 To make the students aware about the finer sensibilities of human existence
through an art form. The students will learn to appreciate different forms of literature
as suitable modes of expressing human experience.
1. COURSE CONTENTS
Introduction to Elements of Literature

1. Relevance of literature
a) Enhances Reading, thinking, discussing and writing skills.
b) Develops finer sensibility for better human relationship.
c) Increases understanding of the problem of humanity without bias.
d) Providing space to reconcile and get a cathartic effect.

2. Elements of fiction
a) Fiction, fact and literary truth.
b) Fictional modes and patterns.
c) Plot character and perspective.
3. Elements of poetry
a) Emotions and imaginations.
185
 b) Figurative language.
c) (Simile, metaphor, conceit, symbol, pun and irony).
d) Personification and animation.
e) Rhetoric and trend.

4. Elements of drama
a) Drama as representational art.
b) Content mode and elements.
c) Theatrical performance.
d) Drama as narration, mediation and persuasion.
e) Features of tragedy, comedy and satire.

3. READINGS:
1. An Introduction to the Study of English Literature, W.H. Hudson, Atlantic, 2007.
2. An Introduction to Literary Studies, Mario Klarer, Routledge, 2013.
3. The Experience of Poetry, Graham Mode, Open college of Arts with Open Unv Press,
1991.
4. The Elements of Fiction: A Survey, Ulf Wolf (ed), Wolfstuff, 2114.
5. The Elements of Drama, J.L.Styan, Literary Licensing, 2011.
3.1 Textbook:
3.2 *Reference Books:: To be decided by the teacher and student, on the basis of individual
student so as to enable him or her to write the term paper.
4. OTHER SESSION:
4.1*Tutorials:
4.2*Laboratory:
4.3*Project: The students will write a term paper to show their understanding of a particular
piece of literature
5.*ASSESSMENT:
5.1HA:
5.2Quizzes-HA:
5.3Periodical Examination: one
5.4Project/Lab: one (under the guidance of the teachers the students will take a volume of
poetry, fiction or drama and write a term paper to show their understanding of it in a given
context; sociological, psychological, historical, autobiographical etc.
5.5Final Exam:
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
 Students will be able to understand the relevance of literature in human life and appreciate
its aspects in developing finer sensibilities.

186
MX3083 FILM APPRECIATION LTPC
3 000
In this course on film appreciation, the students will be introduced broadly to the development of
film as an art and entertainment form. It will also discuss the language of cinema as it evolved over
a century. The students will be taught as to how to read a film and appreciate the various nuances
of a film as a text. The students will be guided to study film joyfully.
Theme - A: The Component of Films
A-1: The material and equipment
A-2: The story, screenplay and script
A-3: The actors, crew members, and the director
A-4: The process of film making… structure of a film
Theme - B: Evolution of Film Language
B-1: Film language, form, movement etc.
B-2: Early cinema… silent film (Particularly French)
B-3: The emergence of feature films: Birth of a Nation
B-4: Talkies
Theme - C: Film Theories and Criticism/Appreciation
C-1: Realist theory; Auteurists
C-2: Psychoanalytic, Ideological, Feminists
C-3: How to read films?
C-4: Film Criticism / Appreciation
Theme – D: Development of Films
D-1: Representative Soviet films
D-2: Representative Japanese films
D-3: Representative Italian films
D-4: Representative Hollywood film and the studio system
Theme - E: Indian Films
E-1: The early era
E-2: The important films made by the directors
E-3: The regional films
E-4: The documentaries in India

READING:
A Reader containing important articles on films will be prepared and given to the students. The
students must read them and present in the class and have discussion on these.

MX3084 DISASTER RISK REDUCTION AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

300 0
COURSE OBJECTIVE
 To impart knowledge on concepts related to disaster, disaster risk reduction,
disaster management
 To acquaint with the skills for planning and organizing disaster response

UNIT I HAZRADS, VULNERABILITY AND DISASTER RISKS 9

Definition: Disaster, Hazard, Vulnerability, Resilience, Risks – Types of Disasters: Natural, Human
induced, Climate change induced –Earthquake, Landslide, Flood, Drought, Fire etc –
Technological disasters- Structural collapse, Industrial accidents, oil spills -Causes, Impacts
including social, Economic, political, environmental, health, psychosocial, etc.- Disaster
vulnerability profile of India and Tamil Nadu - Global trends in disasters: urban disasters,
pandemics, Complex emergencies, - -, Inter relations between Disasters and Sustainable
development Goals
187
UNIT II DISASTER RISK REDUCTION (DRR) 9
Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction, Disaster cycle - Phases, Culture of safety,
prevention, mitigation and preparedness community Based DRR, Structural- nonstructural
measures, Roles and responsibilities of- community, Panchayati Raj Institutions / Urban Local
Bodies (PRIs/ULBs), States, Centre, and other stakeholders- Early Warning System – Advisories
from Appropriate Agencies.- Relevance of indigenous Knowledge, appropriate technology and
Local resources.

UNIT III DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Components of Disaster Management – Preparedness of rescue and relief, mitigation,
rehabilitation and reconstruction- Disaster Risk Management and post disaster management –
Compensation and Insurance- Disaster Management Act (2005) and Policy - Other related
policies, plans, programmers and legislation - Institutional Processes and Framework at State and
Central Level- (NDMA –SDMA-DDMA-NRDF- Civic Volunteers)

UNIT IV TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGY FOR DISASTER MANAGEMENT 9

Early warning systems -Components of Disaster Relief: Water, Food, Sanitation, Shelter, Health,
Waste Management, Institutional arrangements (Mitigation, Response and Preparedness, – Role
of GIS and Information Technology Components in Preparedness, Risk Assessment, Response
and Recovery Phases of Disaster – Disaster Damage Assessment. - Elements of Climate Resilient
Development –Standard operation Procedure for disaster response – Financial planning for
disaster Management

UNIT V DISASTER MANAGEMENT: CASE STUDIES 9

Discussion on selected case studies to analyse the potential impacts and actions in the contest of
disasters-Landslide Hazard Zonation: Earthquake Vulnerability Assessment of Buildings and
Infrastructure: Case Studies, Drought Assessment: Case Studies, Coastal Flooding: Storm Surge
Assessment, Floods: Fluvial and Pluvial Flooding: Case Studies; Forest Fire: Case Studies, Man
Made disasters: Case Studies, Space Based Inputs for Disaster Mitigation and Management and
field works related to disaster management.- Field work-Mock drill -
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Taimpo (2016), Disaster Management and Preparedness, CRC Publications
2 Singh R (2017), Disaster Management Guidelines for earthquakes, Landslides, Avalanches and
tsunami, Horizon Press Publications
3 Singhal J.P. “Disaster Management”, Laxmi Publications, 2010. ISBN-10: 9380386427 ISBN-
13: 978-9380386423
4 Tushar Bhattacharya, “Disaster Science and Management”, McGraw Hill India
Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012. ISBN-10: 1259007367, ISBN-13: 978-1259007361]
REFERENCES
1. Govt. of India: Disaster Management Act, Government of India, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Government of India, National Disaster Management Policy, 2009.
3. Shaw R (2016), Community based Disaster risk reduction, Oxford University Press
COURSE OUTCOME:
CO1: To impart knowledge on the concepts of Disaster, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk reduction
(DRR)
CO2: To enhance understanding on Hazards, Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Assessment
prevention and risk reduction
CO3: To develop disaster response skills by adopting relevant tools and technology
CO4: Enhance awareness of institutional processes for Disaster response in the country and
CO5: Develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential Disaster response
in areas where they live, with due sensitivity

188
CO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1
2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - 1
4 3 3 2 3 - - 2 1 - - 2 - 2 - 1
5 3 3 2 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 3 - 1
AVG 3 3 3 3 - - 2 2 - - 2 - 2 - 1

MANDATORY COURSES II

MX3085 WELL BEING WITH TRADITIONAL PRACTICES-YOGA, AYURVEDA

AND SIDDHA LT PC
3 0 00
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enjoy life happily with fun filled new style activities that help to maintain health
also
 To adapt a few lifestyle changes that will prevent many health disorders
 To be cool and handbill every emotion very smoothly in every walk of life
 To learn to eat cost effective but healthy foods that are rich in essential nutrients
 To develop immunity naturally that will improve resistance against many health
disorders

UNIT I HEALTH AND ITS IMPORTANCE 2+4

Health: Definition - Importance of maintaining health - More importance on prevention than
treatment
Ten types of health one has to maintain - Physical health - Mental health - Social health -
Financial health - Emotional health - Spiritual health - Intellectual health - Relationship health -
Environmental health - Occupational/Professional heath.

Present health status - The life expectancy-present status - mortality rate - dreadful diseases -
Non-communicable diseases (NCDs) the leading cause of death - 60% - heart disease – cancer –
diabetes - chronic pulmonary diseases - risk factors – tobacco – alcohol - unhealthy diet - lack of
physical activities.

Types of diseases and disorders - Lifestyle disorders – Obesity – Diabetes - Cardiovascular

diseases – Cancer – Strokes – COPD - Arthritis - Mental health issues.

Causes of the above diseases / disorders - Importance of prevention of illness - Takes care
of health - Improves quality of life - Reduces absenteeism - Increase satisfaction - Saves time

Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health - Healthy Eating habits (Balanced diet
according to age) Physical Activities (Stretching exercise, aerobics, resisting exercise) -
Maintaining BMI-Importance and actions to be taken

UNIT II DIET 4+6

Role of diet in maintaining health - energy one needs to keep active throughout the day -

189
nutrients one needs for growth and repair - helps one to stay strong and healthy - helps to prevent
diet-related illness, such as some cancers - keeps active and - helps one to maintain a healthy
weight - helps to reduce risk of developing lifestyle disorders like diabetes – arthritis –
hypertension – PCOD – infertility – ADHD – sleeplessness -helps to reduce the risk of heart
diseases - keeps the teeth and bones strong.
Balanced Diet and its 7 Components - Carbohydrates – Proteins – Fats – Vitamins – Minerals -
Fibre and Water.

Food additives and their merits & demerits - Effects of food additives - Types of food additives -
Food additives and processed foods - Food additives and their reactions

Definition of BMI and maintaining it with diet

Importance - Consequences of not maintaining BMI - different steps to maintain optimal BM

Common cooking mistakes

Different cooking methods, merits and demerits of each method

UNIT III ROLE OF AYURVEDA & SIDDHA SYSTEMS IN MAINTAINING HEALTH 4+4
AYUSH systems and their role in maintaining health - preventive aspect of AYUSH - AYUSH
as a soft therapy.
Secrets of traditional healthy living - Traditional Diet and Nutrition - Regimen of Personal and
Social Hygiene - Daily routine (Dinacharya) - Seasonal regimens (Ritucharya) - basic sanitation
and healthy living environment - Sadvritta (good conduct) - for conducive social life.
Principles of Siddha & Ayurveda systems - Macrocosm and Microcosm theory -
Pancheekarana Theory / (Five Element Theory) 96 fundamental Principles - Uyir Thathukkal (Tri-
Dosha Theory) - Udal Thathukkal
Prevention of illness with our traditional system of medicine
Primary Prevention - To decrease the number of new cases of a disorder or illness - Health
promotion/education, and - Specific protective measures - Secondary Prevention - To lower the
rate of established cases of a disorder or illness in the population (prevalence) - Tertiary
Prevention - To decrease the amount of disability associated with an existing disorder.

UNIT IV MENTAL WELLNESS 3+4

Emotional health - Definition and types - Three key elements: the subjective experience - the
physiological response - the behavioral response - Importance of maintaining emotional health -
Role of emotions in daily life -Short term and long term effects of emotional disturbances - Leading
a healthy life with emotions - Practices for emotional health - Recognize how thoughts influence
emotions - Cultivate positive thoughts - Practice self-compassion - Expressing a full range of
emotions.

Stress management - Stress definition - Stress in daily life - How stress affects one’s life -
Identifying the cause of stress - Symptoms of stress - Managing stress (habits, tools, training,
professional help) - Complications of stress mismanagement.

Sleep - Sleep and its importance for mental wellness - Sleep and digestion.
Immunity - Types and importance - Ways to develop immunity

UNIT V YOGA 2+12

Definition and importance of yoga - Types of yoga - How to Choose the Right Kind for
individuals according to their age - The Eight Limbs of Yoga - Simple yogasanas for cure and
prevention of health disorders - What yoga can bring to our life.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

190
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nutrition and Dietetics - Ashley Martin, Published by White Word Publications,
New York, NY 10001, USA
2. Yoga for Beginners_ 35 Simple Yoga Poses to Calm Your Mind and Strengthen Your
Body, by Cory Martin, Copyright © 2015 by Althea Press, Berkeley, California

REFERENCES:
1. WHAT WE KNOW ABOUT EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE How It Affects Learning, Work,
Relationships, and Our Mental Health, by Moshe Zeidner, Gerald Matthews, and Richard
D.
2. Roberts A Bradford Book, The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, London, England
The Mindful Self-Compassion Workbook, Kristin Neff, Ph.D Christopher Germer, Ph.D,
Published Guilford Press A Division of Guilford Publications, Inc.370 Seventh Avenue,
Suite 1200, New York, NY 10001
1. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC4799645/
2. Simple lifestyle modifications to maintain health
https://www.niddk.nih.gov/health-information/diet-nutrition/changing-habits-better-
health#:~:text=Make%20your%20new%20healthy%20habit,t%20have%20time%20
to%20cook.
3. Read more: https://www.legit.ng/1163909-classes-food-examples-functions.html
4. https://www.yaclass.in/p/science-state-board/class-9/nutrition-and-health-5926
5. Benefits of healthy eating https://www.cdc.gov/nutrition/resources-
publications/benefits-of-healthy-eating.html
6. Food additives
https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/conditionsandtreatments/food-additives
7. BMI https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/healthy-weight/
https://www.who.int/europe/news-room/fact-sheets/item/a-healthy-lifestyle---who-
recommendations
8. Yoga https://www.healthifyme.com/blog/types-of-yoga/
https://yogamedicine.com/guide-types-yoga-styles/
Ayurveda : https://vikaspedia.in/health/ayush/ayurveda-1/concept-of-healthy-living-
in-ayurveda
9. Siddha : http://www.tkdl.res.in/tkdl/langdefault/Siddha/Sid_Siddha_Concepts.asp
10. CAM : https://www.hindawi.com/journals/ecam/2013/376327/
11. Preventive herbs : https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3847409/

COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing the course, the students will be able to:
 Learn the importance of different components of health
 Gain confidence to lead a healthy life
 Learn new techniques to prevent lifestyle health disorders
 Understand the importance of diet and workouts in maintaining health

MX3086 HISTORY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
UNIT-I CONCEPTS AND PERSPECTIVES
Meaning of History
Objectivity, Determinism, Relativism, Causation, Generalization in History; Moral judgment in
history
Extent of subjectivity, contrast with physical sciences, interpretation and speculation, causation
verses evidence, concept of historical inevitability, Historical Positivism.

191
Science and Technology-Meaning, Scope and Importance, Interaction of science, technology &
society, Sources of history on science and technology in India.

UNIT-II HISTORIOGRAPHY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA

Introduction to the works of D.D. Kosambi, Dharmpal, Debiprasad Chattopadhyay, Rehman, S.
Irfan Habib, Deepak Kumar, Dhruv Raina, and others.

UNIT-III SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA

Technology in pre-historic period
Beginning of agriculture and its impact on technology
Science and Technology during Vedic and Later Vedic times
Science and technology from 1st century AD to C-1200.

UNIT-IV SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN MEDIEVAL INDIA

Legacy of technology in Medieval India, Interactions with Arabs
Development in medical knowledge, interaction between Unani and Ayurveda and alchemy
Astronomy and Mathematics: interaction with Arabic Sciences
Science and Technology on the eve of British conquest

UNIT-V SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN COLONIAL INDIA

Science and the Empire
Indian response to Western Science
Growth of techno-scientific institutions

UNIT-VI SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN A POST-INDEPENDENT INDIA

Science, Technology and Development discourse
Shaping of the Science and Technology Policy
Developments in the field of Science and Technology
Science and technology in globalizing India
Social implications of new technologies like the Information Technology and Biotechnology
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

MX3087 POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC THOUGHT FOR A HUMANE SOCIETY LT PC

3 0 00
Pre-Requisite: None. (Desirable: Universal Human Values 1, Universal Human Values 2)

OBJECTIVES:
 This course will begin with a short overview of human needs and desires and how
different political-economic systems try to fullfill them. In the process, we will end
with a critique of different systems and their implementations in the past, with
possible future directions.

COURSE TOPICS:
Considerations for humane society, holistic thought, human being’s desires, harmony in self,
harmony in relationships, society, and nature, societal systems. (9 lectures, 1 hour each)

(Refs: A Nagaraj, M K Gandhi, JC Kumarappa)

Capitalism – Free markets, demand-supply, perfect competition, laissez-faire, monopolies,

imperialism. Liberal democracy. (5 lectures)

(Refs: Adam smith, J S Mill)

Fascism and totalitarianism. World war I and II. Cold war. (2 lectures)
192
Communism – Mode of production, theory of labour, surplus value, class struggle, dialectical
materialism, historical materialism, Russian and Chinese models.

(Refs: Marx, Lenin, Mao, M N Roy) (5 lectures)

Welfare state. Relation with human desires. Empowered human beings, satisfaction. (3 lectures)

Gandhian thought. Swaraj, Decentralized economy & polity, Community. Control over one’s lives.
Relationship with nature. (6 lectures)

(Refs: M K Gandhi, Schumacher, Kumarappa)

Essential elements of Indian civilization. (3 lectures)

(Refs: Pt Sundarlal, R C Mazumdar, Dharampal)

Technology as driver of society, Role of education in shaping of society. Future directions. (4

lectures) (Refs: Nandkishore Acharya, David Dixon, Levis Mumford)

Conclusion (2 lectures)

Total lectures: 39

Preferred Textbooks: See Reference Books

Reference Books: Authors mentioned along with topics above. Detailed reading list will be
provided.

GRADING:
Mid sems 30
End sem 20
Home Assign 10
Term paper 40
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOME:
 The students will get an understanding of how societies are shaped by philosophy,
political and economic system, how they relate to fulfilling human goals & desires
with some case studies of how different attempts have been made in the past and
how they have fared.

MX3088 STATE, NATION BUILDING AND POLITICS IN INDIA LT PC

3 0 00
OBJECTIVE:
The objective of the course is to provide an understanding of the state, how it works through its
main organs, primacy of politics and political process, the concept of sovereignty and its changing
contours in a globalized world. In the light of this, an attempt will be made to acquaint the students
with the main development and legacies of national movement and constitutional development in

193
India, reasons for adopting a Parliamentary-federal system, the broad philosophy of the
Constitution of India and the changing nature of Indian Political System. Challenges/ problems and
issues concerning national integration and nation-building will also be discussed in the
contemporary context with the aim of developing a future vision for a better India.

TOPICS:
Understanding the need and role of State and politics.

Development of Nation-State, sovereignty, sovereignty in a globalized world.

Organs of State – Executive, Legislature, Judiciary. Separation of powers, forms of government-

unitary-federal, Presidential-Parliamentary,
The idea of India.

1857 and the national awakening.

1885 Indian National Congress and development of national movement – its

legacies. Constitution making and the Constitution of India.
Goals, objective and philosophy.
Why a federal system?
National integration and nation-building.

Challenges of nation-building – State against democracy (Kothari)

New social movements.
The changing nature of Indian Political System, the future
scenario. What can we do?
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME OF THE COURSE:
It is expected that this course will make students aware of the theoretical aspect of the state, its
organs, its operationalization aspect, the background and philosophy behind the founding of the
present political system, broad streams and challenges of national integration and nation-building
in India. It will equip the students with the real understanding of our political system/ process in
correct perspective and make them sit up and think for devising ways for better participation in the
system with a view to making the governance and delivery system better for the common man who
is often left unheard and unattended in our democratic setup besides generating a lot of
dissatisfaction and difficulties for the system.

SUGGESTED READING:
i. Sunil Khilnani, The Idea of India. Penguin India Ltd., New Delhi.
ii. Madhav Khosla, The Indian Constitution, Oxford University Press. New Delhi, 2012.
iii. Brij Kishore Sharma, Introduction to the Indian Constitution, PHI, New Delhi, latest edition.
iv. Sumantra Bose, Transforming India: Challenges to the World’s Largest Democracy,
Picador India, 2013.
v. Atul Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India’s Growing Crisis of Governability, Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge, U. K., 1991.
vi. M. P. Singh and Rekha Saxena, Indian Politics: Contemporary Issues and Concerns, PHI,
New Delhi, 2008, latest edition.
vii. Rajni Kothari, Rethinking Democracy, Orient Longman, New Delhi, 2005.

194
MX3089 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY LT PC
3 0 00
OBJECTIVES
 To Understand the Introduction and basic Terminologies safety.
 To enable the students to learn about the Important Statutory Regulations and standards.
 To enable students to Conduct and participate the various Safety activities in the Industry.
 To have knowledge about Workplace Exposures and Hazards.
 To assess the various Hazards and consequences through various Risk Assessment
Techniques.
UNIT I SAFETY TERMINOLOGIES
Hazard-Types of Hazard- Risk-Hierarchy of Hazards Control Measures-Lead indicators- lag
Indicators-Flammability- Toxicity Time-weighted Average (TWA) - Threshold LimitValue (TLV) -
Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL)- Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)- acute and
chronic Effects- Routes of Chemical Entry-Personnel Protective Equipment- Health and Safety
Policy-Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS

UNIT II STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

Indian Factories Act-1948- Health- Safety- Hazardous materials and Welfare- ISO 45001:2018
occupational health and safety (OH&S) - Occupational Safety and Health Audit IS14489:1998-
Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis- code of practice IS 15656:2006

UNIT III SAFETY ACTIVITIES

Toolbox Talk- Role of safety Committee- Responsibilities of Safety Officers and Safety
Representatives- Safety Training and Safety Incentives- Mock Drills- On-site Emergency Action
Plan- Off-site Emergency Action Plan- Safety poster and Display- Human Error Assessment

UNIT IV WORKPLACE HEALTH AND SAFETY

Noise hazard- Particulate matter- musculoskeletal disorder improper sitting poster and lifting
Ergonomics RULE & REBA- Unsafe act & Unsafe Condition- Electrical Hazards- Crane Safety-
Toxic gas Release

UNIT V HAZARD IDENTIFICATION TECHNIQUES

Job Safety Analysis-Preliminary Hazard Analysis-Failure mode and Effects Analysis- Hazard and
Operability- Fault Tree Analysis- Event Tree Analysis Qualitative and Quantitative Risk
Assessment- Checklist Analysis- Root cause analysis- What-If Analysis- and Hazard Identification
and Risk Assessment
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Course outcomes on completion of this course the student will be able:
 Understand the basic concept of safety.
 Obtain knowledge of Statutory Regulations and standards.
 Know about the safety Activities of the Working Place.
 Analyze on the impact of Occupational Exposures and their Remedies
 Obtain knowledge of Risk Assessment Techniques.

TEXTBOOKS
1. R.K. Jain and Prof. Sunil S. Rao Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management
Systems KHANNA PUBLISHER
2. L. M. Deshmukh Industrial Safety Management: Hazard Identification and Risk Control
McGraw-Hill Education

REFERENCES
1. Frank Lees (2012) ‘Lees’ Loss Prevention in Process Industries.Butterworth-Heinemann
publications, UK, 4th Edition.
2. John Ridley & John Channing (2008)Safety at Work: Routledge, 7th Edition.
195
 3. Dan Petersen (2003) Techniques of Safety Management: A System Approach.
4. Alan Waring.(1996).Safety management system: Chapman &Hall,England
5. Society of Safety Engineers, USA

ONLINE RESOURCES
ISO 45001:2018 occupational health and safety (OH&S) International Organization for
Standardization https://www.iso.org/standard/63787.html
Indian Standard code of practice on occupational safety and health audit
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.14489.1998.pdf
Indian Standard code of practice on Hazard Identification and Risk Analysis IS 15656:2006
https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S02/is.15656.2006.pdf

Program Outcome
Course
Statement PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Understand the
CO1 basic concept of 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 3 3 3
safety.
Obtain knowledge
CO2 of Statutory
2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Regulations and
standards.
Know about the
CO3 safety Activities of 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 3 3
the Working Place.
Analyze on the
CO4 impact of
Occupational 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3
Exposures and
their Remedies
Obtain knowledge
CO5 of Risk
3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
Assessment
Techniques.
Average 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 1 3 3 3 3

196
 OPEN ELECTIVE I AND II

OCS351 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND MACHINE LEARNING FUNDAMENTALS

LTPC
202 3
OBJECTIVES:
The main objectives of this course are to:
1. Understand the importance, principles, and search methods of AI
2. Provide knowledge on predicate logic and Prolog.
3. Introduce machine learning fundamentals
4. Study of supervised learning algorithms.
5. Study about unsupervised learning algorithms.

UNIT I INTELLIGENT AGENT AND UNINFORMED SEARCH 6

Introduction - Foundations of AI - History of AI - The state of the art - Risks and Benefits of AI -
Intelligent Agents - Nature of Environment - Structure of Agent - Problem Solving Agents -
Formulating Problems - Uninformed Search - Breadth First Search - Dijkstra's algorithm or
uniform-cost search - Depth First Search - Depth Limited Search

UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING WITH SEARCH TECHNIQUES 6

Informed Search - Greedy Best First - A* algorithm - Adversarial Game and Search - Game
theory - Optimal decisions in game - Min Max Search algorithm - Alpha-beta pruning - Constraint
Satisfaction Problems (CSP) - Examples - Map Coloring - Job Scheduling - Backtracking Search
for CSP

UNIT III LEARNING 6

Machine Learning: Definitions – Classification - Regression - approaches of machine learning
models - Types of learning - Probability - Basics - Linear Algebra – Hypothesis space and
inductive bias, Evaluation. Training and test sets, cross validation, Concept of over fitting, under
fitting, Bias and Variance - Regression: Linear Regression - Logistic Regression

UNIT IV SUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Neural Network: Introduction, Perceptron Networks – Adaline - Back propagation networks -
Decision Tree: Entropy – Information gain - Gini Impurity - classification algorithm - Rule based
Classification - Naïve Bayesian classification - Support Vector Machines (SVM)

UNIT V UNSUPERVISED LEARNING 6

Unsupervised Learning – Principle Component Analysis - Neural Network: Fixed Weight
Competitive Nets - Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps – Clustering: Definition - Types of
Clustering – Hierarchical clustering algorithms – k-means algorithm
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
Programs for Problem solving with Search
1. Implement breadth first search
2. Implement depth first search
3. Analysis of breadth first and depth first search in terms of time and space
4. Implement and compare Greedy and A* algorithms.
Supervised learning
5. Implement the non-parametric locally weighted regression algorithm in order to fit data points.
Select appropriate data set for your experiment and draw graphs
6. Write a program to demonstrate the working of the decision tree based algorithm.
7. Build an artificial neural network by implementing the back propagation algorithm and test the
same using appropriate data sets.
8. Write a program to implement the naïve Bayesian classifier.

197
Unsupervised learning
9. Implementing neural network using self-organizing maps
10. Implementing k-Means algorithm to cluster a set of data.
11. Implementing hierarchical clustering algorithm.
Note:
 Installation of gnu-prolog, Study of Prolog (gnu-prolog).
 The programs can be implemented in using C++/JAVA/ Python or appropriate tools can be
used by designing good user interface
 Data sets can be taken from standard repositories
(https://archive.ics.uci.edu/ml/datasets.html) or constructed by the students.

OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the foundations of AI and the structure of Intelligent Agents
CO2: Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
CO3: Study of learning methods
CO4: Solving problem using Supervised learning
CO5: Solving problem using Unsupervised learning
TOTAL PERIODS: 60
TEXT BOOK
1. S. Russell and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Prentice Hall, Fourth
Edition, 2021
2. S.N.Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, Principles of soft computing-Wiley India.3 rd ed,

REFERENCES
1. Machine Learning. Tom Mitchell. First Edition, McGraw- Hill, 1997.
2. I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Artificial Intelligence‖, Fourth edition, Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc., 2011.
3. C. Muller & Sarah Alpaydin, Ethem. Introduction to machine learning. MIT press, 2020.

OCS352 IOT CONCEPTS AND APPLICATIONS LTPC

2 023
OBJECTIVES:
 To apprise students with basic knowledge of IoT that paves a platform to understand
physical and logical design of IOT
 To teach a student how to analyse requirements of various communication models and
protocols for cost-effective design of IoT applications on different IoT platforms.
 To introduce the technologies behind Internet of Things(IoT).
 To explain the students how to code for an IoT application using Arduino/Raspberry Pi
open platform.
 To apply the concept of Internet of Things in real world scenario.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Evolution of Internet of Things – Enabling Technologies – IoT Architectures: oneM2M, IoT World
Forum (IoTWF) and Alternative IoT Models – Simplified IoT Architecture and Core IoT Functional
Stack – Fog, Edge and Cloud in IoT

UNIT II COMPONENTS IN INTERNET OF THINGS 5

Functional Blocks of an IoT Ecosystem – Sensors, Actuators, and Smart Objects – Control Units -
Communication modules (Bluetooth, Zigbee,Wifi, GPS, GSM Modules)

198
UNIT III PROTOCOLS AND TECHNOLOGIES BEHIND IOT 6
IOT Protocols - IPv6, 6LoWPAN, MQTT, CoAP - RFID, Wireless Sensor Networks, BigData
Analytics, Cloud Computing, Embedded Systems.

UNIT IV OPEN PLATFORMS AND PROGRAMMING 7

IOT deployment for Raspberry Pi /Arduino platform-Architecture –Programming – Interfacing –
Accessing GPIO Pins – Sending and Receiving Signals Using GPIO Pins – Connecting to the
Cloud.

UNIT V IOT APPLICATIONS 7

Business models for the internet of things, Smart city, Smart mobility and transport, Industrial IoT,
Smart health, Environment monitoring and surveillance – Home Automation – Smart Agriculture
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Introduction to Arduino platform and programming
2. Interfacing Arduino to Zigbee module
3. Interfacing Arduino to GSM module
4. Interfacing Arduino to Bluetooth Module
5 Introduction to Raspberry PI platform and python programming
6. Interfacing sensors to Raspberry PI
7. Communicate between Arduino and Raspberry PI using any wireless medium
8. Setup a cloud platform to log the data
9. Log Data using Raspberry PI and upload to the cloud platform
10.Design an IOT based system

OUTCOMES:
CO 1:Explain the concept of IoT.
CO 2:Understand the communication models and various protocols for IoT.
CO 3:Design portable IoT using Arduino/Raspberry Pi /open platform
CO 4:Apply data analytics and use cloud offerings related to IoT.
CO 5:Analyze applications of IoT in real time scenario.
TOTAL PERIODS:60
TEXTBOOKS
1. Robert Barton, Patrick Grossetete, David Hanes, Jerome Henry, Gonzalo Salgueiro, “IoT
Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of Things”,
CISCO Press, 2017
2. Samuel Greengard, The Internet of Things, The MIT Press, 2015

REFERENCES
1. Perry Lea, “Internet of things for architects”, Packt, 2018
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi , “The Internet of Things – Key
applications and Protocols”, Wiley, 2012
3. IOT (Internet of Things) Programming: A Simple and Fast Way of Learning, IOT Kindle
Edition.
4. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison, Michahelles, Florian (Eds), “Architecting the Internet of
Things”, Springer, 2011.
5. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”, Universities
Press, 2015
6. https://www.arduino.cc/
https://www.ibm.com/smarterplanet/us/en/?ca=v_smarterplanet

199
OCS353 DATA SCIENCE FUNDAMENTALS LTPC
2 023
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
● Familiarize students with the data science process.
● Understand the data manipulation functions in Numpy and Pandas.
● Explore different types of machine learning approaches.
● Understand and practice visualization techniques using tools.
● Learn to handle large volumes of data with case studies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Data Science: Benefits and uses – facets of data - Data Science Process: Overview – Defining
research goals – Retrieving data – data preparation - Exploratory Data analysis – build the model
– presenting findings and building applications - Data Mining - Data Warehousing – Basic
statistical descriptions of Data

UNIT II DATA MANIPULATION 9

Python Shell - Jupyter Notebook - IPython Magic Commands - NumPy Arrays-Universal Functions
– Aggregations – Computation on Arrays – Fancy Indexing – Sorting arrays – Structured data –
Data manipulation with Pandas – Data Indexing and Selection – Handling missing data –
Hierarchical indexing – Combining datasets – Aggregation and Grouping – String operations –
Working with time series – High performance

UNIT III MACHINE LEARNING 5

The modeling process - Types of machine learning - Supervised learning - Unsupervised learning -
Semi-supervised learning- Classification, regression - Clustering – Outliers and Outlier Analysis

UNIT IV DATA VISUALIZATION 5

Importing Matplotlib – Simple line plots – Simple scatter plots – visualizing errors – density and
contour plots – Histograms – legends – colors – subplots – text and annotation – customization –
three dimensional plotting - Geographic Data with Basemap - Visualization with Seaborn

UNIT V HANDLING LARGE DATA 5

Problems - techniques for handling large volumes of data - programming tips for dealing with large
data sets- Case studies: Predicting malicious URLs, Building a recommender system - Tools and
techniques needed - Research question - Data preparation - Model building – Presentation and
automation.
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS

LAB EXERCISES
1. Download, install and explore the features of Python for data analytics.
2. Working with Numpy arrays
3. Working with Pandas data frames
4. Basic plots using Matplotlib
5. Statistical and Probability measures
a) Frequency distributions
b) Mean, Mode, Standard Deviation
c) Variability
d) Normal curves
e) Correlation and scatter plots
f) Correlation coefficient
g) Regression

6. Use the standard benchmark data set for performing the following:
200
a) Univariate Analysis: Frequency, Mean, Median, Mode, Variance, Standard Deviation,
Skewness and Kurtosis.
b) Bivariate Analysis: Linear and logistic regression modelling.
7. Apply supervised learning algorithms and unsupervised learning algorithms on any data set.
8. Apply and explore various plotting functions on any data set.

Note: Example data sets like: UCI, Iris, Pima Indians Diabetes etc.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Gain knowledge on data science process.
CO2: Perform data manipulation functions using Numpy and Pandas.
CO3 Understand different types of machine learning approaches.
CO4: Perform data visualization using tools.
CO5: Handle large volumes of data in practical scenarios.

TOTAL PERIODS:60
TEXT BOOKS
1. David Cielen, Arno D. B. Meysman, and Mohamed Ali, “Introducing Data Science”,
Manning Publications, 2016.
2. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, 2016.

REFERENCES
1. Robert S. Witte and John S. Witte, “Statistics”, Eleventh Edition, Wiley Publications, 2017.
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Stats: Exploratory Data Analysis in Python”, Green Tea
Press,2014.

CCS333 AUGMENTED REALITY/VIRTUAL REALITY L T P C

2 0 2 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To impart the fundamental aspects and principles of AR/VR technologies.
 To know the internals of the hardware and software components involved in the
development of AR/VR enabled applications.
 To learn about the graphical processing units and their architectures.
 To gain knowledge about AR/VR application development.
 To know the technologies involved in the development of AR/VR based applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 7
Introduction to Virtual Reality and Augmented Reality – Definition – Introduction to Trajectories and
Hybrid Space-Three I’s of Virtual Reality – Virtual Reality Vs 3D Computer Graphics – Benefits of
Virtual Reality – Components of VR System – Introduction to AR-AR Technologies-Input Devices –
3D Position Trackers – Types of Trackers – Navigation and Manipulation Interfaces – Gesture
Interfaces – Types of Gesture Input Devices – Output Devices – Graphics Display – Human Visual
System – Personal Graphics Displays – Large Volume Displays – Sound Displays – Human
Auditory System.

UNIT II VR MODELING 6
Modeling – Geometric Modeling – Virtual Object Shape – Object Visual Appearance – Kinematics
Modeling – Transformation Matrices – Object Position – Transformation Invariants –Object
Hierarchies – Viewing the 3D World – Physical Modeling – Collision Detection – Surface
Deformation – Force Computation – Force Smoothing and Mapping – Behavior Modeling – Model
Management.

201
UNIT III VR PROGRAMMING 6
VR Programming – Toolkits and Scene Graphs – World ToolKit – Java 3D – Comparison of World
ToolKit and Java 3D

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 6
Human Factors in VR – Methodology and Terminology – VR Health and Safety Issues – VR and
Society-Medical Applications of VR – Education, Arts and Entertainment – Military VR Applications
– Emerging Applications of VR – VR Applications in Manufacturing – Applications of VR in
Robotics – Information Visualization – VR in Business – VR in Entertainment – VR in Education.

UNIT V AUGMENTED REALITY 5

Introduction to Augmented Reality-Computer vision for AR-Interaction-Modelling and Annotation-
Navigation-Wearable devices
30 PERIODS
PRACTICAL EXERCISES: 30 PERIODS
1. Study of tools like Unity, Maya, 3DS MAX, AR toolkit, Vuforia and Blender.
2. Use the primitive objects and apply various projection types by handling camera.
3. Download objects from asset store and apply various lighting and shading effects.
4. Model three dimensional objects using various modelling techniques and apply textures
over them.
5. Create three dimensional realistic scenes and develop simple virtual reality enabled mobile
applications which have limited interactivity.
6. Add audio and text special effects to the developed application.
7. Develop VR enabled applications using motion trackers and sensors incorporating full
haptic interactivity.
8. Develop AR enabled applications with interactivity like E learning environment, Virtual
walkthroughs and visualization of historic places.
9. Develop AR enabled simple applications like human anatomy visualization, DNA/RNA
structure visualization and surgery simulation.
10. Develop simple MR enabled gaming applications.
TOTAL PERIODS:60

OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of AR and VR
CO2:Understand the tools and technologies related to AR/VR
CO3:Know the working principle of AR/VR related Sensor devices
CO4:Design of various models using modeling techniques
CO5:Develop AR/VR applications in different domains

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Charles Palmer, John Williamson, “Virtual Reality Blueprints: Create compelling VR
experiences for mobile”, Packt Publisher, 2018
2. Dieter Schmalstieg, Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality: Principles & Practice”, Addison
Wesley, 2016
3. John Vince, “Introduction to Virtual Reality”, Springer-Verlag, 2004.
4. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig: Understanding Virtual Reality – Interface, Application,
Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2003

202
 CO’s – PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING
5.

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 2 - 3 - - - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 1 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 - - - 3 2 1 2 3 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 - - - 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
AVg. 3.00 2.60 2.40 2.00 3.00 - - - 2.80 2.20 1.80 2.60 2.80 1.80 2.20

OPEN ELCTIVE III

OHS351 ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMINATIONS L T P C

3 0 0 3
Course Description:
Students aspiring to take up competitive exams of which the English language is a vital component
will find this course useful. Designed for students in the higher semesters, the course will help
students to familiarise themselves with those aspects of English that are tested in these
examinations.

Objectives:
 To train the students in the language components essential to face competitive examinations
both at the national (UPSC, Banking, Railway, Defence) and the international level (GRE,
TOEFL, IELTS).
 To enhance an awareness of the specific patterns in language testing and the respective skills
to tackle verbal reasoning and verbal ability tests.
 To inculcate effective practices in language-learning in order to improve accuracy in usage of
grammar and coherence in writing.
 To improve students’ confidence to express their ideas and opinions in formal contexts
 To create awareness of accuracy and precision in communication

UNIT I 9
Orientation on different formats of competitive exams - Vocabulary – Verbal ability – Verbal
reasoning - Exploring the world of words – Essential words – Meaning and their usage –
Synonyms-antonyms – Word substitution – Word analogy – Idioms and phrases – Commonly
confused words – Spellings – Word expansion – New words in use.

UNIT II 9
Grammar – Sentence improvement –Sentence completion – Rearranging phrases into sentences
– Error identification –Tenses – Prepositions – Adjectives – Adverbs – Subject-verb agreement –
Voice – Reported speech – Articles – Clauses – Speech patterns.

UNIT III 9
Reading - Specific information and detail – Identifying main and supporting ideas – Speed reading
techniques – Improving global reading skills – Linking ideas – Summarising – Understanding
argument – Identifying opinion/attitude and making inferences - Critical reading.

UNIT IV 9
Writing – Pre-writing techniques – Mindmap - Describing pictures and facts - Paragraph structure –
organising points – Rhetoric writing – Improving an answer – Drafting, writing and developing an
argument – Focus on cohesion – Using cohesive devices –Analytic writing – Structure and types
of essay – Mind maps – Structure of drafts, letters, memos, emails – Statements of Purpose –
Structure, Content and Style.

203
UNIT V 9
Listening and Speaking – Contextual listening – Listening to instructions – Listening for specific
information – Identifying detail, main ideas – Following signpost words – Stress, rhythm and
intonation - Speaking to respond and elicit ideas – Guided speaking – Opening phrases –
Interactive communication – Dysfluency -Sentence stress – Speaking on a topic – Giving opinions
– Giving an oral presentation – Telling a story or a personal anecdote – Talking about oneself -
Utterance – Speech acts- Brainstorming ideas – Group discussion.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learners will be able
 expand their vocabulary and gain practical techniques to read and comprehend a wide range
of texts with the emphasis required
 identify errors with precision and write with clarity and coherence
 understand the importance of task fulfilment and the usage of task-appropriate vocabulary
 communicate effectively in group discussions, presentations and interviews
 write topic based essays with precision and accuracy

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 - - -
2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
AVg. 2 2.6 2.6 2 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2 3 2.4 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation

Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

Teaching Methods:
Instructional methods will involve discussions, taking mock tests on various question papers –
Objective, multiple-choice and descriptive. Peer evaluation, self-check on improvement and peer
feedback - Practice sessions on speaking assessments, interview and discussion – Using
multimedia.

Evaluative Pattern:
Internal Tests – 50%
End Semester Exam - 50%

TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.P.Bhatnagar - General English for Competitive Examinations. Macmillan India Limited,
2009.
REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Educational Testing Service - The Official Guide to the GRE Revised General Test, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. The Official Guide to the TOEFL Test, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. R Rajagopalan- General English for Competitive Examinations, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, 2008.
Websites
http://www.examenglish.com/, http://www.ets.org/ , http://www.bankxams.com/
http://civilservicesmentor.com/, http://www.educationobserver.com
http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/

204
OCE353 LEAN CONCEPTS, TOOLS AND PRACTICES LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about the basics of lean principles, tools and techniques, and
implementation in the construction industry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction and overview of the construction project management - Review of Project
Management & Productivity Measurement Systems - Productivity in Construction - Daily Progress
Report-The state of the industry with respect to its management practices -construction project
phases - The problems with current construction management techniques.

UNIT II LEAN MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to lean management - Toyota’s management principle-Evolution of lean in
construction industry - Production theories in construction –Lean construction value - Value in
construction - Target value design - Lean project delivery system- Forms of waste in construction
industry - Waste Elimination.

UNIT III CORE CONCEPTS IN LEAN 9

Concepts in lean thinking – Principles of lean construction – Variability and its impact – Traditional
construction and lean construction – Traditional project delivery - Lean construction and workflow
reliability – Work structuring – Production control.

UNIT IV LEAN TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

Value Stream Mapping – Work sampling – Last planner system – Flow and pull based production
– Last Planner System – Look ahead schedule – constraint analysis – weekly planning meeting-
Daily Huddles – Root cause analysis – Continuous improvement – Just in time.

UNIT V LEAN IMPLEMENTATION IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY 9

Lean construction implementation- Enabling lean through information technology - Lean in design -
Design Structure - BIM (Building Information Modelling) - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) –
Sustainability through lean construction approach.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of this course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Explains the contemporary management techniques and the issues in present scenario.
CO2 Apply the basics of lean management principles and their evolution from manufacturing
industry to construction industry.
CO3 Develops a better understanding of core concepts of lean construction tools and techniques
and their importance in achieving better productivity.
CO4 Apply lean techniques to achieve sustainability in construction projects.
CO5 Apply lean construction techniques in design and modeling.

REFERENCES:
1. Corfe, C. and Clip, B., Implementing lean in construction: Lean and the sustainability
agenda, CIRIA, 2013.
2. Shang Gao and Sui Pheng Low, Lean Construction Management: The Toyota Way,
Springer, 2014.
3. Dave, B., Koskela, L., Kiviniemi, A., Owen, R., andTzortzopoulos, P.,Implementing
lean in construction: Lean construction and BIM, CIRIA, 2013.
4. Ballard, G., Tommelein, I., Koskela, L. and Howell, G., Lean construction tools and
techniques, 2002.
5. Salem, O., Solomon, J., Genaidy, A. and Luegring, M., Site implementation and
Assessment of Lean Construction Techniques, Lean Construction Journal, 2005.

205
OMG352 NGOS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 . to understand the importance of sustainable development
 to acquire a reasonable knowledge on the legal frameworks pertaining to pollution control and
environmental management
 to comprehend the role of NGOs in attaining sustainable development
 to comprehend the role of NGOs in attaining sustainable development

Unit I ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 9

Introduction to sustainable development goals, Global responsibility of environmental concern,
Importance of environmental preservation, Environmental threats, Pollution and its types, Effects
of Pollution, Pollution control, Treatment of wastes

UNIT II ROLE OF NGOS 9

Role of NGO’s in national development, NGO’s and participatory management, Challenges and
limitations of NGO’s, Community Development programmes, Role of NGO’s in Community
Development programmes, Participation of NGO’s in environment management, Corporate Social
responsibility, NGO’s and corporate social responsibility

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Issues and Challenges of Sustainable Development, Bioenergy, Sustainable Livelihoods and Rural
Poor in Sustainable Development, Protecting ecosystem services for sustainable development,
Non-renewable sources of energy and its effect, Renewable sources of energy for sustainability,
Nuclear resources and Legal Regulation of Hazardous Substances, Sustainable Development:
Programme and Policies, Sustainability assessment and Indicators

UNIT IV NGO’S FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Civil Society Initiatives in Environment Management, Civil Society Initiatives for Sustainable
Development, Global Initiatives in Protecting Global Environment, World Summit on Sustainable
Development (Johannesburg Summit 2002), Ecological economics, Environmental sustainability,
Social inclusion, Health for all, education for all, Food security and Water security, NGOs and
Sustainable Development strategies

UNIT V LEGAL FRAMEWORKS 9

Need for a Legal framework and its enforcement, Legal measures to control pollution,
Environmental Legislations in India, Mechanism to implement Environmental Laws in India, Legal
Protection of Forests Act 1927, Legal Protection of Wild Life, Role of NGO’s in implementing
environmental laws, Challenges in the implementation of environmental legislation
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student will :
CO1 Have a thorough grounding on the issues and challenges being faced in attaining
sustainable development
CO2 have a knowledge on the role of NGOs towards sustainable developemnt
CO 3 present strategies for NGOs in attaining sustainable development
CO 4 recognize the importance of providing energy, food security and health equity to all members
of the society without damaging the environment
CO 5 understand the environmental legislations

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Kulsange, S and Kamble, R. (2019). Environmental NGO’s: Sustainability Stewardship, Lap
Lambert Academic Publishing, India, ISBN-13: 978-6200442444.
2. Dodds, F. (2007). NGO diplomacy: The influence of nongovernmental organizations in
international environmental negotiations. Mit Press, Cambridge, ISBN-13: 978-0262524766.

206
3. Ghosh, S. (Ed.). (2019). Indian environmental law: Key concepts and principles. Orient
BlackSwan, India, ISBN-13: 978-9352875795.
4. Alan Fowler and Chiku Malunga (2010) NGO Management: The Earthscan Companion,
Routledge, ISBN-13 : 978-1849711197.

OMG353 DEMOCRACY AND GOOD GOVERNANCE L T P C

3 0 0 3
UNIT-I (9)
Structure and Process of Governance: Indian Model of Democracy, Parliament, Party Politics and
Electoral Behaviour, Federalism, the Supreme Court and Judicial Activism, Units of Local
Governance

UNIT-II (9)
Regulatory Institutions – SEBI, TRAI, Competition Commission of India,

UNIT-III (9)
Lobbying Institutions: Chambers of Commerce and Industries, Trade Unions, Farmers
Associations, etc.

UNIT- IV (9)
Contemporary Political Economy of Development in India: Policy Debates over Models of
Development in India, Recent trends of Liberalisation of Indian Economy in different sectors,
E‐governance

UNIT-V (9)
Dynamics of Civil Society: New Social Movements, Role of NGO’s, Understanding the political
significance of Media and Popular Culture.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Atul Kohli (ed.): The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
2. Corbridge, Stuart and John Harris: Reinventing India: Liberalisation, Hindu Nationalism and
Popular Democracy, Oxford University Press, 2000.
3. J.Dreze and A.Sen, India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, Clarendon, 1995.
4. Saima Saeed: Screening the Public Sphere: Media and Democracy in India,2013
5. Himat Singh: Green Revolution Reconsidered: The Rural World of Punjab, OUP, 2001.
6. Jagdish Bhagwati: India in Transition: Freeing The Economy, 1993.
7. Smitu Kothari: Social Movements and the Redefinition of Democracy, Boulder, Westview, 1993.

CME365 RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGIES L T PC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To know the Indian and global energy scenario
2 To learn the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
3 To educate the various wind energy technologies.
4 To explore the various bio-energy technologies.
5 To study the ocean and geothermal technologies.

UNIT – I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Indian energy scenario in various sectors – domestic, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
transportation and others – Present conventional energy status – Present renewable energy
207
status-Potential of various renewable energy sources-Global energy status-Per capita energy
consumption - Future energy plans

UNIT – II SOLAR ENERGY 9

Solar radiation – Measurements of solar radiation and sunshine – Solar spectrum - Solar thermal
collectors – Flat plate and concentrating collectors – Solar thermal applications – Solar thermal
energy storage – Fundamentals of solar photo voltaic conversion – Solar cells – Solar PV Systems
– Solar PV applications.

UNIT – III WIND ENERGY 9

Wind data and energy estimation – Betz limit - Site selection for windfarms – characteristics - Wind
resource assessment - Horizontal axis wind turbine – components - Vertical axis wind turbine –
Wind turbine generators and its performance – Hybrid systems – Environmental issues -
Applications.

UNIT – IV BIO-ENERGY 9
Bio resources – Biomass direct combustion – thermochemical conversion - biochemical
conversion-mechanical conversion - Biomass gasifier - Types of biomass gasifiers - Cogeneration
–- Carbonisation – Pyrolysis - Biogas plants – Digesters –Biodiesel production – Ethanol
production - Applications.

UNIT – V OCEAN AND GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9

Small hydro - Tidal energy – Wave energy – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Limitations –
Geothermal energy – Geothermal energy sources - Types of geothermal power plants –
Applications - Environmental impact.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students would be able to
 Discuss the Indian and global energy scenario.
 Describe the various solar energy technologies and its applications.
 Explain the various wind energy technologies.
 Explore the various bio-energy technologies.
 Discuss the ocean and geothermal technologies.

TEXT BOOKS:
 Fundamentals and Applications of Renewable Energy Indian Edition, by Mehmet Kanoglu,
Yunus A. Cengel, John M. Cimbala, cGraw Hill; First edition (10 December 2020), ISBN-10 :
9390385636
 Renewable Energy Sources and Emerging Technologies, by Kothari, Prentice Hall India
Learning Private Limited; 2nd edition (1 January 2011), ISBN-10 : 8120344707

REFERENCES:
1. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University Press,
U.K., 2012.
2. Rai.G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Sukhatme.S.P., “Solar Energy: Principles of Thermal Collection and Storage”, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
4. Tiwari G.N., “Solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications”, Alpha
Science Intl Ltd, 2015.
5. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.

208
 PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 2
2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 1 2
3 3 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2
4 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 2
5 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

OME354 APPLIED DESIGN THINKING LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Introduce tools & techniques of design thinking for innovative product
 development Illustrate customer-centric product innovation using on simple
 use cases Demonstrate development of Minimum usable Prototypes
 Outline principles of solution concepts & their evaluation
 Describe system thinking principles as applied to complex systems

UNIT I DESIGN THINKING PRINCIPLES 9

Exploring Human-centered Design - Understanding the Innovation process, discovering areas of
opportunity, Interviewing & empathy-building techniques, Mitigate validation risk with FIR [Forge
Innovation rubric] - Case studies

UNIT II ENDUSER-CENTRIC INNOVATION 9

Importance of customer-centric innovation - Problem Validation and Customer Discovery -
Understanding problem significance and problem incidence - Customer Validation. Target user,
User persona & user stories. Activity: Customer development process - Customer interviews and
field visit

UNIT III APPLIED DESIGN THINKING TOOLS 9

Concept of Minimum Usable Prototype [MUP] - MUP challenge brief - Designing & Crafting
the value proposition - Designing and Testing Value Proposition; Design a compelling value
proposition; Process, tools and techniques of Value Proposition Design

UNIT IV CONCEPT GENERATION 9

Solution Exploration, Concepts Generation and MUP design- Conceptualize the solution
concept; explore, iterate and learn; build the right prototype; Assess capability, usability and
feasibility. Systematic concept generation; evaluation of technology alternatives and the solution
concepts

UNIT V SYSTEM THINKING 9

System Thinking, Understanding Systems, Examples and Understandings, Complex Systems
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
● Define & test various hypotheses to mitigate the inherent risks in product innovations.
● Design the solution concept based on the proposed value by exploring alternate solutions to
achieve value-price fit.
● Develop skills in empathizing, critical thinking, analyzing, storytelling & pitching
● Apply system thinking in a real-world scenario

209
Text Books
1. Steve Blank, (2013), The four steps to epiphany: Successful strategies for products that win,
Wiley.
2. Alexander Osterwalder, Yves Pigneur, Gregory Bernarda, Alan Smith, Trish Papadakos,
(2014), Value
3. Proposition Design: How to Create Products and Services Customers Want, Wiley
4. Donella H. Meadows, (2015), “Thinking in Systems -A Primer”, Sustainability Institute.
5. Tim Brown,(2012) “Change by Design: How Design Thinking Transforms Organizations and
Inspires Innovation”, Harper Business.

REFERENCES
1. https://www.ideou.com/pages/design-thinking#process
2. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/valuation-risk-versus-validation-risk-in-product-innovations-
49f253ca86 24
3. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/product-innovation-rubric-adf5ebdfd356
4. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/evaluating-product-innovations-e8178e58b86e
5. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/user-guide-for-product-innovation-rubric-857181b253dd
6. https://blog.forgefor ward.in/star tup-failure-is-like-true-lie-7812cdfe9b85

MF3003 REVERSE ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The main learning objective of this course is to prepare students for:
 Applying the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Applying the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Applying the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
 Analysing the various legal aspect and applications of reverse engineering in product design
and development.
 Understand about 3D scanning hardware & software operations and procedure to generate 3D
model

UNIT I INTRODUCTION & GEOMETRIC FORM 9 Hours

Definition – Uses – The Generic Process – Phases – Computer Aided Reverse Engineering -
Surface and Solid Model Reconstruction – Dimensional Measurement – Prototyping.

UNIT II MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS AND PROCESS IDENTIFICATION 9 Hours

.Alloy Structure Equivalency – Phase Formation and Identification – Mechanical Strength –
Hardness –Part Failure Analysis – Fatigue – Creep and Stress Rupture – Environmentally
Induced Failure Material Specification - Composition Determination - Microstructure Analysis -
Manufacturing Process Verification.

UNIT III DATA PROCESSING 9 Hours

Statistical Analysis – Data Analysis – Reliability and the Theory of Interference – Weibull Analysis
– Data Conformity and Acceptance – Data Report – Performance Criteria – Methodology of
Performance Evaluation – System Compatibility.

UNIT IV 3D SCANNING AND MODELLING 9 Hours

Introduction, working principle and operations of 3D scanners: Laser, White Light, Blue Light -
Applications- Software for scanning and modelling: Types- Applications- Preparation techniques

210
for Scanning objects- Scanning and Measuring strategies - Calibration of 3D Scanner- Step by
step procedure: 3D scanning - Geometric modelling – 3D inspection- Case studies.

UNIT V INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9 Hours

Reverse Engineering in the Automotive Industry; Aerospace Industry; Medical Device Industry.
Case studies and Solving Industrial projects in Reverse Engineering.Legality: Patent – Copyrights
–Trade Secret – Third-Party Materials.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
 Apply the fundamental concepts and principles of reverse engineering in product design and
development.
 Apply the concept and principles material characteristics, part durability and life limitation in
reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Apply the concept and principles of material identification and process verification in reverse
engineering of product design and development.
 Apply the concept and principles of data processing, part performance and system compatibility
in reverse engineering of product design and development.
 Analyze the various legal aspect
 Applications of reverse engineering in product design and development.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Robert W. Messler, Reverse Engineering: Mechanisms, Structures, Systems & Materials, 1st
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2014
2. Wego Wang, Reverse Engineering Technology of Reinvention, CRC Press, 2011

REFERENCES:
1. Scott J. Lawrence , Principles of Reverse Engineering, Kindle Edition, 2022
2. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, Product Design: Techniques in Reverse Engineering and New
Product Development, Prentice Hall, 2001
3. Kathryn, A. Ingle, “Reverse Engineering”, McGraw-Hill, 1994.
4. Linda Wills, “Reverse Engineering”, Kluver Academic Publishers, 1996
5. Vinesh Raj and Kiran Fernandes, “Reverse Engineering: An Industrial Perspective”, Springer-
Verlag London Limited 2008.

OPR351 SUSTAINABLE MANUFACTURING L TP C

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To be acquainted with sustainability in manufacturing and its evaluation.
 To provide knowledge in environment and social sustainability.
 To provide the student with the knowledge of strategy to achieve sustainability.
 To familiarize with trends in sustainable operations.
 To create awareness in current sustainable practices in manufacturing industry.

UNIT – I ECONOMIC SUSTAINABILITY 9

Industrial Revolution-Economic sustainability: globalization and international issues Sustainability
status - Emerging issues- Innovative products- Reconfiguration manufacturing enterprises -
Competitive manufacturing strategies - Performance evaluation- Management for sustainability -
Assessments of economic sustainability

211
UNIT – II SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY 9
Social sustainability – Introduction-Work management -Human rights - Societal commitment -
Customers -Business practices -Modelling and assessing social sustainability. Environmental
issues pertaining to the manufacturing sector: Pollution - Use of resources -Pressure to reduce
costs - Environmental management: Processes that minimize negative environmental impacts -
environmental legislation and energy costs - need to reduce the carbon footprint of manufacturing
Operations-Modelling and assessing environmental sustainability

UNIT – III SUSTAINABILITY PRACTICES 9

Sustainability awareness - Measuring Industry Awareness-Drivers and barriers -Availability of
sustainability indicators -Analysis of sustainability practicing -Modeling and assessment of
sustainable practicing -Sustainability awareness -Sustainability drivers and barriers - Availability of
sustainability indicators- Designing questionnaires- Optimizing Sustainability Indexes-Elements –
Cost and time model.

UNIT – IV MANUFACTURING STRATEGY FOR SUSTAINABILITY 9

Concepts of competitive strategy and manufacturing strategies and development of a strategic
improvement programme - Manufacturing strategy in business success strategy formation and
formulation - Structured strategy formulation - Sustainable manufacturing system design options -
Approaches to strategy formulation - Realization of new strategies/system designs.

UNIT – V TRENDS IN SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS 9

Principles of sustainable operations - Life cycle assessment manufacturing and service activities -
influence of product design on operations - Process analysis – Capacity management - Quality
management -Inventory management - Just-In-Time systems - Resource efficient design -
Consumerism and sustainable well-being.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Discuss the importance of economic sustainability.
CO2: Describe the importance of sustainable practices.
CO3: Identify drivers and barriers for the given conditions.
CO4: Formulate strategy in sustainable manufacturing.
CO5: Plan for sustainable operation of industry with environmental, cost consciousness.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ibrahim Garbie, “Sustainability in Manufacturing Enterprises Concepts, Analyses and
Assessments for Industry 4.0”, Springer International Publishing., United States, 2016,
ISBN-13: 978-3319293042.
2. Davim J.P., “Sustainable Manufacturing”, John Wiley & Sons., United States, 2010,ISBN:
978-1-848-21212-1.

REFERENCES:
1. Jovane F, Ęmper, W.E. and Williams, D.J., “The ManuFuture Road: Towards
Competitive and Sustainable High-Adding-Value Manufacturing”, Springer,2009, United
States, ISBN 978-3-540-77011-4.
2. Kutz M., “Environmentally Conscious Mechanical Design”, John Wiley & Sons., United
States, 2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-72636-4.
3. Seliger G., “Sustainable Manufacturing: Shaping Global Value Creation”, Springer,
United States, 2012, ISBN 978-3-642-27289-9.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/Pos POs PSOs
&PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 - 2 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 1 2 1 2 2
212
 CO3 3 - - - - - 2 3 - 1 1 2 1 2 2
CO4 3 - 3 - - - 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO/PO &
3 - 3 - - - 2 2 - 1 1 2 2 2 1
PSO Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

AU3791 ELECTRIC AND HYBRID VEHICLES LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to prepare the students to know about the general aspects of
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (EHV), including architectures, modelling, sizing, and sub system
design and hybrid vehicle control.

UNIT I DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Need for Electric vehicle- Comparative study of diesel, petrol, hybrid and electric Vehicles.
Advantages and Limitations of hybrid and electric Vehicles. - Design requirement for electric
vehicles- Range, maximum velocity, acceleration, power requirement, mass of the vehicle.
Various Resistance- Transmission efficiency- Electric vehicle chassis and Body Design, Electric
Vehicle Recharging and Refuelling Systems.

UNIT II ENERGY SOURCES 9

Battery Parameters- - Different types of batteries – Lead Acid- Nickel Metal Hydride - Lithium ion-
Sodium based- Metal Air. Battery Modelling - Equivalent circuits, Battery charging- Quick
Charging devices. Fuel Cell- Fuel cell Characteristics- Fuel cell types-Half reactions of fuel cell.
Ultra capacitors. Battery Management System.

UNIT III MOTORS AND DRIVES 9

Types of Motors- DC motors- AC motors, PMSM motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance
motors working principle, construction and characteristics.

UNIT IV POWER CONVERTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9

Solid state Switching elements and characteristics – BJT, MOSFET, IGBT, SCR and TRIAC -
Power Converters – rectifiers, inverters and converters - Motor Drives - DC, AC motor, PMSM
motors, BLDC motors, Switched reluctance motors – four quadrant operations –operating modes

UNIT V HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Main components and working principles of a hybrid and electric vehicles, Different
configurations of hybrid and electric vehicles. Power Split devices for Hybrid Vehicles - Operation
modes - Control Strategies for Hybrid Vehicle - Economy of hybrid Vehicles - Case study on
specification of electric and hybrid vehicles.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the student will be able to
1. Understand the operation and architecture of electric and hybrid vehicles
2. Identify various energy source options like battery and fuel cell
3. Select suitable electric motor for applications in hybrid and electric vehicles.
4. Explain the role of power electronics in hybrid and electric vehicles
5. Analyze the energy and design requirement for hybrid and electric vehicles.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003
2. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRCPress,2005.
213
REFERENCES:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley &
Sons,2003
2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005
3. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication,2005.

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
2 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
3 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
4 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
5 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3
Avg. 1 1 2 1 3 2 2 1 3

OAS352 SPACE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 Use the standard atmosphere tables and equations.
 Find lift and drag coefficient data from NACA plots.
 Apply the concept of static stability to flight vehicles.
 Describe the concepts of stress, strain, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio, yield strength.
 Demonstrate a basic knowledge of dynamics relevant to orbital mechanics.

UNIT I STANDARD ATMOSPHERE 6

History of aviation – standard atmosphere - pressure, temperature and density altitude.

UNIT II AERODYNAMICS 10
Aerodynamic forces – Lift generation Viscosity and its implications - Shear stress in a velocity
profile - Lagrangian and Eulerian flow field - Concept of a streamline – Aircraft terminology and
geometry - Aircraft types - Lift and drag coefficients using NACA data.

UNIT III PERFORMANCE AND PROPULSION 9

Viscous and pressure drag - flow separation - aerodynamic drag - thrust calculations -thrust/power
available and thrust/power required.

UNIT IV AIRCRAFT STABILITY AND STRUCTURAL THEORY 10

Degrees of freedom of aircraft motions - stable, unstable and neutral stability - concept of static
stability - Hooke’s Law- brittle and ductile materials - moment of inertia - section
modulus.

UNIT V SPACE APPLICATIONS 10

History of space research - spacecraft trajectories and basic orbital manoeuvres - six orbital
elements - Kepler’s laws of orbits - Newtons law of gravitation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Illustrate the history of aviation & developments over the years
 Ability to identify the types & classifications of components and control systems
 Explain the basic concepts of flight & Physical properties of Atmosphere
 Identify the types of fuselage and constructions.
 Distinguish the types of Engines and explain the principles of Rocket
214
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John D. Anderson, Introduction to Flight, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Education, New York,2015.
2. E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021.
3. Stephen. A. Brandt, " Introduction to Aeronautics: A design perspective " American
Institute of Aeronautics & Astronautics,1997.

REFERENCE:
1. Kermode, A.C., “Mechanics of Flight”, Himalayan Book, 1997.

OIM351 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce fundamental concepts of industrial management
 To understand the approaches to the study of Management
 To learn about Decision Making, Organizing and leadership
 To analyze the Managerial Role and functions
 To know about the Supply Chain Management

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Technology Management - Definition - Functions - Evolution of Modern Management - Scientific
Management Development of Management Thought. Approaches to the study of Management,
Forms of Organization -Individual Ownership - Partnership - Joint Stock Companies - Co-operative
Enterprises - Public Sector Undertakings, Corporate Frame Work- Share Holders - Board of
Directors - Committees - Chief Executive Line and Functional Managers,-Financial-Legal-Trade
Union

UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 9

Planning - Nature and Purpose - Objectives - Strategies – Policies and Planning Premises -
Decision Making - Organizing - Nature and Process - Premises - Departmentalization - Line and
staff - Decentralization -Organizational culture, Staffing - selection and training .Placement -
Performance appraisal - Career Strategy – Organizational Development. Leading - Managing
human factor - Leadership .Communication, Controlling - Process of Controlling - Controlling
techniques, productivity and operations management - Preventive control, Industrial Safety.

UNIT III ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9

Definition - Organization - Managerial Role and functions -Organizational approaches, Individual
behaviour - causes - Environmental Effect - Behaviour and Performance, Perception -
Organizational Implications. Personality - Contributing factors - Dimension – Need Theories -
Process Theories - Job Satisfaction, Learning and Behaviour-Learning Curves, Work Design and
approaches.

UNIT IV GROUPDYNAMICS 9
Group Behaviour - Groups - Contributing factors - Group Norms, Communication - Process -
Barriers to communication - Effective communication, leadership - formal and informal
characteristics – Managerial Grid - Leadership styles - Group Decision Making - Leadership Role
in Group Decision, Group Conflicts - Types -Causes - Conflict Resolution -Inter group relations
and conflict, Organization centralization and decentralization - Formal and informal -
Organizational Structures Organizational Change and Development -Change Process –
Resistance to Change - Culture and Ethics.

215
UNIT V MODERN CONCEPTS 9
Management by Objectives (MBO) - Management by Exception (MBE),Strategic Management -
Planning for Future direction - SWOT Analysis -Evolving development strategies, information
technology in management Decisions support system-Management Games Business Process Re-
engineering(BPR) –Enterprises Resource Planning (ERP) - Supply Chain Management (SCM) -
Activity Based Management (AM) - Global Perspective - Principles and Steps Advantages and
disadvantage
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Understand the basic concepts of industrial management
CO2: Identify the group conflicts and its causes.
CO3: Perform swot analysis
CO4 : Analyze the learning curves
CO5 : Understand the placement and performance appraisal

REFERENCES:
Maynard H.B, “Industrial Engineering Hand book”, McGraw-Hill, sixth 2008
CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3
4 2 2 3 3 3 3
5 2 2 2
AVg. 2 2.2 2.3 3 1.8 2 2.6

OIE354 QUALITY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Developing a clear knowledge in the basics of various quality concepts.
 Facilitating the students in understanding the application of control charts and its
techniques.
 Developing thespecialcontrolproceduresforserviceandprocessorientedindustries.
 Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
 Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Quality Dimensions–Quality definitions–Inspection-Quality control–Quality Assurance–Quality
planning-Quality costs–Economics of quality– Quality loss function

UNIT II CONTROLCHARTS 9
Chance and assignable causes of process variation, statistical basis of the control chart, control
charts for variables- X , R and S charts, attribute control charts - p, np, c and u- Construction and
application.

UNIT III SPECIAL CONTROL PROCEDURES 9

Warning and modified control limits, control chart for individual measurements, multi-vari chart,
Xchart with a linear trend, chart for moving averages and ranges, cumulative-sum and
exponentially weighted moving average control charts.

UNIT IV STATISTICALPROCESSCONTROL 9
Process stability, process capability analysis using a Histogram or probability plots and control
216
chart.Gauge capability studies,setting specification limits.

UNITV ACCEPTANCESAMPLING 9
The acceptance sampling fundamental, OC curve, sampling plans for attributes, simple, double,
multiple and sequential, sampling plans for variables,MIL-STD-105DandMIL-STD-414E&IS2500
standards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students will be able to:
CO1: Control the quality of processes using control charts for variables in manufacturing industries.
CO2: Control the occurrence of defective product and the defects in manufacturing companies.
CO3: Control the occurrence of defects in services.
CO4: Analyzing and understanding the process capability study.
CO5: Developing the acceptance sampling procedures for incoming raw material.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 1
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1
4 3 2 3 1 1
5 2 3 3 3 1
AVg. 2.6 2.7 2.7 3 3 1 2.7 1 2.7 1 2 1

OSF351 FIRE SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1:To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Fire and Safety Studies
2:To learn about the effect of fire on materials used for construction, the method of test for non-
combustibility & fire resistance
3:To learn about fire area, fire stopped areas and different types of fire-resistant doors
4:To learn about the method of fire protection of structural members and their repair due to fire
damage.
5:To develop safety professionals for both technical and management through systematic and
quality-based study programmes

UNIT I INHERENT SAFETY CONCEPTS 9

Compartment fire-factors controlling fire severity, ventilation controlled and fuel controlled fires;
Spread of fire in rooms, within building and between buildings. Effect of temperature on the
properties of structural materials- concrete, steel, masonry and wood; Behavior of non-structural
materials on fire- plastics, glass, textile fibres and other house hold materials.

UNIT II PLANT LOCATIONS 9

Compartment temperature-time response at pre-flashover and post flashover periods; Equivalence
of fire severity of compartment fire and furnace fire; Fire resistance test on structural elements-
standard heating condition, Indian standard test method, performance criteria.

UNIT III WORKING CONDITIONS 9

Fire separation between building- principle of calculation of safe distance. Design principles of fire
resistant walls and ceilings; Fire resistant screens- solid screens and water curtains; Local
barriers; Fire stopped areas-in roof, in fire areas and in connecting structures; Fire doors- Low
combustible, Non-combustible and Spark-proof doors; method of suspension of fire doors; Air-tight
217
sealing of doors;

UNIT IV FIRE SEVERITY AND REPAIR TECHNIQUES 9

Fabricated fire proof boards-calcium silicate, Gypsum, Vermiculite, and Perlite boards; Fire
protection of structural elements - Wooden, Steel and RCC.. Reparability of fire damaged
structures- Assessment of damage to concrete, steel, masonry and timber structures, Repair
techniques- repair methods to reinforced concrete Columns, beams and slabs, Repair to steel
structural members, Repair to masonry structures.

UNIT V WORKING AT HEIGHTS 9

Safe Access - Requirement for Safe Work Platforms- Stairways - Gangways and Ramps-Fall
Prevention & Fall Protection - Safety Belts - Safety nets - Fall Arrestors- Working on Fragile Roofs
- Work Permit Systems-Accident Case Studies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
On completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1:Understand the effect of fire on materials used for construction
CO2:Understand the method of test for non-combustibility and fire resistance; and will be able to
select different structural elements and their dimensions for a particular fire resistance rating
of a building.
CO3:To understand the design concept of fire walls, fire screens, local barriers and fire doors and
able to select them appropriately to prevent fire spread.
CO4:To decide the method of fire protection to RCC, steel, and wooden structural elements and
their repair methods if damaged due to fire.
CO5:Describe the safety techniques and improve the analytical and intelligence to take the right
decision at right time.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Roytman, M. Y,”Principles of fire safety standards for building construction”. Amerind Publishing
Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,1975
2. John A. Purkiss,”Fire safety engineering design of structures” (2nd edn.), Butterworth
Heinemann, Oxford, UK,2009.
REFERENCES:
4. Smith, E.E. and Harmathy, T.Z. (Editors),”Design of buildings for fire safety”. ASTM Special
Publication 685, American Society for Testing and Materials, Boston, U.S.A,1979.
5. Butcher, E. G. and Parnell, A. C, ”Designing of fire safety”. JohnWiley and Sons Ltd., New York,
U.S.A.1983.
6. Jain, V.K,”Fire safety in buildings” (2nd edn.). New Age International(P) Ltd., New Delhi,2010. 4.
Hazop&Hazan,”Identifying and Assessing Process Industry Hazards”, Fourth Edition ,1999
7. Frank R. Spellman, Nancy E. Whiting,”The Handbook of Safety Engineering: Principles and
Applications”, 2009

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 1 - 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - - - - -
4 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -
5 2 - 1 - - 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - -
AVg. 1.3 - 1.75 - - 1 1.3 1 1 - 1 - - -

218
OML351 INTRODUCTION TO NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Understanding the basic importance of NDT in quality assurance.
 Imbibing the basic principles of various NDT techniques, its applications, limitations, codes and
standards.
 Equipping themselves to locate a flaw in various materials, products.
 Applying apply the testing methods for inspecting materials in accordance with industry
specifications and standards.
 Acquiring the knowledge on the selection of the suitable NDT technique for a given application

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NDT & VISUAL TESTING 9

Concepts of Non-destructive testing-relative merits and limitations-NDT Versus mechanical
testing, Fundamentals of Visual Testing – vision, lighting, material attributes, environmental
factors, visual perception, direct and indirect methods – mirrors, magnifiers, boroscopes and
fibroscopes – light sources and special lighting.

UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT & MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING 9

Liquid Penetrant Inspection: principle, applications, advantages and limitations, dyes, developers
and cleaners, Methods & Interpretation.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: Principles, applications, magnetization methods, magnetic particles,
Testing Procedure, demagnetization, advantages and limitations, – Interpretation and evaluation of
test indications.

UNIT III EDDY CURRENT TESTING & THERMOGRAPHY 9

Eddy Current Testing: Generation of eddy currents– properties– eddy current sensing elements,
probes, Instrumentation, Types of arrangement, applications, advantages, limitations – Factors
affecting sensing elements and coil impedance, calibration, Interpretation/Evaluation.
Thermography- Principle, Contact & Non-Contact inspection methods, Active & Passive methods,
Liquid Crystal – Concept, example, advantages & limitations. Electromagnetic spectrum, infrared
thermography- approaches, IR detectors, Instrumentation and methods, applications.

UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING & AET 9

Ultrasonic Testing: Types of ultrasonic waves, characteristics, attenuation, couplants, probes,
EMAT. Inspection methods-pulse echo, transmission and phased array techniques, types of
scanning and displays, angle beam inspection of welds, time of flight diffraction (TOFD) technique,
Thickness determination by ultrasonic method, Study of A, B and C scan presentations,
calibration.
Acoustic Emission Technique – Introduction, Types of AE signal, AE wave propagation, Source
location, Kaiser effect, AE transducers, Principle, AE parameters, AE instrumentation, Advantages
& Limitations, Interpretation of Results, Applications.

UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY TESTING 9

Sources-X-rays and Gamma rays and their characteristics-absorption, scattering. Filters and
screens, Imaging modalities-film radiography and digital radiography (Computed, Direct, Real
Time, CT scan). Problems in shadow formation, exposure factors, inverse square law, exposure
charts, Penetrameters, safety in radiography.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Realize the importance of NDT in various engineering fields.
2. Have a basic knowledge of surface NDE techniques which enables to carry out various
inspection in accordance with the established procedures.
3. Calibrate the instrument and inspect for in-service damage in the components by means of
Eddy current testing as well as Thermography testing.
219
 4. Differentiate various techniques of UT and AET and select appropriate NDT methods for
better evaluation.
5. Interpret the results of Radiography testing and also have the ability to analyse the
influence of various parameters on the testing.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T. Jayakumar and M. Thavasimuthu, Practical Non Destructive Testing, Alpha
Science International Limited, 3rd edition, 2002.
2. J. Prasad and C. G. K. Nair, Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education, 2nd edition, 2011.
3. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. ASM Metals Handbook, V-17, "Nondestructive Evaluation and Quality Control", American
Society of Metals, USA, 2001.
2. Barry Hull and Vernon John,"Nondestructive Testing", Macmillan, 1989.
3. Chuck Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive Evaluation”, Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
4. Louis Cartz, "Nondestructive Testing", ASM International, USA, 1995.

PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 2 2 1.8 2 1.3

OMR351 MECHATRONICS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
1. Selecting sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
2. Explaining the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also
interpret and develop programs.
3. Designing appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with
microprocessor.
4. Applying PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
5. Designing and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION AND SENSORS 9

Introduction to Mechatronics – Systems – Need for Mechatronics – Emerging areas of
Mechatronics – Classification of Mechatronics. Sensors and Transducers: Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance Sensors – Strain Gauges –
220
Eddy Current Sensor – Hall Effect Sensor –Temperature Sensors – Light Sensors.

UNIT – II 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9

Introduction – Pin Configuration - Architecture of 8085 – Addressing Modes – Instruction set,
Timing diagram of 8085.

UNIT – III PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE 9

Introduction – Architecture of 8255, Keyboard Interfacing, LED display – Interfacing, ADC and
DAC Interface, Temperature Control – Stepper Motor Control – Traffic Control Interface.

UNIT – IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9

Introduction – Architecture – Input / Output Processing – Programming with Timers, Counters
and Internal relays – Data Handling – Selection of PLC.

UNIT – V ACTUATORS AND MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle – Characteristics,
Stages of Mechatronics Design Process – Comparison of Traditional and Mechatronics Design
Concepts with Examples – Case studies of Mechatronics Systems – Pick and Place Robot –
Engine Management system – Automatic Car Park Barrier.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Select sensors to develop mechatronics systems.
CO2: Explain the architecture and timing diagram of microprocessor, and also
interpret and develop programs.
CO3: Design appropriate interfacing circuits to connect I/O devices with
microprocessor.
CO 4: Apply PLC as a controller in mechatronics system.
CO 5: Design and develop the apt mechatronics system for an application.
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO/PO & PSO 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with
the 8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.

REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and
Hall, 1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage
Learning, 2010.
221
 4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.

ORA351 FOUNDATION OF ROBOTICS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To study the kinematics, drive systems and programming of robots.
2. To study the basics of robot laws and transmission systems.
3. To familiarize students with the concepts and techniques of robot manipulator, its
kinematics.
4. To familiarize students with the various Programming and Machine Vision application in
robots.
5. To build confidence among students to evaluate, choose and incorporate robots in
engineering systems.

UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9

Robot – Definition – Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate systems, Work Envelope, types and
classification – specifications – Pitch, yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load –
Robot Parts and their functions – Need for Robots – Different Applications.

UNIT – II ROBOT KINEMATICS 9

Forward kinematics, inverse kinematics and the difference: forward kinematics and inverse
Kinematics of Manipulators with two, three degrees of freedom (in 2 dimensional), four degrees
of freedom (in 3 dimensional) – derivations and problems. Homogeneous transformation
matrices, translation and rotation matrices.

UNIT – III ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9

Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives – Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo
Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of
All These Drives. End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic
Grippers, Magnetic grippers, vacuum grippers, internal grippers and external grippers, selection
and design considerations of a gripper

UNIT – IV SENSORS IN ROBOTICS 9

Force sensors, touch and tactile sensors, proximity sensors, non-contact sensors, safety
considerations in robotic cell, proximity sensors, fail safe hazard sensor systems, and
compliance mechanism. Machine vision system - camera, frame grabber, sensing and
digitizing image data – signal conversion, image storage, lighting techniques, image processing
and analysis – data reduction, segmentation, feature extraction, object recognition, other
algorithms, applications – Inspection, identification, visual serving and navigation.

UNIT – V PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS OF ROBOT 9

Teach pendant programming, lead through programming, robot programming languages – VAL
programming – Motion Commands, Sensors commands, End-Effector Commands, and simple
programs - Role of robots in inspection, assembly, material handling, underwater, space and
medical fields.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
CO1: Interpret the features of robots and technology involved in the control.
CO2: Apply the basic engineering knowledge and laws for the design of robotics.
222
CO3: Explain the basic concepts like various configurations, classification and parts of end
effectors compare various end effectors and grippers and tools and sensors used in robots.
CO4: Explain the concept of kinematics, degeneracy, dexterity and trajectory planning.
CO5: Demonstrate the image processing and image analysis techniques by machine vision
system.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs& POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO/PO &
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ganesh.S.Hedge,”A textbook of Industrial Robotics”, Lakshmi Publications, 2006.
2. Mikell.P.Groover , “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and applications”
McGraw Hill 2ND edition 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Fu K.S. Gonalz R.C. and ice C.S.G.”Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence”,
McGraw Hill book co. 2007.
2. YoramKoren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Book, Co., 2002.
3. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill 2005.
4. John. J.Craig, “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control” 2nd Edition, 2002.
5. Jazar, “Theory of Applied Robotics: Kinematics, Dynamics and Control”, Springer India
reprint, 2010.

OAE352 FUNDAMENTALS OF AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire the knowledge on the Historical evaluation of Airplanes
 To learn the different component systems and functions
 To know the concepts of basic properties and principles behind the flight
 To learn the basics of different structures & construction
 To learn the various types of power plants used in aircrafts

UNIT I HISTORY OF FLIGHT 8

Balloon flight-ornithopter-Early Airplanes by Wright Brothers, biplanes and monoplanes,
Developments in aerodynamics, materials, structures and propulsion over the years.

UNIT II AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATIONS AND ITS CONTROLS 10

Different types of flight vehicles, classifications-Components of an airplane and their functions-
Conventional control, powered control- Basic instruments for flying-Typical systems for control
actuation.

223
UNIT III BASICS OF AERODYNAMICS 9
Physical Properties and structures of the Atmosphere, Temperature, pressure and altitude
relationships, Newton’s Law of Motions applied to Aeronautics-Evolution of lift, drag and moment.
Aerofoils, Mach number, Maneuvers.

UNIT IV BASICS OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES 9

General types of construction, Monocoque, semi-monocoque and geodesic constructions, typical
wing and fuselage structure. Metallic and non-metallic materials. Use of Aluminium alloy, titanium,
stainless steel and composite materials. Stresses and strains-Hooke’s law- stress-strain diagrams-
elastic constants-Factor of Safety.

UNIT V BASICS OF PROPULSION 9

Basic ideas about piston, turboprop and jet engines – use of propeller and jets for thrust
production- Comparative merits, Principle of operation of rocket, types of rocket and typical
applications, Exploration into space.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:

ge and constructions.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Anderson, J.D., Introduction to Flight, McGraw-Hill; 8th edition , 2015
2. . E Rathakrishnan, “Introduction to Aerospace Engineering: Basic Principles of Flight”, John
Wiley, NJ, 2021
3. Stephen.A. Brandt, Introduction to aeronautics: A design perspective, 2nd edition, AIAA
Education Series, 2004.

REFERENCE
1. SADHU SINGH, “INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND GAS TURBINE”-, SS
Kataraia & sons, 2015
2. KERMODE , “FLIGHT WITHOUT FORMULAE”, -, Pitman; 4th Revised edition 1989

OGI351 REMOTE SENSING CONCEPTS LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the concepts of remote sensing processes and its components.
 To expose the various remote sensing platforms and sensors and to introduce the elements of
data interpretation

UNIT I REMOTE SENSING AND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 9

Definition – components of RS – History of Remote Sensing – Merits and demerits of data
collation between conventional and remote sensing methods - Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radiation principles - Wave theory, Planck‘s law, Wien’s Displacement Law, Stefan’s
Boltzmann law, Kirchoff‘s law – Radiation sources: active & passive - Radiation Quantities

UNIT II EMR INTERACTION WITH ATMOSPHERE AND EARTH MATERIAL 9

Standard atmospheric profile – main atmospheric regions and its characteristics – interaction of
radiation with atmosphere – Scattering, absorption and refraction – Atmospheric windows - Energy
balance equation – Specular and diffuse reflectors – Spectral reflectance & emittance –
Spectroradiometer – Spectral Signature concepts – Typical spectral reflectance curves for
vegetation, soil and water – solid surface scattering in microwave region.
224
UNIT III ORBITS AND PLATFORMS 9
Motions of planets and satellites – Newton‘s law of gravitation - Gravitational field and potential -
Escape velocity - Kepler‘s law of planetary motion - Orbit elements and types – Orbital
perturbations and maneuvers – Types of remote sensing platforms - Ground based, Airborne
platforms and Space borne platforms – Classification of satellites – Sun synchronous and
Geosynchronous satellites – Lagrange Orbit.

UNIT IV SENSING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification of remote sensors – Resolution concept : spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal
resolutions - Scanners - Along and across track scanners – Optical-infrared sensors – Thermal
sensors – microwave sensors – Calibration of sensors - High Resolution Sensors - LIDAR , UAV –
Orbital and sensor characteristics of live Indian earth observation satellites

UNIT V DATA PRODUCTS AND INTERPRETATION 9

Photographic and digital products – Types, levels and open source satellite data products –-
selection and procurement of data– Visual interpretation: basic elements and interpretation keys -
Digital interpretation – Concepts of Image rectification, Image enhancement and Image
classification
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO 1 Understand the concepts and laws related to remote sensing
CO 2 Understand the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with atmosphere and earth material
CO 3 Acquire knowledge about satellite orbits and different types of satellites
CO 4 Understand the different types of remote sensors
CO 5 Gain knowledge about the concepts of interpretation of satellite imagery

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Thomas M.Lillesand, Ralph W. Kiefer and Jonathan W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and
Image interpretation, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York,2015.
2. George Joseph and C Jeganathan, Fundamentals of Remote Sensing,Third Edition
Universities Press (India) Private limited, Hyderabad, 2018

REFERENCES:
1. Janza, F.Z., Blue H.M. and Johnson,J.E. Manual of Remote Sensing. Vol.1, American
Society of Photogrametry, Virginia, USA, 2002.
2. Verbyla, David, Satellite Remote Sensing of Natural Resources. CRC Press, 1995
3. Paul Curran P.J. Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman, RLBS, 1988.
4. Introduction to Physics and Techniques of Remote Sensing , Charles Elachi and Jacob Van
Zyl, 2006 Edition II, Wiley Publication.
5. Basudeb Bhatta, Remote Sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press, 2011

CO-PO MAPPING
Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
225
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics discipline 3 3 3 3 3 3
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
Engineering problems and innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
3 3 3 3 3
Design solutions

OAI351 URBAN AGRICULTURE LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the students the principles of agricultural crop production and the production
practices of crops in modern ways.
 To delineate the role of agricultural engineers in relation to various crop production practices.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Benefits of urban agriculture- economic benefits, environmental benefits, social and cultural
benefits, educational, skill-building and job training benefits, health, nutrition and food accessibility
benefits.

UNIT II VERTICAL FARMING 9

Vertical farming- types, green facade, living/green wall-modular green wall , vegetated mat wall-
Structures and components for green wall system: plant selection, growing media, irrigation and
plant nutrition: Design, light, benefits of vertical gardening. Roof garden and its types. Kitchen
garden, hanging baskets: The house plants/ indoor plants

UNIT III SOIL LESS CULTIVATION 9

Hydroponics, aeroponics, aquaponics: merits and limitations, costs and Challenges, backyard
gardens- tactical gardens- street landscaping- forest gardening, greenhouses, urban beekeeping

UNIT IV MODERN CONCEPTS 9

Growth of plants in vertical pipes in terraces and inside buildings, micro irrigation concepts suitable
for roof top gardening, rain hose system, Green house, polyhouse and shade net system of crop
production on roof tops

UNIT V WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Concept, scope and maintenance of waste management- recycle of organic waste, garden
wastes- solid waste management-scope, microbiology of waste, other ingredients like
insecticide, pesticides and fungicides residues, waste utilization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Demonstrate the principles behind crop production and various parameters that influences the
crop growth on roof tops
2. Explain different methods of crop production on roof tops
3. Explain nutrient and pest management for crop production on roof tops
4. Illustrate crop water requirement and irrigation water management on roof tops
5. Explain the concept of waste management on roof tops

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Martellozzo F and J S Landry. 2020. Urban Agriculture. Scitus Academics Llc.

226
2. Rob Roggema. 2016. Sustainable Urban Agriculture and Food Planning. Routledge Taylor and
Francis Group.
3. Akrong M O. 2012. Urban Agriculture. LAP Lambert Academic Publishing.

REFERENCES:
1. Agha Rokh A. 2008. Evaluation of ornamental flowers and fishes breeding in Bushehr urban
wastewater using a pilot-scale aquaponic system. Water and Wastewater, 19 (65): 47–53.
2. Agrawal M, Singh B, Rajput M, Marshall F and Bell J. N. B. 2003. Effect of air pollution on peri-
urban agriculture: A case study. Environmental Pollution, 126 (3): 323–329.
https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0269749103002458#aep-section-id24.
3. Jac Smit and Joe Nasr. 1992. Urban agriculture for sustainable cities: using wastes and idle
land and water bodies as resources. Environment and Urbanization, 4 (2):141-152.

CO-PO MAPPING
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall
correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO2 Problem Analysis 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 2 1 1 3 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of
1 1 2 2 1 1
Complex Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO8 Ethics 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 2 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 1 1 1 2
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 3 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving
1 2 1 1 2 1
approach in agriculture with
proper knowledge and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 2 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity
using modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 2 1 2
linkage.

OEE352 ELECTRIC VEHICLE TECHNOLOGY LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To provide knowledge about electric machines and special machine
 To understand the basics of power converters
 To know the concepts of controlling DC and AC drive systems
 To understand the architecture and power train components.
227
  To impart knowledge on vehicle control for standard drive cycles of hybrid electrical
vehicles (HEVs)

UNIT I ROTATING POWER CONVERTERS 9

Magnetic circuits- DC machine and AC machine –Working principle of Generator and Motor-DC
and AC - Voltage and torque equations – Characteristics and applications. Working principle of
special machines like: Brushless DC motor, Switched reluctance motor and PMSM.

UNIT II STATIC POWER CONVERTERS 9

Working and Characteristics of Power Diodes, MOSFET and IGBT. Working of uncontrolled
rectifiers, controlled rectifiers (Single phase and Three phase), DC choppers, single and three
phase inverters, Multilevel inverters and Matrix Converters.

UNIT III CONTROL OF DC AND AC MOTOR DRIVES 9

Speed control for constant torque, constant HP operation of all electric motors - DC/DC chopper
based four quadrant operation of DC motor drives, inverter based V/f Operation (motoring and
braking) of induction motor drives, Transformation theory, vector control operation of Induction
motor and PMSM, Brushless DC motor drives, Switched reluctance motor (SRM) drives

UNIT IV HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE ARCHITECTURE AND POWER TRAIN

COMPONENTS 9
History of evolution of Electric Vehicles - Comparison of Electric Vehicles with Internal
Combustion Engines - Architecture of Electric Vehicles (EV) and Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV) –
Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV)- Power train components and sizing, Gears, Clutches,
Transmission and Brakes.

UNIT V MECHANICS OF HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND CONTROL OF

VEHICLES 9
Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics - tractive force, power and energy requirements for standard
drive cycles of HEV's - motor torque and power rating and battery capacity. HEV supervisory
control - Selection of modes - power spilt mode - parallel mode - engine brake mode -
regeneration mode - series parallel mode
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Able to understand the principles of conventional and special electrical machines.
CO2: Acquired the concepts of power devices and power converters
CO3: Able to understand the control for DC and AC drive systems.
CO4: Learned the electric vehicle architecture and power train components.
CO5: Acquired the knowledge of mechanics of electric vehicles and control of electric
vehicles.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 3
Avg 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3

REFERENCES:
1 Stephen D. Umans, “Fitzgerald & Kingsley’s Electric Machinery”, Tata McGraw Hill, 7 th Edition,
2020.
2 Bogdan M. Wilamowski, J. David Irwin, The Industrial Electronics Handbook, Second Edition,
Power Electronics and Motor Drives, CRC Press, 2011
228
3 Paul C. Krause, Oleg Wasynczuk, Scott D. Sudhoff, Steven D. Pekarek “Analysis of Electric
Machinery and Drive Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2013.
4 Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics Circuits, Devices and Applications ", Pearson, fourth Edition,
10th Impression 2021.
5 Iqbal Husain, ‘Electric and Hybrid Electric Vehicles’, CRC Press, 2021.
6 Wei Liu, ‘Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control’, Second Edition, WILEY, 2017
7 James Larminie and John Lowry, ‘Electric Vehicle Technology Explained’, Second Edition,
Wiley, 2012

OEI353 INTRODUCTION TO PLC PROGRAMMING LT P C

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Understand basic PLC terminologies digital principles, PLC architecture and operation.
2. Familiarize different programming language of PLC.
3. Develop PLC logic for simple applications using ladder logic.
4. Understand the hardware and software behind PLC and SCADA.
5. Exposures about communication architecture of PLC/SCADA.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLC 9

Introduction to PLC: Microprocessor, I/O Ports, Isolation, Filters, Drivers, Microcontrollers/DSP,
PLC/DDC- PLC Construction: What is a PLC, PLC Memories, PLC I/O, , PLC Special I/O, PLC
Types.

UNIT II PLC INSTRUCTIONS 9

PLC Basic Instructions: PLC Ladder Language- Function block Programming- Ladder/Function
Block functions- PLC Basic Instructions, Basic Examples (Start Stop Rung, Entry/Reset Rung)-
Configuration of Sensors, Switches, Solid State Relays-Interlock examples- Timers, Counters,
Examples.

UNIT III PLC PROGRAMMING 9

Different types of PLC program, Basic Ladder logic, logic functions, PLC module addressing,
registers basics, basic relay instructions, Latching Relays, arithmetic functions, comparison
functions, data handling, data move functions, timer-counter instructions, input-output instructions,
sequencer instructions

UNIT IV COMMUNICATION OF PLC AND SCADA 9

Communication Protocol – Modbus, HART, Profibus- Communication facilities SCADA: -
Hardware and software, Remote terminal units, Master Station and Communication architectures

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9

Stepper Motor Control- Elevator Control-CNC Machine Control- conveyor control-Interlocking
Problems
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Communication Network Used for PLC/SCADA.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Know the basic requirement of a PLC input/output devices and architecture. (L1)
229
 CO2 Ability to apply Basics Instruction Sets used for ladder Logic and Function Block
Programming.(L2)
CO3 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
CO4 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)
CO5 Ability to Understand the Concepts of Communication used for PLC/SCADA.(L1)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Frank Petruzzula, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition
2. John W. Webb, Ronald A. Reis, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and
Applications, PHI publication

REFERENCES:
1. MadhuchanndMitra and SamerjitSengupta, Programmable Logic Controllers Industrial
Automation an Introduction, Penram International Publishing Pvt. Ltd.
2. J. R. Hackworth and F. D. Hackworth, Programmable Logic Controllers Principles
andApplications, Pearson publication

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
2. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
3. https://www.etf.ues.rs.ba/~slubura/Procesni%20racunari/Programmable%20Logic%20Contr
ollers%20Programming%20Methods.pdf
4. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

PO,
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PSO
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.9 2.25 2.6 1.6 1 1 3 3 2.9

OFD352 TRADITIONAL INDIAN FOODS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To help students acquire a sound knowledge on diversities of foods, food habits and patterns in
India with focus on traditional foods.

UNIT I HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES 9

Food production and accessibility - subsistence foraging, horticulture, agriculture and
pastoralization, origin of agriculture, earliest crops grown. Food as source of physical sustenance,
food as religious and cultural symbols; importance of food in understanding human culture -
variability, diversity, from basic ingredients to food preparation; impact of customs and traditions
on food habits, heterogeneity within cultures (social groups) and specific social contexts - festive
occasions, specific religious festivals, mourning etc. Kosher, Halal foods; foods for religious and
other fasts.

230
UNIT II TRADITIONAL METHODS OF FOOD PROCESSING 9
Traditional methods of milling grains – rice, wheat and corn – equipments and processes as
compared to modern methods. Equipments and processes for edible oil extraction, paneer, butter
and ghee manufacture – comparison of traditional and modern methods. Energy costs, efficiency,
yield, shelf life and nutrient content comparisons. Traditional methods of food preservation –
sundrying, osmotic drying, brining, pickling and smoking.

UNIT III TRADITIONAL FOOD PATTERNS 9

Typical breakfast, meal and snack foods of different regions of India.Regional foods that have
gone Pan Indian / Global. Popular regional foods; Traditional fermented foods,pickles and
preserves, beverages, snacks, desserts and sweets, street foods; IPR issues in traditional foods

UNIT IV COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION OF TRADITIONAL FOODS 9

Commercial production of traditional breads, snacks, ready-to-eat foods and instant mixes, frozen
foods – types marketed, turnover; role of SHGs, SMES industries, national and multinational
companies; commercial production and packaging of traditional beverages such as tender coconut
water, neera, lassi, buttermilk, dahi. Commercial production of intermediate foods – ginger and
garlic pastes, tamarind pastes, masalas (spice mixes), idli and dosa batters.

UNIT V HEALTH ASPECTS OF TRADIONAL FOODS 9

Comparison of traditional foods with typical fast foods / junk foods – cost, food safety, nutrient
composition, bioactive components; energy and environmental costs of traditional foods; traditional
foods used for specific ailments /illnesses.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1To understand the historical and traditional perspective of foods and food habits
CO2 To understand the wide diversity and common features of traditional Indian foods and meal
patterns.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sen, Colleen Taylor “Food Culture in India” Greenwood Press, 2005.
2. Davidar, Ruth N. “Indian Food Science: A Health and Nutrition Guide to Traditional Recipes:
East West Books, 2001.

OFD353 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD PROCESSING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 The course aims to introduce the students to the area of Food Processing. This is necessary for
effective understanding of a detailed study of food processing and technology subjects. This
course will enable students to appreciate the importance of food processing with respect to the
producer, manufacturer and consumer.

UNIT I PROCESSING OF FOOD AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Source of food - plant, animal and microbial origin; different foods and groups of foods as raw
materials for processing – cereals, pulses, grains, vegetables and fruits, milk and animal foods,
sea weeds, algae, oil seeds & fats, sugars, tea, coffee, cocoa, spices and condiments, additives;
need and significance of processing these foods.

UNIT II METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9

Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using low
temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub atmospheric

231
storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and tubers; freezing of
raw and processed foods.

UNIT III LARGE-SCALE FOOD PROCESSING 12

Milling of grains and pulses; edible oil extraction; Pasteurisation of milk and yoghurt; canning and
bottling of foods; drying – Traditional and modern methods of drying, Dehydration of fruits,
vegetables, milk, animal products etc; preservation by use of acid, sugar and salt; Pickling and
curing with microorganisms, use of salt, and microbial fermentation; frying, baking, extrusion
cooking, snack foods.

UNIT IV FOOD WASTES IN VARIOUS PROCESSES 6

Waste disposal-solid and liquid waste; rodent and insect control; use of pesticides; ETP; selecting
and installing necessary equipment.

UNIT V FOOD HYGIENE 9

Food related hazards – Biological hazards – physical hazards – microbiological considerations in
foods. Food adulteration – definition, common food adulterants, contamination with toxic metals,
pesticides and insecticides; Safety in food procurement, storage handling and preparation;
Relationship of microbes to sanitation, Public health hazards due to contaminated water and food;
Personnel hygiene; Training& Education for safe methods of handling and processing food;
sterilization and disinfection of manufacturing plant; use of sanitizers, detergents, heat, chemicals,
Cleaning of equipment and premises.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course the students are expected to
CO1 Be aware of the different methods applied to processing foods.
CO2 Be able to understand the significance of food processing and the role of foodand beverage
industries in the supply of foods.

TEXT BOOKS/REFERENCES:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge, 2003.
2. VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and
Practice”.Surbhi Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.

OPY352 IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide the basic fundamental knowledge of different forms of Intellectual Property
Rights in national and international level.
 To provide the significance of the Intellectual Property Rights about the patents, copyrights,
industrial design, plant and geographical indications.
 This paper is to study significance of the amended patent act on pharma industry.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION- INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 9

Introduction, Types of Intellectual Property Rights -patents, plant varieties protection, geographical
indicators, copyright, trademark, trade secrets.

UNIT II PATENTS 9
Patents-Objective, Introduction, Requirement for patenting- Novelty, Inventive step (Non-
obviousness) and industrial application (utility), Non-patentable inventions, rights of patent owner,

232
assignment of patent rights, patent specification (provisional and complete), parts of complete
specification, claims, procedure for obtaining patents, compulsory license.

UNIT III PLANT VARIETY-TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE –GEOGRAPHICAL

INDICATIONS 9
Plant variety- Justification, criteria for protection of plant variety and protection in India. Traditional
knowledge- Concept of traditional knowledge, protection of traditional knowledge under Intellectual
Property frame works in national level and Traditional knowledge digital library (TKDL).
Geographical Indications – Justification for protection, National and International position.

UNIT IV ENFORCEMENT AND PRACTICAL ASPECTS OF IPR 9

Introduction – civil remedies – injunction, damage, account of profit – criminal remedies – patent,
trademark. Practical aspects – Introduction, benefits of licensing, licensing of basic types of IPR,
licensing clauses of IPR. Case studies of patent infringement, compulsory licensing, simple patent
license agreements.

UNIT V INTERNATIONAL BACKGROUND OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 9

International Background of Intellectual Property- Paris Convention, Berne convention, World
Trade Organization (WTO), World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), Trade Related
Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) and Patent Co-operation Treaty (PCT).
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME
The student will be able to
C1 Understand and differentiate the categories of intellectual property rights.
C2 Describe about patents and procedure for obtaining patents.
C3 Distinguish plant variety, traditional knowledge and geographical indications under IPR.
C4 Provide the information about the different enforcements and practical aspects involved in
protection of IPR.
C5 Provide different organizations role and responsibilities in the protection of IPR in the
international level.
C6 Understand the interrelationships between different Intellectual Property Rights on
International Society

TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. Nagpal, M. Arora, M.R.D. Usman, S. Rahar, “Intellectual Property Rights” Edu creation
Publishing, New Delhi, 2017.
2. The Patents Act, 1970 (Bare Act with Short Notes) (New Delhi: Universal Law Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd. 2012.
3. B.S. Rao, P.V. Appaji, “Intellectual Property Rights in Pharmaceutical Industry: Theory and
Practice”, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Patents for Chemicals, Pharmaceuticals, & Biotechnology-Fundamentals of Global Law,
Practice and Strategy. Philip W. Grubb, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Basic Principles of patent law – Basics principles and acquisition of IPR. Ramakrishna T.
CIPRA, NLSIU, Bangalore, 2005
3. S. Lakshmana Prabu, TNK. Suriyaprakash, “Intellectual Property Rights”, 1st ed., In Tech open
access, Croatia, 2017.

233
 CO – PO MAPPING
IPR FOR PHARMA INDUSTRY
PO1 PO2 PO PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO1 PO11 PO
3 0 12
C1 3 3 2 2 2
C2 3 3 2 2
C3 3 3 2 2 1
C4 2 3 3 2 2
C5 3 3 2 1
C6 3 2 2 2 2

OTT351 BASICS OF TEXTILE FINISHING LT PC

3 00 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics and different types of finishes required for
textile materials and machines used for finishing.

UNIT I RESIN FINISHING 9

Importance of finishing and its classification. Resin finishing: Mechanism of creasing, Types of
Resins .Anti crease, wash and wear, durable press resin finishing. Study about eco friendly
method of anti crease finishing.

UNIT II FLAME PROOF & WATERPROOF 9

Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy. Flame retardant finishes for cotton, Concept of
waterproof and water repellent Finishes, Durable & Semi durable and Temporary finishes,
Concept of Antimicrobial finish.

UNIT III SOIL RELEASE AND ANTISTATIC FINISHES 9

Soil Release Finishing: Mechanism of soil retention & soil release. Anti pilling Finishing: chemical
and mechanical methods to produce anti pilling. Concept of UV Protection finishes- Concept of
antistatic finishes.

UNIT IV MECHANICAL FINISHES 9

Mechanical finishing of textile materials - calendaring, compacting, Sanforising, Peach finishing.
Object of Heat setting. Various methods of heat setting and mechanism of heat setting.

UNIT V STIFFENING AND SOFTENING 9

Concept of stiffening and softening of textile materials. Mechanism in the weight reduction of PET
.Concept of Micro encapsulation techniques in finishing process, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment
and Bio finishing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO: 1 Basics of Resin Finishing Process.
CO: 2 Concept of Flame proof & flame retardancy, waterproof and water repellent,
Antimicrobial finishes.
CO: 3 Concept of Soil Release, Anti Pilling, UV Protection and Antistatic finishes.
CO: 4 Concept of Mechanical finishing.
CO: 5 Basics of Micro encapsulation techniques, Nano finish, Plasma Treatment.
234
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.A.Shennai, "Technology of Finishing", Vol X, Sevak Publications, Mumbai
2. Perkins, W.S., “Textile colouration and finishing”, Carolina Academic Press., U.K, ISBN:
0890898855.2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Microencapsulation in finishing, Review of progress of Colouration, SDC, 2001 62
2. Chakraborty, J.N, Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles, Woodhead
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3
3. W. D. Schindler and P. J. Hauser "Chemical finishing of textiles", Woodhead Publishing
Cambridge England,2004.

OTT352 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING FOR GARMENT INDUSTRY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to learn about basics of industrial engineering and different
tools of industrial engineering and its application in apparel industry

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Scope of industrial engineering in apparel Industry, role of industrial engineers.
Productivity: Definition - Productivity, Productivity measures .Reduction of work content due to
the product and process, Reduction of ineffective time due to the management, due to the
worker. Causes for low productivity in apparel industry and measures for improvement.

UNIT II WORK STUDY 9

Definition, Purpose, Basic procedure and techniques of work-study.
Work environment – Lighting, Ventilation, Climatic condition on productivity.
Temperature control, humidity control, noise control measures. Safety and ergonomics on
work station and work environment
Material Handling – Objectives, Classification and characteristics of material handling
equipments, Specialized material handling equipments.

UNIT III METHOD STUDY 9

Definition, Objectives, Procedure, Process charts and symbols. Various charts – Charts
indicating process sequence: Outline process chart, flow process chart (man type, material type
and equipment type); Charts using time scale – multiple activity chart. Diagrams indicating
movement – flow diagram, string diagram, cycle graph, chrono cycle graph, travel chart
MOTION STUDY: Principle of motion economy, Two handed process chart, micro motion
analysis – therbligs, SIMO chart.

UNIT IV WORK MEASUREMENT 9

Definition, purpose, procedure, equipments, techniques. Time study - Definition, basics of
time study- equipments. Time study forms, Stop watch procedure. Predetermined motion time
standards (PMTS). Time Study rating, calculation of standard time, Performance rating –
relaxation and other allowances. Calculation of SAM for different garments, GSD.

UNIT V WORK STUDY APPLICATION 9

Application of work study techniques in cutting, stitching and packing in garment industry.
Workaids in sewing, Pitch diagram, Line balancing, Capacity planning, scientific method
of training.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to understand
CO1: Fundamental concepts of industrial Engineering and productivity
235
 CO2: Method study
CO3: Motion analysis
CO4: Work measurement and SAM
CO5: Ergonomics and its application to garment industry

TEXTBOOKS:
1. George Kanwaty, “Introduction to Work Study “, ILO, Geneva, 1996, ISBN: 9221071081
|ISBN-13: 9789221071082
2. Enrick N. L., “Time study manual for Textile industry”, Wiley Eastern (P) Ltd., 1989, ISBN:
0898740444 | ISBN-13: 9780898740448
3. Khanna O. P., and Sarup A., “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai
Publications, New Delhi, 2010, ISBN: 818992835X / ISBN: 978-8189928353

REFERENCES
1. Norberd Lloyd Enrick., “Industrial Engineering Manual for Textile Industry”, Wiley Eastern
(P) Ltd., New Delhi, 1988, ISBN: 0882756311 | ISBN-13: 9780882756318
2. Chuter A. J., “Introduction to Clothing Production Management”, Wiley-Black well Science,
U.S. A., 1995, ISBN: 0632039396 | ISBN-13: 9780632039395
3. GordanaColovic., “Ergonomics in the garment industry”, Wood publishing India Pvt. Ltd.,
India, 2014, ISBN: 0857098225 | ISBN-13: 9780857098221
4. Rajesh Bheda, “Managing Productivity in Apparel Industry “CBS Publishers & Distributors,
2008

Course Articulation Matrix:

Cours Program Outcome
e PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO P P P PS PS PSO
Outcom Statement 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 O O O O O 3
es 10 11 12 1 2
CO1 Fundament
al concepts
of industrial
2 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
Engineering
and
productivity
CO2 Method
1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
study
CO3 Motion
1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 -
analysis
CO4 Work
measureme 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
nt and SAM
CO5 Ergonomics
and its
application 1 2 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 1 -
to
garment
industry
Overall CO
1.2 2 3 3 2 1 1.2 2 2 1 2.4 2 1 1 -
1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and
Substantial (High) respectively

236
OTT353 BASICS OF TEXTILE MANUFACTURE LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
To enable the students to learn about the basics of fibre forming, yarn production, fabric formation,
coloration of fabrics and garment manufacturing

UNIT I NATURAL FIBRES 9

Introduction: Definition of staple fibre, filament; Classification of natural and man-made fibres,
essential and desirable properties of fibres. Production and cultivation of Natural Fibers:
Cultivation of cotton, production of silk (sericulture), wool and jute – physical and chemical
structure of these fibres..

UNIT II REGENERATED AND SYNTHETIC FIBRES 9

Production sequence of regenerated and modified cellulosic fibres: viscose rayon, Acetate Rayon,
high wet modulus and high tenacity fibres; synthetic fibres – chemical structure, fibre forming
polymers, production principles.

UNIT III BASICS OF SPINNING 9

Spinning – principle of yarn formation, sequence of machines for yarn production with short staple
fibres and blends, principles of opening and cleaning machines; yarn numbering - calculations

UNIT IV BASICS OF WEAVING 9

Woven fabric – warp, weft, weaving, path of warp; looms – classification, handloom and its parts,
powerloom, automatic looms, shuttleless looms, special type of looms; preparatory machines for
weaving process and their objectives; basic weaving mechanism - primary, secondary and
auxiliary mechanisms,

UNIT V BASICS OF KNITTING AND NONWOVEN 9

Knitting – classification, principle, types of fabrics; nonwoven process –classification, principle,
types of fabrics.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the students shall have the basic knowledge on
CO1: Classification of fibres and production of natural fibres
CO2: Regenerated and synthetic fibres
CO3: Yarn spinning
CO4: Weaving
CO5: Knitting and nonwoven

TEXTBOOKS
1. Mishra S. P. , “A Text Book of Fibre Science and Technology”, New Age Publishers, 2000,
ISBN: 8122412505
2. Marks R., and Robinson. T.C., “Principles of Weaving”, The Textile Institute, Manchester,
1989, ISBN: 0 900739 258.
3. Spencer D.J., “Knitting Technology”, III Ed., Textile Institute, Manchester, 2001, ISBN:
185573 333 1.

237
REFERENCES:
1. Hornberer M., Eberle H., Kilgus R., Ring W. and Hermeling H., “Clothing
Technology: From Fibre to Fabric”, Europa LehrmittelVerlag, 2008, ISBN:
3808562250 / ISBN: 978-3808562253.
2. Wynne A., “Motivate Series-Textiles”, Maxmillan Publications, London, 1997.
3. Carr H. and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture” Backwell
Science, U.K., 1994, ISBN: 0632037482 / ISBN:13: 9780632037483.Klein W., “The
Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.1”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd., Winterthur, 2014,
ISBN 10 3-9523173-1-4 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-1-0.
4. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.2”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd.,
Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-2-2 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-2-7.
5. Klein W., “The Rieter Manual of Spinning, Vol.1-3”, Rieter Machine Works Ltd.,
Winterthur, 2014, ISBN 10 3-9523173-3-0 / ISBN 13 978-3-9523173-3-4.
6. Talukdar. M.K., Sriramulu. P.K., and Ajgaonkar. D.B., “Weaving: Machines,
Mechanisms, Management”, Mahajan Publishers, Ahmedabad, 1998, ISBN: 81-
85401-16-0.
7. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The
Textile Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
8. Gohl E. P. G., “Textile Science”, CBS Publishers and distributors, 1987, ISBN
0582685958

Course Articulation Matrix:

Cours Statement Program Outcome

e P P
P P P P P P P P P P P
Outco P S S PS
O O O O O O O O O O O
mes O1 O O O3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2
CO1. Classification of - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
fibres and
production of
natural fibres
CO2. Regenerated and - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
synthetic fibres
CO3. Yarn spinning - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO4. Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO5. Knitting and - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
nonwoven
Overall CO - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium)
and Substantial (High) respectively

238
OCH351 NANO TECHNOLOGY L T PC
3 0 03
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
General definition and size effects–important nano structured materials and nano particles-
importance of nano materials- Size effect on thermal, electrical, electronic, mechanical,
optical and magnetic properties of nanomaterials- surface area - band gap energy and
applications. Photochemistry and Electrochemistry of nanomaterials –Ionic properties of
nanomaterials- Nano catalysis.

UNIT II SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 8

Bottom up and Top-down approach for obtaining nano materials - Precipitation methods –
sol gel technique – high energy ball milling, CVD and PVD methods, gas phase
condensation, magnetron sputtering and laser deposition methods – laser ablation,
sputtering.

UNIT III NANO COMPOSITES 10

Definition- importance of nanocomposites- nano composite materials-classification of
composites- metal/metal oxides, metal-polymer- thermoplastic based, thermoset based and
elastomer based- influence of size, shape and role of interface in composites applications.

UNIT IV NANO STRUCTURES AND CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 10

Classifications of nanomaterials - Zero dimensional, one-dimensional and two-dimensional
nanostructures- Kinetics in nanostructured materials- multilayer thin films and superlattice-
clusters of metals, semiconductors and nanocomposites. Spectroscopic techniques,
Diffraction methods, thermal analysis method, BET analysis method.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF NANO MATERIALS 9

Overview of nanomaterials properties and their applications, nano painting, nano coating,
nanomaterials for renewable energy, Molecular Electronics and Nanoelectronics –
Nanobots- Biological Applications. Emerging technologies for environmental applications-
Practice of nanoparticles for environmental remediation and water treatment.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
CO1 - understand the basic properties such as structural, physical, chemical properties of
nanomaterials and their applications.
CO2 – able to acquire knowledge about the different types of nano material synthesis
CO3 – describes about the shape, size,structure of composite nano materials and their
interference
CO4 – understand the different characterization techniques for nanomaterials
CO5 - develop a deeper knowledge in the application of nanomaterials in different fields.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mick Wilson, Kamali Kannangara,Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmom, Burkhard Raguse, “
Nano Technology: Basic Science & Engineering Technology”, 2005, Overseas Press
2. G. Cao, “Nanostructures & Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties &Applications” Imperial
College Press, 2004
3.William A Goddard “Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology”, 3rd Edition,
CRC Taylor and Francis group 2012.
REFERENCES
1. R.H.J.Hannink & A.J.Hill, Nanostructure Control, Wood Head Publishing
Ltd.,Cambridge, 2006.
2. C.N.R.Rao, A.Muller, A.K.Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis,
Properties and Applications Vol. I & II, 2nd edition, 2005, Wiley VCH Verlag Gibtl &
Co

239
 3. Ivor Brodie and Julius J.Muray,’The physics of Micro/Nano – Fabrication’,Springer
International Edition,2010

Course articulation matrix

Cour Program Outcomes
se Statements PO PO PO PO PO PO PO P P P PO P P P PSO
Outc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 O8 O O 11 O S S 3
9 10 12 O O
ome 1 2
s
CO1 understand the basic 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
properties such as
structural, physical,
chemical properties
of nanomaterials
and their
applications
CO2 acquire knowledge 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
about the different
types of nano
material synthesis
CO3 describes about the 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
shape, size,structure
of composite nano
materials and their
interference
CO4 understand the 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
different
characterization
techniques for
nanomaterials
CO5 develop a deeper 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
knowledge in the
application of
nanomaterials in
different fields
Overall CO 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3

240
OCH352 FUNCTIONAL MATERIALS LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 The course emphasis on the molecular safe assembly and materials for polymer
electronics

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Historical Perspectives, Lessons from the Nature, Engineering the Functions, Tuning the
functions, Multiscale Modeling and Computation, Classification of Functional Materials,
Functional Diversity of Materials, Hybrid Materials, Technological Relevance, Societal
Impact.

UNIT II MOLECULAR SELF ASSEMBLY 9

Molecular Organization, Self-Assembly in Biology, Energetics of Self-Organization, A Few
Case Studies, Synthetic Protocols and Challenges, Solvent-assisted Self-Assembly,
Directed Assembly-Langmuir-Blodgett and Langmuir-Schaefer techniques, Technological
Applications of SAMs.

UNIT III BIO-INSPIRED MATERIALS 9

Bio-inspired materials, Classification, Biomimicry, Spider Silk, Lotus Leaf, Gecko feet,
Synovial fluid, ‘Bionics’-Bio-inspired Information Technologies, Artificial Sensory Organs,
Biomineralization- En route to Nanotechnology.

UNIT IV SMART OR INTELLIGENT MATERIALS 9

Criteria for Smartness, Significance of Smart Materials, Representative Examples like Smart
Gels and Polymers, Electro/Magneto Rheological Fluids, Smart Electroceramics, Technical
Limitations and Challenges, Functional Nanocomposites, Polymer-carbon nanotube
composities.

UNIT V MATERIALS FOR POLYMER ELECTRONICS 9

Polymers for Electronics, Organic Light Emitting Diodes, Working Principle of OLEDs,
Illustrated Examples, Organic Field-Effect Transistors Operating Principle, Design
Considerations, Polymer FETs vs Inorganic FETs, Liquid Crystal Displays, Engineering
Aspects of Flat Panel Displays, Intelligent Polymers for Data Storage, Polymer-based Data
Storage-Principle, Magnetic Vs. Polymer-based Data Storage.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Students will be able to differentiate among various functional properties and select
appropriate material for certain functional applications, analyze the nature and
potential of functional material.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Vijayamohanan K. Pillai and MeeraParthasarathy, “Functional Materials: A chemist’s
perpective”, Universities Press Hyderabad (2012).

REFERENCE:
1. Stephen Manne “Biomimetic Materials Chemistry” Wiley-VCH Newyork, 1966.

241
OPT351 BASICS OF PLASTICS PROCESSING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the fundamentals of plastics processing, such as the relationships
between material structural properties and required processing parameters, and so
on
 To gain practical knowledge on the polymer selection and its processing
 Understanding the major plastic material processing techniques (Extrusion, Injection
molding, Compression and Transfer molding, Blow molding, Thermoforming and
casting)
 To understand suitable additives for plastics compounding
 To Propose troubleshooting mechanisms for defects found in plastics products
manufactured by various processing techniques

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICS PROCESSING 9

Introduction to plastic processing – Principles of plastic processing: processing of plastics vs.
metals and ceramics. Factors influencing the efficiency of plastics processing: molecular
weight, viscosity and rheology. Difference in approach for thermoplastic and thermoset
processing. Additives for plastics compounding and processing: antioxidants, light
stabilizers, UV stabilizers, lubricants, impact modifiers, flame retardants, antistatic agents,
stabilizers and plasticizers. Compounding: plastic compounding techniques, plasticization,
pelletization.

UNIT II EXTRUSION 9
Extrusion – Principles of extrusion. Features of extruder: barrel, screw, types of screws,
drive mechanism, specifications, heating & cooling systems, types of extruders. Flow
mechanism: process variables, die entry effects and exit instabilities. Die swell, Defects: melt
fracture, shark skin, bambooing. Factors determining efficiency of an extruder. Extrusion of
films: blown and cast films. Tube/pipe extrusion. Extrusion coating: wire & cable. Twin screw
extruder and its applications. Applications of extrusion and new developments.

UNIT III INJECTION MOLDING 9

Injection molding – Principles and processing outline, machinery, accessories and functions,
specifications, process variables, mould cycle. Types of clamping: hydraulic and toggle
mechanisms. Start-up and shut down procedures-Cylinder nozzles- Press capacity projected
area -Shot weight Basic theoretical concepts and their relationship to processing -
Interaction of moulding process aspect effects in quoted variables. Basic mould types.
Reciprocating vs. plunger type injection moulding. Thermoplastic vs. thermosetting injection
moulding. Injection moulding vs. other plastic processing techniques. State-of-the art
injection moulding techniques - Introduction to trouble shooting

UNIT IV COMPRESSION AND TRANSFER MOLDING 9

Compression moulding – Basic principles of compression and transfer moulding-Meaning of
terms-Bulk factor and flow properties, moulding materials, process variables and process
cycle, Inter relation between flow properties-Curing time-Mould temperature and Pressure
requirements. Preforms and preheating- Techniques of preheating. Machines used-Types of
compression mould- positive, semi-positive and flash. Common moulding faults and their
correction- Finishing of mouldings. Transfer moulding: working principle, equipment, Press
capacity-Integral moulds and auxiliary ram moulds, moulding cycle, moulding tolerances, pot
transfer, plunger transfer and screw transfer moulding techniques, advantages over
compression moulding

242
UNIT V BLOW MOLDING, THERMOFORMING AND CASTING 9
Blow moulding: principles and terminologies. Injection blow moulding. Extrusion blow
moulding. Design guidelines for optimum product performance and appearance.
Thermoforming: principle, vacuum forming, pressure forming mechanical forming. Casting:
working principle, types and applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Ability to find out the correlation between various processing techniques with product
properties.
 Understand the major plastics processing techniques used in moulding (injection,
blow, compression, and transfer), extrusion, thermoforming, and casting.
 Acquire knowledge on additives for plastic compounding and methods employed for
the same
 Familiarize with the machinery and ancillary equipment associated with various
plastic processing techniques.
 Select an appropriate processing technique for the production of a plastic product

REFERENCES
1. S. S. Schwart, S. H. Goodman, Plastics Materials and Processes, Van Nostrad
Reinhold Company Inc. (1982).
2. F. Hensen (Ed.), Plastic Extrusion Technology, Hanser Gardner (1997).
3. W. S. Allen and P. N. Baker, Hand Book of Plastic Technology, Volume-1, Plastic
Processing Operations [Injection, Compression, Transfer, Blow Molding], CBS
Publishers and Distributors (2004).
4. M. Chanda, S. K. Roy, Plastic Technology handbook, 4th Edn., CRC Press (2007).
5. I. I. Rubin, Injection Molding Theory & Practice, Society of Plastic Engineers, Wiley
(1973).
6. D.V. Rosato, M. G. Rosato, Injection Molding Hand Book, Springer (2012).
7. M. L. Berins (Ed.), SPI Plastic Engineering Hand Book of Society of Plastic Industry
Inc., Springer (2012).
8. B. Strong, Plastics: Material & Processing, A, Pearson Prentice hall (2005).
9. D.V Rosato, Blow Molding Hand Book, Carl HanserVerlag GmbH & Co (2003).

OEC351 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To understand the basic properties of signal & systems
● To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time domain
● To analyze continuous time signals and system in the Fourier and Laplace domain
● To analyze discrete time signals and system in the Fourier and Z transform domain

UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials and
Sinusoids_Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT) signals,
Periodic & Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy & Power signals -
Classification of systems- CT systems and DT systems- – Linear & Nonlinear, Time-
variant& Time-invariant,Causal & Non-causal, Stable & Unstable.
UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9
Fourier series for periodic signals - Fourier Transform – properties- Laplace Transforms and
Properties

243
UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9
Impulse response - convolution integrals- Differential Equation- Fourier and Laplace
transforms in Analysis of CT systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.

UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9

Baseband signal Sampling–Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT)– Properties
of DTFT - Z Transform & Properties
UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9
Impulse response–Difference equations-Convolution sum- Discrete Fourier Transform and
Z Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-DT systems connected in
series and parallel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
CO1:determine if a given system is linear/causal/stable
CO2: determine the frequency components present in a deterministic signal
CO3:characterize continuous LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO4:characterize discrete LTI systems in the time domain and frequency domain
CO5:compute the output of an LTI system in the time and frequency domains

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Oppenheim, Willsky and Hamid, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2015.(Units I - V)
2. Simon Haykin, Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2002

REFERENCES :
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, 2nd Edition, Oxford, 2009.
2. M. J. Roberts, “Signals and Systems Analysis using Transform methods and
MATLAB”, McGraw- Hill Education, 2018.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007.

C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - 3 - - 1
2 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - 3 - 3 -
3 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 2 - -
4 3 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
5 3 3 - 3 3 2 - - - - 3 - 3 1
C 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 3 2 3 1
O

244
OEC352 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
● To give a comprehensive exposure to all types of devices and circuits constructed with
discrete components. This helps to develop a strong basis for building linear and digital
integrated circuits
● To analyze the frequency response of small signal amplifiers
● To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
 To study about feedback amplifiers and oscillators principles
 To understand the analysis and design of multi vibrators

UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

PN junction diode, Zener diode, BJT, MOSFET, UJT –structure, operation and V-I characteristics,
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifier, Zener as regulator

UNIT II AMPLIFIERS 9
Load line, operating point, biasing methods for BJT and MOSFET, BJT small signal model –
Analysis of CE, CB, CC amplifiers- Gain and frequency response –Analysis of CS and Source
follower – Gain and frequency response- High frequency analysis.

UNIT III MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS AND DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 9

Cascode amplifier, Differential amplifier – Common mode and Difference mode analysis – Tuned
amplifiers – Gain and frequency response – Neutralization methods.

UNIT IV FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Advantages of negative feedback – Analysis of Voltage / Current, Series , Shunt feedback
Amplifiers – positive feedback–Condition for oscillations, phase shift – Wien bridge, Hartley,
Colpitts and Crystal oscillators.

UNIT V POWER AMPLIFIERS AND DC/DC CONVERTERS 9

Power amplifiers- class A-Class B-Class AB-Class C-Temperature Effect- Class AB Power
amplifier using MOSFET –DC/DC convertors – Buck, Boost, Buck-Boost analysis and design.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1: Explain the structure and working operation of basic electronic devices.
CO2: Design and analyze amplifiers.
CO3: Analyze frequency response of BJT and MOSFET amplifiers
CO4: Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and oscillator principles.
CO5: Design and analyze power amplifiers and supply circuits

TEXT BOOKS :
1. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Oxford Higher Education press, 5 th
Edition, 2010.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nasheresky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”,
10th Edition, Pearson Education / PHI, 2008.
3. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, "Micro Electronic Circuits", Oxford University
Press, 7 th Edition, 2014.

REFERENCES :
1. Donald.A. Neamen, "Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 3
rd Edition, 2010.
2. D.Schilling and C.Belove, "Electronic Circuits", McGraw Hill, 3 rd Edition, 1989
3. Muhammad H.Rashid, "Power Electronics", Pearson Education / PHI , 2004.
245
 PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
1 3 3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
4 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
5 3 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - 1 2 1 1

CBM348 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
• To understand the global trends and development methodologies of various types of products
and services
• To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan for a new product based
on the type of the new product and development methodology integrating the hardware,
software, controls, electronics and mechanical systems
• To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect, analyze and arrive at
requirements for new product development and convert them in to design specification
• To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their interfaces and arrive at the
optimum system specification and characteristics
• To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with various teams to validate
and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life) support activities for engineering customer

UNIT I BASICS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical Trends- Economical
Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends - Introduction to Product Development
Methodologies and Management - Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product
Development - Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle – Product
Development Planning and Management.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement Engineering - traceability Matrix
and Analysis - Requirement Management - System Design & Modeling - Introduction to System
Modeling - System Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design - Interface Design.

UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction to Concept
generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering Disciplines - Concept Screening
& Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component Design and Verification – Mechanical, Electronics
and Software Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program - Types of
Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout and Hardware Testing
– Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration,
Testing, Certification and Documentation

UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT 9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to Product Validation
processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and Certification - Product Documentation -
Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair – Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence
Management – Configuration Management - EoL Disposal

246
UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9
The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in Industry versus Academia
–The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical Specific Product Development processes -
Manufacturing/Purchase and Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical, Embedded and
Software Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property Rights and
Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
 Define, formulate, and analyze a problem
 Solve specific problems independently or as part of a team
 Gain knowledge of the Innovation & Product Development process in the Business Context
 Work independently as well as in teams
 Manage a project from start to finish

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development", Tata McGraw
Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata McGraw Hill, Eleventh
Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House, 2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann [Elsevier], Oxford,
2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource Planning – Concepts”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering and Design",
McGraw Hill Education, Seventh Edition, 2013

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 3 1 1 1
2 3 2 3 1 1 1
3 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg.

CBM333 ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement various assistive devices
 To understand the prosthetic and orthotic devices
 To know the developments in assistive technology

247
UNIT I CARDIAC ASSIST DEVICES 9
Cardiac functions and parameters, principle of External counter pulsation techniques, intra aortic
balloon pump, Auxillary ventricle and schematic for temporary bypass of left ventricle, prosthetic
heart valves, cardiac pacemaker.

UNIT II HEMODIALYSERS 9
Physiology of kidney, Artificial kidney, Dialysis action, hemodialyser unit, membrane dialysis,
portable dialyser monitoring and functional parameters.

UNIT III HEARING AIDS 9

Anatomy of ear, Common tests – audiograms, air conduction, bone conduction, masking
techniques, SISI, Hearing aids – principles, drawbacks in the conventional unit, DSP based
hearing aids.

UNIT IV PROSTHETIC AND ORTHODIC DEVICES 9

Hand and arm replacement – different types of models, externally powered limb prosthesis,
feedback in orthotic system, functional electrical stimulation, sensory assist devices.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulator, bio-feedback, assistive devices in drug delivery
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Interpret the various mechanical techniques that will help in assisting the heart functions.
CO2: Describe the underlying principles of hemodialyzer machine.
CO3: Indicate the methodologies to assess the hearing loss.
CO4: Evaluate the types of assistive devices for mobilization.
CO5: Explain about TENS and biofeedback system.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph D. Bronzino, The Biomedical Engineering Handbook, Third Edition: Three Volume
Set, CRC Press,2006
2. Marion. A. Hersh, Michael A. Johnson,Assistive Technology for visually impaired and
blind,Springer Science & Business Media, 1st edition, 12-May-2010
3. Yadin David, Wolf W. von Maltzahn, Michael R. Neuman, Joseph.D, Bronzino, Clinical
Engineering, CRC Press, 1st edition,2010.

REFERENCES
1. Kenneth J. Turner Advances in Home Care Technologies: Results of the match Project,
Springer, 1stedition, 2011.
2. Gerr M. Craddock Assistive Technology-Shaping the future, IOS Press, 1st edition, 2003.
3. 3D Printing in Orthopaedic Surgery, Matthew Dipaola , Elsevier 2019 ISBN 978 -0-323-
662116
4. Cardiac Assist Devices, Daniel Goldstein (Editor), Mehmet Oz (Editor), Wiley-Blackwell
April 2000 ISBN: 978-0-879-93449-1

CO’s PO’s PSO’s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 1 1 1 1
2 3 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 1 1 1
4 3 1 1 1 1
5 3 1 1 1 1
AVg.

248
OMA352 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
This course will help the students to
 determine the optimum solution for Linear programming problems.
 study the Transportation and assignment models and various techniques
to solve them.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of integer
programming problems.
 acquire the knowledge of optimality, formulation and computation of dynamic
programming problems.
 determine the optimum solution for non-linear programming problems.

UNIT I LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9

Formulation of linear programming models – Graphical solution – Simplex method - Big M
Method – Two phase simplex method - Duality - Dual simplex method.

UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEMS 9

Matrix form of Transportation problems – Loops in T.P – Initial basic feasible solution –
Transportation algorithm – Assignment problem – Unbalanced assignment problems .

UNIT III INTEGER PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction – All and mixed I.P.P – Gomory’s method – Cutting plane algorithm – Branch and
bound algorithm – Zero – one programming.

UNIT IV DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Recursive nature of computation – Forward and backward recursion – Resource Allocation
model – Cargo – loading model – Work – force size model - Investment model – Solution of
L.P.P by dynamic programming .

UNIT V NON - LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS 9

Lagrange multipliers – Equality constraints – Inequality constraints – Kuhn – Tucker Conditions –
Quadratic programming.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, students will be able to
 Could develop a fundamental understanding of linear programming models, able to develop
a linear programming model from problem description, apply the simplex method for
solving linear programming problems.
 analyze the concept of developing, formulating, modeling and solving transportation and
assignment problems.
 solve the integer programming problems using various methods.
 conceptualize the principle of optimality and sub-optimization, formulation and computational
procedure of dynamic programming.
 determine the optimum solution for non linear programming problems.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Man Mohan, " Operations Research " , Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, Fifth Edition , 1990.
2. Taha. H.A, " Operations Research – An Introduction , Pearson Education, Ninth
Edition , New Delhi, 2012.

249
REFERENCES :
1. J.K.Sharma , " Operations Research - Theory and Applications " Mac Millan India Ltd ,
Second Edition , New Delhi , 2003.
2. Richard Bronson & Govindasami Naadimuthu , " Operations Research " ( Schaum’s
Outlines – TMH Edition) Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Pradeep Prabhakar Pai , " Operations Research and Practice", Oxford University
Press, New Delhi , 2012.
4. J.P.Singh and N.P.Singh , " Operations Research , Ane Books Pvt.L.td, New Delhi ,
2014.
5. F.S.Hillier and G.J. Lieberman, " Introduction to Operations Research " , Tata McGraw
Hill, Eighth Edition , New Delhi, 2005.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -

OMA353 ALGEBRA AND NUMBER THEORY LT P C

3 00 3
OBJECTIVES :
 To introduce the basic notions of groups, rings, fields which will then be used to solve
related problems.
 To examine the key questions in the Theory of Numbers.
 To give an integrated approach to number theory and abstract algebra, and provide a firm
basis for further reading and study in the subject.

UNIT I GROUPS AND RINGS 9

Groups: Definition - Properties - Homomorphism - Isomorphism - Cyclic groups - Cosets -
Lagrange's theorem.
Rings: Definition - Sub rings - Integral domain - Field - Integer modulo n - Ring homomorphism.

UNIT II FINITE FIELDS AND POLYNOMIALS 9

Rings - Polynomial rings - Irreducible polynomials over finite fields - Factorization of polynomials
over finite fields.

UNIT III DIVISIBILITY THEORY AND CANONICAL DECOMPOSITIONS 9

Division algorithm- Base-b representations – Number patterns – Prime and composite numbers –
GCD – Euclidean algorithm – Fundamental theorem of arithmetic – LCM.

UNIT IV DIOPHANTINE EQUATIONS AND CONGRUENCES 9

Linear Diophantine equations – Congruence’s – Linear Congruence’s - Applications : Divisibility
tests - Modular exponentiation - Chinese remainder theorem – 2x2 linear systems.

UNIT V CLASSICAL THEOREMS AND MULTIPLICATIVE FUNCTIONS 9

Wilson’s theorem – Fermat’s Little theorem – Euler’s theorem – Euler’s Phi functions – Tau and
Sigma functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

250
OUTCOMES :
 Explain the fundamental concepts of advanced algebra and their role in modern
mathematics and applied contexts.
 Demonstrate accurate and efficient use of advanced algebraic techniques.
 The students should be able to demonstrate their mastery by solving non-trivial problems
related to the concepts, and by proving simple theorems about the, statements proven by the
text

TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grimaldi, R.P and Ramana, B.V., "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics", Pearson
Education, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Thomas Koshy, “Elementary Number Theory with Applications”, Elsevier
Publications , New Delhi , 2002.

REFERENCES:
1. San Ling and Chaoping Xing, “Coding Theory – A first Course”, Cambridge Publications,
Cambridge, 2004.
2. Niven.I, Zuckerman.H.S., and Montgomery, H.L., “An Introduction to Theory of Numbers” ,
John Wiley and Sons , Singapore, 2004.
3. Lidl.R., and Pitz. G, "Applied Abstract Algebra", Springer Verlag, New Delhi, 2nd Edition , 2006.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 1 2 - - - 2 1 - 1 2 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 - - -
CO5 2 2 1 - 3 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 - - -
Avg 2.8 2.4 1.6 0.8 2.4 1 2.2 1 0.8 1 2.2 2.6 - - -

OMA354 LINEAR ALGEBRA LT P C

30 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
 To find the basis and dimension of vector space.
 To obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
 To find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
 To find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.

UNIT I MATRICES AND SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS 9

Matrices - Row echelon form - Rank - System of linear equations - Consistency - Gauss
elimination method - Gauss Jordan method.

UNIT II VECTOR SPACES 9

Vector spaces over Real and Complex fields - Subspace – Linear space - Linear independence
and dependence - Basis and dimension.

251
UNIT III LINEAR TRANSFORMATION 9
Linear transformation - Rank space and null space - Rank and nullity - Dimension theorem– Matrix
representation of linear transformation - Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of linear transformation –
Diagonalization.

UNIT IV INNER PRODUCT SPACES 9

Inner product and norms - Properties - Orthogonal, Orthonormal vectors - Gram Schmidt
orthonormalization process - Least square approximation.

UNIT V EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS AND MATRIX DECOMPOSITION 9

Eigen value Problems : Power method, Jacobi rotation method - Singular value decomposition –
QR decomposition.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to
1. Test the consistency and solve system of linear equations.
2. Find the basis and dimension of vector space.
3. Obtain the matrix of linear transformation and its eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
4. Find orthonormal basis of inner product space and find least square approximation.
5. Find eigenvalues of a matrix using numerical techniques and perform matrix decomposition.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Faires J.D. and Burden R., Numerical Methods, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Publications), New
Delhi, 2002.
2. Friedberg A.H, Insel A.J. and Spence L, Linear Algebra, Pearson Education, 5th Edition,2019.

REFERENCES
1. Bernard Kolman, David R. Hill, Introductory Linear Algebra, Pearson Educations, New
Delhi, 8th Edition, 2009.
2. Gerald C.F. and Wheatley P.O, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Educations, New
Delhi, 7th Edition, 2007.
3. Kumaresan S, Linear Algebra - A geometric approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,
Reprint, 2010.
4. Richard Branson, Matrix Operations, Schaum's outline series, 1989.
5. Strang G, Linear Algebra and its applications, Thomson (Brooks / Cole) New Delhi,
4th Edition, 2005.
6. Sundarapandian V, Numerical Linear Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2014.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 2.8 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -

252
OBT352 BASICS OF MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Enable the Non-biological student’s to understand about the basics of life science and
their pro and cons for living organisms.

UNIT I BASICS OF MICROBES AND ITS TYPES 9

Introduction to microbes, existence of microbes, inventions of great scientist and history, types of
microorganisms – Bacteria, Virus, Fungi.

UNIT II MICROBIAL TECHNIQUES 9

Sterilization – types – physical and chemical sterilization, Decontamination, Preservation methods,
fermentation, Cultivation and growth of microbes, Diagnostic methods.

UNIT III PATHOGENIC MICROBES 9

Infectious Disease – Awareness, Causative agent, Prevention and control - Cholera, Dengu,
Malaria, Diarrhea, Tuberculosis, Typhoid, Covid, HIV.

UNIT IV BENEFICIAL MICROBES 9

Applications of microbes – Clinical microbiology, agricultural microbiology, Food Microbiology,
Environmental Microbiology, Animal Microbiology, Marine Microbiology.

UNIT V PRODUCTS FROM MICROBES 9

Fermentedproducts – Fermented Beverages, Curd, Cheese, Mushroom, Agricultural products –
Biopesticide, Biofertilizers, Vermi compost, Pharmaceutical products - Antibiotics, Vaccines
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOME:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
1. Microbes and their types
2. Cultivation of microbes
3. Pathogens and control measures for safety
4. Microbes in different industry for economy.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Talaron K, Talaron A, Casita, Pelczar and Reid. Foundations in Microbiology, W.C. Brown
Publishers, 1993.
2. Pelczar MJ, Chan ECS and Krein NR, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi,
India.
3. Prescott L.M., Harley J.P., Klein DA, Microbiology, 3rd Edition, Wm. C. Brown Publishers,
1996.

OBT353 BASICS OF BIOMOLECULES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 The objective is to offer basic concepts of biochemistry to students with diverse
background in life sciences including but not limited to the structure and function of various
biomolecules and their metabolism.

UNIT I CARBOHYDRATES 9
Introduction to carbohydrate, classification, properties of monosaccharide, structural aspects of
monosaccharides. Introduction to disaccharide (lactose, maltose, sucrose) and polysaccharide
(Heparin, starch, and glycogen) biological function of carbohydrate.

253
UNIT II LIPID AND FATTY ACIDS 9
Introduction to lipid, occurrence, properties, classification of lipid. Importance of phospholipids,
sphingolipid and glycerolipid. Biological function of lipid. Fatty acid, Introduction, Nomenclature
and classification of fatty acid Essential and non essential fatty acids.

UNIT III AMINO ACIDS AND PROTEIN. 9

Introduction to amino acid, structure, classification of protein based on polarity. Introduction to
protein, classification of protein based on solubility, shape, composition and Function. Peptide
bond– Structure of peptide bond. Denauration – renaturation of protein, properties of protein.
Introduction to lipoprotein, glycoprotein and nucleoprotein.Biological function of protein.

UNIT IV NUCLEIC ACIDS 9

Introduction to nucleic acid, Difference between nucleotide and nucleoside, composition of DNA &
amp; RNA Structure of Nitrogen bases in DNA and RNA along with the nomenclature· DNA double
helix (Watson and crick) model, types of DNA, RNA.
UNIT V VITAMINS AND HORMONES 9
Different types of vitamins, their diverse biochemical functions and deficiency related diseases.
Overview of hormones. Hormone mediated signaling. Mechanism of action of steroid hormones,
epinephrine, glucagons and insulin.Role of vitamins and hormones in metabolism; Hormonal
disorders; Therapeutic uses ofvitamins and hormones.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Students will learn about various kinds of biomolecules and their physiological role.
 Students will gain knowledge about various metabolic disorders and will help them to know
the importance of various biomolecules in terms of disease correlation.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry 6th Edition by David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox
W.H.Freeman and Company 2017
2. Satyanarayana, U. and U. Chakerapani, “Biochemistry” 3rd Rev. Edition, Books & Allied
(P) Ltd., 2006. 3. Rastogi, S.C. “Biochemistry” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
4. Conn, E.E., etal., “Outlines of Biochemistry” 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1987.
5. Outlines of Biochemistry, 5th Edition: By E E Conn, P K Stumpf, G Bruening and R Y Doi.pp
693. John Wiley and Sons, New York. 1987.

REFERENCES
1. Berg, Jeremy M. et al. “Biochemsitry”, 6th Edition, W.H. Freeman & Co., 2006.
2. Murray, R.K., etal “Harper’s Illustrated Biochemistry”, 31st Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2018.
3. Voet, D. and Voet, J.G., “Biochemistry”, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.

OBT354 FUNDAMENTALS OF CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide knowledge on the fundamentals of cell biology.
 To understand the signalling mechanisms.
 Understand basic principles of molecular biology at intracellular level to regulate growth,
division and development.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CELL 9

Cell, cell wall and Extracellular Matrix (ECM), composition, cellular dimensions, Evolution,
Organisation, differentiation of prokaryotic and Eukaryotic cells, Virus, bacteria,cyanobacteria,
mycoplasma and prions.

254
UNIT II CELL ORGANELLES 9
Molecular organisation, biogenesis and functin Mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulam, golgi
apparatus, plastids, chloroplast, leucoplast, centrosome, lysosome, ribosome, peroxisome,
Nucleus and nucleolus. Endo membrane system, concept of compartmentalisation.

UNIT III BIO-MEMBRANE TRANSPORT 9

Physiochemical properties of cell membranes. Molecular constitute of membranes, asymmetrical
organisation of lipids and proteins. Solute transport across membrane’s-fick’s law, simple diffusion,
passive-facilitated diffusion, active transport- primary and secondary, group translocation,
transport ATPases, membrane transport in bacteria and animals. Transportmechanism- mobile
carriers and pores mechanisms. Transport by vesicle formation, endocytosis, exocytosis, cell
respiration.

UNIT IV CELL CYCLE 9

Cell cycle- Cell division by mitosis and meosis, Comparision of meosis and mitosis, regulation of
cell cycle, cell lysis, Cytokinesis, Cell signaling, Cell communication, Cell adhesion and Cell
junction, cell cycle checkpoints.

UNIT V CENTRAL DOGMA 9

Overview of Central dogma DNA replication: Meselson & Stahl experiment, bi–directional
DNA replication, Okazaki fragments. Structure and function of mRNA, rRNA and tRNA. RNA
synthesis: Initiation, elongation and termination of RNA synthesis Introduction to Genetic code-
Steps in translation: Initiation, Elongation and termination of protein synthesis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Understanding of cell at structural and functional level.
 Understand the central dogma of life and its significance.
 Comprehend the basic mechanisms of cell division.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Cooper, G.M. and R.E. Hansman “The Cell: A Molecular Approach”, 8th Edition,
Oxford University Press, 2018
2. Friefelder, David. “Molecular Biology.” Narosa Publications, 1999
3. Weaver, Robert F. “Molecular Biology” IInd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.

REFERENCES:
1. Lodish H, Berk A, MatsudairaP,Kaiser CA, Krieger M, Schot MP, Zipursky L, Darnell J.
Molecular Cell Biology, 6th Edition, 2007.
2. Becker, W.M. etal., “The World of the Cell”, 9th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Campbell, N.A., J.B. Recee and E.J. Simon “Essential Biology”, VIIrd Edition, Pearson
International, 2007.
4. Alberts, Bruce etal., “Essential Cell Biology”, 4th Edition, W.W. Norton, 2013.

255
 OPEN ELECTIVE IV

OHS352 PROJECT REPORT WRITING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The Course will enable Learners to,
 Understand the essentials of project writing.
 Perceive the difference between general writing and technical writing
 Assimilate the fundamental features of report writing.
 Understand the essential differences that exist between general and technical writing.
 Learn the structure of a technical and project report.

UNITI 9
Writing Skills – Essential Grammar and Vocabulary – Passive Voice, Reported Speech, Concord,
Signpost words, Cohesive Devices – Paragraph writing - Technical Writing vs. General Writing.

UNIT II 9
Project Report – Definition, Structure, Types of Reports, Purpose – Intended Audience –
Plagiarism – Report Writing in STEM fields – Experiment – Statistical Analysis.

UNIT III 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 1) Framing a Title – Content – Acknowledgement – Funding
Details -Abstract – Introduction – Aim of the Study – Background - Writing the research question -
Need of the Study/Project Significance, Relevance – Determining the feasibility – Theoretical
Framework.

UNIT IV 9
Structure of the Project Report: (Part 2) – Literature Review, Research Design, Methods of Data
Collection - Tools and Procedures - Data Analysis - Interpretation - Findings –Limitations -
Recommendations – Conclusion – Bibliography.

UNIT V 9
Proof reading a report – Avoiding Typographical Errors – Bibliography in required Format – Font –
Spacing – Checking Tables and Illustrations – Presenting a Report Orally – Techniques.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
By the end of the course, learners will be able to
 Write effective project reports.
 Use statistical tools with confidence.
 Explain the purpose and intension of the proposed project coherently and with clarity.
 Create writing texts to suit achieve the intended purpose.
 Master the art of writing winning proposals and projects.

CO-PO & PSO MAPPING

CO PO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - -
2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 - - -
3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 - - -
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - -
AVg. 2.4 2.2 2.4 2.2 2 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.6 3 2.6 3 - - -
 1-low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
256
  Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.
REFERENCES
1. Gerson and Gerson - Technical Communication: Process and Product, 7th Edition,
Prentice Hall(2012)
2. Virendra K. Pamecha - Guide to Project Reports, Project Appraisals and Project Finance
(2012)
3. Daniel Riordan - Technical Report Writing Today (1998)
Darla-Jean Weatherford - Technical Writing for Engineering Professionals (2016) Penwell
Publishers.

OCE354 BASICS OF INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the interdisciplinary approach of water management.
 To develop knowledge base and capacity building on IWRM.

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF IWRM 9

Facts about water - Definition – Key challenges - Paradigm shift - Water management Principles -
Social equity - Ecological sustainability – Economic efficiency - SDGs - World Water Forums.

UNIT II WATER USE SECTORS: IMPACTS AND SOLUTION 9

Water users: People, Agriculture, ecosystem and others - Impacts of the water use sectors on
water resources - Securing water for people, food production, ecosystems and other uses - IWRM
relevance in water resources management.

UNIT III WATER ECONOMICS 9

Economic characteristics of water good and services – Economic instruments – Private sector
involvement in water resources management - PPP experiences through case studies.

UNIT IV RECENT TREANDS IN WATER MANAGEMENT 9

River basin management - Ecosystem Regeneration – 5 Rs - WASH - Sustainable livelihood -
Water management in the context of climate change.

UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION OF IWRM 9

Barriers to implementing IWRM - Policy and legal framework - Bureaucratic reforms and inclusive
development - Institutional Transformation - Capacity building - Case studies on conceptual
framework of IWRM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
 On completion of the course, the student will be able to apply appropriate management
techniques towards managing the water resources.
CO1 Describe the context and principles of IWRM; Compare the conventional and integrated
ways of water management.
CO2 Discuss on the different water uses; how it is impacted and ways to tackle these impacts.
CO3 Explain the economic aspects of water and choose the best economic option among the
alternatives; illustrate the pros and cons of PPP through case studies.
CO4 Illustrate the recent trends in water management.
CO5 Understand the implementation hitches and the institutional frameworks.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Cech Thomas V., Principles of water resources: history, development, management and policy.
John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. 2003.
2. Mollinga P. et al. “ Integrated Water Resources Management”, Water in South Asia Volume I,
Sage Publications, 2006.

257
REFERENCES
1. Technical Advisory Committee, Background Papers No: 1, 4 and 7, Stockholm, Sweden.
2002.
2. IWRM Guidelines at River Basin Level (UNESCO, 2008).
3. Tutorial on Basic Principles of Integrated Water Resources Management ,CAP-NET.
http://www.pacificwater.org/userfiles/file/IWRM/Toolboxes/introduction%20to%20iwrm/Tutorial
_text.pdf
4. Pramod R. Bhave, 2011, Water Resources Systems, Narosa Publishers.
5. The 17 Goals, United Nations, https://sdgs.un.org/goals.

OMA355 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge on numerical methods that will come in handy to solve numerically
the problems that arise in engineering and technology. This will also serve as a precursor for
future research.

UNIT I ALGEBRAIC EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEM 9

System of nonlinear equations : Fixed point iteration method - Newton's method; System of linear
equations: Thomas algorithm for tri diagonal system - SOR iteration methods ; Eigen value
problems: Given's method - Householder's method.

UNIT II INTERPOLATION 9
Central difference: Stirling and Bessel's interpolation formulae ; Piecewise spline interpolation:
Piecewise linear, piecewise quadratic and cubic spline ; Least square approximation for
continuous data (upto 3rd degree).

UNIT III NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9

Explicit Adams - Bashforth Techniques - Implicit Adams - Moulton Techniques, Predictor -
Corrector Techniques - Finite difference methods for solving two - point linear boundary value
problems - Orthogonal Collocation method.

UNIT IV FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS FOR ELLIPTIC EQUATIONS 9

Laplace and Poisson’s equations in a rectangular region : Five point finite difference schemes -
Leibmann’s iterative methods - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – Laplace equation in polar
coordinates : Finite difference schemes .

UNIT V FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD FOR TIME DEPENDENT PARTIAL

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9
Parabolic equations : Explicit and implicit finite difference methods – Weighted average
approximation - Dirichlet's and Neumann conditions – First order hyperbolic equations - Method of
characteristics - Different explicit and implicit methods; Wave equation : Explicit scheme –
Stability of above schemes.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for nonlinear equations,
system of linear equations and eigenvalue problems;
CO2: understand the interpolation theory;
CO3: understand the concepts of numerical methods for ordinary differential equations;
CO4: demonstrate the understandings of common numerical methods for elliptic equations;
CO5: understand the concepts of numerical methods for time dependent partial differential
equations

258
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal, B.S., "Numerical Methods in Engineering & Science ", Khanna Publications,
Delhi, 2013.
2. Gupta, S.K., "Numerical Methods for Engineers", (Third Edition), New Age Publishers, 2015.
3. Jain, M.K., Iyengar, S.R.K. and Jain, R.K., "Computational Methods for Partial Differential
Equations", New Age Publishers, 1994.

REFERENCES:
1. Saumyen Guha and Rajesh Srivastava, "Numerical methods for Engineering and Science",
Oxford Higher Education, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Burden, R.L., and Faires, J.D., “Numerical Analysis – Theory and Applications”, 9 th Edition,
Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2016.
3. Gupta S.K., “Numerical Methods for Engineers”,4th Edition, New Age Publishers, 2019.
4. Sastry, S.S., “Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis”, 5th Edition, PHI Learning, 2015.
5. Morton, K.W. and Mayers D.F., "Numerical solution of Partial Differential equations",
Cambridge University press, Cambridge, 2002.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -
Avg 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 - - -

OMA356 RANDOM PROCESSES LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional random variables
with applications to engineering which can describe real life phenomenon.
 To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used in
communication networks.
 To acquaint with specialized random processes which are apt for modelling the real time
scenario.
 To understand the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 To understand the significance of linear systems with random inputs.

UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES 9

Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Joint
Distribution- Covariance and Correlation – Transformation of a random variable.

UNIT II RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Characterization – Cross correlation and Cross covariance functions - Stationary
Random Processes – Markov process - Markov chain.

UNIT III SPECIAL RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Bernoulli Process – Gaussian Process - Poisson process – Random telegraph process.

UNIT IV CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES 9

259
Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions – Properties – Power spectral density –
Cross spectral density – Properties.

UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 9

Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with random inputs –
Auto correlation and cross correlation functions of input and output.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and apply in
engineering applications.
 Apply the concept random processes in engineering disciplines.
 Understand and apply the concept of correlation and spectral densities.
 Get an exposure of various distribution functions and help in acquiring skills in handling
situations involving more than one variable.
 Analyze the response of random inputs to linear time invariant systems.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Ibe, O.C.," Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes ", 1st Indian Reprint,
Elsevier, 2007.
2. Peebles, P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principles ", Tata McGraw
Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.

REFERENCES
1. Cooper. G.R., McGillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis", Oxford
University Press, New Delhi, 3rd Indian Edition, 2012.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes ", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing and Communications ", Academic Press, 2004.
4. Stark. H. and Woods. J.W., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing ", Pearson Education, Asia, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Yates. R.D. and Goodman. D.J., “Probability and Stochastic Processes", Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.,
Bangalore, 2nd Edition, 2012.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO2 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 - - -

OMA357 QUEUEING AND RELIABILITY MODELLING LT P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for applications
such as random signals, linear systems in communication engineering.
 To understand the concept of queueing models and apply in engineering.
260
  To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop probabilistic
models which can be used in several areas of science and engineering.
 To study the system reliability and hazard function for series and parallel systems.
 To implement Markovian Techniques for availability and maintainability which opens up new
avenues for research.

UNIT I RANDOM PROCESSES 9

Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete parameter
Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.

UNIT II MARKOVIAN QUEUEING MODELS 9

Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing models –
Little’s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms.

UNIT III ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 9

M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special cases – Series
queues – Open Jackson networks.

UNIT IV SYSTEM RELIABILITY 9

Reliability and hazard functions- Exponential, Normal, Weibull and Gamma failure distribution –
Time - dependent hazard models – Reliability of Series and Parallel Systems.

UNIT V MAINTAINABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 9

Maintainability and Availability functions – Frequency of failures – Two Unit parallel system with
repair – k out of m systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
 Enable the students to apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines.
 Students acquire skills in analyzing various queueing models.
 Students can understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time
in a probabilistic manner.
 Students can analyze reliability of the systems for various probability distributions.
 Students can be able to formulate problems using the maintainability and
availability analyses by using theoretical approach.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Shortle J.F, Gross D, Thompson J.M,Harris C.M., “Fundamentals of Queueing Theory”, John
Wiley and Sons, New York,2018.
2. Balagurusamy E., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi,2010.

REFERENCES
1. Medhi J, ”Stochastic models of Queueing Theory”, Academic Press, Elsevier, Amsterdam,
2003.
2. Taha, H.A., "Operations Research", 9th Edition, Pearson India Education Services, Delhi,
2016.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer Science
Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Govil A.K., “Reliability Engineering”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
New Delhi,1983.

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
261
 CO2 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO3 3 3 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO4 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
CO5 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -
Avg 3 3 1.4 0.8 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 2 - - -

OMG354 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation Management for
entrepreneurship.
 To understand the Production process and planning.
 To understand the Production and Operations Management Control for business owners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANGEMENT 9

Functions of Production Management - Relationship between production and other functions –
Production management and operations management, Characteristics of modern production and
operation management, organisation of production function, recent trends in production
/operations management - production as an organisational function, decision making in production
Operations research

UNIT II PRODUCTION & OPERATION SYSTEMS 9

Production Systems- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation in Production - Functions
and significance- Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning- Capacity
measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing and service
industry

UNIT III PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS PLANNING 9

Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design process and
techniques – Location break even analysis-Production Process Planning: Characteristic of
production process systems – Steps for production process- Production Planning Control
Functions – Planning phase- Action phase- Control phase - Aggregate production planning

UNIT IV PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT PROCESS 9

Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study – Significance –
Methods, evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and rating - Value Analysis - Plant
Layout: meaning – characters –- Plant location techniques - Types- MRP and Layout Design -
Optimisation and Theory of Constraints (TOC)– Critical Chain Project Management (CCPM)- REL
(Relationship) Chart – Assembly line balancing- – Plant design optimisation -Forecasting
methods.

UNIT V CONTROLING PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Material requirement planning (MRP)- Concept- Process and control - Inventory control systems
and techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing - Network techniques - Quality Management:
262
Preventive Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality – Techniques for measuring quality - Control
Chart (X , R , p , np and C chart ) - Cost of Quality, Continuous improvement (Kaizen) - Quality
awards - Supply Chain Management - Total Quality Management - 6 Sigma approach and Zero
Defect Manufacturing.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able :
CO 1 To understand the basics and functions of Production and Operation Management for
business owners.
CO 2 To learn about the Production & Operation Systems.
CO 3 To acquaint on the Production & Operations Planning Techniques followed by entrepreneurs
in Industries.
CO 4 To known about the Production & Operations Management Processes in organisations.
CO 5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling , Production and Operations in industries.

REFERENCES
1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated Manufacturing,
Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management, , 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan
India,1992.
6. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
7. Terry Hill ,Operation Management. Pal Grave McMillan (Case Study).2005.

OMG355 MULTIVARIATE DATA ANALYSIS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To know various multivariate data analysis techniques for business research.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Uni-variate, Bi-variate and Multi-variate techniques – Classification of multivariate techniques –
Guidelines for multivariate analysis and interpretation.

UNIT II PREPARING FOR MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS 9

Conceptualization of research model with variables, collection of data –-Approaches for dealing
with missing data – Testing the assumptions of multivariate analysis.

UNIT III MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS, FACTOR ANALYSIS 9

Multiple Linear Regression Analysis – Inferences from the estimated regression function –
Validation of the model. -Approaches to factor analysis – interpretation of results.

UNIT IV LATENT VARIABLE TECHNIQUES 9

Confirmatory Factor Analysis, Structural equation modelling, Mediation models, Moderation
models, Longitudinal studies.

UNIT V ADVANCED MULTIVARIATE TECHNIQUES 9

Multiple Discriminant Analysis, Logistic Regression, Cluster Analysis, Conjoint Analysis,
multidimensional scaling.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES :

263
 Demonstrate a sophisticated understanding of the concepts and methods; know the exact
scopes and possible limitations of each method; and show capability of using multivariate
techniques to provide constructive guidance in decision making.
 Use advanced techniques to conduct thorough and insightful analysis, and interpret the
results correctly with detailed and useful information.
 Show substantial understanding of the real problems; conduct deep analysis using correct
methods; and draw reasonable conclusions with sufficient explanation and elaboration.
 Write an insightful and well-organized report for a real-world case study, including thoughtful
and convincing details.
 Make better business decisions by using advanced techniques in data analytics. ‘

REFERENCES :
1. Joseph F Hair, Rolph E Anderson, Ronald L. Tatham & William C. Black, Multivariate Data
Analysis, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Barbara G. Tabachnick, Linda S.Fidell, Using Multivariate Statistics, 6th Edition, Pearson, 2012.
3. Richard A Johnson and Dean W.Wichern, Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, Prentice
Hall, New Delhi, 2005.
4. David R Anderson, Dennis J Seveency, and Thomas A Williams, Statistics for Business and
Economics, Thompson, Singapore, 2002

OME352 ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the development, capabilities, applications, of Additive Manufacturing (AM), and its
business opportunities.
To be acquainted with vat polymerization and material extrusion processes
To be familiar with powder bed fusion and binder jetting processes.
To gain knowledge on applications of direct energy deposition, and material jetting processes.
To impart knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technologies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Overview - Need - Development of Additive Manufacturing (AM) Technology: Rapid Prototyping-
Rapid Tooling - Rapid Manufacturing - Additive Manufacturing. AM Process Chain - ASTM/ISO
52900 Classification - Benefits - AM Unique Capabilities - AM File formats: STL, AMF Applications:
Building Printing, Bio Printing, Food Printing, Electronics Printing, Automobile, Aerospace,
Healthcare. Business Opportunities in AM.

UNIT II VAT POLYMERIZATION AND MATERIAL EXTRUSION 9

Photo polymerization: Stereolithography Apparatus (SLA)- Materials -Process - top down and
bottom up approach - Advantages - Limitations - Applications. Digital Light Processing (DLP) -
Process - Advantages - Applications.
Material Extrusion: Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM) - Process-Materials -Applications and
Limitations.

UNIT III POWDER BED FUSION AND BINDER JETTING 9

Powder Bed Fusion: Selective Laser Sintering (SLS): Process - Powder Fusion Mechanism -
Materials and Application. Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Materials
- Process - Advantages and Applications.
Binder Jetting: Three-Dimensional Printing - Materials - Process - Benefits - Limitations -
Applications.

UNIT IV MATERIAL JETTING AND DIRECTED ENERGY DEPOSITION 9

Material Jetting: Multijet Modeling- Materials - Process - Benefits - Applications.

264
 Directed Energy Deposition: Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS) - Process - Material Delivery -
Materials -Benefits -Applications.

UNIT V SHEET LAMINATION AND DIRECT WRITE TECHNOLOGY 9

Sheet Lamination: Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM)- Basic Principle- Mechanism: Gluing or
Adhesive Bonding - Thermal Bonding - Materials - Application and Limitation.
Ink-Based Direct Writing (DW): Nozzle Dispensing Processes, Inkjet Printing Processes, Aerosol
DW - Applications of DW.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course students shall be able to:
CO1: Recognize the development of AM technology and how AM technology propagated into
various businesses and developing opportunities.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on process vat polymerization and material extrusion processes and its
applications.
CO3: Elaborate the process and applications of powder bed fusion and binder jetting.
CO4: Evaluate the advantages, limitations, applications of material jetting and directed energy
deposition processes.
CO5: Acquire knowledge on sheet lamination and direct write technology.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian Gibson, David Rosen, Brent Stucker, Mahyar Khorasani “Additive manufacturing
technologies”. 3rd edition Springer Cham, Switzerland. (2021). ISBN: 978-3-030-56126-0
2. Andreas Gebhardt and Jan-Steffen Hötter “Additive Manufacturing: 3D Printing for
Prototyping and Manufacturing”, Hanser publications, United States, 2015, ISBN: 978-1-
56990-582-1.

REFERENCES:
1. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Manufacturing”, Hanser Gardner Publication, Cincinnati., Ohio, 2011, ISBN
:9783446425521.
2. Milan Brandt, “Laser Additive Manufacturing: Materials, Design, Technologies, and
Applications”, Woodhead Publishing., United Kingdom, 2016, ISBN: 9780081004333.
3. Amit Bandyopadhyay and Susmita Bose, “Additive Manufacturing”, 1st Edition, CRC Press.,
United States, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-1482223590.
4. Kamrani A.K. and Nasr E.A., “Rapid Prototyping: Theory and practice”, Springer., United
States ,2006, ISBN: 978-1-4614-9842-1.
5. Liou, L.W. and Liou, F.W., “Rapid Prototyping and Engineering applications: A tool box for
prototype development”, CRC Press., United States, 2011, ISBN: 9780849334092.

CME343 NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1 To introduce the fundamental concepts of the new product development
2 To develop material specifications, analysis and process.
3 To Learn the Feasibility Studies & reporting of new product development.
To study the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new product
4
development
To learn Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model

UNIT – I FUNDAMENTALS OF NPD 9

Introduction – Reading of Drawing – Grid reading, Revisions, ECN (Engg. Change Note), Component
material grade, Specifications, customer specific requirements – Basics of monitoring of NPD applying
Gantt chart, Critical path analysis – Fundamentals of BOM (Bill of Materials), Engg. BOM & Manufacturing
265
BOM. Basics of MIS software and their application in industries like SAP, MS Dynamics, Oracle ERP
Cloud – QFD.

UNIT – II MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS, ANALYSIS & PROCESS 9

Material specification standards – ISO, DIN, JIS, ASTM, EN, etc. – Awareness on various manufacturing
process like Metal castings & Forming, Machining (Conventional, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, 5 Axis, ), Fabrications,
Welding process. Qualifications of parts mechanical, physical & Chemical properties and their test report
preparation and submission. Fundamentals of DFMEA & PFMEA, Fundamentals of FEA, Bend Analysis,
Hot Distortion, Metal and Material Flow, Fill and Solidification analysis.

UNIT – III ESSENTIALS OF NPD 9

RFQ (Request of Quotation) Processing – Feasibility Studies & reporting – CFT (Cross Function Team)
discussion on new product and reporting – Concept design, Machine selection for tool making, Machining
– Manufacturing Process selection, Machining Planning, cutting tool selection – Various Inspection
methods – Manual measuring, CMM – GOM (Geometric Optical Measuring), Lay out marking and Cut
section analysis. Tool Design and Detail drawings preparation, release of details to machine shop and
CAM programing. Tool assembly and shop floor trials. Initial sample submission with PPAP documents.

UNIT – IV CRITERIONS OF NPD 9

New product qualification for Dimensions, Mechanical & Physical Properties, Internal Soundness
proving through X-Ray, Radiography, Ultrasonic Testing, MPT, etc. Agreement with customer for testing
frequencies. Market Survey on similar products, Risk analysis, validating samples with simulation
results, Lesson Learned & Horizontal deployment in NPD.

UNIT – V REPORTING & FORWARD-THINKING OF NPD 9

Detailed study on PPAP with 18 elements reporting, APQP and its 5 Sections, APQP vs PPAP,
Importance of SOP (Standard Operating Procedure) – Purpose & documents, deployment in shop floor.
Prototyping & RPT - Concepts, Application and its advantages, 3D Printing – resin models, Sand cores for
foundries; Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model –
Advantages & Limitation of RE, CE (Concurrent Engineering) – Basics, Application and its advantages in
NPD (to reduce development lead time, time to Market, Improve productivity and product cost.)
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES: At the end of the course the students would be able to
1. Discuss fundamental concepts and customer specific requirements of the New Product
development
2. Discuss the Material specification standards, analysis and fabrication, manufacturing process.
3. Develop Feasibility Studies & reporting of New Product development
4. Analyzing the New product qualification and Market Survey on similar products of new product
development
5. Develop Reverse Engineering. Cloud points generation, converting cloud data to 3D model

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Product Development – Sten Jonsson
2. Product Design & Development – Karl T. Ulrich, Maria C. Young, Steven D. Eppinger

REFERENCES:
1. Revolutionizing Product Development – Steven C Wheelwright & Kim B. Clark
2. Change by Design
3. Toyota Product Development System – James Morgan & Jeffrey K. Liker
4. Winning at New Products – Robert Brands 3rd Edition
5. Product Design & Value Engineering – Dr. M.A. Bulsara &Dr. H.R. Thakkar

PO PSO
CO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
266
 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
3 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
4 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
5 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
Low (1) ; Medium (2) ; High (3)

OME355 INDUSTRIAL DESIGN & RAPID PROTOTYPING TECHNIQUES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The course aims to
 Outline Fundamental concepts in UI & UX
 Introduce the principles of Design and Building an mobile app
 Illustrate the use of CAD in product design
 Outline the choice and use of prototyping tools
 Understanding design of electronic circuits and fabrication of electronic devices

UNIT I UI/UX 9
Fundamental concepts in UI & UX - Tools - Fundamentals of design principles - Psychology and
Human Factors for User Interface Design - Layout and composition for Web, Mobile and
Devices - Typography - Information architecture - Color theory - Design process flow, wireframes,
best practices in the industry -User engagement ethics - Design alternatives

UNIT II APP DEVELOPMENT 9

SDLC - Introduction to App Development - Types of Apps - web Development -
understanding Stack - Frontend - backend - Working with Databases - Introduction to API -
Introduction to Cloud services - Cloud environment Setup- Reading and writing data to cloud
- Embedding ML models to Apps - Deploying application.

UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9

Introduction to Industrial Design - Points, lines, and planes - Sketching and concept
generation - Sketch to CAD - Introduction to CAD tools - Types of 3D modeling - Basic 3D
Modeling Tools - Part creation – Assembly - Product design and rendering basics - Dimensioning
& Tolerancing

UNIT IV MECHANICAL RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Need for prototyping - Domains in prototyping - Difference between actual manufacturing and
prototyping - Rapid prototyping methods - Tools used in different domains - Mechanical
Prototyping; 3D Printing and classification - Laser Cutting and engraving - RD Works - Additive
manufacturing

UNIT V ELECTRONIC RAPID PROTOTYPING 9

Basics of electronic circuit design - lumped circuits - Electronic Prototyping - Working with
simulation tool - simple PCB design with EDA
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
● Create quick UI/UX prototypes for customer needs
● Develop web application to test product traction / product feature
● Develop 3D models for prototyping various product ideas
● Built prototypes using Tools and Techniques in a quick iterative methodology

Text Books
267
1. Peter Fiell, Charlotte Fiell, Industrial Design A-Z, TASCHEN America Llc(2003)
2. Samar Malik, Autodesk Fusion 360 - The Master Guide.
3. Steve Krug, Don't Make Me Think, Revisited: A Common Sense Approach to Web Usability,
Pearson,3rd edition(2014)
References
1. https://www.adobe.com/products/xd/learn/get-star ted.html
2. https://developer.android.com/guide
3. https://help.autodesk.com/view/fusion360/ENU/courses/
4. https://help.prusa3d.com/en/categor y/prusaslicer_204

MF3010 MICRO AND PRECISION ENGINEERING LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
At the end of this course the student should be able to
 Learn about the precision machine tools
 Learn about the macro and micro components.
 Understand handling and operating of the precision machine tools.
 Learn to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other
instruments.
 Learn metrology for micro system

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEMS 9

Design, and material selection, micro-actuators: hydraulic, pneumatic, electrostatic/ magnetic etc.
for medical to general purpose applications. Micro-sensors based on Thermal, mechanical,
electrical properties; micro-sensors for measurement of pressure, flow, temperature, inertia, force,
acceleration, torque, vibration, and monitoring of manufacturing systems.

UNIT II FABRICATION PROCESSES FOR MICRO-SYSTEMS: 9

Additive, subtractive, forming process, microsystems-Micro-pumps, micro- turbines, micro
engines, micro-robot, and miniature biomedical devices

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO PRECISION ENGINEERING 9

Machine tools, holding and handling devices, positioning fixtures for fabrication/ assembly of
microsystems. Precision drives: inch worm motors, ultrasonic motors, stick- slip mechanism and
other piezo-based devices.

UNIT IV PRECISION MACHINING PROCESSES 9

Precision machining processes for macro components - Diamond turning, fixed and free abrasive
processes, finishing processes.

UNIT V METROLOGY FOR MICRO SYSTEMS 9

Metrology for micro systems - Surface integrity and its characterization.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
 Select suitable precision machine tools and operate
 Apply the macro and micro components for fabrication of micro systems.
 Apply suitable machining process
 Able to work with miniature models of existing machine tools/robots and other instruments.
 Apply metrology for micro system

TEXT BOOKS:
268
 1. Davim, J. Paulo, ed. Microfabrication and Precision Engineering: Research and
Development. Woodhead Publishing, 2017
2. Gupta K, editor. Micro and Precision Manufacturing. Springer; 2017

REFERENCES:
1. Dornfeld, D., and Lee, D. E., Precision Manufacturing, 2008, Springer.
2. H. Nakazawa, Principles of Precision Engineering, 1994, Oxford University Press.
3. Whitehouse, D. J., Handbook of Surface Metrology, Institute of Physics Publishing,
Philadelphia PA, 1994.
4. Murthy.R.L, ―Precision Engineering in Manufacturing‖, New Age International, New Delhi,
2005

OMF354 COST MANAGEMENT OF ENGINEERING PROJECTS LT P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Summarize the costing concepts and their role in decision making
 Infer the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection
 Interpret costing concepts with project execution
 Develop knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques
 Illustrate with quantitative techniques in cost management

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Objectives of a Costing System; Cost concepts in decision-making; Relevant cost, Differential
cost, Incremental cost and Opportunity cost; Creation of a Database for operational control.’

UNIT – II INTRODUCTION TO PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Project: meaning, Different types, why to manage, cost overruns centres, various stages of project
execution: conception to commissioning. Project execution as conglomeration of technical and
nontechnical activities, Detailed Engineering activities, Pre project execution main clearances and
documents, Project team: Role of each member, Importance Project site: Data required with
significance, Project contracts

UNIT – III PROJECT EXECUTION AND COSTING CONCEPTS 9

Project execution Project cost control, Bar charts and Network diagram, Project commissioning:
mechanical and process, Cost Behavior and Profit Planning Marginal Costing; Distinction between
Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing; Break-even Analysis, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis,
Various decision-making problems, Pricing strategies: Pareto Analysis, Target costing, Life Cycle
Costing

UNIT – IV COSTING OF SERVICE SECTOR AND BUDGETERY CONTROL 9

Just-in-time approach, Material Requirement Planning, Enterprise Resource Planning, Activity
Based Cost Management, Bench Marking; Balanced Score Card and Value-Chain Analysis,
Budgetary Control: Flexible Budgets; Performance budgets; Zero-based budgets.

UNIT – V QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR COST MANAGEMENT 9

Linear Programming, PERT/CPM, Transportation problems, Assignment problems, Learning
Curve Theory.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand the costing concepts and their role in decision making.
CO2: Understand the project management concepts and their various aspects in selection.
CO3: Interpret costing concepts with project execution.

269
CO4: Gain knowledge of costing techniques in service sector and various budgetary control
techniques.
CO5: Become familiar with quantitative techniques in cost management.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. John M. Nicholas, Herman Steyn Project Management for Engineering, Business and
Technology, Taylor & Francis, 2 August 2020, ISBN: 9781000092561.
2. Albert Lester ,Project Management, Planning and Control, Elsevier/Butterworth-
Heinemann, 2007, ISBN: 9780750669566, 075066956X.

REFERENCES:
1. Ashish K. Bhattacharya, Principles & Practices of Cost Accounting A. H. Wheeler
publisher, 1991.
2. Charles T. Horngren and George Foster, Advanced Management Accounting, 1988.
3. Charles T. Horngren et al Cost Accounting a Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2011.
4. Robert S Kaplan Anthony A. Alkinson, Management & Cost Accounting, 2003.
5. Vohra N.D., Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co. Ltd,
2007.

AU3002 BATTERIES AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LTP

C
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The objective of this course is to make the students to understand the working and characteristics
of different types of batteries and their management .

UNIT I ADVANCED BATTERIES 9

Li-ion Batteries-different formats, chemistry, safe operating area, efficiency, aging. Characteristics-
SOC,DOD, SOH. Balancing-Passive Balancing Vs Active Balancing. Other Batteries-NCM and
NCA Batteries. NCR18650B specifications.

UNIT II BATTERY PACK 9

Battery Pack- design, sizing, calculations, flow chart, real and simulation Model.Peak power –
definition, testing methods-relationships with Power, Temperature and ohmic Internal Resistance.
Cloud based and Local Smart charging.

UNIT III BATTERY MODELLING 9

Battery Modelling Methods-Equivalent Circuit Models, Electrochemical Model, Neural Network
Model. ECM Comparisons- Rint model, Thevenin model, PNGV model. State space Models-
Introduction. Battery Modelling software/simulation frameworks

UNIT IV BATTERY STATE ESTIMATION 9

SOC Estimation- Definition, importance, single cell Vs series batteries SOC. Estimation Methods-
Load voltage, Electromotive force, AC impedance, Ah counting, Neural networks, Neuro-fuzzy
forecast method, Kalman filter. Estimation Algorithms.

UNIT V BMS ARCHITECTURE AND REAL TIME COMPONENTS 9

Battery Management System- need, operation, classification. BMS ASIC-bq76PL536A-Q1 Battery
Monitor IC- CC2662R-Q1 Wireless BMS MCU. Communication Modules- CAN Open-Flex Ray-
CANedge1 package.ARBIN Battery Tester. BMS Development with Modeling software and Model-
Based Design.
TOTAL =45 PERIODS
270
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, students will be able to
1. Acquire knowledge of different Li-ion Batteries performance.
2. Design a Battery Pack and make related calculations.
3. Demonstrate a BatteryModel or Simulation.
4. Estimate State-of-Charges in a Battery Pack.
5. Approach different BMS architectures during real world usage.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Jiuchun Jiang and Caiping Zhang, “Fundamentals and applications of Lithium-Ion
batteriesin Electric Drive Vehicles’’, Wiley, 2015.
2. Davide Andrea ,“Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery Packs”
ARTECH House, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Developing Battery Management Systems with Simulink and Model-Based Design-whitepaper
2. Panasonic NCR18650B- DataSheet
3. bq76PL536A-Q1- IC DataSheet
4. CC2662R-Q1- IC DataSheet

AU3008 SENSORS AND ACTUATORS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 The objective of this course is to make the students to list common types of sensor and
actuators used in automotive vehicles.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENTS AND SENSORS 9

Sensors: Functions- Classifications- Main technical requirement and trends Units and standards-
Calibration methods- Classification of errors- Error analysis- Limiting error- Probable error-
Propagation of error- Odds and uncertainty- principle of transduction-Classification. Static
characteristics- mathematical model of transducers- Zero, First and Second order transducers-
Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test inputs.

UNIT II VARIABLE RESISTANCE AND INDUTANCE SENSORS 9

Principle of operation- Construction details- Characteristics and applications of resistive
potentiometer- Strain gauges- Resistive thermometers- Thermistors- Piezoresistive sensors
Inductive potentiometer- Variable reluctance transducers:- EI pick up and LVDT

UNIT III VARIABLE AND OTHER SPECIAL SENSORS 9

Variable air gap type, variable area type and variable permittivity type- capacitor microphone
Piezoelectric, Magnetostrictive, Hall Effect, semiconductor sensor- digital transducers-Humidity
Sensor. Rain sensor, climatic condition sensor, solar, light sensor, antiglare sensor.

UNIT IV AUTOMOTIVE ACTUATORS 9

Electromechanical actuators‐ Fluid‐mechanical actuators‐ Electrical machines‐ Direct‐current
machines‐ Three‐phase machines‐ Single‐phase alternating‐current Machines ‐ Duty‐type ratings
for electrical machines. Working principles, construction and location of actuators viz. Solenoid,
relay, stepper motor etc.

UNIT V AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ACTUATORS 9

Different types of actuators used in automatic temperature control‐ Fixed and variable
displacement temperature control‐ Semi Automatic‐ Controller design for Fixed and variable
displacement type air conditioning system.
TOTAL =45 PERIODS
271
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. List common types of sensor and actuators used in vehicles.
2. Design measuring equipment’s for the measurement of pressure force, temperature and flow.
3. Generate new ideas in designing the sensors and actuators for automotive application
4. Understand the operation of thesensors, actuators and electronic control.
5. Design temperature control actuators for vehicles.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin's Measurement Systems: 7th Edition (SIE),Ernest O. Doebelin DhaneshN.Manik
McGraw Hill Publishers, 2019.
2. Robert Brandy, “ Automotive Electronics and Computer System”, Prentice Hall,2001
3. William Kimberley,” Bosch Automotive Handbook”, 6th Edition, Robert Bosch GmbH, 2004.
4. Bosch Automotive Electrics and Automotive Electronics Systems and Components,
Networking and Hybrid Drive, 5th Edition, 2007, ISBN No: 978‐3‐658‐01783‐5.

REFERENCES:
1. James D Halderman, “ Automotive Electrical and Electronics” , Prentice Hall, USA, 2013
2. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronics Systems,” Third Edition, 2004, SAE
International.
3. Patranabis.D, “ Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India Ltd,2003
4. William Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics ‐An Engineering Perspective," 7th
Edition, Elsevier Butterworth‐Heinemann Publishers, 2012.

OAS353 SPACE VEHICLES L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To interpret the missile space stations, space vs earth environment.
 To explain the life support systems, mission logistics and planning.
 To deploy the skills effectively in the understanding of space vehicle configuration design.
 To explain Engine system and support of space vehicle
 To interpret nose cone configuration of space vehicle

UNIT I FUNDAMENTAL ASPECTS 9

Energy and Efficiencies of power plants for space vehicles – Typical Performance Values –
Mission design – Structural design aspects during launch - role of launch environment on launch
vehicle integrity.

UNIT II SELECTION OF ROCKET PROPULSION SYSTEMS 9

Ascent flight mechanics – Launch vehicle selection process – Criteria for Selection for different
missions – selection of subsystems – types of staging – Interfaces – selection and criteria for
stages and their role in launch vehicle configuration design.

UNIT III ENGINE SYSTEMS, CONTROLS, AND INTEGRATION 9

Propellant Budget – Performance of Complete or Multiple Rocket Propulsion Systems – Engine
Design – Engine Controls – Engine System Calibration – System Integration and Engine
Optimization.

UNIT IV THRUST VECTOR CONTROL 9

TVC Mechanisms with a Single Nozzle – TVC with Multiple Thrust Chambers or Nozzles – Testing
– Integration with Vehicle – SITVC method – other jet control methods - exhaust plume problems
in space environment

272
UNIT V NOSE CONE CONFIGURATION 9
Aerodynamic aspects on the selection of nose shape of a launch vehicle - design factors in the
finalization of nose configuration with respect to payload - nose cone thermal protection system -
separation of fairings - payload injection mechanism
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
 Explain exotic space propulsion concepts, such as nuclear, solar sail, and antimatter.
 Apply knowledge in selecting the appropriate rocket propulsion systems.
 interpret the air-breathing propulsion suitable for initial stages and fly-back boosters.
 Analyze aerodynamics aspect, including boost-phase lift and drag, hypersonic, and re-entry.
 Adapt from aircraft engineers moving into launch vehicle, spacecraft, and hypersonic vehicle
design.

OIM352 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Of this course are
 To introduce fundamental concepts of management and organization to students.
 Toi mpart knowledge to students on various aspects of marketing, quality control and
marketing strategies.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of human resources management.
 To acquaint students with the concepts of project management and cost analysis.
 To make students familiarize with the concepts of planning process and business
strategies.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION 9
Concepts of Management and organization- nature, importance and Functions of Management,
Systems Approach to Management - Taylor's Scientific Management Theory- Fayal's Principles of
Management- Maslow's theory of Hierarchy of Human Needs- Douglas McGregor's
TheoryXandTheoryY-HertzbergTwoFactorTheoryofMotivation-
LeadershipStyles,Socialresponsibilities of Management, Designing Organisational Structures:
Basic concepts related to Organisation -Departmentation and Decentralisation.

UNIT II OPERATIONS AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Principles and Types of Plant Layout-Methods of Production(Job, batch and Mass
Production),Work Study - Basic procedure involved in Method Study and Work Measurement -
BusinessProcessReengineering(BPR)-
StatisticalQualityControl:controlchartsforVariablesandAttributes (simple Problems) and Acceptance
Sampling, Objectives of Inventory control, EOQ,ABC Analysis, Purchase Procedure, Stores
Management and Store Records - JIT System,Supply Chain Management, Functions of Marketing,
Marketing Mix, and Marketing Strategies based on ProductLifeCycle.

UNIT III HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT 9

Concepts of HRM, HRD and Personnel Management and Industrial Relations (PMIR), HRM vs
PMIR, Basic functions of HR Manager:Manpower planning, Recruitment, Selection,
TrainingandDevelopment,WageandSalaryAdministration,Promotion,Transfer,PerformanceApprais
al, Grievance Handling and Welfare Administration, Job Evaluation and Merit Rating –Capability
Maturity Model (CMM)Levels.

UNIT IV PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path
Method(CPM), identifying critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time,

273
Project Cost Analysis,Project Crashing (simple problems).

UNIT V STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CONTEMPORARY STRATEGIC ISSUES 9

Mission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate Planning
Process, Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy
Formulation and Implementation, Generic Strategy alternatives. Bench Marking and Balanced
Score Cardas Contemporary Business Strategies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSEOUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, Students will be able to
CO1:Plananorganizationalstructureforagivencontextintheorganisationtocarryoutproductionoperatio
nsthroughWork-study.
CO2:Surveythemarkets,customersandcompetitionbetterandpricethegivenproductsappropriatey
CO3:Ensurequalityforagivenproduct or service.
CO4:Plan, schedule and control projects through PERTandCPM.
CO5:Evaluate strategyforabusiness orserviceorganisation.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3
2 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
4 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3
5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2.8 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.4 2 2 2.5

TEXTBOOKS:
1. KanishkaBedi, Production and Operations Management,OxfordUniversityPress,2007.
2. Stoner,Freeman,Gilbert, Management,6th Ed, PearsonEducation,NewDelhi,2004.
3. ThomasN.Duening & John M.Ivancevich Management Principles and Guidelines,
Biztantra,2007.
4. P.VijayKumar,N.Appa Rao and Ashnab, Chnalill, CengageLearning India,2012.

REFERECES:
1. KotlerPhilip and KellerKevinLane: Marketing Management, Pearson, 2012.
2. KoontzandWeihrich: Essentials of Management, McGrawHill, 2012.
3. Lawrence RJauch,R.Guptaand William F. Glueck: Business Policy and Strategic
Management Science,McGrawHill,2012.
4. SamuelC.Certo:Modern Management,2012.

OIM353 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of production planning and control act work study,
 To apply the concept of product planning,
 To analyze the production scheduling,
 To apply the Inventory Control concepts.
 To prepare the manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource
Planning (ERP).
274
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of
production- job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect -
Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect. Profit
consideration- Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-Economics of
a new design.

UNITII WORK STUDY 9

Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development -
Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement - Techniques of work
measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data -
Predetermined motion time standards.

UNITIII PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9

Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of
product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process
planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-Machine capacity,
balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.

UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9

Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gantt
charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance – Flow production
scheduling- Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing – Production Control systems-
Periodic batch control-Material requirement planning kanban – Dispatching-Progress reporting and
expediting- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.

UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9

Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures.
Two bin system - Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic
lot size- ABC analysis - Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production
planning systems- elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course,
CO1:The students can able to prepare production planning and control act work study,
CO2:The students can able to prepare product planning,
CO3:The students can able to prepare production scheduling,
CO4:The students can able to prepare Inventory Control.
CO5:They can plan manufacturing requirements manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II)
and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).

TEXT BOOKS:
1. James. B. Dilworth, ”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for manufacturing
and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edition, S. Chand
and Company, 2000.

REFERENCES
1. Chary. S.N., “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1995.
2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”, 8th
Edition John Wiley and Sons, 2000
3. Jain. K.C. & Aggarwal. L.N., “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”, Khanna
Publishers, 1990
275
4. Kanishka Bedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford university press,
2007.
5. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw hill.
6. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management” 9th Edition, Thomson learning IE, 2007
7. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book Corpn.1984
8. Upendra Kachru, “ Production and Operations Management – Text and cases” 1st Edition,
Excel books 2007

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 3 3 1 1 3
2 3 2 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 2
5 3 3 2 1
AVg. 3 2.6 2 3 1 1 3 1.8

OIE353 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Recognize and appreciate the concept of Production and Operations Management in creating and
enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages.
 Describe the concept and contribution of various constituents of Production and Operations
Management (both manufacturing and service).
 Relate the interdependence of the operations function with the other key functional areas of a firm.
 Teach analytical skills and problem-solving tools to the analysis of the operations problems.
 Apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System Performance.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 9

Operations Management – Nature, Importance, historical development, transformation processes,
differences between services and goods, a system perspective, functions, challenges, current
priorities, recent trends; Operations Strategy - Strategic fit , framework; Supply Chain
Management

UNIT II FORECASTING, CAPACITY AND FACILITY DESIGN 9

Demand Forecasting - Need, Types, COURSE OBJECTIVES and Steps. Overview of
Qualitative and Quantitative methods. Capacity Planning - Long range, Types, Developing
capacity alternatives. Overview of sales and operations planning. Overview of MRP, MRP II
and ERP. Facility Location – Theories, Steps in Selection, Location Models. Facility Layout –
Principles, Types, Planning tools and techniques.

UNIT III DESIGN OF PRODUCT, PROCESS AND WORK SYSTEMS 9

Product Design – Influencing factors, Approaches, Legal, Ethical and Environmental issues.
Process – Planning, Selection, Strategy, Major Decisions. Work Study – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Procedure. Method Study and Motion Study. Work Measurement and
Productivity – Measuring Productivityand Methods to improve productivity.

UNIT IV MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 9

Materials Management – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Planning, Budgeting and Control.
Purchasing – COURSE OBJECTIVES, Functions, Policies, Vendor rating and Value Analysis.
Stores Management – Nature, Layout, Classification and Coding. Inventory – COURSE
OBJECTIVES, Costs and control techniques. Overview of JIT.
276
UNIT V SCHEDULING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9
Project Management – Scheduling Techniques, PERT, CPM; Scheduling - work centers –
nature, importance; Priority rules and techniques, shopfloor control; Flow shop scheduling –
Johnson‟sAlgorithm – Gantt charts; personnel scheduling in services.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: The students will appreciate the role of Production and Operations management in enabling
and enhancing a firm’s competitive advantages in the dynamic business
environment.
CO2: The students will obtain sufficient knowledge and skills to forecast demand for
Production and Service Systems.
CO3: The students will able to Formulate and Assess Aggregate Planning strategies and
Material Requirement Plan.
CO4: The students will be able to develop analytical skills to calculate capacity requirements and
developing capacity alternatives.
CO5: The students will be able to apply scheduling and Lean Concepts for improving System
Performance.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2
2 3 3 3 3
3 2 3 3 2 3
4 3 3 3 2 3
5 3 2
AVg. 3 2.6 3 2.6 2 2 3 3

TEXT BOOKS
1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, Nicholas J. Aquilano,
Operations andSupply Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 12th Edition, 2010.
2. Norman Gaither and Gregory Frazier, Operations Management, South Western
CengageLearning, 2002.
REFERENCES
1. William J Stevenson, Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 9th Edition, 2009.
2. Russel and Taylor, Operations Management, Wiley, Fifth Edition, 2006.
3. Kanishka Bedi, Production and Operations Management, Oxford University Press, 2004.
4. Chary S. N, Production and Operations Management, Tata McGraw Hill, Third Edition,
2008.
5. Aswathappa K and Shridhara Bhat K, Production and Operations Management,
Himalaya Publishing House, Revised Second Edition, 2008.
6. Mahadevan B, Operations Management Theory and practice, Pearson Education, 2007.
7. Pannerselvam R, Production and Operations Management, Prentice Hall India, Second
Edition, 2008.

277
OSF352 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE L T PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Demonstrate an understanding of how occupational hygiene standards are set and used in
work health and safety.
2. Compare and contrast the roles of environmental and biological monitoring in work health and
safety
3. Outline strategies for identifying, assessing and controlling risks associated with airborne
gases, vapours and particulates
4. Discuss how personal protective equipment can be used to reduce risks associated with
workplace exposures
5. Provide high-level advice on managing and controlling noise and noise-related hazards

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE 9

Occupational Health and Environmental Safety Management - Principles practices. Comm on
Occupational diseases: Occupational Health Management Services at the work place. Pre-
employment, periodic medical examination of workers, medical surveillance for control of
occupational diseases and health records.

UNIT II MONITORING FOR SAFETY, HEALTH & ENVIRONMENT 9

Occupational Health and Environment Safety Management System, ILO and EPA Standards
Industrial Hygiene: Definition of Industrial Hygiene, Industrial Hygiene: Control Methods,
Substitution, Changing the process, Local Exhaust Ventilation, Isolation, Wet method, Personal
hygiene, housekeeping and maintenance, waste disposal, special control measures.

UNIT III OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY EDUCATION 9

Element of training cycle, Assessment of needs.Techniques of training, design and development
of training programs.Training methods and strategies types of training.Evaluation and review of
training programs. Occupational Health Hazards, Promoting Safety, Safety and Health training,
Stress and Safety, Exposure Limit .

UNIT IV OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT 9

Bureau of Indian standards on safety and health 14489 - 1998 and 15001 – 2000, OSHA, Process
Safety Management (PSM) as per OSHA, PSM principles, OHSAS – 18001, EPA Standards,
Performance measurements to determine effectiveness of PSM. Importance of Industrial safety,
role of safety department,

UNIT-V INDUSTRIAL HAZARDS 9

i. Radiation: Types and effects of radiation on human body, Measurement and detection of
radiation intensity. Effects of radiation on human body, Measurement – disposal of radioactive
waste, Control of radiation ii. Noise and Vibration: Sources, and its control, Effects of noise on the
auditory system and health, Measurement of noise , Different air pollutants in industries, Effect of
different gases and particulate matter ,acid fumes ,smoke, fog on human health, Vibration: effects.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1: Explain and apply human factors engineering concepts in both evaluation of existing
systems and design of new systems
CO2: Specify designs that avoid occupation related injuries
CO3: Define and apply the principles of work design, motion economy, and work environment
design.
CO4: Identify the basic human sensory, cognitive, and physical capabilities and limitations with
respect to human-machine system performance.
CO5: Acknowledge the impact of workplace design and environment on productivity

TEXT BOOKS:
278
1. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao , Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006)
2. Slote. L, Handbook of Occupational Safety and Health, John Willey and Sons, New York .

REFERENCES:
1. Jeanne MagerStellman, Encyclopedia of Occupational Health and Safety (ILO) Ms. Irma
Jourdan publication
2. Frank P Lees - Loss of prevention in Process Industries, Vol. 1 and 2,
3. ButterworthHeinemann Ltd., London (1991). 2. Industrial Safety - National Safety Council of
India
4. Frank P Lees – Loss of prevention in Process Industries , Vol. 1 and 2, Butterworth- Heinemann
Ltd., London
5. R. K. Jain and Sunil S. Rao, Industrial Safety , Health and Environment Management Systems,
Khanna publishers, New Delhi (2006).

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 - - - -
3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
4 - - - - - - 2 - 3 - - - -
5 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
AVg. 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 2 - 2 - - -

OML352 ELECTRICAL, ELECTRONIC AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Understanding the importance of various materials used in electrical, electronics and
 magnetic applications
 Acquiring knowledge on the properties of electrical, electronics and magnetic materials.
 Gaining knowledge on the selection of suitable materials for the given application
 Knowing the fundamental concepts in Semiconducting materials
 Getting equipped with the materials used in optical and optoelectronic applications.

UNIT I DIELECTRIC MATERIALS 9

Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric strength, breakdown
voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid dielectrics, electric conductivity in solid,
liquid and gaseous dielectrics, Ferromagnetic materials, properties of ferromagnetic materials in
static fields, spontaneous, polarization, curie point, anti-ferromagnetic materials, piezoelectric
materials, pyroelectric materials.

UNIT II MAGNETIC MATERIALS 9

Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic materials,
magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically soft and hard materials,
special purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials, Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent
magnets, ageing of magnets. Factors effecting permeability and Hysteresis

279
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR MATERIALS 9
Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and very large scale
Integration techniques. Concept of superconductivity; theories and examples for high temperature
superconductivity; discussion on specific superconducting materials; comments on fabrication and
engineering applications.

UNIT IV MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures, stranded conductors,
bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact materials, electric carbon materials,
thermocouple materials. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous insulating materials, Effect of moisture on
insulation.

UNIT V OPTICAL AND OPTOELECTRONIC MATERIALS 9

Principles of photoconductivity - effect of impurities - principles of luminescence-laser principles -
He-Ne, injection lasers, LED materials - binary, ternary photoelectronic materials - LCD materials -
photo detectors - applications of optoelectronic materials - optical fibres and materials - electro
optic modulators - Kerr effect - Pockels effect.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand various types of dielectric materials, their properties in various conditions.
2. Evaluate magnetic materials and their behavior.
3. Evaluate semiconductor materials and technologies.
4. Select suitable materials for electrical engineering applications.
5. Identify right material for optical and optoelectronic applications

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pradeep Fulay, “Electronic, Magnetic and Optical materials”, CRC Press, taylor and Francis, 2
nd illustrated edition, 2017.
2. “R K Rajput”, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Laxmi Publications, 2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. T K Basak, “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, New Age Science Publications, 2009
2. TTTI Madras, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 2004.
3. Adrianus J. Dekker, “Electrical Engineering Materials”, PHI Publication, 2006.
4. S. P. Seth, P. V. Gupta “A course in Electrical Engineering Materials”, Dhanpat Rai & amp;
Sons, 2011.
5. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 7th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,Singapore,
(2006).
PO1 PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO11 PO12
0 1 2 3
C01 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 1
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 3 1.8 1.6 2.2 2 2 2 1.2

OML353 NANOMATERIALS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C

280
 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The main learning objective of this course is to prepare the students for:
 Understanding the evolution of nanomaterials in the scientific era and make them to
understand different types of nanomaterials for the future engineering applications
 Gaining knowledge on dimensionality effects on different properties of nanomaterials
 Getting acquainted with the different processing techniques employed for fabricating
nanomaterials
 Having knowledge on the different characterisation techniques employed to characterise
the nanomaterials
 Acquiring knowledge on different applications of nanomaterials in different disciplines of
engineering.

UNIT I NANOMATERIALS 9
Introduction, Classification: 0D, 1D, 2D, 3D nanomaterials and nano-composites, their mechanical,
electrical, optical, magnetic properties; Nanomaterials versus bulk materials.

UNIT II THERMODYNAMICS & KINETICS OF NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS 9

Size and interface/interphase effects, interfacial thermodynamics, phase diagrams, diffusivity,
grain growth, and thermal stability of nanomaterials.

UNIT III PROCESSING 9

Bottom-up and top-down approaches for the synthesis of nanomaterials, mechanical alloying,
chemical routes, severe plastic deformation, and electrical wire explosion technique.

UNIT IV STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICS 9

Principles of emerging nanoscale X-ray techniques such as small angle X-ray scattering and X-ray
absorption fine structure (XAFS), electron and neutron diffraction techniques and their application
to nanomaterials; SPM, Nanoindentation, Grain size, phase formation, texture, stress analysis

UNIT V APPLICATIONS 9
Applications of nanoparticles, quantum dots, nanotubes, nanowires, nanocoatings; applications in
electronic, electrical and medical industries
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Evaluate nanomaterials and understand the different types of nanomaterials
2. Recognise the effects of dimensionality of materials on the properties
3. Process different nanomaterials and use them in engineering applications
4. Use appropriate techniques for characterising nanomaterials
5. Identify and use different nanomaterials for applications in different engineering fields.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2nd edition, 2007.
2. Carl C. Koch (ed.), NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS, Processing, Properties and Potential
Applications, NOYES PUBLICATIONS, Norwich, New York, U.S.A.

REFERENCES:
1. Poole C.P, and Owens F.J., Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley 2003
2. Nalwa H.S., Encyclopedia of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, American Scientific
Publishers 2004
3. Zehetbauer M.J. and Zhu Y.T., Bulk Nanostructured Materials, Wiley 2008
4. Wang Z.L., Characterization of Nanophase Materials, Wiley 2000

281
5. Gutkin Y., Ovid’ko I.A. and Gutkin M., Plastic Deformation in Nanocrystalline Materials,
Springer 2004

PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10 11 12 1 2 3
C01 2 2 2 3 2 1 2
C02 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
C03 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Avg 2.8 1.6 1.7 2.2 2 1.8 2 1.3

OMR353 SENSORS L TPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the various types of sensors, transducers, sensor output signal types, calibration
techniques, formulation of system equation and its characteristics.
 To understand basic working principle, construction, Application and characteristics of
displacement, speed and ranging sensors.
 To understand and analyze the working principle, construction, application and
characteristics of force, magnetic and heading sensors.
 To learn and analyze the working principle, construction, application and characteristics of
optical, pressure, temperature and other sensors.
 To familiarize students with different signal conditioning circuits design and data acquisition
system.

UNIT I SENSOR CLASSIFICATION, CHARACTERISTICS AND SIGNAL TYPES 9

Basics of Measurement – Classification of Errors – Error Analysis – Static and Dynamic
Characteristics of Transducers – Performance Measures of Sensors – Classification of Sensors –
Sensor Calibration Techniques – Sensor Outputs - Signal Types - Analog and Digital Signals,
PWM and PPM.

UNIT II DISPLACEMENT, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9

Displacement Sensors – Brush Encoders - Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical,
Magnetic, Inductive, Capacitive, LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer – Range
Sensors - Ultrasonic Ranging - Reflective Beacons - Laser Range Sensor (LIDAR) – GPS - RF
Beacons.

UNIT III FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 9

Strain Gage – Types, Working, Advantage, Limitation, and Applications: Load Measurement –
Force and Torque Measurement - Magnetic Sensors – Types, Principle, Advantage, Limitation,
and Applications - Magneto Resistive – Hall Effect, Eddy Current Sensor - Heading Sensors –
Compass, Gyroscope and Inclinometers.

UNIT IV OPTICAL, PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE AND OTHER SENSORS 9

Photo Conductive Cell, Photo Voltaic, Photo Resistive, LDR – Fiber Optic Sensors – Pressure –
Diaphragm – Bellows - Piezoelectric - Piezo-resistive - Acoustic, Temperature – IC, Thermistor,
RTD, Thermocouple – Non Contact Sensor - Chemical Sensors - MEMS Sensors - Smart
Sensors.

282
UNIT V SIGNAL CONDITIONING 9
Need for Signal Conditioning – Resistive, Inductive and Capacitive Bridges for Measurement - DC
and AC Signal Conditioning - Voltage, Current, Power and Instrumentation Amplifiers – Filter and
Isolation Circuits – Fundamentals of Data Acquisition System
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Understand various sensor effects, sensor characteristics, signal types, calibration
methods and obtain transfer function and empirical relation of sensors. They can also
analyze the densor response.
CO2: Analyze and select suitable sensor for displacement, proximity and range measurement.
CO3: Analyze and select suitable sensor for force, magnetic field, speed, position and direction
measurement.
CO4: Analyze and Select suitable sensor for light detection, pressure and temperature
measurement and also familiar with other miniaturized smart sensors.
CO5: Select and design suitable signal conditioning circuit with proper compensation and
linearizing element based on sensor output signal.

Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs & POs PSOs
PSOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO/PO & PSO 3 3 2 0. 0. 0.8 0.8 2 3 2 1
Average 8 8
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Bolton W., “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2015.
2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the
8085”, Penram International Publishing Private Limited, 6th Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES
1. Bradley D.A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and Loader A.J., “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,
1993.
2. Davis G. Alciatore and Michael B. Histand, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
systems”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, Cengage Learning,
2010.
4. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education, 2015.
5. Smaili. A and Mrad. F, “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,
Oxford University Press, 2007.

283
ORA352 CONCEPTS IN MOBILE ROBOTS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce mobile robotic technology and its types in detail.
2. To learn the kinematics of wheeled and legged robot.
3. To familiarize the intelligence into the mobile robots using various sensors.
4. To acquaint the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
5. To aware the collaborative mobile robotics in task planning, navigation and intelligence.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE ROBOTICS 9

Introduction – Locomotion of the Robots – Key Issues on Locomotion – Legged Mobile Roots –
Configurations and Stability – Wheeled Mobile Robots – Design Space and Mobility Issues –
Unmanned Aerial and Underwater Vehicles

UNIT II KINEMATICS 9
Kinematic Models – Representation of Robot – Forward Kinematics – Wheel and Robot
Constraints – Degree of Mobility and Steerability – Manoeuvrability – Workspace – Degrees of
Freedom – Path and Trajectory Considerations – Motion Controls - Holonomic Robots

UNIT III PERCEPTION 9

Sensor for Mobile Robots – Classification and Performance Characterization – Wheel/Motor
Sensors – Heading Sensors - Ground-Based Beacons - Active Ranging - Motion/Speed
Sensors – Camera - Visual Appearance based Feature Extraction.

UNIT IV LOCALIZATION 9
Localization Based Navigation Versus Programmed Solutions - Map Representation -
Continuous Representations - Decomposition Strategies - Probabilistic Map-Based Localization
- Landmark-Based Navigation - Globally Unique Localization - Positioning Beacon Systems -
Route-Based Localization - Autonomous Map Building - Simultaneous Localization and
Mapping (SLAM).
UNIT V PLANNING, NAVIGATION AND COLLABORATIVE ROBOTS 9
Introduction - Competences for Navigation: Planning and Reacting - Path Planning - Obstacle
Avoidance - Navigation Architectures - Control Localization - Techniques for Decomposition -
Case Studies – Collaborative Robots – Swarm Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1: Evaluate the appropriate mobile robots for the desired application.
CO2: Create the kinematics for given wheeled and legged robot.
CO3:Analyse the sensors for the intelligence of mobile robotics.
CO4: Create the localization strategies and mapping technique for mobile robot.
CO5: Create the collaborative mobile robotics for planning, navigation and intelligence for
desired applications.

TEXTBOOK
1. Roland Siegwart and IllahR.Nourbakish, “Introduction to Autonomous Mobile Robots” MIT
Press, Cambridge, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Dragomir N. Nenchev, Atsushi Konno, TeppeiTsujita, “Humanoid Robots: Modelling and
Control”, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2018
284
2. MohantaJagadish Chandra, “Introduction to Mobile Robots Navigation”, LAP Lambert
Academic Publishing, 2015.
3. Peter Corke, “Robotics, Vision and Control”, Springer, 2017.
4. Ulrich Nehmzow, “Mobile Robotics: A Practical Introduction”, Springer, 2003.
5. Xiao Qi Chen, Y.Q. Chen and J.G. Chase, “Mobile Robots - State of the Art in Land, Sea,
Air, and Collaborative Missions”, Intec Press, 2009.
6. Alonzo Kelly, Mobile Robotics: Mathematics, Models, and Methods, Cambridge University
Press, 2013, ISBN: 978-1107031159.

MV3501 MARINE PROPULSION LTPC

3003
COOURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart knowledge on basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
 To educate them on basic layout and propulsion equipment’s
 To impart basic knowledge on performance of the ship
 To impart basic knowledge on Ship propeller and its types
 To impart knowledge on ship rudder and its types

UNIT I BASICS SHIP PROPULSION SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENTS 9

law of floatation - Basics principle of propulsion- Earlier methods of propulsion- ship propulsion
machinery- boiler, Marine steam engine, diesel engine, ship power transmission system, ship
dynamic structure, Marine propulsion equipment - shaft tunnel, Intermediate shaft and bearing,
stern tube, stern tube sealing etc. degree of freedom, Modern propelling methods- water jet
propulsion , screw propulsion.

UNIT II SHIPS MOVEMENTS AND SHIP STABILIZATION 9

Thrust augmented devices, Ship hull, modern ship propulsion design, bow thruster – Advantages,
various methods to stabilize the ship- passive and active stabilizer, fin stabilizer, bilge keel -
stabilizing and securing ship in port- effect of tides on ship – effect of river water and sea water
sailing vessel, Load line and load line of marking- draught markings.

UNIT III SHIPS SPEED AND ITS PERFORMANCE 9

Ship propulsion factors, factors affecting ships speed, various velocities of ship, hull drag, effects
of fouling on ships hull, ship wake, relation between powers, Fuel consumption of ship, cavitations
- effects of cavitation’s, ship turning radius.

UNIT IV BASICS OF PROPELLER 9

Propeller dimension, Propeller and its types – fixed propeller, control pitch propeller, kort nozzle,
ducted propeller, voith schneider, Parts of propeller, 3 blade - 5 blade - 6 blade propellers and its
advantages, propeller boss hub, crown nut, propeller skew, pitch of propeller - Thrust creation by
propeller. Propeller Material – Propeller balancing- static and dynamic.

UNIT V BASICS OF RUDDER 9

Rudder dimension, Area of rudder and its design, Rudder arrangements, Rudder fittings- Rudder
pintle - Rudder types- Balanced rudder, semi balanced rudder, Spade rudder, merits and demerits
of various types of rudders, Propeller and rudder interaction, Rudder stopper, movement of
rudders, Basic construction of Rudder
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Explain the basics of propulsion system and ship dynamic movements
285
CO2: Familiarize with various components assisting ship stabilization.
CO3: Demonstrate the performance of the ship.
CO4: Classify the Propeller and its types, Materials etc.
CO5: Categories the Rudder and its types, design criteria of rudder.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. GP. Ghose, “Basic Ship propulsion”,2015
2. E.A. Stokoe “Reeds Ship construction for marine engineers”, Vol. 5,2010
3. E.A. Stokoe, “Reeds Naval architecture for the marine engineers”,4th Edition,2009

REFERENCES BOOKS:
1. DJ Eyers and GJ Bruse, “Ship Construction”, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. KJ Rawson and EC Tupper, “Basic Ship theory I” Vol. 1,5th Edition,2001.
MAPPING OF COS AND POS:
CO PO PSO
PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PS PS PS PS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 O1 O2 O3 O4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 1 1
5 1 1 1 1 1
Av 5/5 2/2 4/4 4/4 2/2 1/1 1/1= 2/2= 1/1= 1/1= 5/5= 5/5=
g =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 =1 1 1 1 1 1 1

OMV351 MARINE MERCHANT VESSELS LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to acquire
 Knowledge on basics of Hydrostatics
 Familiarization on types of merchant ships
 Knowledge on Shipbuilding Materials
 Knowledge on marine propeller and rudder
 Awareness on governing bodies in shipping industry

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HYDROSTATICS 9

Archimedes Principle- Laws of floatation– Meta centre – stability of floating and submerged bodies-
Density, relative density - Displacement –Pressure –centre of pressure.

UNIT II TYPES OF SHIP 10

General cargo ship - Refrigerated cargo ships - Container ships - Roll-on Roll-off ships – Oil
tankers- Bulk carriers - Liquefied Natural Gas carriers - Liquefied Petroleum Gascarriers - Chemical
tankers - Passenger ships

UNIT III SHIPBUILDING MATERIALS 9

Types of Steels used in Shipbuilding - High tensile steels, Corrosion resistant steels, Steel
sandwich panels, Steel castings, Steel forgings - Other shipbuilding materials, Aluminium alloys,
Aluminium alloy sandwich panels, Fire protection especially for Aluminium Alloys, Fiber Reinforced
Composites

286
UNIT IV MARINE PROPELLER AND RUDDER 8
Types of rudder, construction of Rudder-Types of Propeller, Propeller material-Cavitations and its
effects on propeller

UNIT V GOVERNING BODIES FOR SHIPPING INDUSTRY 9

Role of IMO (International Maritime Organization), SOLAS (International Convention for the
Safety of Life at Sea), MARPOL (International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from
Ships ) , MLC (Maritime Labour Convention), STCW 2010 (International Convention on Standards
of Training, Certification and Watch keeping for Seafarers), Classification societies Administration
authorities
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students would
1. Acquire Knowledge on floatation of ships
2. Acquire Knowledge on features of various ships
3. Acquire Knowledge of Shipbuilding Materials
4. Acquire Knowledge to identify the different types of marine propeller
and rudder
5. Understand the Roles and responsibilities of governing bodies

TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.J.Eyres, “Ship Constructions”, Seventh Edition, Butter Worth Heinemann Publishing,
USA,2015
2. Dr.DA Taylor, “Merchant Ship Naval Architecture” I. Mar EST publications, 2006
3. EA Stokoe, E.A, “Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers”, Vol.4, Reeds Publications,2000

REFERENCES:
1. Kemp & Young “Ship Construction Sketches & Notes”, Butter Worth Heinemann
Publishing,USA, 2011
2. MARPOL Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2018
3. SOLAS Consolidated Edition , Bhandakar Publications, 2016

OMV352 ELEMENTS OF MARINE ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, students are expected to
1. Understand the role of Marine machinery systems
2. Be familiar with Marine propulsion machinery system
3. Acquaint with Marine Auxiliary machinery system
4. Have acquired basics of Marine Auxiliary boiler system
5. Be aware of ship propellers and steering system

UNIT I ELEMENTARY KNOWLEDGE ON MARINE MACHINERY SYSTEMS 9

Marine Engineering Terminologies, Parts of Ship, Introduction to Machinery systems on board
ships – Propulsion Machinery system, Electricity Generator system, Steering gear system, Air
compressors & Air reservoirs, Fuel oil and Lubricating Oil Purifiers, Marine Boiler systems

UNIT II MARINE PROPULSION MACHINERY SYSTEM 9

Two stroke Large Marine slow speed Diesel Engine – General Construction, Basic knowledge of
Air starting and reversing mechanism, Cylinder lubrication oil system, Main lubricating oil system
and cooling water system

287
UNIT III MARINE AUXILIARY MACHINERY SYSTEM 9
Four stroke medium speed Diesel engine – General Construction, Inline, V-type arrangement of
engine, Difference between slow speed and medium speed engines – advantages, limitations and
applications

UNIT IV MARINE BOILER SYSTEM 9

Types of Boiler – Difference between Water tube boiler and Fire tube boiler, Need for boiler on
board ships, Uses of steam, Advantages of using steam as working medium, Boiler mountings and
accessories – importance of mountings, need for accessories

UNIT V SHIP PROPELLERS AND STEERING MECHANISM 9

Importance of Propellor and Steering gear, Types of propellers - Fixed pitch propellers,
Controllable pitch propellers, Water jet propellers, Steering gear systems - 2-Ram and 4 Ram
steering gear, Electric steering gear
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, students should able to,
1. Distinguish the role of various marine machinery systems
2. Relate the components of marine propulsion machinery system
3. Explain the importance of marine auxiliary machinery system
4. Acquire knowledge of marine boiler system
5. Understand the importance of ship propellors and steering system

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Taylor, “Introduction to Marine engineering”, Revised Second Edition, Butterworth
Heinemann, London, 2011
2. J.K.Dhar, “Basic Marine Engineering”, Tenth Edition, G-Maritime Publications, Mumbai, 2011
3. K.Ramaraj, “ Text book on Marine Engineering”, Eswar Press, Chennai, 2018

REFERENCES:
1. Alan L.Rowen, “Introduction to Practical Marine Engineering, Volume 1&2, The Institute of
Marine Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2006
2. A.S.Tambwekar, “Naval Architecture and Ship Construction”, The Institute of Marine
Engineers (India), Mumbai, 2015

CRA332 DRONE TECHNOLOGIES L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basics of drone concepts
 To learn and understand the fundaments of design, fabrication and programming of
drone
 To impart the knowledge of an flying and operation of drone
 To know about the various applications of drone
 To understand the safety risks and guidelines of fly safely

UNIT – I INTRODUCTION TO DRONE TECHNOLOGY 9

Drone Concept - Vocabulary Terminology- History of drone - Types of current generation of
drones based on their method of propulsion- Drone technology impact on the businesses-
Drone business through entrepreneurship- Opportunities/applications for entrepreneurship and

288
employability

UNIT – II DRONE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND PROGRAMMING 9

Classifications of the UAV -Overview of the main drone parts- Technical characteristics of the
parts -Function of the component parts -Assembling a drone- The energy sources- Level of
autonomy- Drones configurations -The methods of programming drone- Download program -
Install program on computer- Running Programs- Multi rotor stabilization- Flight modes -Wi-Fi
connection.

UNIT – III DRONE FLYING AND OPERATION 9

Concept of operation for drone -Flight modes- Operate a small drone in a controlled
environment- Drone controls Flight operations –management tool –Sensors-Onboard storage
capacity -Removable storage devices- Linked mobile devices and applications

UNIT – IV DRONE COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Choosing a drone based on the application -Drones in the insurance sector- Drones in
delivering mail, parcels and other cargo- Drones in agriculture- Drones in inspection of
transmission lines and power distribution -Drones in filming and panoramic picturing

UNIT – V FUTURE DRONES AND SAFETY 9

The safety risks- Guidelines to fly safely -Specific aviation regulation and standardization-
Drone license- Miniaturization of drones- Increasing autonomy of drones -The use of drones in
swarms
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to:
CO1: Know about a various type of drone technology, drone fabrication and programming.
CO2: Execute the suitable operating procedures for functioning a drone
CO3: Select appropriate sensors and actuators for Drones
CO4: Develop a drone mechanism for specific applications
CO5: Createthe programs for various drones

CO-PO MAPPING:
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs
COs/Pos&P POs PSOs
SOs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO3 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO4 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO5 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
CO/PO & 1 2 3 1 3 2 1 2 1 3
PSO
Average
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial

TEXT BOOKS
1. Daniel Tal and John Altschuld, “Drone Technology in Architecture, Engineering and
Construction: A Strategic Guide to Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Operation and
Implementation”, 2021 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
2. Terry Kilby and Belinda Kilby, “Make:Getting Started with Drones “,Maker Media, Inc,
2016

REFERENCES
1. John Baichtal, “Building Your Own Drones: A Beginners' Guide to Drones, UAVs, and
289
 ROVs”, Que Publishing, 2016
2. Zavrsnik, “Drones and Unmanned Aerial Systems: Legal and Social Implications for
Security and Surveillance”, Springer, 2018.

OGI352 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
To impart the knowledge on basic components, data preparation and implementation of
Geographical Information System.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF GIS 9

Introduction to GIS - Basic spatial concepts - Coordinate Systems - GIS and Information
Systems – Definitions – History of GIS - Components of a GIS – Hardware, Software, Data,
People, Methods – Proprietary and open source Software - Types of data – Spatial, Attribute
data- types of attributes – scales/ levels of measurements.

UNIT II SPATIAL DATA MODELS 9

Database Structures – Relational, Object Oriented – Entities – ER diagram - data models -
conceptual, logical and physical models - spatial data models – Raster Data Structures – Raster
Data Compression - Vector Data Structures - Raster vs Vector Models- TIN and GRID data
models.

UNIT III DATA INPUT AND TOPOLOGY 9

Scanner - Raster Data Input – Raster Data File Formats – Georeferencing – Vector Data Input –
Digitizer – Datum Projection and reprojection -Coordinate Transformation – Topology - Adjacency,
connectivity and containment – Topological Consistency – Non topological file formats - Attribute
Data linking – Linking External Databases – GPS Data Integration

UNIT IV DATA QUALITY AND STANDARDS 9

Data quality - Basic aspects - completeness, logical consistency, positional accuracy, temporal
accuracy, thematic accuracy and lineage – Metadata – GIS Standards –Interoperability - OGC -
Spatial Data Infrastructure

UNIT V DATA MANAGEMENT AND OUTPUT 9

Import/Export – Data Management functions- Raster to Vector and Vector to Raster Conversion -
Data Output - Map Compilation – Chart/Graphs – Multimedia – Enterprise Vs. Desktop GIS-
distributed GIS.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to
CO1 Have basic idea about the fundamentals of GIS.
CO2 Understand the types of data models.
CO3 Get knowledge about data input and topology
CO4 Gain knowledge on data quality and standards
CO5 Understand data management functions and data output

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Kang - Tsung Chang, Introduction to Geographic Information Systems, McGraw Hill
Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2011.
2. Ian Heywood, Sarah Cornelius, Steve Carver, Srinivasa Raju, “An Introduction Geographical
Information Systems, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,2007.

REFERENCES:

290
1. Lo. C. P., Albert K.W. Yeung, Concepts and Techniques of Geographic Information Systems,
Prentice-Hall India Publishers, 2006

CO – PO – PSO MAPPING: GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEM

Course Outcome
PO Graduate Attribute CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Average
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 3 3 3 3 3 3
PO2 Problem Analysis 3 3 3
PO3 Design/Development of Solutions 3 3 3 3
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex 3
3 3 3
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 3 3 3 3
PO6 The Engineer and Society
PO 7 Environment and Sustainability
PO 8 Ethics
PO 9 Individual and Team Work
PO 10 Communication
PO 11 Project Management and Finance
PO 12 Life-long Learning
PSO 1 Knowledge of Geoinformatics 3
3 3 3 3 3
discipline
PSO 2 Critical analysis of Geoinformatics 3
Engineering problems and 3 3 3 3 3
innovations
PSO 3 Conceptualization and evaluation of 3
Design solutions 3 3 3 3 3

OAI352 AGRICULTURE ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES
 To introduce the importance of Agri-business management, its characteristics and
principles
 To impart knowledge on the functional areas of Agri-business like Marketing management,
Product pricing methods and Market potential assessment.

UNIT I ENTREPRENEURIAL ENVIRONMENT IN INDIAN CONTEXT 9

Entrepreneur Development(ED): Concept of entrepreneur and entrepreneurship assessing overall
business environment in Indian economy- Entrepreneurial and managerial characteristics-
Entrepreneurship development programmers (EDP)-Generation incubation and commercialization
of ideas and innovations- Motivation and entrepreneurship development- Globalization and the
emerging business entrepreneurial environment.

UNIT II AGRIPRNEURSHIP IN GLOBAL ARENA: LEGAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Importance of agribusiness in Indian economy - International trade-WTO agreements- Provisions
related to agreements in agricultural and food commodities - Agreements on Agriculture (AOA)-
Domestic supply, market access, export subsidies agreements on sanitary and phyto-sanitary
(SPS) measures, Trade related intellectual property rights (TRIPS).

UNIT III ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT: FINANCIAL PERSPECTIVE 9

Entrepreneurship - Essence of managerial Knowledge -Management functions- Planning-
organizing-Directing-Motivation-ordering-leading-supervision- communication and control-

291
Understanding Financial Aspects of Business - Importance of financial statements-liquidity ratios-
leverage ratios, coverage ratios-turnover ratios-Profitability ratios. Agro-based industries-Project-
Project cycle-Project appraisal and evaluation techniques-undiscounted measures-Payback
period-proceeds per rupee of outlay, Discounted measures-Net Present Value (NPV)-Benefit-Cost
Ratio(BCR)-Internal Rate of Return(IRR)-Net benefit investment ratio(N/K ratio)-sensitivity
analysis.

UNIT IV ENTREPRENEURIAL OPPORTUNITIES: ECONOMIC GROWTH

PERSPECTIVE 9
Managing an enterprise: Importance of planning, budgeting, monitoring evaluation and follow-up
managing competition. Role of ED in economic development of a country- Overview of Indian
social, political system and their implications for decision making by individual entrepreneurs-
Economic system and its implication for decision making by individual entrepreneurs.

UNITV ENTREPRENEURIAL PROMOTION MEASURES AND GOVERNMENT

SUPPORT 9
Social responsibility of business. Morals and ethics in enterprise management- SWOT analysis-
Government schemes and incentives for promotions of entrepreneurship. Government policy on
small and medium enterprises (SMEs)/SSIs/MSME sectors- Venture capital (VC), contract
framing (CF) and Joint Venture (JV), public-private
partnerships (PPP) - overview of agricultural engineering industry, characteristics of Indian farm
machinery industry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
1. Judge about agricultural finance, banking and cooperation
2. Evaluate basic concepts, principles and functions of financial management
3. Improve the skills on basic banking and insurance schemes available to customers
4. Analyze various financial data for efficient farm management
5. Identify the financial institutions

TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph L. Massie, 1995, “Essentials of Management”, prentice Hall of India Pvt
limited, New Delhi
2. Khanka S, 1999, Entrepreneurial Development, S, Chand and Co, New Delhi
3. Mohanty S K, 2007, Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall India, New
Delhi.

REFERENCES
1. Harih S B, Conner U J and Schwab G D, 1981, Management of the Farm Business,
Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
2. Omri Ralins, N.1980, Introduction to Agricultural: Prentice Hall Inc, New Jersey
3. Gittenger Price, 1989, Economic Analysis of Agricultural project, John Hopkins
University, Press, London.
4. Thomas W Zimmer and Norman M Scarborough, 1996, Entrepreneurship, Prentice
Hall, New Jersey.
5. Mar J Dollinger, 1999, Entrepreneurship strategies and resources, Prentice –Hall,
Upper Saddal Rover, New Jersey.

292
CO-PO MAPPING
PO/PSO CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 CO5 Overall
correlation of
COs with POs
PO1 Engineering Knowledge 1 2 1 1 1 2
PO2 Problem Analysis 2 1 1 1 2 1
PO3 Design/ Development of Solutions 1 1 1 2 1 2
PO4 Conduct Investigations of Complex
1 1 2 1 1 1
Problems
PO5 Modern Tool Usage 2 1 1 1 1 2
PO6 The Engineer and Society 1 2 1 2 1 1
PO7 Environment and sustainability 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO8 Ethics 1 2 1 1 1 1
PO9 Individual and team work: 1 1 1 2 1 1
PO10 Communication 1 1 1 1 2 1
PO11 Project management and finance 1 1 2 1 1 1
PO12 Life-long learning: 1 2 1 1 1 2
PSO1 To make expertise in design and
engineering problem solving approach
1 2 1 1 1 1
in agriculture with proper knowledge
and skill
PSO2 To enhance students ability to
formulate solutions to real-world
problems pertaining to 1 1 2 1 1 1
sustained agricultural productivity using
modern technologies.
PSO3 To inculcate entrepreneurial skills
through strong Industry-Institution 1 2 1 1 2 1
linkage.

OEN352 BIODIVERSITY CONSERVATION LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 The identification of different aspects of biological diversity and conservation techniques.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Concept of Species, Variation; Introduction to Major Plant Groups; Evolutionary relationships
between Plant Groups; Nomenclature and History of plant taxonomy; Systems of Classification
and their Application; Study of Plant Groups; Study of Identification Characters; Study of important
families of Angiosperms; Plant Diversity Application.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL DIVERSITY AND TAXONOMY 9

Principles and Rules of Taxonomy; ICZN Rules, Animal Study Techniques; Concepts of Taxon,
Categories, Holotype, Paratype, Topotype etc; Classification of Animal kingdom, Invertebrates,
Vertebrates, Evolutionary relationships between Animal Groups.

UNIT III MICROBIAL DIVERSITY 9

Microbes and Earth History, Magnitude, Occurrence and Distribution. Concept of Species, Criteria
for Classification, Outline Classification of Microorganisms (Bacteria, Viruses and Protozoa);
Criteria for Classification and Identification of Fungi; Chemical and Biochemical Methods of
Microbial Diversity Analysis

293
UNIT IV MEGA DIVERSITY 9
Biodiversity Hot-spots, Floristic and Faunal Regions in India and World; IUCN Red List; Factors
affecting Diversity, Impact of Exotic Species and Human Disturbance on Diversity, Dispersal,
Diversity-Stability Relationship; Socio- economic Issues of Biodiversity; Sustainable Utilization of
Bioresources; National Movements and International Convention/Treaties on Biodiversity.

UNIT V CONSERVATIONS OF BIODIVERSITY 9

In-Situ Conservation- National parks, Wildlife sanctuaries, Biosphere reserves; Ex-situ
conservation- Gene bank, Cryopreservation, Tissue culture bank; Long term captive breeding,
Botanical gardens, Animal Translocation, Zoological Gardens; Concept of Keystone Species,
Endangered Species, Threatened Species, Rare Species, Extinct Species
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A textbook of Botany: Angiosperms- Taxonomy, Anatomy, Economic Botany & Embryology.
S. Chand, Limited, Pandey, B. P. January 2001
2. Principles of Systematic Zoology, Mcgraw-Hill College, Ashlock, P.D., Latest Edition.
3. Microbiology, MacGraw Hill Companies Inc, Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P., and Klein D.A.
(2022).
4. Microbiology, Pearson Publisher, Gerard J. Tortora, Berdell R. Funke, Christine L.Case, 13th
Edition 2019

REFERENCES:
1. Ecological Census Technique: A Handbook, Cambridge University Press, Sutherland, W.
2. Encyclopedia of Biodiversity, Academic Press, Simonson Asher Levin.

OUTCOMES
Upon successful completion of this course, students will:
CO1: An insight into the structure and function of diversity for ecosystem stability.
CO2: Understand the concept of animal diversity and taxonomy
CO3: Understand socio-economic issues pertaining to biodiversity
CO4: An understanding of biodiversity in community resource management.
CO5: Student can apply fundamental knowledge of biodiversity conservation to solve problems
associated with infrastructure development.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3
1.low, 2-medium, 3-high, ‘-“- no correlation
Note: The average value of this course to be used for program articulation matrix.

OEE353 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS LTPC

30 03
OBJECTIVES
 To impart knowledge on various representations of systems.
 To familiarize time response analysis of LTI systems and steady state error.
 To analyze the frequency responses and stability of the systems
 To analyze the stability of linear systems in frequency domain and time domain

294
  To develop linear models mainly state variable model and transfer function model

UNIT I MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF PHYSICALSYSTEMS 9

Definition & classification of system – terminology & structure of feedback control theory –
Analogous systems - Physical system representation by Differential equations – Block
diagram reduction–Signal flow graphs.

UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS & ROOTLOCUSTECHNIQUE 9

Standard test signals – Steady state error & error constants – Time Response of I and II
order system–Root locus–Rules for sketching root loci.

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Correlation between Time & Frequency response – Polar plots – Bode Plots – Determination
of Transfer Function from Bode plot.

UNIT IV STABILITY CONCEPTS & ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability – Necessary condition – RH criterion – Relative stability – Nyquist stability
criterion – Stability from Bode plot – Relative stability from Nyquist & Bode – Closed
loop frequency response.

UNITV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS 9

Concept of state – State Variable & State Model – State models for linear & continuous time
systems–Solution of state & output equation–controllability & observability.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Ability to
CO1: Design the basic mathematical model of physical System.
CO2: Analyze the time response analysis and techniques.
CO3: Analyze the transfer function from different plots.
CO4: Apply the stability concept in various criterion.
CO5: Assess the state models for linear and continuous Systems.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Farid Golnarghi , Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems Paper back McGraw Hill
Education, 2018.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, Pearson, 5th Edition2015.
3. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering (Multi Colour Edition), New Age
International, 2018.

REFERENCES
1. Richard C. Dorf and Robert H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. Control System Dynamics" by Robert Clark, Cambridge University Press, 1996 USA.
3. John J. D’Azzo, Constantine H. Houpis and Stuart N. Sheldon, Linear Control System
AnalysisandDesign, 5th Edition, CRC PRESS, 2003.
4. S. Palani, Control System Engineering, McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited, 2009.
5. Yaduvir Singh and S.Janardhanan, Modern Control, Cengage Learning, First
Impression2010.
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 2 3 1 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 3
3 3 3
295
OEI354 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS LT P C
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To educate on design of signal conditioning circuits for various applications.
2. To Introduce signal transmission techniques and their design.
3. Study of components used in data acquisition systems interface techniques
4. To educate on the components used in distributed control systems
5. To introduce the communication buses used in automation industries.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Automation overview, Requirement of automation systems, Architecture of Industrial Automation
system, Introduction of PLC and supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA). Industrial bus
systems : Modbus & Profibus

UNIT II AUTOMATION COMPONENTS 9

Sensors for temperature, pressure, force, displacement, speed, flow, level, humidity and pH
measurement. Actuators, process control valves, power electronics devices DIAC, TRIAC, power
MOSFET and IGBT. Introduction of DC and AC servo drives for motion control.

UNIT III COMPUTER AIDED MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9

Role of computers in measurement and control, Elements of computer aided measurement and
control, man-machine interface, computer aided process control hardware, process related
interfaces, Communication and networking, Industrial communication systems, Data transfer
techniques, Computer aided process control software, Computer based data acquisition system,
Internet of things (IoT) for plant automation.

UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9

Programmable controllers, Programmable logic controllers, Analog digital input and output
modules, PLC programming, Ladder diagram, Sequential flow chart, PLC Communication and
networking, PLC selection, PLC Installation, Advantage of using PLC for Industrial automation,
Application of PLC to process control industries.

UNIT V DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9

Overview of DCS, DCS software configuration, DCS communication, DCS Supervisory Computer
Tasks, DCS integration with PLC and Computers, Features of DCS, Advantages of DCS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
SKILL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES (Group Seminar/Mini Project/Assignment/Content
Preparation / Quiz/ Surprise Test / Solving GATE questions/ etc) 5
1. Market survey of the recent PLCs and comparison of their features.
2. Summarize the PLC standards
3. Familiarization of any one programming language (Ladder diagram/ Sequential Function
Chart/ Function Block Diagram/ Equivalent open source software)
4. Market survey of Industrial Data Networks.

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Students able to
CO1 Design a signal conditioning circuits for various application (L3).
CO2 Acquire a detail knowledge on data acquisition system interface and DCS system (L2).
CO3 Understand the basics and Importance of communication buses in applied automation
Engineering (L2).
CO4 Ability to design PLC Programmes by Applying Timer/Counter and Arithmetic and Logic
Instructions Studied for Ladder Logic and Function BIock.(L3)
296
 CO5 Able to develop a PLC logic for a specific application on real world problem. (L5)

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.K.Singh, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2nd edition companies,2003.
2. C D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hall India,8th Edition,
2006.
3. E.A.Parr, Newnes ,NewDelhi,“Industrial Control Handbook”,3rd Edition, 2000.

REFERENCES:
1. John W. Webb and Ronald A. Reis, “Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and
Applications”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 2003.
2. Frank D. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 5th Edition, McGraw- Hill, New York,
2016.
3. Krishna Kant, “Computer - Based Industrial Control”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi,
2011.
4. Gary Dunning, Thomson Delmar,“Programmable Logic Controller”, CeneageLearning, 3 rd
Edition,2005.

List of Open Source Software/ Learning website:

1. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105062/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063
3. https://www.electrical4u.com/industrial-automation/
4. https://realpars.com/what-is-industrial-automation/
5. https://automationforum.co/what-is-industrial-automation-2/

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 1 - 1
CO2 3 `1 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO3 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2.25 2 2.6 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1

OFD354 FUNDAMENTALS OF FOOD ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
The course aims to
 acquaint and equip the students with different techniques of measurement of engineering
properties.
 make the students understand the nature of food constituents in the design of processing
equipment

UNIT I 9
Engineering properties of food materials: physical, thermal, aerodynamic, mechanical, optical and
electromagnetic properties.

UNIT II 9
Drying and dehydration: Basic drying theory, heat and mass transfer in drying, drying rate curves,
calculation of drying times, dryer efficiencies; classification and selection of dryers; tray, vacuum,

297
osmotic, fluidized bed, pneumatic, rotary, tunnel, trough, bin, belt, microwave, IR, heat pump and
freeze dryers; dryers for liquid: Drum or roller dryer, spray dryer and foammat dryers

UNIT III 9
Size reduction: Benefits, classification, determination and designation of the fineness of ground
material, sieve/screen analysis, principle and mechanisms of comminution of food, Rittinger’s,
Kick’s and Bond’s equations, work index, energy utilization; Size reduction equipment: Principal
types, crushers (jaw crushers, gyratory, smooth roll), hammer mills and impactors, attrition mills,
buhr mill, tumbling mills, tumbling mills, ultra fine grinders, fluid jet pulverizer, colloid mill, cutting
machines (slicing, dicing, shredding, pulping)

UNIT IV 9
Mixing: theory of solids mixing, criteria of mixer effectiveness and mixing indices, rate of mixing,
theory of liquid mixing, power requirement for liquids mixing; Mixing equipment: Mixers for lo.w- or
medium-viscosity liquids (paddle agitators, impeller agitators, powder-liquid contacting devices,
other mixers), mixers for high viscosity liquids and pastes, mixers for dry powders and particulate
solids.

UNIT V 9
Mechanical Separations: Theory, centrifugation, liquid-liquid centrifugation, liquid-solid
centrifugation, clarifiers, desludging and decanting machine, Filtration: Theory of filtration, rate of
filtration, pressure drop during filtration, applications, constant-rate filtration and constant-pressure
filtration, derivation of equation; Filtration equipment; plate and frame filter press, rotary filters,
centrifugal filters and air filters, filter aids, Membrane separation: General considerations, materials
for membrane construction, ultra-filtration, microfiltration, concentration, polarization, processing
variables, membrane fouling, applications of ultra-filtration in food processing, reverse osmosis,
mode of operation, and applications; Membrane separation methods, demineralization by electro-
dialysis, gel filtration, ion exchange, per-evaporation and osmotic dehydration.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the students will be able to
CO1 understand the importance of food polymers
CO2 understand the effect of various methods of processing on the structure and texture of food
materials
CO3 understand the interaction of food constituents with respect to thermal, electrical properties to
develop new technologies for processing and preservation.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. R.L. Earle. 2004. Unit Operations in Food Processing. The New Zealand Intitute of Food
Science & Technology, Nz. Warren L. McCabe, Julian Smith, Peter Harriott. 2004.
2. Unit Operations of Chemical Engineering, 7th Ed. McGraw-Hill, Inc., NY, USA. Christie
John Geankoplis. 2003.
3. Transport Processes and Separation Process Principles (Includes Unit Operations), 4th
Ed. Prentice-Hall, NY, USA.
4. George D. Saravacos and Athanasios E. Kostaropoulos. 2002. Handbook of Food
Processing Equipment. Springer Science+Business Media, New York, USA.
5. J. F. Richardson, J. H. Harker and J. R. Backhurst. 2002. Coulson & Richardson's
Chemical Engineering, Vol. 2, Particle Technology and Separation Processes, 5th Ed.

298
OFD355 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY REGULATIONS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
• To characterize different type of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the
industry and food service establishments
• To help become skilled in systems for food safety surveillance
• To be aware of the regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world
• To ensure processed food meets global standards

UNIT I 10
Introduction to food safety and security: Hygienic design of food plants and equipments, Food
Contaminants (Microbial, Chemical, Physical), Food Adulteration (Common adulterants), Food
Additives (functional role, safety issues), Food Packaging & labeling. Sanitation in warehousing,
storage, shipping, receiving, containers and packaging materials. Control of rats, rodents, mice,
birds, insects and microbes. Cleaning and Disinfection, ISO 22000 – Importance and
Implementation

UNIT II 8
Food quality: Various Quality attributes of food, Instrumental, chemical and microbial Quality
control. Sensory evaluation of food and statistical analysis. Water quality and other utilities.

UNIT III 9
Critical Quality control point in different stages of production including raw materials and
processing materials. Food Quality and Quality control including the HACCP system. Food
inspection and Food Law, Risk assessment – microbial risk assessment, dose response and
exposure response modelling, risk management, implementation of food surveillance system to
monitor food safety, risk communication

UNIT IV 9
Indian and global regulations: FAO in India, Technical Cooperation programmes, Bio-security in
Food and Agriculture, World Health Organization (WHO), World Animal Health Organization (OIE),
International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC)

UNIT V 9
Codex Alimentarius Commission - Codex India – Role of Codex Contact point, National Codex
contact point (NCCP), National Codex Committee of India – ToR, Functions, Shadow Committees
etc.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 Thorough Knowledge of food hazards, physical, chemical and biological in the industry and
food service establishments
CO2 Awareness on regulatory and statutory bodies in India and the world

REFERENCES:
1. Handbook of food toxicology by S. S. Deshpande, 2002
2. The food safety information handbook by Cynthia A. Robert, 2009
3. Nutritional and safety aspects of food processing by Tannenbaum SR, Marcel Dekker Inc., New
York 1979
4. Microbiological safety of Food by Hobbs BC, 1973
5. Food Safety Handbook by Ronald H. Schmidt, Gary E. Rodrick, A John Wiley & Sons
Publication, 2003

299
OPY353 NUTRACEUTICALS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the basic concepts of Nutraceuticals and functional food, their chemical
nature and methods of extraction.
 To understand the role of Nutraceuticals and functional food in health and disease.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND SIGNIFICANCE 6

Introduction to Nutraceuticals and functional foods; importance, history, definition, classification,
list of functional foods and their benefits, Phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food,
plants, animals and microbes.

UNIT II PHYTOCHEMICALS AS NUTRACEUTICALS 11

Phytoestrogens in plants; isoflavones; flavonols, polyphenols, tannins, saponins, lignans,
lycopene, chitin, caratenoids. Manufacturing practice of selected nutraceuticals such as lycopene,
isoflavonoids, glucosamine, phytosterols. Formulation of functional foods containing nutraceuticals
- stability, analytical and labelling issues.

UNIT III ASSESSMENT OF ANTIOXIDANT ACTIVITY 11

In vitro and in vivo methods for the assessment of antioxidant activity, Comparison of different in
vitro methods to evaluate the antioxidant, antioxidant mechanism, Prediction of the antioxidant
activity of natural phenolics from electrotopological state indices, Optimising phytochemical
release by process technology; Variation of Antioxidant Activity during technological treatments,
new food grade peptidases from plant sources.

UNIT IV ROLE IN HEALTH AND DISEASE 11

The health benefit of - Soy protein, Spirulina, Tea, Olive oil, plant sterols, Broccoli, omega3 fatty
acid and eicosanoids. Nutraceuticals and Functional foods in Gastrointestinal disorder, Cancer,
CVD, Diabetic Mellitus, HIV and Dental disease; Importance and function of probiotic, prebiotic
and synbiotic and their applications, Functional foods and immune competence; role and use in
obesity and nervous system disorders.

UNIT V SAFETY ISSUES 6

Health Claims, Adverse effects and toxicity of nutraceuticals, regulations and safety issues
International and national.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bisset, Normal Grainger and Max Wich H “Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals”, 2nd
Edition, CRC, 2001.
2. Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods: Robert Wildman, CRC, Publications.
2006
3. WEBB, PP, Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods Blackwell Publishing Ltd (United
Kingdom), 2006
4. Ikan, Raphael “Natural Products: A Laboratory Guide”, 2nd Edition, Academic Press /
Elsevier, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Asian Functional Foods (Nutraceutical Science and Technology) by John Shi (Editor),
Fereidoon Shahidi (Editor), Chi-Tang Ho (Editor), CRC Publications, Taylor & Francis, 2007
2. Functional Foods and Nutraceuticals in Cancer Prevention by Ronald Ross Watson (Author),
Blackwell Publishing, 2007
3. Marketing Nutrition: Soy, Functional Foods, Biotechnology, and Obesity by Brian Wansink.
4. Functional foods: Concept to Product: Edited by G R Gibson and C M Williams, Wood head
Publ., 2000

300
 5. Hanson, James R. “Natural Products: The Secondary Metabolites”, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2003.

COURSE OUTCOME - NUTRACEUTICALS

CO 1 acquire knowledge about the Nutraceuticals and functional foods, their classification and
benefits.
CO 2 acquire knowledge of phytochemicals, zoochemicals and microbes in food, plants,
animals and microbes
CO 3 attain the knowledge of the manufacturing practices of selected nutraceutical
components and formulation considerations of functional foods.
CO 4 distinguish the various In vitro and In vivo assessment of Antioxidant activity of
compounds from plant sources.
CO 5 gain information about the health benefits of various functional foods and nutraceuticals
in the prevention and treatment of various lifestyle diseases.
CO 6 Attain the knowledge of the regulatory and safety issues of nutraceuticals at national
and international level.

CO – PO MAPPING
NUTRACEUTICALS
Course PO1 PO2 PO PO PO PO6 PO PO8 PO PO10 PO11 PO12
outcome 3 4 5 7 9
CO 1 3 1
CO 2 3 1
CO 3 3 2
CO 4 3
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 3 2 1

OTT354 BASICS OF DYEING AND PRINTING LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to learn about the basics of Pretreatment, dyeing, printing and
machinery in textile processing.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Impurities present in different fibres, Inspection of grey goods and lot preparation. Shearing,

UNIT II PRE TREATMENT 9

Desizing-Objective of Desizing- types of Desizing- Objective of Scouring- Mechanism of Scouring–
Degumming of Silk, Scouring of wool - Bio Scouring. Bleaching -Objective of Bleaching: Bleaching
mechanism of Hydrogen Peroxide, Hypo chlorites. Objective of Mercerizing - Physical and
Chemical changes of Mercerizing.
UNIT III DYEING 9
Dye - Affinity, Substantively, Reactivity, Exhaustion and Fixation. Classification of dyes. Direct
dyes: General properties, principles and method of application on cellulosic materials. Reactive
dyes – principles and method of application on cellulosic materials hot brand, cold brand.

301
UNIT IV PRINTING 9
Definition of printing – Difference between printing and dying- Classification thickeners –
Requirements to be good thickener, printing paste Preparation - different styles of printing.
UNIT V MACHINERIES 9
Fabric Processing - winch, jigger and soft flow machines. Beam dyeing machines: Printing -flat bed
screen - Rotary screen. Thermo transfer printing machinery. Garment dyeing machines.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand the
CO1: Basics of grey fabric
CO2: Basics of pre treatment
CO3: Concept of Dyeing
CO4: Concept of Printing
CO5: Machinery in processing industry
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Trotman, E.R., Textile Scouring and Bleaching, Charless Griffins, Com. Ltd., London 1990.
2. Shenai V.A. “Technology of Textile Processing Vol. IV” 1998, Sevak Publications, Mumbai.
REFERENCES:
1. Trotman E. R., “Dyeing and Chemical Technology of Textile Fibres”, Charles Griffin & Co.
Ltd., U.K., 1984, ISBN : 0 85264 165 6.
2. Dr. N N Mahapatra., “Textile dyeing”, Wood head publishing India, 2018
3. Mathews Kolanjikombil., ”Dyeing of Textile substrates III –Fibres, Yarns and Knitted fabrics”,
Wood head publishing India , 2021
4. Bleaching & Mercerizing – BTRA Silver Jubilee Monograph series
5. Chakraborty, J.N, "Fundamentals and Practices in colouration of Textiles", Wood head
Publishing India, 2009, ISBN-13:978-81-908001-4-3.

Course Articulation Matrix:

Course Program Outcome
Outco Statemen PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
mes t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
Classifica - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
tion of
fibres
and
CO1
productio
n of
natural
fibres
Regener - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ated and
CO2
synthetic
fibres
Yarn - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
CO3
spinning
CO4 Weaving - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
Knitting - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
and
CO5
nonwove
n
Overa - - - - - - - 2 1 - 1 1 - 1 -
ll CO

302
 1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and
Substantial (High) respectively

FT3201 FIBRE SCIENCE LTPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To enable the students to learn about the types of fibre and its properties
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO TEXTILE FIBRES 9
Definition of various forms of textile fibres - staple fibre, filament, bicomponent fibres. Classification
of Natural and Man-made fibres, essential and desirable properties of Fibres. Production and
cultivation of Natural Fibers: Cotton, Silk, Wool -Physical and chemical structure of the above
fibres.

UNIT II REGENERATED FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Regenerated Cellulosic fibres: Viscose Rayon, Acetate rayon – High wet
modulus fibres: Modal and Lyocel ,Tencel

UNIT III SYNTHEITC FIBRES 9

Production Sequence of Synthetic Fibers: polymer-Polyester, Nylon, Acrylic and polypropylene.
Mineral fibres: fibre glass ,carbon .Introduction to spin finishes and texturization
UNIT IV SPECIALITY FIBRES 9
Properties and end uses of high tenacity and high modulus fibres, high temperature and flame
retardant fibres, Chemical resistant fibres

UNIT V FUNCTIONAL SPECIALITY FIBRES 9

Properties and end uses : Fibres for medical application – Biodegradable fibres based on PLA
,Super absorbent fibres elastomeric fibres, ultra-fine fibres, electrospun nano fibres, metallic fibres
– Gold and Silver coated.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the student would be able to
 Understand the process sequence of various fibres
 Understand the properties of various fibres

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Morton W. E., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Properties of Textile Fibres”, The Textile
Institute, Washington D.C., 2008, ISBN 978-1-84569-220-95
2. Meredith R., and Hearle J. W. S., “Physical Methods of Investigation of Textiles”, Wiley
Publication, New York, 1989, ISBN: B00JCV6ZWU | ISBN-13:
3. Mukhopadhyay S. K., “Advances in Fibre Science”, The Textile Institute,1992, ISBN:
1870812379

REFERENCES:
1. Meredith R., “Mechanical Properties of Textile Fibres”, North Holland, Amsterdam, 1986,
ISBN: 1114790699, ISBN-13: 9781114790698
2. Hearle J. W. S., Lomas B., and Cooke W. D., “Atlas of Fibre Fracture and Damage to
Textiles”, The Textile Institute, 2nd Edition, 1998, ISBN: 1855733196.
3. Raheel M. (ed.)., “Modern Textile Characterization Methods”, Marcel Dekker, 1995,
ISBN:0824794737
4. Mukhopadhyay. S. K., “The Structure and Properties of Typical Melt Spun Fibres”, Textile

303
 Progress, Vol. 18, No. 4, Textile Institute, 1989, ISBN: 1870812115
5. Hearle J.W.S., “Polymers and Their Properties: Fundamentals of Structures and
Mechanics Vol 1”, Ellis Horwood, England, 1982, ISBN: 047027302X ISBN-13:
9780470273029 36

OTT355 GARMENT MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LTPC

30 03
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to understand the basics of pattern making, cutting and sewing.
 To expose the students to various problems & remedies during garment manufacturing

UNIT I PATTERN MAKING, MARKER PLANNING, CUTTING 9

Anthropometry, specification sheet, pattern making – principles, basic pattern set drafting, grading,
marker planning, spreading & cutting

UNIT II TYPES OF SEAMS, STITCHES AND FUNCTIONS OF NEEDLES 9

Different types of seams and stitches; single needle lock stitch machine – mechanism and
accessories; needle – functions, special needles, needlepoint

UNIT III COMPONENTS AND TRIMS USED IN GARMENT 9

Sewing thread-construction, material, thread size, packages, accessories – labels, linings,
interlinings, wadding, lace, braid, elastic, hook and loop fastening, shoulder pads, eyelets and
laces, zip fasteners, buttons

UNIT IV GARMENT INSPECTION AND DIMENSIONAL CHANGES 9

Raw material, in process and final inspection; needle cutting; sewability of fabrics; strength
properties of apparel; dimensional changes in apparel due to laundering, dry-cleaning, steaming
and pressing.

UNIT V GARMENT PRESSING, PACKING AND CARE LABELING 9

Garment pressing – categories and equipment, packing; care 304abelling of apparels
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to Understand
CO1: Pattern making, marker planning, cutting
CO2: Types of seams, stitches and functions of needles
CO3: Components and trims used in garment
CO4: Garment inspection and dimensional changes
CO5: Garment pressing, packing and careabelling

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Carr H., and Latham B., “The Technology of Clothing Manufacture”, Blackwell Science Ltd.,
Oxford, 1994.
2. Gerry Cooklin, “Introduction to Clothing Manufacture” Blackwell Science Ltd., 1995. 64
3. Harrison.P.W Garment Dyeing, The Textile Institute Publication, Textile Progress, Vol .19
No.2,1988.

REFERENCES:
1. Winifred Aldrich., “Metric Pattern Cutting”, Blackwell Science Ltd., Oxford, 1994
2. Peggal H., “The Complete Dress Maker”, Marshall Caverdish, London, 1985
3. Jai Prakash and Gaur R.K., “Sewing Thread”, NITRA, 1994
4. Ruth Glock, Grace I. Kunz, “Apparel Manufacturing”, Dorling Kindersley Publishing Inc., New
Jersey, 1995.

304
 5. Pradip V.Mehta, “An Introduction to Quality Control for the Apparel Industry”, J.S.N.
Internationals, 1992.

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 - 2 - 1 1 - 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
2 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
4 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3
5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
Avg 1.6 1.2 1 0.8 1.4 0.8 1.4 1 0.2 1.8 2.4 1 1.8 2.6 1 2.6

OCH353 ENERGY TECHNOLOGY LTPC

30 0 3
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Units of energy, conversion factors, general classification of energy, world energy resources and
energy consumption, Indian energy resources and energy consumption, energy crisis, energy
alternatives, Renewable and non-renewable energy sources and their availability. Prospects of
Renewable energy sources

UNIT II CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 8

Conventional energy resources, Thermal, hydel and nuclear reactors, thermal, hydel and nuclear
power plants, efficiency, merits and demerits of the above power plants, combustion processes,
fluidized bed combustion.

UNIT III NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY 10

Solar energy, solar thermal systems, flat plate collectors, focusing collectors, solar water heating,
solar cooling, solar distillation, solar refrigeration, solar dryers, solar pond, solar thermal power
generation, solar energy application in India, energy plantations. Wind energy, types of windmills,
types of wind rotors, Darrieus rotor and Gravian rotor, wind electric power generation, wind power
in India, economics of wind farm, ocean wave energy conversion, ocean thermal energy
conversion, tidal energy conversion, geothermal energy.

UNIT IV BIOMASS ENERGY 10

Biomass energy resources, thermo-chemical and biochemical methods of biomass conversion,
combustion, gasification, pyrolysis, biogas production, ethanol, fuel cells, alkaline fuel cell,
phosphoric acid fuel cell, molten carbonate fuel cell, solid oxide fuel cell, solid polymer electrolyte
fuel cell, magneto hydrodynamic power generation, energy storage routes like thermal energy
storage, chemical, mechanical storage and electrical storage.

UNIT V ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation in chemical process plants, energy audit, energy saving in heat exchangers,
distillation columns, dryers, ovens and furnaces and boilers, steam economy in chemical plants,
energy conservation.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
On completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Students will be able to describe the fundamentals and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources and their differences compared to fossil fuels.
CO2: Students will excel as professionals in the various fields of energy engineering

305
 CO3: Compare different renewable energy technologies and choose the most appropriate based
on local conditions.
CO4: Explain the technological basis for harnessing renewable energy sources.
CO5: Identify and critically evaluate current developments and emerging trends within the
field of renewable energy technologies and to develop in-depth technical
understanding of energy problems at an advanced level.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rao, S. and Parulekar, B.B., Energy Technology, Khanna Publishers, 2005.
2. Rai, G.D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1984.
3. Bansal, N.K., Kleeman, M. and Meliss, M., Renewable Energy Sources and Conversion
Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.
4. Nagpal, G.R., Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2008.

REFERENCES
1. Nejat Vezirog, Alternate Energy Sources, IT, McGraw Hill, New York.
2. El. Wakil, Power Plant Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, New York, 2002.
3. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Enery - Thermal Collection and Storage, Tata McGraw hill, New Delhi,
1981.
Course articulation matrix

Cour Program Outcomes

se Statements PO PO PO PO P PO P PO P P PO P PS PS PS
Outc 1 2 3 4 O5 6 O 8 O O 11 O O1 O2 O3
7 9 10 12
ome
s
CO1 Students will be able to 2 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 1 1 3
describe the fundamentals
and main characteristics of
renewable energy sources
and their differences
compared to fossil fuels.
CO2 Students will excel as 2 3 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
professionals in the various
fields of energy engineering
CO3 Compare different 2 2 2 3 3 1 1 - 1 1 - 3 2 1 3
renewable energy
technologies and choose
the most appropriate based
on local conditions.
CO4 Explain the technological 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 1 1 3
basis for harnessing
renewable energy sources.
CO5 Identify and critically 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 3 2 1 3
evaluate current
developments and emerging
trends within the field of
renewable energy
technologies and to develop
in-depth technical
understanding of energy
problems at an advanced
level
OVERALL CO 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 3

1, 2 and 3 are correlation levels with weightings as Slight (Low), Moderate (Medium) and Substantial (High) respectively

306
OCH354 SURFACE SCIENCE LT P C
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVE:
 To enable the students to analyze properties of a surfaces and correlate them to structure,
chemistry, and physics and surface modification technique.

UNIT I SURFACE STRUCTURE AND EXPERIMENTAL PROBES 9

Relevance of surface science to Chemical and Electrochemical Engineering, Heterogeneous
Catalysis and Nanoscience; Surface structure and reconstructions, absorbate structure, Band and
Vibrational structure, Importance of UHV techniques, Electronic probes and molecular beams,
Scanning probes and diffraction, Qualitative introduction to electronic and vibrational spectroscopy

UNIT II ADSORPTION, DYNAMICS, THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS AT

SURFACES 9
Interactions at the surface, Physisorption, Chemisorption, Diffusion, dynamics and reactions of
atoms/molecules on surfaces, Generic reaction mechanism on surfaces, Adsorption isotherms,
Kinetics of adsorption, Use of temperature desorption methods
UNIT III LIQUID INTERFACES 9
Structure and Thermodynamics of liquid-solid interface, Self-assembled monolayers, Electrified
interfaces, Charge transfer at the liquid-solid interfaces, Photoelectrochemical processes, Gratzel
cells

UNIT IV HETEROGENEOUS CATALYSIS 9

Characterization of heterogeneous catalytic processes, Microscopic kinetics to catalysis, Overview
of important heterogeneous catalytic processes: Haber-Bosch, Fishcher-Tropsch and Automotive
catalysis, Role of promoters and poisons, Bimetallic surfaces, surface functionalization and
clusters in catalysis, Role of Sabatier principle in catalyst design, Rate oscillations and
spatiotemporal pattern formation

UNIT V EPITAXIAL GROWTH AND NANO SURFACE-STRUCTURES 9

Origin of surface forces, Role of stress and strain in epitaxial growth, Energetic and growth modes,
Nucleation theory, Nonequilibrium growth modes, MBE, CVD and ablation techniques, Catalytic
growth of nanotubes, Etching of surfaces, Formation of nanopillars and nanorods and its
application in photoelectrochemical processes, Polymer surfaces and biointerfaces.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 Upon completion of this course, the students can understand, predict and design surface
properties based on surface structure. Students would understand the physics and
chemistry behind surface phenomena

TEXT BOOK:
1. K. W. Kolasinski, “Surface Science: Foundations of catalysis and nanoscience” II Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 2008.

REFERENCE:
1. Gabor A. Somorjai and Yimin Li “Introduction to Surface Chemistry and catalysis”, II Edition
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2010.

307
OPT352 PLASTIC MATERIALS FOR ENGINEERS LTPC
3003

COURSE OBJECTIVES
 Understand the advantages, disadvantages and general classification of plastic materials
 To know the manufacturing, sources, and applications of engineering thermoplastics
 Understand the basics as well as the advanced applications of various plastic materials in
the industry
 To understand the preparation methods of thermosetting materials
 Select suitable specialty plastics for different end applications

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTIC MATERIALS 9

Introduction to Plastics – Brief history of plastics, advantages and disadvantages, thermoplastic
and thermosetting behavior, amorphous polymers, crystalline polymers and cross-linked
structures. General purpose thermoplastics/ Commodity plastics: manufacture, structure,
properties and applications of polyethylene (PE), cross-linked PE, chlorinated PE, polypropylene,
polyvinyl chloride-compounding, formulation, polypropylene (PP)

UNIT II ENGINEERING THERMOPLASTICS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Engineering thermoplastics – Aliphatic polyamides: structure, properties, manufacture and
applications of Nylon 6, Nylon 66. Polyesters: manufacture, structure, properties and uses of PET,
PBT. Manufacture, structure, properties and uses of Polycarbonates, acetal resins, polyimides,
PMMA, polyphenylene oxide, thermoplastic polyurethane (PU)

UNIT III THERMOSETTING PLASTICS 9

Thermosetting Plastics – Manufacture, curing, moulding powder, laminates, properties and uses of
phenol formaldehyde resins, urea formaldehyde, melamine formaldehyde, unsaturated polyester
resin, epoxy resin, silicone resins, polyurethane resins.

UNIT IV MISCELLANEOUS PLASTICS FOR END APPLICATIONS 9

Miscellaneous plastics- Manufacture, properties and uses of polystyrene, HIPS, ABS, SAN,
poly(tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE), TFE and copolymers, PVDF, PVA, poly (vinyl acetate), poly
(vinyl carbazole), cellulose acetate, PEEK, High energy absorbing polymers, super absorbent
polymers- their synthesis, properties and applications

UNIT V PLASTICS MATERIALS FOR BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9

Sources, raw materials, methods of manufacturing, properties and applications of bio-based
polymers- poly lactic acid (PLA), poly hydroxy alkanoates (PHA), PBAT, bioplastics- bio-PE, bio-
PP, bio-PET, polymers for biomedical applications
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

COURSE OUTCOMES
 To study the importance, advantages and classification of plastic materials
 Summarize the raw materials, sources, production, properties and applications of various
engineering thermoplastics
 To understand the application of polyamides, polyesters and other engineering
thermoplastics, thermosetting resins
 Know the manufacture, properties and uses of thermosetting resins based on polyester,
epoxy, silicone and PU
 To understand the engineering applications of various polymers in miscellaneous areas
and applications of different biopolymers

308
REFERENCES
1. Marianne Gilbert (Ed.), Brydson’s Plastics Materials, 8th Edn., Elsevier (2017).
2. J.A.Brydson, Plastics Materials, 7th Edn., Butterworth Heinemann (1999).
3. Manas Chanda, Salil K. Roy, Plastics Technology Handbook, 4th Edn., CRC press (2006).
4. A. Brent Strong, Plastics: Materials and Processing, 3rd Edn., Pearson Prentice Hall (2006).
5. Olagoke Olabisi, Kolapo Adewale (Eds.), Handbook of Thermoplastics 2nd
Edn., CRC press (2016).
6. Charles A. Harper, Modern Plastics Handbook, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1999.
7. H. Dominighaus, Plastics for Engineers, Hanser Publishers, Munich, 1988.

OPT353 PROPERTIES AND TESTING OF PLASTICS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To understand the relevance of standards and specifications as well as the specimen
preparation for polymer testing.
 To study the mechanical properties and testing of polymer materials and their structural
property relationships.
 To understand the thermal properties of polymers and their testing methods.
 To gain knowledge on the electrical and optical properties of polymers and their testing
methods.
 To study about the environmental effects and prevent polymer degradation.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CHARACTERIZATION AND TESTING OF POLYMERS 9

Introduction- Standard organizations: BIS, ASTM, ISO, BS, DIN etc. Standards and specifications.
Importance of standards in the quality control of polymers and polymer products. Preparation of
test pieces, conditioning and test atmospheres. Tests on elastomers: processability parameters of
rubbers – plasticity, Mooney viscosity, scorch time, cure time, cure rate index, Processability tests
carried out on thermoplastics and thermosets: MFI, cup flow index, gel time, bulk density, bulk
factor.

UNIT II MECHANICAL PROPERTIES 9

Mechanical properties: Tensile, compression, flexural, shear, tear strength, hardness, impact
strength, resilience, abrasion resistance, creep and stress relaxation, compression set, dynamic
fatigue, ageing properties, Basic concepts of stress and strain, short term tests: Viscoelastic
behavior (simple models: Kelvin model for creep and stress relaxation, Maxwell-Voigt model,
strain recovery and dynamic response), Effect of structure and composition on mechanical
properties, Behavior of reinforced polymers

UNIT III THERMAL RHEOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 9

Thermal properties: Transition temperatures, specific heat, thermal conductivity, co-efficient of
thermal expansion, heat deflection temperature, Vicat softening point, shrinkage, brittleness
temperature, thermal stability and flammability. Product testing: Plastic films, sheeting, pipes,
laminates, foams, containers, cables and tubes.

UNIT IV ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL PROPERTIES 9

Electrical properties: volume and surface resistivity, dielectric strength, dielectric constant and
power factor, arc resistance, tracking resistance, dielectric behavior of polymers (dielectric co-
efficient, dielectric polarization), dissipation factor and its importance. Optical properties:
transparency, refractive index, haze, gloss, clarity, birefringence.

309
UNIT V ENVIRONMENTAL AND CHEMICAL RESISTANCE 9
Environmental stress crack resistance (ESCR), water absorption, weathering, aging, ozone
resistance, permeability and adhesion. Tests for chemical resistance. Acids, alkalies, Flammability
tests- oxygen index test.
TOTAL HOURS: 45
COURSE OUTCOMES
 Understand the relevance of standards and specifications.
 Summarize the various test methods for evaluating the mechanical properties of the
polymers.
 To know the thermal, electrical & optical properties of polymers.
 Identify various techniques used for characterizing polymers.
 Distinguish the processability tests used for thermoplastics, thermosets and
elastomers.

REFERENCES
1. F.Majewska, H.Zowall, Handbook of analysis of synthetic polymers and plastics, Ellis
Horwood Limited Publisher 1977.
2. J.F.Rabek, Experimental Methods in Polymer Chemistry, John Wiley and Sons 1980.
3. R.P.Brown, Plastic test methods, 2nd Edn., Harlond, Longman Scientific, 1981.
4. A. B. Mathur, I. S. Bharadwaj, Testing and Evaluation of Plastcis, Allied Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
5. Vishu Shah, Handbook of Plastic Testing Technology, 3rd Edn., John Wiley & Sons 2007.
6. S. K. Nayak, S. N. Yadav, S. Mohanty, Fundamentals of Plastic Testing, Springer, 2010.
OEC353 VLSI DESIGN LTPC
30 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
● Understand the fundamentals of IC technology components and their characteristics.
● Understand combinational logic circuits and design principles.
● Understand sequential logic circuits and clocking strategies.
● Understand Interconnects and Memory Architecture.
● Understand the design of arithmetic building blocks

UNIT I MOS TRANSISTOR PRINCIPLES 9

MOS logic families (NMOS and CMOS), Ideal and Non Ideal IV Characteristics, CMOS devices.
MOS(FET) Transistor DC transfer Characteristics ,small signal analysis of MOSFET.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Propagation Delays, stick diagram, Layout diagrams, Examples of combinational logic design,
Elmore’s constant, Static Logic Gates, Dynamic Logic Gates, Pass Transistor Logic, Power
Dissipation.

UNIT III SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS AND CLOCKING STRATEGIES 9

Static Latches and Registers, Dynamic Latches and Registers, Pipelines, Timing classification of
Digital Systems, Synchronous Design, Self-Timed Circuit Design .

UNIT IV INTERCONNECT, MEMORY ARCHITECTURE 9

Interconnect Parameters – Capacitance, Resistance, and Inductance, Logic Implementation using
Programmable Devices (ROM, PLA, FPGA), Memory Architecture and Building Blocks.

UNIT V DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS 9

Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders-Ripple Carry Adder, Carry-Bypass Adder, Carry
Select Adder, Carry-Look Ahead Adder, Multipliers, Barrel Shifter, power and speed tradeoffs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
310
Upon successful completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Understand the working principle and characteristics of MOSFET
CO2: Design Combinational Logic Circuits
CO3: Design Sequential Logic Circuits and Clocking systems
CO4: Understand Memory architecture and interconnects
CO5: Design of arithmetic building blocks.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Jan D Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
PHI, 2016.(Units II, III IV and V).
2. Neil H E Weste, Kamran Eshranghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: A System
Perspective,” Addison Wesley, 2009.( Units - I).

REFERENCES
1. D.A. Hodges and H.G. Jackson, Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits,
International Student Edition, McGraw Hill 1983
2. P. Rashinkar, Paterson and L. Singh, "System-on-a-Chip Verification-Methodology and
Techniques", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001
3. Samiha Mourad and Yervant Zorian, “Principles of Testing Electronic Systems”, Wiley 2000
4. M. Bushnell and V. D. Agarwal, "Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and
Mixed-Signal VLSI Circuits", Kluwer Academic Publishers,2000

C PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O
1 1
3 2
3 3
2 4
2 5
1 6
3 7- 8- 9- 0- 1
2 2
3 1
3 2
3 3
3
2 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - 2 3 3 3
3 3 - 3 2 1 2 - - - - 3 2 3 2 3
4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 3 2
5 2 - 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2 2
C 3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 3 3 3
O

CBM370 WEARABLE DEVICES LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
 To know the hardware requirement of wearable systems
 To understand the communication and security aspects in the wearable devices
 To know the applications of wearable devices in the field of medicine

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO WEARABLE SYSTEMS AND SENSORS 9

Wearable Systems- Introduction, Need for Wearable Systems, Drawbacks of Conventional
Systems for Wearable Monitoring, Applications of Wearable Systems, Types of Wearable
Systems, Components of wearable Systems. Sensors for wearable systems-Inertia movement
sensors, Respiration activity sensor, Impedance plethysmography, Wearable ground reaction
force sensor.

UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING AND ENERGY HARVESTING FOR WEARABLE

DEVICES 9
Wearability issues -physical shape and placement of sensor, Technical challenges - sensor
design, signal acquisition, sampling frequency for reduced energy consumption, Rejection of
irrelevant information. Power Requirements- Solar cell, Vibration based, Thermal based, Human

311
body as a heat source for power generation, Hybrid thermoelectric photovoltaic energy harvests,
Thermopiles.

UNIT III WIRELESS HEALTH SYSTEMS 9

Need for wireless monitoring, Definition of Body area network, BAN and Healthcare, Technical
Challenges- System security and reliability, BAN Architecture – Introduction, Wireless
communication Techniques.

UNIT IV SMART TEXTILE 9

Introduction to smart textile- Passive smart textile, active smart textile. Fabrication Techniques-
Conductive Fibres, Treated Conductive Fibres, Conductive Fabrics, Conductive Inks.Case study-
smart fabric for monitoring biological parameters - ECG, respiration.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF WEARABLE SYSTEMS 9

Medical Diagnostics, Medical Monitoring-Patients with chronic disease, Hospital patients, Elderly
patients, neural recording, Gait analysis, Sports Medicine.
TOTAL PERIODS:45
OUTCOMES:
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
CO1: Describe the concepts of wearable system.
CO2: Explain the energy harvestings in wearable device.
CO3: Use the concepts of BAN in health care.
CO4: Illustrate the concept of smart textile
CO5: Compare the various wearable devices in healthcare system

TEXT BOOKS
1. Annalisa Bonfiglo and Danilo De Rossi, Wearable Monitoring Systems, Springer, 2011
2. Zhang and Yuan-Ting, Wearable Medical Sensors and Systems,Springer, 2013
3. Edward Sazonov and Micheal R Neuman, Wearable Sensors: Fundamentals,
Implementation and Applications, Elsevier, 2014
4. Mehmet R. Yuce and JamilY.Khan, Wireless Body Area Networks Technology,
Implementation applications,Pan Stanford Publishing Pte.Ltd, Singapore, 2012

REFERENCES
1. Sandeep K.S, Gupta, Tridib Mukherjee and Krishna Kumar Venkatasubramanian, Body
Area Networks Safety, Security, and Sustainability, Cambridge University Press, 2013.
2. Guang-Zhong Yang, Body Sensor Networks, Springer, 2006.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1

312
CBM356 MEDICAL INFORMATICS LTPC
30 03
Preamble:
 To study the applications of information technology in health care management.
 This course provides knowledge on resources, devices, and methods required to optimize
the acquisition, storage, retrieval, and use of information in health and biomedicine.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Introduction - Structure of Medical Informatics –Internet and Medicine -Security issues ,
Computer based medical information retrieval, Hospital management and information system,
Functional capabilities of a computerized HIS, Health Informatics – Medical Informatics,
Bioinformatics

UNIT II COMPUTERS IN CLINICAL LABORATORY AND MEDICAL IMAGING 9

Automated clinical laboratories-Automated methods in hematology, cytology and histology,
Intelligent Laboratory Information System - Computer assisted medical imaging- nuclear
medicine, ultrasound imaging, computed X-ray tomography, Radiation therapy and
planning, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance.

UNIT III COMPUTERISED PATIENT RECORD 9

Introduction - conventional patient record, Components and functionality of CPR, Development
tools, Intranet, CPR in Radiology- Application server provider, Clinical information system,
Computerized prescriptions for patients.

UNIT IV COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DECISION-MAKING 9

Neuro computers and Artificial Neural Networks application, Expert system-General model of
CMD, Computer–assisted decision support system-production rule system cognitive model,
semantic networks, decisions analysis inclinical medicine-computers in the care of critically ill
patients, Computer aids for the handicapped.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Virtual reality applications in medicine, Virtual endoscopy, Computer assisted surgery, Surgical
simulation, Telemedicine - Tele surgery, Computer assisted patient education and health- Medical
education and healthcare information, computer assisted instruction in medicine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
1. Explain the structure and functional capabilities of Hospital Information System.
2. Describe the need of computers in medical imaging and automated clinical laboratory.
3. Articulate the functioning of information storage and retrieval in computerized patient record
system.
4. Apply the suitable decision support system for automated clinical diagnosis.
5. Discuss the application of virtual reality and telehealth technology in medical industry.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd, 2003.
2. R.D.Lele, “Computers in medicine progress in medical informatics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill,2005

REFERENCES:
1. Kathryn J. Hannah, Marion J Ball, “Health Informatics”, 3rd Edition, Springer, 2006.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

CO’s PO’s PSO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1

313
 2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
4 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
5 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
AVg. 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1

OBT355 BIOTECHNOLOGY FOR WASTE MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
UNIT I BIOLOGICAL TREATMENT PROCESS 9
Fundamentals of biological process - Anaerobic process – Pretreatment methods in anaerobic
process – Aerobic process, Anoxic process, Aerobic and anaerobic digestion of organic wastes -
Factors affecting process efficiency - Solid state fermentation – Submerged fermentation – Batch
and continous fermentation

UNIT II WASTE BIOMASS AND ITS VALUE ADDITION 9

Types of waste biomass – Solid waste management - Nature of biomass feedstock – Biobased
economy/process – Value addition of waste biomass – Biotransformation of biomass –
Biotransformation of marine processing wastes – Direct extraction of biochemicals from biomass –
Plant biomass for industrial application

UNIT III BIOCONVERSION OF WASTES TO ENERGY 9

Perspective of biofuels from wastes - Bioethanol production – Biohydrogen Production – dark and
photofermentative process - Biobutanol production – Biogas and Biomethane production - Single
stage anaerobic digestion, Two stage anaerobic digestion - Biodiesel production - Enzymatic
hydrolysis technologies

UNIT IV CHEMICALS AND ENZYME PRODUCTION FROM WASTES 9

Production of lactic acid, succinic acid, citric acid – Biopolymer synthesis – Production of
Amylases - Lignocellulolytic enzymes - Pectinolytic enzymes - Proteases – Lipases

UNIT V BIOCOMPOSTING OF ORGANIC WASTES 9

Overview of composting process - Benefitis of composting, Role of microorganisms in composting
- Factors affecting the composting process - Waste Materials for Composting, Fundamentals of
composting process - Composting technologies, Composting systems – Nonreactor Composting,
Reactor composting - Compost Quality
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students should be able
1. To learn the various methods biological treatment
2. To know the details of waste biomass and its value addition
3. To develop the bioconversion processes to convert wastes to energy
4. To synthesize the chemicals and enzyme from wastes
5. To produce the biocompost from wastes
6. To apply the theoretical knowledge for the development of value added products

TEXT BOOKS
1. Antoine P. T., (2017) “Biofuels from Food Waste Applications of Saccharification Using Fungal
Solid State Fermentation”, CRC press
2. Joseph C A., (2019)“Anaerobic Waste-Wastewater Treatment and Biogas Plants-A Practical
Handbook”, CRC Press,

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Palmiro P. and Oscar F.D’Urso, (2016) ‘Biotransformation of Agricultural
Waste and By-Products’,The Food, Feed, Fibre, Fuel (4F) Economy, Elsevier
314
2. Kaur Brar S., Gurpreet Singh D. and Carlos R.S., (Eds), (2014)‘Biotransformation of Waste
Biomass into High Value Biochemicals’, Springer.
3. Keikhosro K, Editor, (2015) ‘Lignocellulose-Based Bioproducts’, Springer.
4. John P, (2014) ‘Waste Management Practices-Municipal, Hazardous, and Industrial’, Second
Edition, CRC Press, 2014

OBT356 LIFESTYLE DISEASES LTPC

3 003
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Lifestyle diseases – Definition ; Risk factors – Eating, smoking, drinking, stress, physical activity,
illicit drug use ; Obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, respiratory diseases, cancer;
Prevention – Diet and exercise.

UNIT II CANCER 9
Types - Lung cancer, Mouth cancer, Skin cancer, Cervical cancer, Carcinoma oesophagus;
Causes Tobacco usage, Diagnosis – Biomarkers, Treatment

UNIT III CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES 9

Coronoary atherosclerosis – Coronary artery disease; Causes -Fat and lipids, Alcohol abuse -–
Diagnosis - Electrocardiograph, echocardiograph, Treatment, Exercise and Cardiac rehabilitation

UNIT IV DIABETES AND OBESITY 9

Types of Diabetes mellitus; Blood glucose regulation; Complications of diabetes – Paediatric and
adolescent obesity – Weight control and BMI

UNIT V RESPIRATORY DISEASES 9

Chronic lung disease, Asthma, COPD; Causes - Breathing pattern (Nasal vs mouth), Smoking –
Diagnosis - Pulmonary function testing
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.Kumar&Meenal Kumar, “Guide to Prevention of Lifestyle Diseases”, Deep & Deep
Publications, 2003
2. Gary Eggar et al, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2017

REFERENCES:
1. James M.R, “Lifestyle Medicine”, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2013
2. Akira Miyazaki et al, “New Frontiers in Lifestyle-Related Disease”, Springer, 2008

OBT357 BIOTECHNOLOGY IN HEALTH CARE LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to
 Create higher standard of knowledge on healthcare system and services
 Prioritize advanced technologies for the diagnosis and treatment of various diseases

UNIT I PUBLIC HEALTH 9

Definition and Concept of Public Health, Historical aspects of Public Health, Changing Concepts of
Public Health, Public Health versus Medical Care, Unique Features of Public Health, Determinants

315
of Health (Social, Economic, Cultural, Environmental, Education, Genetics, Food and Nutrition).
Indicators of health, Burden of disease, Role of different disciplines in Public Health.

UNIT II CLINICAL DISEASES 9

Communicable diseases: Chickenpox / Shingles, COVID-19, Tuberculosis, Hepatitis B, Hepatitis
C, HIV / AIDS, Influenza, Swine flu. Non Communicable diseases: Diabetes mellitus,
atherosclerosis, fatty liver, Obesity, Cancer

UNIT III VACCINOLOGY 9

History of Vaccinology, conventional approaches to vaccine development, live attenuated and
killed vaccines, adjuvants, quality control, preservation and monitoring of microorganisms in seed
lot systems. Instruments related to monitoring of temperature, sterilization, environment.

UNIT IV OUTPATIENT & IN PATIENT SERVICES 9

Radiotherapy, Nuclear medicine, surgical units, OT Medical units, G & Obs. units Pediatric,
neonatal units, Critical care units, Physical medicine & Rehabilitation, Neurology,
Gastroenterology, Endoscopy, Pulmonology, Cardiology.

UNIT V BASICS OF IMAGING MODALITIES 9

Diagnostic X-rays - Computer tomography – MRI – Ultrasonography – Endoscopy –
Thermography – Different types of biotelemetry systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. Joseph J.carr and John M. Brown, Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology, John
Wiley and sons, New York, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Thomas M. Devlin.Textbook of Biochemistry with clinical correlations. Wiley Liss
Publishers
3. The Vaccine Book (2nd Ed.), Rafi Ahmed, Roy M. Anderson et. al.Editor(s): Barry R.
Bloom, PaulHenri Lambert, Academic Press, 2016, Pages xxi-xxiv.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Suh, Sang, Gurupur, Varadraj P., Tanik, Murat M., Health Care Systems, Technology and
Techniques, Springer, 1st Edition, 2011
2. Burtis & Ashwood W.B. Tietz Textbook of Clinical chemistry. Saunders Company
3. Levine, M. M. (2004). New Generation Vaccines. New York: M. Dekker

VERTICAL 1: FINTECH AND BLOCK CHAIN

CMG331 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3003
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1.To acquire the knowledge of the decision areas in finance.
2. To learn the various sources of Finance
3. To describe about capital budgeting and cost of capital.
4. To discuss on how to construct a robust capital structure and dividend policy
5. To develop an understanding of tools on Working Capital Management.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANGEMENT 9

Definition and Scope of Finance Functions - Objectives of Financial Management - Profit
Maximization and Wealth Maximization- Time Value of money- Risk and return concepts.

UNIT II SOURCES OF FINANCE 9

Long term sources of Finance -Equity Shares – Debentures - Preferred Stock – Features – Merits
and Demerits. Short term sources - Bank Sources, Trade Credit, Overdrafts, Commercial Papers,
Certificate of Deposits, Money market mutual funds etc
316
UNIT III INVESTMENT DECISIONS: 9
Investment Decisions: capital budgeting – Need and Importance – Techniques of Capital
Budgeting -– Payback -ARR – NPV – IRR –Profitability Index.
Cost of Capital - Cost of Specific Sources of Capital - Equity -Preferred Stock- Debt - Reserves -
Concept and measurement of cost of capital - Weighted Average Cost of Capital.

UNIT IV FINANCING AND DIVIDEND DECISION 9

Operating Leverage and Financial Leverage- EBIT-EPS analysis. Capital Structure – determinants
of Capital structure- Designing an Optimum capital structure .
Dividend policy - Aspects of dividend policy - practical consideration - forms of dividend policy - -
Determinants of Dividend Policy

UNIT V WORKING CAPITAL DECISION 9

Working Capital Management: Working Capital Management - concepts - importance -
Determinants of Working capital. Cash Management: Motives for holding cash – Objectives and
Strategies of Cash Management. Receivables Management: Objectives - Credit policies.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS
1. M.Y. Khan and P.K.Jain Financial management, Text, Tata McGraw Hill
2. M. Pandey Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd

REFERENCES .
1. James C. Vanhorne –Fundamentals of Financial Management– PHI Learning,.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management,
3. Srivatsava, Mishra, Financial Management, Oxford University Press, 2011

CMG332 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENT LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
1. Describe the investment environment in which investment decisions are taken.
2. Explain how to Value bonds and equities
3. Explain the various approaches to value securities
4. Describe how to create efficient portfolios through diversification
5. Discuss the mechanism of investor protection in India.

UNIT I THE INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT

The investment decision process, Types of Investments – Commodities, Real Estate and
FinancialAssets, the Indian securities market, the market participants and trading of securities,
securitymarket indices, sources of financial information, Concept of return and risk, Impact of
Taxes andInflationonreturn.

UNIT II FIXED INCOME SECURITIES

Bond features, types of bonds, estimating bond yields, Bond Valuation types of bond risks,
defaultrisk andcreditrating.

UNIT III APPROACHES TOEQUITYANALYSIS

Introduction to Fundamental Analysis, Technical Analysis and Efficient Market Hypothesis,
dividend capitalisation models, and price-earnings multiple approach to equity valuation.

UNIT IV PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES

Portfolio and Diversification, Portfolio Risk and Return; Mutual Funds; Introduction to Financial
Derivatives; Financial Derivatives Markets in India
317
UNIT V INVESTOR PROTECTION
Role of SEBI and stock exchanges in investor protection; Investor grievances and their redressal
system, insider trading, investors’ awareness andactivism
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Charles P. Jones, Gerald R. Jensen. Investments: analysis and management. Wiley, 14TH
Edition, 2019.
2. Chandra, Prasanna. Investment analysis and portfolio management. McGraw-hill education,
5th, Edition, 2017.
3. Rustagi, R. P. Investment Management Theory and Practice. Sultan Chand & Sons, 2021.
4. ZviBodie, Alex Kane, Alan J Marcus, PitabusMohanty, Investments, McGraw Hill Education
(India), 11 Edition(SIE), 2019

CMG333 BANKING, FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSURANCE LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES
 Understand the Banking system in India
 Grasp how banks raise their sources and how they deploy it
 Understand the development in banking technology
 Understand the financial services in India
 Understand the insurance Industry in India

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN BANKING SYSTEM 9

Overview of Banking system – Structure – Functions –Banking system in India - Key Regulations
in Indian Banking sector –RBI. Relationship between Banker and Customer - Retail & Wholesale
Banking – types of Accounts - Opening and operation of Accounts.

UNIT II MANAGING BANK FUNDS/ PRODUCTS 9

Liquid Assets - Investment in securities - Advances - Loans.Negotiable Instruments – Cheques,
Bills of Exchange & Promissory Notes.Designing deposit schemes– Asset and Liability
Management – NPA’s – Current issues on NPA’s – M&A’s of banks into securities market

UNIT III DEVELOPMENT IN BANKING TECHNOLOGY 9

Payment system in India – paper based – e payment –electronic banking –plastic money – e-
money –forecasting of cash demand at ATM’s –The Information Technology Act, 2000 in India –
RBI’s Financial Sector Technology vision document – security threats in e-banking & RBI’s
Initiative.

UNIT IV FINANCIAL SERVICES 9

Introduction – Need for Financial Services – Financial Services Market in India – NBFC –– Leasing
and Hire Purchase –– mutual funds. Venture Capital Financing –Bill discounting –factoring –
Merchant Banking

UNIT V INSURANCE 9
Insurance –Concept - Need - History of Insurance industry in India. Insurance Act, 1938 –IRDA –
Regulations – Life Insurance - Annuities and Unit Linked Policies - Lapse of the Policy – revival –
settlement of claim
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES :
1. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, “Management of Banking and Financial Services, Pearson,
Delhi, 2017.

318
2. Meera Sharma, “Management of Financial Institutions – with emphasis on Bank and Risk
Management”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 2010
3. Peter S. Rose and Sylvia C. and Hudgins, “Bank Management and Financial Services”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017

CMG334 INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN AND ITS APPLICATIONS LT P C

3003
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BLOCKCHAIN 9
Blockchain: The growth of blockchain technology - Distributed systems - The history of blockchain
and Bitcoin - Features of a blockchain - Types of blockchain, Consensus: Consensus mechanism -
Types of consensus mechanisms - Consensus in blockchain. Decentralization: Decentralization
using blockchain - Methods of decentralization - Routes to decentralization- Blockchain and full
ecosystem decentralization - Smart contracts - Decentralized Organizations- Platforms for
decentralization.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO CRYPTOCURRENCY 9

Bitcoin – Digital Keys and Addresses – Transactions – Mining – Bitcoin Networks and Payments –
Wallets – Alternative Coins – Theoretical Limitations – Bitcoin limitations – Name coin – Prime coin
– Zcash – Smart Contracts – Ricardian Contracts- Deploying smart contracts on a blockchain

UNIT III ETHEREUM 9

Introduction - The Ethereum network - Components of the Ethereum ecosystem - Transactions
and messages - Ether cryptocurrency / tokens (ETC and ETH) - The Ethereum Virtual Machine
(EVM), Ethereum Development Environment: Test networks - Setting up a private net - Starting up
the private network

UNIT IV WEB3 AND HYPERLEDGE ` 9

Introduction to Web3 – Contract Deployment – POST Requests – Development Frameworks –
Hyperledger as a Protocol – The Reference Architecture – Hyperledger Fabric – Distributed
Ledger – Corda.

UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS 9

Kadena – Ripple – Rootstock – Quorum – Tendermint – Scalability – Privacy – Other Challenges –
Blockchain Research – Notable Projects – Miscellaneous Tools.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Imran. Bashir. Mastering block chain: Distributed Ledger Technology, Decentralization, and
Smart Contracts Explained. Packt Publishing, 2nd Edition, 2018
2. Peter Borovykh , Blockchain Application in Finance, Blockchain Driven, 2nd Edition, 2018
3. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Blockchain Applications: A Hands On Approach”, VPT,
2017.

CMG335 FINTECH PERSONAL FINANCE AND PAYMENTS LT P C

3003
UNIT I CURRENCY EXCHANGE AND PAYMENT 9
Understand the concept of Crypto currency- Bitcoin and Applications -Cryptocurrencies and Digital
Crypto Wallets -Types of Cryptocurrencies - Cryptocurrencies and Applications, block chain,
Artificial Intelligence, machine learning. Fintech users, Individual Payments, RTGS Systems,

319
Immediate Page 54 of 90 Payment Service (IMPS), Unified Payments Interface (UPI).Legal and
Regulatory Implications of Crypto currencies, Payment systems and their regulations.Digital
Payments Smart Cards, Stored-Value Cards, EC Micropayments, Payment Gateways, Mobile
Payments, Digital and Virtual Currencies, Security, Ethical, Legal, Privacy, and Technology Issues

UNIT II DIGITAL FINANCE AND ALTERNATIVE FINANCE 9

A Brief History of Financial Innovation, Digitization of Financial Services, Crowd funding, Charity
and Equity,. Introduction to the concept of Initial Coin Offering

UNIT III INSURETECH 9

InsurTech Introduction , Business model disruption AI/ML in InsurTech ● IoT and InsurTech ,Risk
Modeling ,Fraud Detection Processing claims and Underwriting Innovations in Insurance Services

UNIT IV PEER TO PEER LENDING 9

P2P and Marketplace Lending, New Models and New Products in market place lending P2P
Infrastructure and technologies , Concept of Crowdfunding Crowdfunding Architecture and
Technology ,P2P and Crowdfunding unicorns and business models , SME/MSME Lending: Unique
opportunities and Challenges, Solutions and Innovations

UNIT V REGULATORY ISSUES 9

FinTech Regulations: Global Regulations and Domestic Regulations, Evolution of RegTech,
RegTech Ecosystem: Financial Institutions, RegTech Ecosystem: StartupsRegTech, Startups:
Challenges, RegTech Ecosystem: Regulators, Use of AI in regulation and Fraud detection
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCE
1. Swanson Seth, Fintech for Beginners: Understanding and Utilizing the power of
technology, Createspace Independent Publishing Platform,2016.
2. Models AuTanda, Fintech Bigtech And Banks Digitalization and Its Impact On Banking
Business, Springer, 2019
3. Henning Diedrich, Ethereum: Blockchains, Digital Assets, Smart Contracts, Decentralized
Autonomous Organizations, Wildfire Publishing, 2016
4. Jacob William, FinTech:TheBeginner’s Guide to Financial Technology, Createspace
Independent Publishing Platform, 2016
5. IIBF, Digital Banking, Taxmann Publication, 2016
6. Jacob William, Financial Technology, Create space Independent Pub, 2016
7. Luke Sutton, Financial Technology: Bitcoin & Blockchain, Createspace Independent Pub,
2016

CMG336 INTRODUCTION TO FINTECH LT P C

3003
OBJECTIVES:
1. To learn about history, importance and evolution of Fintech
2. To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in payment industry
3. To acquire the knowledge of Fintech in insurance industry
4. To learn the Fintech developments around the world
5. To know about the future of Fintech

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Fintech - Definition, History, concept, meaning, architecture, significance, Goals, key areas in
Fintech, Importance of Fintech, role of Fintech in economic development, opportunities and
challenges in Fintech, Evolution of Fintech in different sectors of the industry - Infrastructure,
Banking Industry, Startups and Emerging Markets, recent developments in FinTech, future
prospects and potential issues with Fintech.

320
UNIT II PAYMENT INDUSTRY 9
FinTech in Payment Industry-Multichannel digital wallets, applications supporting wallets,
onboarding and KYC application, FinTech in Lending Industry- Formal lending, Informal lending,
P2P lending, POS lending, Online lending, Payday lending, Microfinance, Crowdfunding.

UNIT III INSURANCE INDUSTRY 9

FinTech in Wealth Management Industry-Financial Advice, Automated investing, Socially
responsible investing, Fractional Investing, Social Investing. FinTech in Insurance Industry- P2P
insurance, On-Demand Insurance, On-Demand Consultation, Customer engagement through
Quote to sell, policy servicing, Claims Management, Investment linked health insurance.

UNIT IV FINTECH AROUND THE GLOBE 9

FinTech developments - US, Europe and UK, Germany, Sweden, France, China, India, Africa,
Australia, New Zealand, Brazil and Middle East, Regulatory and Policy Assessment for Growth of
FinTech. FinTech as disruptors, Financial institutions collaborating with FinTech companies, The
new financial world.

UNIT V FUTURE OF FINTECH 9

How emerging technologies will change financial services, the future of financial services, banking
on innovation through data, why FinTech banks will rule the world, The FinTech Supermarket,
Banks partnering with FinTech start-ups, The rise of BankTech, Fintech impact on Retail Banking,
A future without money, Ethics in Fintech.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES
1. Arner D., Barbers J., Buckley R, The evolution of FinTech: a new post crisis paradigm,
University of New South Wales Research Series, 2015
2. Susanne Chishti, Janos Barberis, The FINTECH Book: The Financial Technology
Handbook for Investors, Entrepreneurs and Visionaries, Wiley Publications, 2016
3. Richard Hayen, FinTech: The Impact and Influence of Financial Technology on Banking
and the Finance Industry, 2016
4. Parag Y Arjunwadkar, FinTech: The Technology Driving Disruption in the financial service
industry CRC Press, 2018
5. Sanjay Phadke, Fintech Future : The Digital DNA of Finance Paperback .Sage
Publications, 2020
6. Pranay Gupta, T. Mandy Tham, Fintech: The New DNA of Financial Services Paperback,
2018

VERTICAL 2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP

CMG337 FOUNDATIONS OF ENTREPRENERUSHIP L TP C

3 00 3
Course Objectives
 To develop and strengthen the entrepreneurial quality and motivation of learners.
 To impart the entrepreneurial skills and traits essential to become successful
entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of entrepreneurship and management in Technology
oriented businessess.
 To empower the learners to run a Technology driven business efficiently and effectively

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Entrepreneurship- Definition, Need, Scope - Entrepreneurial Skill & Traits - Entrepreneur vs.
Intrapreneur; Classification of entrepreneurs, Types of entrepreneurs -Factors affecting

321
entrepreneurial development – Achievement Motivation – Contributions of Entreprenrship to
Economic Development.

UNIT II BUSINESS OWNERSHIP & ENVRIONMENT 9

Types of Business Ownership – Buiness Envrionemental Factors – Political-Economic-
Sociological-Technological-Environmental-Legal aspects – Human Reosurces Mobilisation-Basics
of Managing Finance- Esentials of Marketing Management - Production and Operations Planning
– Systems Management and Administration

UNIT III FUNDAMENTALS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Introduction to Technopreneurship - Definition, Need, Scope- Emerging Concepts- Principles -
Characterisitcis of a technopreneur - Impacts of Technopreneurship on Society – Economy- Job
Opportuinites in Technopreneurship - Recent trends

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF TECHNOPRENEURSHIP 9

Technology Entrepreneurship - Local, National and Global practices - Intrapreneurship and
Technology interactions, Networking of entrepreneurial activities – Launching - Managing
Technology based Product / Service entrepreneurship -– Success Stories of Technopreneurs -
Case Studies

UNIT V EMERGING TRENDS IN ENTREPRENERUSHIP 9

Effective Business Management Strategies For Franchising - Sub-Contracting- Leasing-
Technopreneurs – Agripreneurs - Netpreneurs- Portfolio entrepreneruship - NGO
Entrepreneurship – Recent Entrperneruial Develoments - Local – National – Global perspectives.
TOTAL45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the business ownership patterns and evnironment
CO 3 Understand the Job opportunites in Industries relating to Technopreneurship
CO 4 Learn about applications of tehnopreneurship and successful technopreneurs
CO 5 Acquaint with the recent and emerging trends in entrepreneruship
TEXT BOOKS:
1) S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd. Ram Nagar New Delhi,
2021.
2) Donal F Kuratko Entrepreneurship (11th Edition) Theory, Process, Practice by Published
2019 by Cengage Learning,

REFERENCES :
1) Daniel Mankani. 2003. Technopreneurship: The successful Entrepreneur in the new
Economy. Prentice Hall
2) Edward Elgar. 2007. Entrepreneurship, Cooperation and the Firm: The Emergence and
Survival of High-Technology Ventures in Europe. Edi: Jan Ulijn, Dominique Drillon, and
Frank Lasch. Wiley Pub.
3) Lang, J. 2002, The High Tech Entrepreneur's Handbook, Ft.com.
4) David Sheff 2002, China Dawn: The Story of a Technology and Business Revolution,
5) HarperBusiness,https://fanny.staff.uns.ac.id/files/2013/12/Technopreneur-BASED-
EDUCATION-REVOLUTION.pdf
6) JumpStart: A Technoprenuership Fable, Dennis Posadas, (Singapore: Pearson Prentice
Hall, 2009
7) Basics of Technoprenuership: Module 1.1-1.2, Frederico Gonzales, President-PESO Inc;
M. Barcelon, UP
8) Journal articles pertaining to Entrepreneurship

322
CMG338 TEAM BUILDING & LEADERSHIP MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop and strengthen the Leadership qualities and motivation of learners.
 To impart the Leadership skills and traits essential to become successful entrepreneurs.
 To apply the principles and theories of Team Building in managing Technology oriented
businessess.
 To empower the learners to build robust teams for running and leading a business
efficiently and effectively

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGING TEAMS 9

Introduction to Team - Team Dynamics - Team Formation – Stages of Team Devlopment -
Enhancing teamwork within a group - Team Coaching - Team Decision Making - Virtual Teams -
Self Directed Work Teams (SDWTs) -Multicultural Teams.

UNIT II MANAGING AND DEVELOPING EFFECTIVE TEAMS 9

Team-based Organisations- Leadershp roles in team-based organisations - Offsite training and
team development - Experiential Learning - Coaching and Mentoring in team building - Building
High-Performance Teams - Building Credibility and Trust - Skills for Developing Others - Team
Building at the Top - Leadership in Teamwork Effectiveness.

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO LEADERSHIP 9

Introduction to Leadership - Leadership Myths – Characteristics of Leader, Follower and Situation -
Leadership Attributes - Personality Traits and Leadership- Intelligence Types and Leadership -
Power and Leadership - Delegation and Empowerment .

UNIT IV LEADERSHIP IN ORGANISATIONS 9

Leadership Styles – LMX Theory- Leadership Theory and Normative Decision Model - Situational
Leadership Model - Contingency Model and Path Goal Theory – Transactional and
Transformational Leadership - Charismatic Leadership - Role of Ethics and Values in
Organisational Leadership.

UNIT V LEADERSHIP EFFECTIVENESS 9

Leadership Behaviour - Assessment of Leadership Behaviors - Destructive Leadership -
Motivation and Leadership - Managerial Incompetence and Derailment Conflict Management -
Negotiation and Leadership - Culture and Leadership - Global Leadership – Recent Trends in
Leadership.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of managing teams for business.
CO 2 Understand developing effective teams for business management.
CO 3 Understand the fundamentals of leadership for running a business.
CO 4 Learn about the importance of leadership for business development.
CO 5 Acquaint with emerging trends in leadership effectiveness for entreprenerus.’’

REFERENCES :
1. Hughes, R.L., Ginnett, R.C., & Curphy, G.J., Leadership: Enhancing the lessons of
experience ,9th Ed, McGraw Hill Education, Chennai, India. (2019).
2. Katzenback, J.R., Smith, D.K., The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High Performance
Organisations, Harvard Business Review Press, (2015).
3. Haldar, U.K., Leadership and Team Building, Oxford University Press, (2010).
4. Daft, R.L., The Leadership Experience, Cengage, (2015).
5. Daniel Levi, Group Dynamics for Teams ,4th Ed, (2014), Sage Publications.

323
6. Dyer, W. G., Dyer, W. G., Jr., & Dyer, J. H..Team building: Proven strategies for improving
team performance, 5thed, Jossey-Bass, (2013).

CMG339 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
 To develop the creativity skills among the learners
 To impart the knowledge of creative intelligence essential for entrepreneurs
 To know the applications of innovation in entprerenship.
 To develeop innovative business models for business.

UNIT I CREATIVITY 9
Creativity: Definition- Forms of Creativity-Essence, Elaborative and Expressive Creativities-
Quality of Creativity-Existential, Entrepreneurial and Empowerment Creativities – Creative
Environment- Creative Technology- - Creative Personality and Motivation.

UNIT II CREATIVE INTELLIGENCE 9

Creative Intelligence: Convergent thinking ability – Traits Congenial to creativity – Creativity
Training--Criteria for evaluating Creativity-Credible Evaluation- Improving the quality of our
creativity – Creative Tools and Techniques - Blocks to creativity- fears and Disabilities- Strategies
for Unblocking- Designing Creativity Enabling Environment.

UNIT III INNOVATION 9

Innovation: Definition- Levels of Innovation- Incremental Vs Radical Innovation-Product Innovation
and Process- Technological, Organizational Innovation – Indicators- Characteristics of Innovation
in Different Sectors. Theories in Innovation and Creativity- Design Thinking and Innovation-
Innovation as Collective Change-Innovation as a system

UNIT IV INNOVATION AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Innovation and Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial Mindset , Motivations and Behaviours-
Opportunity Analysis and Decision Making- Industry Understanding - Entrepreneurial
Opportunities- Entrepreneurial Strategies – Technology Pull/Market Push – Product -Market fit

UNIT V INNOVATIVE BUSINESS MODELS 9

Innovative Business Models: Customer Discovery-Customer Segments-Prospect Theory and
Developing Value Propositions- Developing Business Models: Elements of Business Models –
Innovative Business Models: Elements, Designing Innovative Business Models- Responsible
Innovation and Creativity.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of creativity for developing Entrepreneurship
CO 2 Understand the importance of creative inteligence for business growth
CO 3 Understand the advances through Innovation in Industries
CO 4 Learn about applications of innovation in building successful ventures
CO 5 Acquaint with developing innovative business models to run the business effecientlty and
effectively

Suggested Readings:
Creativity and Inovation in Entrepreneurship, Kankha, Sultan Chand
Pradip N Khandwalla, Lifelong Creativity, An Unending Quest, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
Paul Trott, Innovation Management and New Product Development, 4e, Pearson, 2018.
324
Vinnie Jauhari, Sudanshu Bhushan, Innovation Management, Oxford Higher Education, 2014.
Innovation Management, C.S.G. Krishnamacharyulu, R. Lalitha, Himalaya Publishing House,
2010.
A. Dale Timpe, Creativity, Jaico Publishing House, 2003.
Brian Clegg, Paul Birch, Creativity, Kogan Page, 2009.
Strategic Innovation: Building and Sustaining Innovative Organizations- Course Era, Raj
Echambadi.

CMG340 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT FOR BUSINESS L T P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide basic knowledge of concepts, principles, tools and techniques of marketing for
entrepreneurs
To provide an exposure to the students pertaining to the nature and Scope of marketing, which
they are expected to possess when they enter the industry as practitioners.
To give them an understanding of fundamental premise underlying market driven strategies and
the basic philosophies and tools of marketing management for business owners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Market and Marketing – Concepts- Functions of Marketing - Importance of Marketing
- Marketing Orientations - Marketing Mix-The Traditional 4Ps - The Modern Components of the Mix
- The Additional 3Ps - Developing an Effective Marketing Mix.

UNIT II MARKETING ENVIRONMENT 9

Introduction - Environmental Scanning - Analysing the Organisation’s Micro Environment and
Macro Environment - Differences between Micro and Macro Environment – Techniques of
Environment Scanning - Marketing organization - Marketing Research and the Marketing
Information System, Types and Components.

UNIT III PRODUCT AND PRICING MANAGEMENT 9

Product- Meaning, Classification, Levels of Products – Product Life Cycle (PLC) - Product
Strategies - Product Mix - Packaging and Labelling - New Product Development - Brand and
Branding - Advantages and disadvantages of branding Pricing - Factors Affecting Price Decisions -
Cost Based Pricing - Value Based and Competition Based Pricing - Pricing Strategies - National
and Global Pricing.

UNIT IV PROMOTION AND DISTRIBTUION MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction to Promotion – Marketing Channels- Integrated Marketing Communications (IMC) -
Introduction to Advertising and Sales Promotion – Basics of Public Relations and Publicity -
Personal Selling - Process - Direct Marketing - Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning (STP)-
Logistics Management- Introduction to Retailing and Wholesaling.

UNIT V CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9

Introduction - Relationship Marketing Vs. Relationship Management - Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) - Forms of Relationship Management - CRM practices - Managing Customer
Loyalty and Development – Buyer-Seller Relationships- Buying Situations in Industrial / Business
Market - Buying Roles in Industrial Marketing - Factors that Influence Business - Services
Marketing - E-Marketing or Online Marketing.
TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completion of this course, the students will be able to :
CO1 Have the awareness of marketing management process
325
CO 2 Understand the marketing environment
CO 3 Acquaint about product and pricing strategies
CO 4 Knowledge of promotion and distribution in marketing management.
CO 5 Comprehend the contemporary marketing scenairos and offer solutions to marketing
issues.
REFERENCES:
1. Marketing Management, Sherlekar S.A, Himalaya Publishing House, 2016.
2. Marketing Management , Philip Kortler and Kevin Lane Keller, PHI 15th Ed, 2015.
3 Marketing Management- An Indian perspective, Vijay Prakash Anand, Biztantra, Second edition,
2016.
4. Marketing Management Global Perspective, Indian Context, V.S.Ramaswamy &
S.Namakumari, Macmillan Publishers India,5th edition, 2015.
5. Marketing Management, S.H.H. Kazmi, 2013, Excel Books India.
6. Marketing Management- text and Cases, Dr. C.B.Gupta & Dr. N.Rajan Nair, 17th edition, 2016.
7. Marketing Management- text and Cases, Dr. C.B.Gupta & Dr. N.Rajan Nair, 17th edition, 2016.

CMG341 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR ENTREPRENEURS L T P C

3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce the basic concepts, structure and functions of human resource management for
entrepreneurs.
 To create an awareness of the roles, functions and functioning of human resource
department.
 To understand the methods and techniques followed by Human Resource Management
practitioners.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HRM 9

Concept, Definition, Objectives- Nature and Scope of HRM - Evolution of HRM - HR Manager
Roles- Skills - Personnel Management Vs. HRM - Human Resource Policies - HR Accounting -
HR Audit - Challenges in HRM.

UNIT II HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING 9

HR Planning - Definition - Factors- Tools - Methods and Techniques - Job analysis- Job rotation-
Job Description - Career Planning - Succession Planning - HRIS - Computer Applications in HR -
Recent Trends

UNIT III RECRUITMENT AND SELECTION 9

Sources of recruitment- Internal Vs. External - Domestic Vs. Global Sources -eRecruitment -
Selection Process- Selection techniques -eSelection- Interview Types- Employee Engagement.

UNIT IV TRAINING AND EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 9

Types of Training - On-The-Job, Off-The-Job - Training Needs Analysis – Induction and
Socialisation Process - Employee Compensation - Wages and Salary Administration – Health and
Social Security Measures- Green HRM Practices

UNIT V CONTROLLING HUMAN RESOURCES 9

Performance Appraisal – Types - Methods - Collective Bargaining - Grievances Redressal
Methods – Employee Discipline – Promotion – Demotion - Transfer – Dismissal - Retrenchment -
Union Management Relationship - Recent Trends
326
 TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course the learners will be able:
CO 1 To understand the Evolution of HRM and Challenges faced by HR Managers
CO 2 To learn about the HR Planning Methods and practices.
CO 3 To acquaint about the Recruitment and Selection Techniques followed in Industries.
CO 4 To known about the methods of Training and Employee Development.
CO 5 To comprehend the techniques of controlling human resources in organisations.

REFERENCES
1) Gary Dessler and Biju Varkkey, Human Resource Management, 14e , Pearson, 2015.
2) Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning 15e, 2017.
3) David A. Decenzo, Stephen.P.Robbins, and Susan L. Verhulst, Human Resource
Management, Wiley, International Student Edition, 11th Edition, 2014
4) R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management, Pearson , 2015.
5) Luis R.Gomez-Mejia, David B.Balkin, Robert L Cardy. Managing Human Resource. PHI
Learning. 2012
6) John M. Ivancevich, Human Resource Management,12e, McGraw Hill Irwin,2013.
7) K. Aswathappa, Sadhna Dash , Human Resource Management - Text and Cases , 9th
Edition, McGraw Hill, 2021.
8) Uday Kumar Haldar, Juthika Sarkar. Human Resource management. Oxford. 2012

CMG342 FINANCING NEW BUSINESS VENTURES LT P C

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives
 To develop the basics of business venture financing.
 To impart the knowledge essential for entrepreneurs for financing new ventures.
 To acquaint the learners with the sources of debt and quity financing.
 To empower the learners towards fund rasiing for new ventures effectively.

UNIT I ESSENTIALS OF NEW BUSINES VENTURE 9

Setting up new Business Ventures – Need - Scope - Franchising - Location Strategy, Registration
Process - State Directorate of Industries- Financing for New Ventures - Central and State
Government Agencies - Types of loans – Financial Institutions - SFC, IDBI, NSIC and SIDCO.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO VENTURE FINANCING 9

Venture Finance – Definition – Historic Background - Funding New Ventures- Need – Scope –
Types - Cost of Project - Means of Financing - Estimation of Working Capital - Requirement of
funds – Mix of Dent and Equity - Challenges and Opportunities.

UNIT III SOURCES OF DEBT FINANCING 9

Fund for Capital Assets - Term Loans - Leasing and Hire-Purchase - Money Market instruments –
Bonds, Corporate Papers – Preference Capital- Working Capital Management- Fund based Credit
Facilities - Cash Credit - Over Draft.

UNIT IV SOURCES OF EQUITY FINANCING 9

Own Capital, Unsecured Loan - Government Subsidies , Margin Money- Equity Funding - Private
Equity Fund- Schemes of Commercial banks - Angel Funding – Crowdfunding- Venture Capital.

UNIT V METHODS OF FUND RAISING FOR NEW VENTURES 9

Investor Decision Process - Identifying the appropriate investors- Targeting investors- Developing
Relationships with investors - Investor Selection Criteria- Company Creation- Raising Funds -
Seed Funding- VC Selection Criteria – Process- Methods- Recent Trends

327
 TOTAL 45 : PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
CO 1 Learn the basics of starting a new business venture.
CO 2 Understand the basics of venture financing.
CO 3 Understand the sources of debt financing.
CO 4 Understanf the sources of equity financing.
CO 5 Acquaint with the methods of fund raising for new business ventures.

REFERENCES :
1) Principles of Corporate Finance by Brealey and Myers et al.,12TH ed, McGraw Hill
Education (India) Private Limited, 2018
2) Prasanna Chandra, Projects : Planning ,Analysis,Selection ,Financing,Implementation and
Review, McGraw Hilld Education India Pvt Ltd ,New Delhi , 2019.
3) Introduction to Project Finance. Andrew Fight,Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006.
4) Metrick, Andrew; Yasuda, Ayako. Venture Capital And The Finance Of Innovation. Venture
Capital And The Finance Of Innovation, 2nd Edition, Andrew Metrick And Ayako Yasuda,
Eds., John Wiley And Sons, Inc, 2010.
5) Feld, Brad; Mendelson, Jason. Venture Deals. Wiley, 2011.
6) May, John; Simons, Cal. Every Business Needs An Angel: Getting The Money You Need
To Make Your Business Grow. Crown Business, 2001.
7) Gompers, Paul Alan; Lerner, Joshua. The Money Of Invention: How Venture Capital
Creates New Wealth. Harvard Business Press, 2001.
8) Camp, Justin J. Venture Capital Due Diligence: A Guide To Making Smart Investment
Choices And Increasing Your Portfolio Returns. John Wiley & Sons, 2002.
9) Byers, Thomas. Technology Ventures: From Idea To Enterprise. Mcgraw-Hill Higher
Education, 2014.
10) Lerner, Josh; Leamon, Ann; Hardymon, Felda. Venture Capital, Private Equity, And The
Financing Of Entrepreneurship. 2012.

VERTICAL 3: PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION

CMG343 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION L TPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
1. Meaning, Nature and Scope of Public Administration
2. Importance of Public Administration
3. Evolution of Public Administration

UNIT-II (9)
1. New Public Administration
2. New Public Management
3. Public and Private Administration

UNIT-III (9)
1. Relationships with Political Science, History and Sociology
2. Classical Approach
3. Scientific Management Approach

UNIT-IV (9)
1. Bureaucratic Approach: Max Weber
2. Human Relations Approach : Elton Mayo
328
3. Ecological Approach : Riggs

UNIT-V (9)
1. Leadership: Leadership - Styles - Approaches
2. Communication: Communication Types - Process - Barriers
3. Decision Making: Decision Making - Types, Techniques and Processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCEs:
1. Avasthi and Maheswari: Public Administration in India, Agra:Lakshmi Narain Agarwal,2013.
2. Ramesh K Arora: Indian Public Administration, New Delhi: Wishwa Prakashan, 2012.
3. R.B. Jain: Public Administration in India,21st Century Challenges for Good Governance, New
Delhi: Deep and Deep, 2002.
4. Rumki Basu: Public Administration:Concept and Theories, New Delhi:Sterling, 2013.
5. R. Tyagi, Public Administration, Atma Ram & Sons, New Delhi, 1983.

CMG344 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA LTPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
1. Constitutional Development Since 1909 to 1947
2. Making of the Constitution.
3. Constituent Assembly

UNIT-II (9)
1. Fundamental Rights
2. Fundamental Duties
3. Directive Principles of State Policy

UNIT-III (9)
1. President
2. Parliament
3. Supreme Court
UNIT-IV (9)
1. Governor
2. State Legislature
3. High Court

UNIT-V (9)
1. Secularism
2. Social Justice
3. Minority Safeguards
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Basu. D.D.: Introduction to Indian Constitution ; Prentice Hall; New Delhi.
2. Kapur. A.C: Indian Government and Political System; S.Chand and Company Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Johari J.C.: Indian Politics, Vishal Publications Ltd, New Delhi
4. Agarwal R.C: Indian Political System; S.Chand & Co., New Delhi

CMG345 PUBLIC PERSONNEL ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
1. Meaning, Scope and Importance of Personnel Administration

329
2. Types of Personnel Systems: Bureaucratic, Democratic and Representative systems

UNIT-II (9)
1. Generalist Vs Specialist
2. Civil Servants’ Relationship with Political Executive
3. Integrity in Administration.

UNIT-III (9)
1. Recruitment: Direct Recruitment and Recruitment from Within
2. Training: Kinds of Training
3. Promotion

UNIT-IV (9)
1. All India Services
2. Service Conditions
3. State Public Service Commission

UNIT-V (9)
1. Employer Employee Relations
2. Wage and Salary Administration
3. Allowances and Benefits
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Stahl Glean O: Public Personnel Administration
2. Parnandikar Pai V.A: Personnel System for Development Administration.
3. Bhambhiru . P: Bureaucracy and Policy in India.
4. Dwivedi O.P and Jain R.B: India’s Administrative state.
5. Muttalis M.A: Union Public Service Commission.
6. Bhakara Rao .V: Employer Employee Relations in India.
7. Davar R.S. Personnel Management & Industrial Relations

CMG346 ADMINISTRATIVE THEORIES LTPC

3003
UNIT I (9)
Meaning, Scope and significance of Public Administration, Evolution of Public Administration as a
discipline and Identity of Public Administration

UNIT II (9)
Theories of Organization: Scientific Management Theory, Classical Model,
Human Relations Theory

UNIT III (9)

Organization goals and Behaviour, Groups in organization and group dynamics, Organizational
Design.

UNIT IV (9)
Motivation Theories, content, process and contemporary; Theories of Leadership: Traditional and
Modern: Process and techniques of decision-making

UNIT V (9)
Administrative thinkers: Kautilya, Woodrow Willson, C.I. Barnard . Peter Drucker
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Crozior M : The Bureaucratic phenomenon (Chand)
330
2. Blau. P.M and Scott. W : Formal Organizations (RKP)
3. Presthus. R : The Organizational Society (MAC)
4. Alvi, Shum Sun Nisa : Eminent Administrative Thinkers.
5. Keith Davis : Organization Theory (MAC)

CMG347 INDIAN ADMINISTRATIVE SYSTEM LTPC

3003
UNIT I (9)
Evolution and Constitutional Context of Indian Administration, Constitutional Authorities: Finance
Commission, Union Public Services Commission, Election Commission, Comptroller and Auditor
General of India, Attorney General of India

UNIT II (9)
Role & Functions of the District Collector, Relationship between the District
Collector and Superintendent of Police, Role of Block Development Officer in development
programmes, Local Government

UNIT III (9)

Main Features of 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act 1992, Salient Features of 74th Constitutional
Amendment Act 1992

UNIT IV (9)
Coalition politics in India, Integrity and Vigilance in Indian Administration

UNIT V (9)
Corruption – Ombudsman, Lok Pal & Lok Ayuktha
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. S.R. Maheswari : Indian Administration
2. Khera. S.S : Administration in India
3. Ramesh K. Arora : Indian Public Administration
4. T.N. Chaturvedi : State administration in India
5. Basu, D.D : Introduction to the Constitution of India

CMG348 PUBLIC POLICY ADMINISTRATION LTPC

3003
UNIT-I (9)
Meaning and Definition of Public Policy - Nature, Scope and Importance of public policy – Public
policy relationship with social sciences especially with political science and Public Administration.

UNIT-II (9)
Approaches in Policy Analysis - Institutional Approach – Incremental Approach and System’s
Approach – Dror’s Optimal Model

UNIT-III (9)
Major stages involved in Policy making Process – Policy Formulation – Policy Implementation –
Policy Evaluation.

UNIT-IV (9)
Institutional Framework of Policy making – Role of Bureaucracy – Role of Interest Groups and
Role of Political Parties.

331
UNIT-V (9)
Introduction to the following Public Policies – New Economic Policy – Population Policy –
Agriculture policy - Information Technology Policy.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Rajesh Chakrabarti & Kaushik Sanyal : Public Policy in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
2. Kuldeep Mathur : Public Policy and Politics in India, Oxford University Press, 2016.
3. Bidyutv Chakrabarty: Public Policy: Concept, Theory and Practice, 2015.
4. Pradeep Saxena : Public Policy Administration and Development
5. Sapru R.K. : Public Policy: Formulation, Implementation and Evaluation, Sterling Publishers,
2016.

VERTICAL 4: BUSINESS DATA ANALYTICS

CMG349 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To learn the applications of statistics in business decision making.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Basic definitions and rules for probability, Baye‘s theorem and random variables, Probability
distributions: Binomial, Poisson, Uniform and Normal distributions.

UNIT II SAMPLING DISTRIBUTION AND ESTIMATION 9

Introduction to sampling distributions, Central limit theorem and applications, sampling techniques,
Point and Interval estimates of population parameters.

UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS - PARAMETIRC TESTS 9

Hypothesis testing: one sample and two sample tests for means of large samples (z-test), one
sample and two sample tests for means of small samples (t-test), ANOVA one way.

UNIT IV NON-PARAMETRIC TESTS 9

Chi-square tests for independence of attributes and goodness of fit, Kolmogorov-Smirnov – test for
goodness of fit, Mann – Whitney U test and Kruskal Wallis test.

UNIT V CORRELATION AND REGRESSION 9

Correlation –Rank Correlation – Regression – Estimation of Regression line – Method of Least
Squares – Standard Error of estimate.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 To facilitate objective solutions in business decision making.
 To understand and solve business problems
 To apply statistical techniques to data sets, and correctly interpret the results.
 To develop skill-set that is in demand in both the research and business environments
 To enable the students to apply the statistical techniques in a work setting.

REFERENCES:
1. Richard I. Levin, David S. Rubin, Masood H.Siddiqui, Sanjay Rastogi, Statistics for
Management, Pearson Education, 8th Edition, 2017.
2. Prem. S. Mann, Introductory Statistics, Wiley Publications, 9th Edition, 2015.
3. T N Srivastava and Shailaja Rego, Statistics for Management, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition
2017.
4. Ken Black, Applied Business Statistics, 7th Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2012.
332
5. David R. Anderson, Dennis J. Sweeney, Thomas A.Williams, Jeffrey D.Camm, James
J.Cochran, Statistics for business and economics, 13th edition, Thomson (South – Western) Asia,
Singapore, 2016.
6. N. D. Vohra, Business Statistics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.

CMG350 DATAMINING FOR BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES :
 To know how to derive meaning form huge volume of data and information.
 To understand how knowledge discovering process is used in business decision making.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Data mining, Text mining, Web mining, Data ware house.

UNIT II DATA MINING PROCESS 9

Datamining process – KDD, CRISP-DM, SEMMA
Prediction performance measures

UNIT III PREDICTION TECHNIQUES 9

Data visualization, Time series – ARIMA, Winter Holts,

UNIT IV CLASSIFICATION AND CLUSTERING TECHNIQUES 9

Classification, Association, Clustering.

UNIT V MACHINE LEARNING AND AI 9

Genetic algorithms, Neural network, Fuzzy logic, Ant Colony optimization, Particle Swarm
optimization
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
1. Learn to apply various data mining techniques into various areas of different domains.
2. Be able to interact competently on the topic of data mining for business intelligence.
3. Apply various prediction techniques.
4. Learn about supervised and unsupervised learning technique.
5. Develop and implement machine learning algorithms

REFERENCES :
1. Jaiwei Ham and Micheline Kamber, Data Mining concepts and techniques, Kauffmann
Publishers 2006
2. Efraim Turban, Ramesh Sharda, Jay E. Aronson and David King, Business Intelligence,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
3. W.H.Inmon, Building the Data Warehouse, fourth edition Wiley India pvt. Ltd. 2005.
4. Ralph Kimball and Richard Merz, The data warehouse toolkit, John Wiley, 3rd edition,2013.
5. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Mastering Data mining, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2nd Edition,
2011
6. Michel Berry and Gordon Linoff, Data mining techniques for Marketing, Sales and Customer
support, John Wiley, 2011
7. G. K. Gupta, Ïntroduction to Data mining with Case Studies, Prentice hall of India, 2011
8. Giudici, Applied Data mining – Statistical Methods for Business and Industry, John Wiley. 2009
9. Elizabeth Vitt, Michael Luckevich Stacia Misner, Business Intelligence, Microsoft, 2011
10. Michalewicz Z., Schmidt M. Michalewicz M and Chiriac C, Adaptive Business Intelligence,
Springer – Verlag, 2007
11. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel and Peter C. Bruce, Data Mining for Business Intelligence –
Concepts, Techniques and Applications Wiley, India, 2010.
333
CMG351 HUMAN RESOURCE ANALYTICS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To develop the ability of the learners to define and implement HR metrics that are aligned
with the overall business strategy.
 To know the different types of HR metrics and understand their respective impact and
application.
 To understand the impact and use of HR metrics and their connection with HR analytics.
 To understand common workforce issues and resolving them using people analytics.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO HR ANALYTICS 9

People Analytics - stages of maturity - Human Capital in the Value Chain : impact on business –
HR metrics and KPIs.

UNIT II HR ANLYTICS I: RECRUITMENT 9

Recruitment Metrics : Fill-up ratio - Time to hire - Cost per hire - Early turnover - Employee referral
hires - Agency hires - Lateral hires - Fulfillment ratio- Quality of hire.

UNIT III HR ANALYTICS - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Training & Development Metrics : Percentage of employees trained- Internally and externally
trained -Training hours and cost per employee - ROI.

UNIT IV HR ANALYTICS EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT AND CAREER

PROGRESSION 9
Employee Engagement Metrics :Talent Retention index - Voluntary and involuntary turnover-
grades, performance, and service tenure - Internal hired index Career Progression Metrics:
Promotion index - Rotation index - Career path index.

UNIT V HR ANALYTICS IV: WORKFORCE DIVERSITY AND DEVELOPMENT 9

Workforce Diversity and Development Metrics : Employees per manager – Workforce age profiling
- Workforce service profiling - Churnover index - Workforce diversity
index - Gender mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 The learners will be conversant about HR metrics and ready to apply at work settings.
 The learners will be able to resolve HR issues using people analytics.

REFERENCES:
1. JacFitzenz , The New HR Analytics, AMACOM , 2010.
2. Edwards M. R., & Edwards K, Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the HR Metric.London: Kogan
Page.2016.
3. Human Resources kit for Dummies – 3 rd edition – Max Messmer, 2003
4. Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya, HR Analytics ,Understanding Theories and
Applications, SAGE Publications India ,2017.
5. Sesil, J. C. , Applying advanced analytics to HR management decisions: Methods fo selection,
developing incentives, and improving collaboration. Upper Saddle River,New Jersey: Pearson
Education,2014.
6. Pease, G., & Beresford, B, Developing Human Capital: Using Analytics to Plan and Optimize
Your Learning and Development Investments. Wiley ,2014.
7. Phillips, J., & Phillips, P.P, Making Human Capital Analytics Work: Measuring the ROI of Human
Capital Processes and OUTCOME. McGraw-Hill,2014.
8. HR Scorecard and Metrices, HBR, 2001.

334
CMG352 MARKETING AND SOCIAL MEDIA WEB ANALYTICS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To showcase the opportunities that exist today to leverage the power of the web and social
media

UNIT I MARKETING ANALYTICS 9

Marketing Budget and Marketing Performance Measure, Marketing - Geographical Mapping, Data
Exploration, Market Basket Analysis

UNIT II COMMUNITY BUILDING AND MANAGEMENT 9

History and Evolution of Social Media-Understanding Science of Social Media –Goals for using
Social Media- Social Media Audience and Influencers - Digital PR- Promoting Social Media Pages-
Linking Social Media Accounts-The Viral Impact of Social Media.

UNIT III SOCIAL MEDIA POLICIES AND MEASUREMENTS 9

Social Media Policies-Etiquette, Privacy- ethical problems posed by emerging social media
technologies - The Basics of Tracking Social Media.

UNIT IV WEB ANALYTICS 9

Data Collection, Overview of Qualitative Analysis, Business Analysis, KPI and Planning, Critical
Components of a Successful Web Analytics Strategy, Proposals & Reports, Web Data Analysis.

UNIT V SEARCH ANALYTICS 9

Search engine optimization (SEO), user engagement, user-generated content, web traffic
analysis, online security, online ethics, data visualization.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOME:
 The Learners will understand social media, web and social media analytics and their
potential impact.

REFERENCES:
1. K. M. Shrivastava, Social Media in Business and Governance, Sterling Publishers Private
Limited, 2013
2. Christian Fuchs, Social Media a critical introduction, SAGE Publications Ltd, 2014
3. Bittu Kumar, Social Networking, V & S Publishers, 2013
4. Avinash Kaushik, Web Analytics - An Hour a Day, Wiley Publishing, 2007
5. Ric T. Peterson, Web Analytics Demystified, Celilo Group Media and CafePress 2004
6. Takeshi Moriguchi, Web Analytics Consultant Official Textbook, 7th Edition, 2016

CMG353 OPERATION AND SUPPLY CHAIN ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 To treat the subject in depth by emphasizing on the advanced quantitative models and
methods in operations and supply chain management and its practical aspects and the
latest developments in the field.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive analytics, Data Driven Supply Chains – Basics,
transforming supply chains.

335
UNIT II WAREHOUSING DECISIONS 9
P-Median Methods - Guided LP Approach, Greedy Drop Heuristics, Dynamic Location Models,
Space Determination and Layout Methods.

UNIT III INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 9

Dynamic Lot sizing Methods, Multi-Echelon Inventory models, Aggregate Inventory system and
LIMIT, Risk Analysis in Supply Chain, Risk pooling strategies.

UNIT IV TRANSPORTATION NETWORK MODELS 9

Minimal Spanning Tree, Shortest Path Algorithms, Maximal Flow Problems, Transportation
Problems, Set covering and Set Partitioning Problems, Travelling Salesman Problem, Scheduling
Algorithms.

UNIT V MCDM MODELS 9

Analytic Hierarchy Process(AHP), Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA), Fuzzy Logic an Techniques,
the analytical network process (ANP), TOPSIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
 To enable quantitative solutions in business decision making under conditions of
certainty, risk and uncertainty.
REFERENCES:
1. Nada R. Sanders, Big data driven supply chain management: A framework for implementing
analytics and turning information into intelligence, Pearson Education, 2014.
2. Michael Watson, Sara Lewis, Peter Cacioppi, Jay Jayaraman, Supply Chain Network Design:
Applying Optimization and Analytics to the Global Supply Chain, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. Anna Nagurney, Min Yu, Amir H. Masoumi, Ladimer S. Nagurney, Networks Against Time:
Supply Chain Analytics for Perishable Products, Springer, 2013.
4. Muthu Mathirajan, Chandrasekharan Rajendran, Sowmyanarayanan Sadagopan, Arunachalam
Ravindran, Parasuram Balasubramanian, Analytics in
Operations/Supply Chain Management , I.K. International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
5. Gerhard J. Plenert, Supply Chain Optimization through Segmentation and Analytics, CRC Press,
Taylor & Francis Group, 2014.

CMG354 FINANCIAL ANALYTICS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVE:
 This course introduces a core set of modern analytical tools that specifically target finance
applications.

UNIT I CORPORATE FINANCE ANALYSIS 9

Basic corporate financial predictive modelling- Project analysis- cash flow analysis- cost of capital,
Financial Break even modelling, Capital Budget model-Payback, NPV, IRR.

UNIT II FINANCIAL MARKET ANALYSIS 9

Estimation and prediction of risk and return ( bond investment and stock investment) –Time series-
examining nature of data, Value at risk, ARMA, ARCH and GARCH.

UNIT III PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS 9

Portfolio Analysis – capital asset pricing model, Sharpe ratio, Option pricing models- binomial
model for options, Black Scholes model and Option implied volatility.

UNIT IV TECHNICAL ANALYSIS 9

Prediction using charts and fundamentals – RSI, ROC, MACD, moving average and candle charts,
simulating trading strategies. Prediction of share prices.
336
UNIT V CREDIT RISK ANALYSIS 9
Credit Risk analysis- Data processing, Decision trees, logistic regression and evaluating credit risk
model.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
 The learners should be able to perform financial analysis for decision making using excel,
Python and R.

REFERENCES:
1. Financial analytics with R by Mark J. Bennett, Dirk L. Hugen, Cambridge university press.
2. Haskell Financial Data Modeling and Predictive Analytics Paperback – Import, 25 Oct 2013 by
Pavel Ryzhov.
3. Quantitative Financial Analytics: The Path To Investment Profits Paperback – Import, 11 Sep
2017 by Edward E Williams (Author), John A Dobelman.
4. Python for Finance - Paperback – Import, 30 Jun 2017 by Yuxing Yan (Author).
5. Mastering Python for Finance Paperback – Import, 29 Apr 2015 by James Ma Weiming.

VERTICAL 5: ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY

CES331 SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT LTPC

3 003
OBJECTIVE:
 To impart knowledge about sustainable Infrastructure development goals, practices and to
understand the concepts of sustainable planning, design, construction, maintenance and
decommissioning of infrastructure projects.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS 9

Definitions, principles and history of Sustainable Development - Sustainable development goals
(SDG): global and Indian – Infrastructure Demand and Supply - Environment and Development
linkages - societal and cultural demands – Sustainability indicators - Performance indicators of
sustainability and Assessment mechanism - Policy frameworks and practices: global and Indian –
Infrastructure Project finance – Infrastructure project life cycle - Constraints and barriers for
sustainable development - future directions.

UNIT II SUSTAINABLE INFRASTRUCTURE PLANNING 9

Overview of Infrastructure projects: Housing sector, Power sector, Water supply, road, rail and port
transportation sector, rural and urban infrastructure. Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA),
Land acquisition -Legal aspects, Resettlement &Rehabilitation and Development - Cost
effectiveness Analysis - Risk Management Framework for Infrastructure Projects, Economic,
demand, political, socio-environmental and cultural risks. Shaping the Planning Phase of
Infrastructure Projects to mitigate risks, Designing Sustainable Contracts, Negotiating with multiple
Stakeholders on Infrastructure Projects. Use of ICT tools in planning – Integrated planning - Clash
detection in construction - BIM (Building Information Modelling).

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES AND TECHNIQUES 9

Sustainability through lean construction approach - Enabling lean through information technology –
Lean in planning and design - IPD (Integrated Project Delivery) - Location Based Management
System - Geospatial Technologies for machine control, site management, precision control and
real time progress monitoring - Role of logistics in achieving sustainable construction – Data
management for integrated supply chains in construction - Resource efficiency benefits of effective
logistics - Sustainability in geotechnical practice – Design considerations, Design Parameters and
337
Procedures – Quality control and Assurance - Use of sustainable construction techniques: Precast
concrete technology, Pre-engineered buildings.

UNIT IV SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS 9

Construction materials: Concrete, steel, glass, aluminium, timber and FRP - No/Low cement
concrete - Recycled and manufactured aggregate - Role of QC and durability - Sustainable
consumption – Eco-efficiency - green consumerism - product stewardship and green engineering -
Extended producer responsibility – Design for Environment Strategies, Practices, Guidelines,
Methods, And Tools. Eco-design strategies –Design for Disassembly - Dematerialization,
rematerialization, transmaterialization – Green procurement and green distribution - Analysis
framework for reuse and recycling – Typical constraints on reuse and recycling - Communication
of Life Cycle Information - Indian Eco mark scheme - Environmental product declarations –
Environmental marketing- Life cycle Analysis (LCA), Advances in LCA: Hybrid LCA,
Thermodynamic LCA - Extending LCA - economic dimension, social dimension - Life cycle
costing (LCC) - Combining LCA and LCC – Case studies

UNIT V SUSTAINABLE MAINTENANCE OF INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS 9

Case Studies - Sustainable projects in developed countries and developing nations - An Integrated
Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and Management - Information Technology and
Systems for Successful Infrastructure Management, - Structural Health Monitoring for
Infrastructure projects - Innovative Design and Maintenance of Infrastructure Facilities - Capacity
Building and Improving the Governments Role in Infrastructure Implementation, Infrastructure
Management Systems and Future Directions. – Use of Emerging Technologies – IoT, Big Data
Analytics and Cloud Computing, Artificial Intelligences, Machine and Deep Learning, Fifth
Generation (5G) Network services for maintenance .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME:
On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
CO1 Understand the environment sustainability goals at global and Indian scenario.
CO2 Understand risks in development of projects and suggest mitigation measures.
CO3 Apply lean techniques, LBMS and new construction techniques to achieve sustainability in
infrastructure construction projects.
CO4 Explain Life Cycle Analysis and life cycle cost of construction materials.
CO5 Explain the new technologies for maintenance of infrastructure projects.

REFERENCES:
1. Charles J Kibert, Sustainable Construction : Green Building Design & Delivery, 4th Edition ,
Wiley Publishers 2016.
2. Steve Goodhew, Sustainable Construction Process, Wiley Blackwell,UK, 2016.
3. Craig A. Langston & Grace K.C. Ding, Sustainable Practices in the Built Environment,
Butterworth Heinemann Publishers, 2011.
4. William P Spence, Construction Materials, Methods & Techniques (3e), Yesdee Publication
Pvt. Ltd, 2016.
5. New Building Materials and Construction World magazine
6. Kerry Turner. R, "Sustainable Environmental Management", Principles and Practice
Publisher:Belhaven Press,ISBN:1852930039.
7. Munier N, "Introduction to Sustainability”, Springer2005
8. Sharma, “Sustainable Smart Cities In India: Challenges And Future Perspectives”,
SPRINGER, 2022.
9. Ralph Horne, Tim Grant, KarliVerghese, Life Cycle Assessment: Principles, Practice and
Prospects, Csiro Publishing,2009
10. European Commission - Joint Research Centre - Institute for Environment and Sustainability:
International Reference Life Cycle Data System (ILCD) Handbook - General guide for Life
Cycle Assessment - Detailed guidance. Luxembourg. European Union;2010
11. Hudson, Haas, Uddin, Infrastructure management: integrating design, construction,
maintenance, rehabilitation, and renovation, McGraw Hill, (1997).
338
 12. GregerLundesjö, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction: Delivering
Tomorrow's Built Environment, Kogan Page Publishers, 2015.

CO’s- PO’s & PSO’s MAPPING

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
2 3 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
4 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
5 3 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 2
Avg. 3 1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 2

CES332 SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003

OBJECTIVES:
• To educate the students about the issues of sustainability in agroecosystems, introduce the
concepts and principles of agroecology as applied to the design and management of
sustainable agricultural systems for a changing world.

UNIT I AGROECOLOGY, AGROECOSYSTEM AND SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE

CONCEPTS 9
Ecosystem definition - Biotic Vs. abiotic factors in an ecosystem - Ecosystem processes -
Ecological services and agriculture - Problems associated with industrial agriculture/food systems -
Defining sustainability - Characteristics of sustainable agriculture - Difference between
regenerative and sustainable agriculture systems

UNIT II SOIL HEALTH, NUTRIENT AND PEST MANAGEMENT 9

Soil health definition - Factors to consider (physical, chemical and biological) - Composition of
healthy soils - Soil erosion and possible control measures - Techniques to build healthy soil -
Management practices for improving soil nutrient - Ecologically sustainable strategies for pest and
disease control

UNIT III WATER MANAGEMENT 9

Soil water storage and availability - Plant yield response to water - Reducing evaporation in
agriculture - Earthworks and tanks for rainwater harvesting - Options for improving the productivity
of water - Localized irrigation - Irrigation scheduling - Fertigation - Advanced irrigation systems and
agricultural practices for sustainable water use

UNIT IV ENERGY AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 9

Types and sources of agricultural wastes - Composition of agricultural wastes - Sustainable
technologies for the management of agricultural wastes - Useful and high value materials
produced using different processes from agricultural wastes - Renewable energy for sustainable
agriculture

UNIT V EVALUATING SUSTAINABILITY IN AGROECOSYSTEMS 9

Indicators of sustainability in agriculture - On-farm evaluation of agroecosystem sustainability -
Alternative agriculture approaches/ farming techniques for sustainable food production - Goals and
components of a community food system - Case studies
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOME
 On completion of the course, the student is expected to be able to
339
CO1 Have an in-depth knowledge about the concepts, principles and advantages of sustainable
agriculture
CO2 Discuss the sustainable ways in managing soil health, nutrients, pests and diseases
CO3 Suggest the ways to optimize the use of water in agriculture to promote an ecological use of
resources
CO4 Develop energy and waste management plans for promoting sustainable agriculture in non-
sustainable farming areas
CO5 Assess an ecosystem for its level of sustainability and prescribe ways of converting to a
sustainable system through the redesign of a conventional agroecosystem

REFERENCES:
1. Approaches to Sustainable Agriculture – Exploring the Pathways Towards the Future of
Farming, Oberc, B.P. & Arroyo Schnell, A., IUCN, Belgium, 2020
2. Natural bioactive products in sustainable agriculture, Singh, J. & Yadav, A.N., Springer,
2020
3. Organic Farming for Sustainable Agriculture, Nandwani, D., Springer, 2016
4. Principles of Agronomy for Sustainable Agriculture, Villalobos, F.J. & Fereres, E., Springer,
2016
5. Sustainable Agriculture for Food Security: A Global Perspective, Balkrishna, A., CRC
Press, 2021
6. Sustainable Energy Solutions in Agriculture, Bundschuh, J. & Chen, G., CRC Press, 2014

CO – PO Mapping - SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE PRACTICES

PO’s PSO’s
CO’s
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
1 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 3 2
3 2 2 3 2 3
4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
5 2 3 2 1 1 2
Avg. 3 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 2 3

1 – Low; 2 – Medium; 3 – High; ‘- “– No correlation

CES333 SUSTAINABLE BIOMATERIALS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES
 To Impart knowledge of biomaterials and their properties
 To learn about Fundamentals aspects of Biopolymers and their applications
 To learn about bioceramics and biopolymers
 To introduce the students about metals as biomaterials and their usage as implants
 To make the students understand the significance of bionanomaterials and its
applications.
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BIOMATERIALS 9
Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials- Types of
Biomaterials- Degradable and resorbable biomaterials- engineered natural materials-
Biocompatibility-Hydrogels-pyrolitic carbon for long term medical implants-textured and porous
materials-Bonding types- crystal structure-imperfection in crystalline structure-surface properties
and adhesion of materials –strength of biological tissues-performance of implants-tissue response
to implants- Impact and Future of Biomaterials

340
UNIT II BIO POLYMERS 9
Molecular structure of polymers -Molecular weight - Types of polymerization techniques–Types of
polymerization reactions- Physical states of polymers- Common polymeric biomaterials -
Polyethylene -Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA-Polylactic acid (PLA) and polyglycolic acid (PGA) -
Polycaprolactone (PCL) - Other biodegradable polymers –Polyurethan- reactions polymers for
medical purposes - Collagens- Elastin- Cellulose and derivatives-Synthetic polymeric membranes
and their biological applications

UNIT III BIO CERAMICS AND BIOCOMPOSITES 9

General properties- Bio ceramics -Silicate glass - Alumina (Al2O3) -Zirconia (ZrO2)-Carbon-
Calcium phosphates (CaP)- Resorbable Ceramics- surface reactive ceramics- Biomedical
Composites-Polymer Matrix Compsite(PMC)-Ceramic Matrix Composite(CMC)-Metal Matrix
Composite (MMC)–glass ceramics - Orthopedic implants-Tissue engineering scaffolds

UNIT IV METALS AS BIOMATERIALS 9

Biomedical metals-types and properties-stainless steel-Cobalt chromium alloys-Titanium alloys-
Tantalum-Nickel titanium alloy (Nitinol)- magnesium-based biodegradable alloys-surface
properties of metal implants for osteointegration-medical application-corrosion of metallic implants
– biological tolerance of implant metals

UNIT V NANOBIOMATERIALS 9
Meatllicnanobiomaterials–Nanopolymers-Nanoceramics- Nanocomposites -Carbon based
nanobiomaterials - transport of nanoparticles- release rate-positive and negative effect of
nanosize-nanofibres-Nano and micro features and their importance in implant performance-
Nanosurface and coats-Applications nanoantibiotics-Nanomedicines- Biochips – Biomimetics-
BioNEMs -Biosensor-Bioimaging/Molecular Imaging- challenges and future perspective.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
 Students will gain familiarity with Biomaterials and they will understand their importance.
 Students will get an overview of different biopolymers and their properties
 Students gain knowledge on some of the important Bioceramics and Biocomposite
materials
 Students gain knowledge on metals as biomaterials
 Student gains knowledge on the importance of nanobiomaterials in biomedical
applications.

REFERENCES
1. C. Mauli Agrawal, Joo L. Ong, Mark R. Appleford, Gopinath Mani “Introduction to
Biomaterials Basic Theory with Engineering Applications” Cambridge University Press,
2014.
2. Donglu shi “Introduction to Biomaterials” Tsinghua University press, 2006.
3. Joon Park, R.S.Lakes “Biomaterials An Introduction” third edition, Springer 2007.
4. M.Jaffe,W.Hammond, P.Tolias and T.Arinzeh “Characterization of Biomaterials” Wood
head publishing, 2013.
5. Buddy D.Ratner and Allan S.Hoffman Biomaterials Science “An Introduction to Material in
Medicine” Third Edition, 2013.
6. VasifHasirci, NesrinHasirci “Fundamentals of Biomaterials” Springer, 2018
7. Leopoido Javier Rios Gonzalez. “Handbook of Research on Bioenergy and Biomaterials:
Consolidated and green process” Apple academic press, 2021.
8. Devarajan Thangadurai, Jeyabalan Sangeetha, Ram Prasad “Functional Bionanomaterials”
springer, 2020.
9. Sujata.V.Bhat Biomaterials; Narosa Publishing house, 2002.

341
CES334 MATERIALS FOR ENERGY SUSTAINABILITY LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES
 To familiarize the students about the challenges and demands of energy sustainability
 To provide fundamental knowledge about electrochemical devices and the materials used.
 To introduce the students to various types of fuel cell
 To enable students to appreciate novel materials and their usage in photovoltaic
application
 To introduce students to the basic principles of various types Supercapacitors and the
materials used.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9

Introduction to energy demand and challenges ahead – sustainable source of energy (wind, solar
etc.) – electrochemical energy systems for energy harvesting and storage – materials for
sustainable electrochemical systems building – India centric solutions based on locally available
materials – Economics of wind and solar power generators vs. conventional coal plants – Nuclear
energy

UNIT II ELECTROCHEMICAL DEVICES 9

Electrochemical Energy – Difference between primary and secondary batteries – Secondary
battery (Li-ion battery, Sodium-ion battery, Li-S battery, Li-O2 battery, Nickel Cadmium, Nickel
Metal Hydride) – Primary battery (Alkaline battery, Zinc-Carbon battery) – Materials for battery
(Anode materials – Lithiated graphite, Sodiated hard carbon, Silicon doped graphene, Lithium
Titanate) (Cathode Materials – S, LiCoO2, LiFePO4, LiMn2O4) – Electrolytes for Lithium-ion battery
(ethylene carbonate and propylene carbonate based)

UNIT III FUEL CELLS 9

Principle of operation of fuel cells – types of fuel cells (Proton exchange membrane fuel cells,
alkaline fuel cell, direct methanol fuel cells, direct borohydride fuel cells, phosphoric acid fuel cells,
solid oxide fuel cells, and molten carbonate fuel cells) – Thermodynamics of fuel cell – Fuel
utilization – electrolyte membrane ( proton conducting and anion conducting) – Catalysts (
Platinum, Platinum alloys, carbon supported platinum systems and metal oxide supported platinum
catalysts) – Anatomy of fuel cells (gas diffusion layer, catalyst layer, flow field plate, current
conductors, bipolar plates and monopolar plates).

UNIT IV PHOTOVOLTAICS 9
Physics of the solar cell – Theoretical limits of photovoltaic conversion – bulk crystal growth of Si
and wafering for photovoltaic application - Crystalline silicon solar cells – thin film silicon solar
cells – multijunction solar cells – amorphous silicon based solar cells – photovoltaic concentrators
– Cu(InGa)Se2 solar cells – Cadium Telluride solar cells – dye sensitized solar cells – Perovskite
solar cells – Measurement and characterization of solar cells - Materials used in solar cells (
metallic oxides, CNT films, graphene, OD fullerenes, single-multi walled carbon nanotubes, two-
dimensional Graphene, organic or Small molecule-based solar cells materials - copper-
phthalocyanine and perylenetetracarboxylicbis - benzine – fullerenes - boron subphthalocyanine-
tin (II) phthalocyanine)

UNIT V SUPERCAPACITORS 9
Supercapacitor –types of supercapacitors (electrostatic double-layer capacitors, pseudo capacitors
and hybrid capacitors) - design of supercapacitor-three and two electrode cell-parameters of
supercapacitor- Faradaic and non - Faradaic capacitance – electrode materials (transition metal
oxides (MO), mixed metal oxides, conducting polymers (CP), Mxenes, nanocarbons, non-noble
metal, chalcogenides, hydroxides and 1D-3D metal-organic frame work (MOF), activated carbon
fibres (ACF)- Hydroxides-Based Materials - Polyaniline (PANI), a ternary hybrid composite-
conductive polypyrrole hydrogels – Different types of nanocomposites for the SC electrodes
(carbon–carbon composites, carbon-MOs composites, carbon-CPs composites and MOs-CPs
342
composites) - Two-Dimensional (2D) Electrode Materials - 2D transition metal carbides,
carbonitrides, and nitrides.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES
 Students will acquire knowledge about energy sustainability.
 Students understand the principles of different electrochemical devices.
 Students learn about the working of fuel cells and their application.
 Students will learn about various Photovoltaic applications and the materials used.
 The students gain knowledge on different types of supercapacitors and the performance of
various materials

REFERENCES
1. Functional materials for sustainable energy applications; John A. Kilner, Stephen J.
Skinner, Stuart J. C. Irvine and Peter P. Edwards.
2. Hand Book of Fuel Cells: Fuel Cell Technology and Applications, Wolf Vielstich, Arnold
Lamm, Hubert Andreas Gasteiger, Harumi Yokokawa, Wiley, London 2003.
3. B.E. Conway, Electrochemical supercapacitors: scientific fundamentals and technological
applications, Kluwer Academic / Plenum publishers, New York, 1999.
4. T.R. Crompton, Batteries reference book, Newners, 3rd Edition, 2002.
5. Materials for Supercapacitor applications; B.Viswanathan. M.Aulice Scibioh
6. Electrode Materials for Supercapacitors: A Review of Recent Advances, Parnia
Forouzandeh, Vignesh Kumaravel and Suresh C. Pillai, catalysts 2020.
7. Recent advances, practical challenges, and perspectives of intermediate temperature solid
oxide fuel cell cathodes Amanda Ndubuisi, Sara Abouali, Kalpana Singh and
VenkataramanThangadurai, J. Mater. Chem. A, 2022.
8. Review of next generation photovoltaic solar cell technology and comparative materialistic
development Neeraj Kant, Pushpendra Singh, Materials Today: Proceedings, 2022.

CES335 GREEN TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 To acquire knowledge on green systems and the environment, energy technology and
efficiency, and sustainability.
 To provide green engineering solutions to energy demand, reduced energy footprint.

UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF GREEN CHEMISTRY 9

Historical Perspectives and Basic Concepts. The twelve Principles of Green Chemistry and green
engineering. Green chemistry metrics- atom economy, E factor, reaction mass efficiency, and
other green chemistry metrics, application of green metrics analysis to synthetic plans.

UNIT II POLLUTION TYPES 9

Pollution – types, causes, effects, and abatement. Waste – sources of waste, different types of
waste, chemical, physical and biochemical methods of waste minimization and recycling.

UNIT III GREEN REAGENTS AND GREEN SYNTHESIS 9

Environmentally benign processes- alternate solvents- supercritical solvents, ionic liquids, water as
a reaction medium, energy-efficient design of processes- photo, electro and sono chemical
methods, microwave-assisted reactions

UNIT IV DESIGNING GREEN PROCESSES 9

Safe design, process intensification, in process monitoring. Safe product and process design –
Design for degradation, Real-time Analysis for pollution prevention, inherently safer chemistry for
accident prevention
343
UNIT V GREEN NANOTECHNOLOGY 9
Nanomaterials for water treatment, nanotechnology for renewable energy, nanotechnology for
environmental remediation and waste management, nanotechnology products as potential
substitutes for harmful chemicals, environmental concerns with nanotechnology
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: To understand the principles of green engineering and technology
CO2: To learn about pollution using hazardous chemicals and solvents
CO3: To modify processes and products to make them green and safe.
CO4: To design processes and products using green technology
CO5 – To understand advanced technology in green synthesis

TEXT BOOKS
1. Green technology and design for the environment, Samir B. Billatos, Nadia A. Basaly, Taylor &
Francis, Washington, DC, ©1997
2. Green Chemistry – An introductory text - M. Lancaster, RSC,2016.
3. Green chemistry metrics - Alexi Lapkin and david Constable (Eds) , Wiley publications,2008

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Environmental chemistry, Stanley E Manahan, Taylor and Francis, 2017

CES336 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY MONITORING AND ANALYSIS LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
 to understand and study the complexity of the environment in relation to pollutants
generated due to industrial activity.
 To analyze the quality of the environmental parameters and monitor the same for the
purpose of environmental risk assessment.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND STANDARDS 9

Introduction- Environmental Standards- Classification of Environmental Standards- Global
Environmental Standards- Environmental Standards in India- Ambient air quality standards- water
quality standard- Environmental Monitoring-Need for environmental monitoring- Concepts of
environmental monitoring- Techniques of Environmental Monitoring.

UNIT II MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS 9

Current Environmental Issues- Global Environmental monitoring programme-International
conventions- Application of Environmental Monitoring- Atmospheric Monitoring - screening
parameters – Significance of environmental sampling- sampling methods – water sampling -
sampling of ambient air-sampling of flue gas.

UNIT III ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING 9

Classification of Instrumental Method- Analysis of Organic Pollutants by Spectrophotometric
methods -Determination of nitrogen, phosphorus and, chemical oxygen demand (COD) in sewage;
Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD)- Sampling techniques for air pollution measurements;
analysis of particulates and air pollutants like oxides of nitrogen, oxides of sulfur, carbon
monoxide, hydrocarbon; Introduction to advanced instruments for environmental analysis

UNIT IV ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME (EMP) & RISKASSESSMENT9

344
Water quality monitoring programme- national water quality monitoring- Parameters for National
Water Quality Monitoring- monitoring protocol; Process of risk assessment- hazard identification-
exposure assessment- dose-response assessment; risk characterization.

UNIT V AUTOMATED DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING 9

Data Acquisition for Process Monitoring and Control - The Data Acquisition System - Online Data
Acquisition, Monitoring, and Control - Implementation of a Data Management System - Review of
Observational Networks -Sensors and transducers- classification of transducers- data acquisition
system- types of data acquisition systems- data management and quality control; regulatory
overview.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course, the students will know

CO1 Basic concepts of environmental standards and monitoring.

CO2 the ambient air quality and water quality standards;
CO3 the various instrumental methods and their principles for environmental monitoring
CO4 The significance of environmental standards in monitoring quality and sustainability
of the environment.
CO5 the various ways of raising environmental awareness among the people.
CO6 Know the standard research methods that are used worldwide for monitoring the
environment.

TEXTBOOKS
1. Environmental monitoring Handbook, Frank R. Burden, © 2002 by The McGraw-Hill
Companies, Inc.
2. Handbook of environmental analysis: chemical pollutants in the air, water, soil, and soild
wastes / Pradyot Patnaik, © 1997 by CRC Press, Inc

REFERENCES
1. Environmental monitoring / edited by G. Bruce Wiersma, © 2004 by CRC Press LLC.
2. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merit, J. A. Dean and F. A. Settle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis,
CBP Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 1988.
3. Heaslip, G. (1975) Environmental Data Handling. John Wiley & Sons. New York.

Course Articulation Matrix

Course Program Outcomes

Outcom PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO2 1 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 1 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 - 1 1 1 - -
CO4 1 2 3 3 1 - - - 2 - 3 3 1 - -
CO5 1 1 3 2 1 - - - 3 - 3 1 2 - -
CO6 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1
Over all 3 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 3 3 1 1

CES337 INTEGRATED ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To create awareness on the energy scenario of India with respect to world
345
 2. To understand the fundamentals of energy sources, energy efficiency and resulting
environmental implications of energy utilisation
3. Familiarisation on the concept of sustainable development and its benefits
4. Recognize the potential of renewable energy sources and its conversion technologies for
attaining sustainable development
5. Acquainting with energy policies and energy planning for sustainable development

UNIT I ENERGY SCENARIO 9

Comparison of energy scenario – India and World (energy sources, generation mix, consumption
pattern, T&D losses, energy demand, per capita energy consumption) – energy pricing – Energy
security

UNIT II ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Conventional Energy Sources - Emissions from fuels – Air, Water and Land pollution –
Environmental standards - measurement and controls

UNIT III SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) -
Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty. Globalization
and Economic growth - Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and growth.

UNIT IV RENEWABLE ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9

Renewable Energy – Sources and Potential – Technologies for harnessing from Solar, Wind,
Hydro, Biomass and Oceans – Principle of operation, relative merits and demerits

UNIT V ENERGY PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

National & State Energy Policy - National solar mission - Framework of Central Electricity Authority
- National Hydrogen Mission - Energy and climate policy - State Energy Action Plan, RE
integration, Road map for ethanol blending, Energy Efficiency and Energy Mix
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the world and Indian energy scenario
2. Analyse energy projects, its impact on environment and suggest control strategies
3. Recognise the need of Sustainable development and its impact on human resource
development
4. Apply renewable energy technologies for sustainable development
5. Fathom Energy policies and planning for sustainable development.

REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Robert Ristirer and Jack P. Kraushaar, “Energy and the environment”, Willey, 2005.
3. Godfrey Boyle, “Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future”, Oxford University
Press, U.K., 2012
4. Twidell, J.W. & Weir A., “Renewable Energy Resources”, EFNSpon Ltd., UK, 2015.
5. Dhandapani Alagiri, Energy Security in India Current Scenario, The ICFAI University Press,
2006.
6. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
7. https://www.niti.gov.in/verticals/energy

346
CES338 ENERGY EFFICIENCY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the types of energy sources, energy efficiency and environmental
implications of energy utilisation
2. To create awareness on energy audit and its impacts
3. To acquaint the techniques adopted for performance evaluation of thermal utilities
4. To familiarise on the procedures adopted for performance evaluation of electrical utilities
5. To learn the concept of sustainable development and the implication of energy usage

UNIT I ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Primary energy sources - Coal, Oil, Gas – India Vs World with respect to energy production and
consumption, Climate Change, Global Warming, Ozone Depletion, UNFCCC, COP

UNIT II ENERGY AUDITING 9

Need and types of energy audit. Energy management (audit) approach-understanding energy
costs, bench marking, energy performance, matching energy use to requirement, maximizing
system efficiencies, optimizing the input energy requirements, fuel & energy substitution, energy
audit instruments

UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL UTILITIES 9

Energy conservation avenues in steam generation and utilisation, furnaces, Thermic Fluid
Heaters. Insulation and Refractories - Commercial waste heat recovery devices: recuperator,
regenerator, heat pipe, heat exchangers (Plate, Shell & Tube), heat pumps, and
thermocompression

UNIT IV ENERGY CONSERVTION IN ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 9

Demand side management - Power factor improvement – Energy efficient transformers - Energy
conservation avenues in Motors, HVAC, fans, blowers, pumps, air compressors, illumination
systems and cooling towers

UNIT V SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT 9

Sustainable Development: Concepts and Stakeholders, Sustainable Development Goal (SDG).
Globalization and Economic growth. Economic development: Economic inequalities, Income and
growth. Social development: Poverty, conceptual issues and measures, impact of poverty,
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the prevailing energy scenario
2. Familiarise on energy audits and its relevance
3. Apply the concept of energy audit on thermal utilities
4. Employ relevant techniques for energy improvement in electrical utilities
5. Understand Sustainable development and its impact on human resource development

REFERENCES:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4Volumes) available at http://www.em-
ea.org/gbook1.asp, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India.2004
2. Eastop.T.D& Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”, Logman
Scientific & Technical, ISBN-0-582-03184, 1990
3. W.R. Murphy and G. McKay “Energy Management” Butterworths, London 1987
4. Pratap Bhattacharyya, “Climate Change and Greenhouse Gas Emission”, New India
Publishing Agency- Nipa,2020

347
5. Matthew John Franchetti , Defne Apul “Carbon Footprint Analysis: Concepts, Methods,
Implementation, and Case Studies” CRC Press,2012
6. Robert A. Ristinen, Jack J. Kraushaar, Jeffrey T. Brack, “Energy and the Environment”, 4th
Edition,Wiley,2022
7. M.H. Fulekar,Bhawana Pathak, R K Kale,“Environment and Sustainable Development”
Springer,2016
8. Sustainable development in India: Stocktaking in the run up to Rio+20: Report prepared by
TERI for MoEF, 2011.

348